S-Class (2022) - Automotive Mercedes-Benz - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Full-size luxury sedan
Dimensions (L x W x H)	5179 mm x 1920 mm x 1503 mm
Wheelbase	3106 mm
Curb Weight	1950–2100 kg (depending on model)
Fuel Tank Capacity	Approximately 76 L
Engine Options	Inline-6, V8, Plug-in Hybrid, 48V mild hybrid
Transmission	9-speed automatic (9G-TRONIC)
Drivetrain	Rear-wheel drive or 4MATIC all-wheel drive
Safety Systems	Airbags, PRE-SAFE, Active Brake Assist, Lane Keeping Assist, Blind Spot Assist, etc.
Restraint System	Seat belts, belt tensioners, front/ side/ window/ rear/ belt airbags
Child Safety	ISOFIX, Top Tether, child safety locks, front passenger airbag disable
Climate Control	THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control, rear climate control option
Infotainment	MBUX multimedia system, voice assistant, navigation, Apple CarPlay, Android Auto
Connectivity	Bluetooth, Wi-Fi hotspot, Mercedes me connect, emergency call system
Lighting	Adaptive LED high-performance headlights, automatic headlamp range control
Wheels and Tires	Tire pressure monitoring, run-flat tires optional, snow chain mode
Maintenance	ASSYST PLUS service interval display, telediagnostics
Battery	12V starter battery; high-voltage battery for plug-in hybrid
Emissions	EU6 compliant; AdBlue for diesel models
Towing Capacity	Up to 3500 kg (with trailer hitch)
Manual Format	Digital and printed Owner's Manual, 657 pages in English

Frequently Asked Questions - S-Class (2022) Mercedes-Benz

How do I disable the front passenger airbag?

The front passenger airbag is automatically disabled or enabled by the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff based on the classification of the occupant or child restraint. You cannot manually disable it. Check the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps: if PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is lit continuously, the airbag is disabled. If PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for up to 60 seconds, it is enabled.

How do I charge the high-voltage battery in a plug-in hybrid S-Class?

Charge the high-voltage battery using the charging cable provided. Connect the cable to the vehicle’s charging socket (located behind the fuel filler flap or on the rear bumper). Use a wallbox, public charging station, or household socket. Refer to the Charging the high-voltage battery section and observe safety warnings.

How do I pair my phone via Bluetooth?

In the MBUX multimedia system, go to Settings > Connectivity > Bluetooth. Enable Bluetooth on your phone. Search for available devices and select your Mercedes-Benz. Confirm the pairing code on both devices. The phone is then connected for calls and media.

What is PRE-SAFE and how does it work?

PRE-SAFE is an anticipatory occupant protection system. It detects critical driving situations (e.g., skidding, emergency braking) and pre-emptively tightens seat belts, closes windows, adjusts seats, and can inflate side bolsters. PRE-SAFE PLUS detects imminent rear impacts and activates hazard lights and brake pressure.

How do I adjust the seats electrically?

Use the seat adjustment switches on the door panel. For the driver seat, there are switches for seat position, backrest angle, lumbar support, and head restraint height. You can also adjust the seat via the MBUX multimedia system under Settings > Vehicle > Seats.

How do I use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC?

Press the DISTRONIC button on the steering wheel to activate. Set the desired speed using the SET button. Use the distance control slider to adjust following distance. The system automatically accelerates and brakes to maintain a set distance from the vehicle ahead. It can bring the car to a stop and resume when traffic moves.

What should I do if the restraint system warning lamp stays on?

If the restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly, there is a malfunction. Have the system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The airbags or seat belt tensioners may not deploy correctly in an accident.

How do I check the tire pressure?

The tire pressure monitoring system displays tire pressures on the driver’s display. Check and adjust tire pressure when cold according to the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap or in the Owner's Manual. If the warning lamp flashes, there may be a malfunction; restart the system after adjusting pressure.

Can I install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat?

Yes, but only if the front passenger airbag is disabled (PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lit). NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint in a seat with an enabled front airbag. Follow the instructions in the Children in the vehicle chapter, including proper use of ISOFIX and Top Tether.

How do I update the navigation maps?

Navigation maps can be updated via over-the-air update or via USB. In the MBUX system, go to Settings > System > Software Update. For USB updates, download the latest map from the Mercedes me portal onto a USB stick and insert it into the vehicle’s USB port. Follow on-screen instructions.

USER MANUAL S-Class (2022) Mercedes-Benz

The following online version of the Owner's Manual describes all models as well as all the standard and optional equipment of your vehicle. Country-specific differences in the language variants are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for safety-relevant systems and functions. Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz dealer if you would like to have a printed Owner's Manual for other vehicle models and vehicle model years. The online version is the current valid Owner's Manual version. Possible variations to your vehicle may not be taken into account as Mercedes-Benz constantly updates their vehicles and equipment to the state of the art and introduces changes in design and equipment.

Please also read the printed Owner's Manual, any supplementary documents and the digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Copyright

All Rights Reserved. All texts, images, graphics, are subject to Copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied for commercial purposes or for transmission, nor changed and used on other websites.

Silver Mercedes-Benz sedan driving on a curved road with green hills in the background (no visible text or symbols)

S-Class

Operator's Manual

Mercedes-Benz

Front passenger airbag warning

AIRBAG NO i i

AIRBAG

Three black-and-white icons representing prohibited behaviors: no litter, sitting on a phone with a bird, and an open book with a pointing hand.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an enabled co-driver airbag

If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the co-driver airbag during an accident.

▶ NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle".

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz

Before your first drive, please read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer service life of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Owner's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people.

The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the following factors:

• Model
• Order
• National version
• Availability

Your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations in individual cases.

The illustrations in this Owner's Manual show a left-hand drive vehicle. On right-hand drive vehicles, the layout of vehicle parts and controls differs accordingly.

Mercedes-Benz is constantly developing its vehicles further.

Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas:

• Design
• Equipment
• Technical features

The following documents are components of the vehicle:

• Digital Owner's Manual
• Printed Owner's Manual
- Service Booklet
• Supplementary manuals relating to specific equipment
• Supplementary documents

Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. Ensure that all documents are in the vehicle or passed on in the event of sale or rental.

Symbols 5

At a glance 6

Cockpit 6

Cockpit (plug-in hybrid) 8

Indicator and warning lamps (standard) ..... 10

Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera) 12

Overhead control panel 14

Door operating unit and seat adjustment ..... 16

Control settings in the rear passenger compartment 18

Emergencies and breakdowns 20

Digital Owner's Manual 22

Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual ..... 22

General notes 23

Protection of the environment 23

Take-back of end-of-life vehicles 23

Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts 24

Owner's Manual 25

Touch-sensitive controls 25

Mercedes me App 26

Operating safety 26

Notes on assembling the number plate on

the front licence plate holder 30

Declarations of conformity and notes on

driving in different countries 30

Diagnostics connection 34

Qualified specialist workshop 35

Vehicle registration 35

Correct use of the vehicle 35

Information on the REACH regulation 36

Notes for persons with electronic medical aids 36

Implied warranty 37

QR code for rescue card 37

Data storage 37

Copyright 40

Occupant safety 41

Brief overview of most important points ..... 41

Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system 49

Purpose and function of the restraint system 53

Seat belts 59

Airbags 60

Safely transporting children in the vehicle ..... 63

Brief overview of most important points ..... 63

Important safety notes 64

Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children 71

Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems 74

Securing the child restraint system 78

Child safety locks 82

Opening and closing 85

Key 85

Doors 89

Boot 96

Side windows 102

Sliding sunroof 106

Roller sunblinds 111

Anti-theft protection 113

Seats and stowing 116

Notes on the correct driver's seat position .. 116

Notes on grab handles 116

Seats 117

Steering wheel 139

Easy entry and exit feature 140

Memory function 142

Memory function in the rear compartment .. 143

Stowage areas 147

Cup holders 159

Sockets 159

Coolbox 161

Wireless charging of the mobile phone

and connection with the exterior aerial ..... 164

Fitting and removing floor mats 167

Light and sight 168

Exterior lighting 168

Interior lighting 177

Windscreen wipers and windscreen

washer system 180

Mirrors 183

Area permeable to radio waves on the

windscreen 186

Infrared-reflective windscreen function ..... 187

Climate control 188

Overview of climate control systems ..... 188

Operating the climate control system ..... 190

Driving and parking 204

Driving 204

DYNAMIC SELECT button 223

Automatic transmission 227

Function of 4MATIC 231

Refuelling 231

Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in

hybrid) 238

Parking 255

Driving and driving safety systems 261

Trailer hitch 333

Bicycle rack function 339

Vehicle towing instructions 342

Driver's display 343

Notes on the driver's display 343

Notes on the 3D driver display 343

Operating the driver's display 343

Driver display menus 344

Head-up display 345

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system 350

Function of the power meter 350

Overview of status displays on the driver's display 350

MBUX Voice Assistant 352

Notes on operating safety 352

Operation 352

Using MBUX voice assistant effectively ..... 354

Essential voice commands 355

MBUX multimedia system 360

Overview and operation 360

System settings 381

AMG TRACK PACE 386

Plug-in hybrid settings 391

Navigation and traffic 392

Telephone 402

Mercedes me Apps 405

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ..... 415

Radio, media & TV 422

Sound settings 428

Maintenance and care 429

ASSYST PLUS service interval display ..... 429

Maintenance Management 430

Telediagnostics 430

Engine compartment 431

Cleaning and care 437

Breakdown assistance 446

Emergency 446

Flat tyre 448

Battery (vehicle) 453

Tow-starting or towing away 461

Electrical fuses 468

Wheels and tyres 473

Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics 473

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres 473

Notes on snow chains 473

Activating or deactivating snow chain mode 474

Tyre pressure 474

Wheel change 478

Emergency spare wheel 488

Technical data 489

Notes on technical data 489

On-board electronics 489

Regulatory radio information 491

Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview 496

Operating fluids 497

Vehicle data 507

Trailer hitch 509

Display messages and warning/indicator

lamps 512

Display messages 512

Warning and indicator lamps 591

Index 611

In this Owner's Manual, you will find the following symbols:

WARNING Danger due to not observing the warning notices

Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others.

▶ Observe the warning notices.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe environmental notes

Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behaviour or environmentally responsible disposal.

▶ Observe environmental notes.

NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage

Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged.

▶ Observe notes on material damage.

These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you.

Instruction

(→ page) Further information on a topic

Display Display in the central display

Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia system

Relevant submenus, which are to be selected in the multimedia system

* Indicates a cause

Diagram of a Mercedes-Benz car interior with numbered components for identification and assembly.

Left-hand-drive vehicles

Light switch → 168
② Steering wheel gearshift paddles → 229
3 Combination switch → 170
4 Driver's display → 343
5 DIRECT SELECT lever → 227
6 ENCINE Start/stop button → 208
(A) ECO start/stop function → 217
⑦ Central display → 360
8 Glove compartment → 149
9 Stowage compartment → 149
10 Switch panel for:
DYNAMIC SELECT button → 225
Active Parking Assist → 320
Switching the stationary heater on/off → 200
Quick vehicle access
Fingerprint sensor → 360

Switching the MBUX multimedia system → 360 on/off
Switching sound on/off → 360
Adjusting the volume → 360
Hazard warning light system 171
12 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system → 367
13 Adjusts the steering wheel → 139
Switches the steering wheel heater → 140 on/off
14 Control panel:
Driver's display → 343
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and variable limiter → 275
15 Diagnostics connection → 34
16 Opens the bonnet → 432
17 (P) Electric parking brake → 257

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components for identification and assembly reference.

Left-hand-drive vehicles

① - Increases recuperation → 220
Driver's display: READY Operational readiness → 343 Power meter → 350 Trip computer → 343 ECO Assist → 220 + Reduces recuperation → 220

4 Central display:
Plug-in hybrid settings → 391
Energy flow display → 392
5 Sets charging times → 391
6 DYNAMIC SELECT button → 223
7 Haptic accelerator pedal → 223
Depressurises the fuel tank → 231

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 OFF 125.3 24967 x1000/min 20 19 18 17 16 ( ! ) ( P ) ( P ) 23 22 21

Standard driver's display

Turn signal lights → 170
2 Trailer hitch → 595
3 Suspension (red) → 604
Suspension (yellow) → 604
Electrical fault 598
5 Power steering (red) → 595
Power steering (yellow) → 595
Rear-axle steering (red) → 595
Rear-axle steering (yellow) → 595
6 Restraint system → 593
7 舟 Seat belt → 593
8 Distance warning → 604
9 ABS → 604
10 Tyre pressure monitoring system → 609
Engine diagnostics → 598
12 ESP ^® OFF → 604

ESP ^® → 604
13 700 Diesel engine: preglow
14 Coolant temperature → 598
15 Coolant temperature display
16 (P) Electric parking brake (yellow) → 601
17 (P) Electric parking brake (red) → 601
18 (1) Brakes (red) → 601
(1) Brakes (yellow) → 601
19 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location → 598 indicator
20 Fuel level
21 High beam → 170
D Low beam → 168
Parking lights → 168
22 0# Rear fog light → 169
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system → 608

1 2 3 4 1 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 125.3 km 24967 x100/mm OFF 13 12 11 10 9 (1) 5 6 7 8

Driver's display with driver camera

Turn signal lights → 170
2 Seat belt → 593
3 Distance warning → 604
4 Restraint system → 593
5 Tyre pressure monitoring system → 609
6 ESP ^® OFF → 604
ESP ^③ → 604
⑦ ABS → 604
8 00 Diesel engine: preglow
9 Coolant temperature → 598
10 Coolant temperature display
Electric parking brake (yellow) → 601
12 (P) Electric parking brake (red) → 601
13 (1) Brakes (red) → 601
(1) Brakes (yellow) → 601
14 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location → 598 indicator

15 Fuel level
16 0# Rear fog light → 169
17 ☐ High beam → 170
D Low beam → 168
Parking lights → 168
18 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system → 608
19 ! Trailer hitch → 595
20 Electrical fault → 598
21 Engine diagnostics → 598
22 Power steering (red) → 595
Power steering (yellow) → 595
Rear-axle steering (red) → 595
Rear-axle steering (yellow) → 595
23 Suspension (red) → 604
Suspension (yellow) → 604

Diagram of a smart home control panel with numbered labels pointing to various device components

Sun visors
Switches the front interior lighting on/off → 177
3 Switches the rear interior lighting on/off → 177
4 me button → 405
5 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sun-roof rear roller sunblind → 106
6 Switches automatic interior lighting control on/off → 177
7 SOS SOS button → 405
8 Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off → 177

9 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sun- → 106 roof
Opens/closes the panorama sliding sun- → 106 roof front roller sunblind
10 Indicator lamps:
PASSENGER AIR BAG → 46
REAR SEAT AIR BAG → 48
Inside rear-view mirror → 185
12 Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off → 177

Diagram of car interior showing numbered components for steering wheel and seat assembly

Locks/unlocks the vehicle → 90
② Adjusts the seats electrically → 117
3 Switches the seat heating on/off → 136
4 Switches the seat ventilation on/off → 138
5 Adjusts the front passenger seat from → 119 the driver's seat
6 M Operates the memory function → 143
⑦ Operates the outside mirrors → 183
8 Opens/closes the right side window → 102
9 Opens/closes the rear right side window → 102

10 Opens/closes the boot lid → 96
11 Rear-window roller sunblind → 112
12 Child safety lock for the rear side windows → 84
13 Opens the door → 90
14 Opens/closes the rear left side window → 102
15 ☐ Opens/closes the left side window → 102
16 Adjusting the head restraints → 130
⑰ Seat adjustment using the multimedia system → 134

Diagram of car interior showing dashboard, seatbelt, and control panel with numbered labels

Vehicles with a reclining rear seat

Climate control rear operating unit → 189
2 Electronics compartment in the centre console 230 V socket → 160
Sets the fully reclined position → 124
4 Selects the front passenger seat → 120
5 Switches the rear seat ventilation on/off → 138
6 Switches the rear seat heating on/off → 136
⑦ Adjusts reclining rear seats electrically → 123
8 Resets the standard seat adjustment set- → 124 tings

9 M Memory function in the rear compartment → 144
10 Stowage box in the seat backrest Refrigerator box → 161
11 Stowage compartment in the rear armrest
12 MBUX rear tablet bracket
13 Cup holder

Technical diagram of a car interior with numbered parts for identification

B-pillar with: QR code for accessing the rescue card → 37
② Safety vests → 446
③ me button → 405
SOS SOS button → 405
④ To check and top up operating fluids → 497
Starting assistance → 459
⑤ Tow-starting or towing away → 463
6 Flat tyre → 448
7 Hazard warning light system → 171

8 Fire extinguisher → 447
9 Fuel filler flap with:
information label on fuel type → 231
information label on tyre pressure → 475
QR code for accessing the rescue card → 37
⑩ Tow-starting or towing away → 463
11 First-aid kit (soft sided) → 447
⑫ TREFIT kit → 449
13 Warning triangle → 446

Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual

Multimedia system:

Settings Info
Owner's Manual
▶ Open Digital Owner's Manual

The Digital Owner's Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehicle and the multimedia system.

Select one of the following menu items in the Digital Owner's Manual:
- Quick start: find the first steps towards adjusting your seat (driver's side).
- Tips: find information that prepares you for certain everyday situations with your vehicle.
- Animations: watch animations of the vehicle functions.
- Messages: receive additional information about the messages in the driver's display.
• Language: select the language for the Digital Owner's Manual.

You can search for keywords using the search field Search, in order to find quick answers to questions about the operation of the vehicle.

1 2 3 4 Search

Menu
② Search
3 Back
④ Contents section

Some sections in the Digital Owner's Manual, such as warning notes, can be expanded and collapsed.

Additional methods of calling up the Digital Owner's Manual:

Driver's display: call up brief information as display messages in the driver's display

MBUX Voice Assistant: call up via the voice control system

Global search: call up search results for contents of the Digital Owner's Manual in the home screen For safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is deactivated while driving.

Protection of the environment

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style

The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you operate the vehicle.

Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the environment. Please observe the following recommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style.

Operating conditions:

Make sure that the tyre pressure is correct.
Do not carry any unnecessary weight (e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them).
Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection.

Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:

Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.
Do not warm up the vehicle while stationary.
▶ Drive carefully and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front.
Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.
Change gear in good time and use each gear only up to 23 of its maximum engine speed.
Switch off the vehicle in stationary traffic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function.
▶ Drive in a fuel-efficient manner. Observe the ECO display for an economical driving style.

Plug-in hybrid

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by irresponsible disposal of the high-voltage battery

A high-voltage battery contains materials which are harmful to the environment.

▶ Dispose of faulty high-voltage batteries at a qualified specialist workshop.

Take-back of end-of-life vehicles

EU countries only:

Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life vehicle for environment-friendly disposal in accordance with the European Union (EU) End-Of-Life Vehicles Directive.

A network of vehicle take-back points and dismantlers has been established for you to return your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these points free of charge. This makes an important contribution to closing the recycling circle and conserving resources.

For further information about the recycling and disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-back conditions, please visit the national Mercedes-Benz website for your country.

Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage caused by not using recycled reconditioned components

Mercedes-Benz AG offers recycled reconditioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the implied warranty is valid as for new parts.

Recycled reconditioned components and parts from Mercedes-Benz AG.

NOTE Impairment of the operating efficiency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding

Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle:

• doors
• door pillars
• Sill
• Seats
• Cockpit
• Driver's display
• Centre console
• lateral roof frame
  Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas.
  Do not carry out repairs or welding.
  Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety that have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-critical systems (e.g. the brake system) may malfunction. Use only Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Use only tyres, wheels and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model.

Mercedes-Benz tests original parts and conversion parts and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been officially approved or independently approved by a testing centre.

Certain parts are officially approved for installation or modification only if they comply with legal requirements. All Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts meet the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit.

This is the case in the following situations:

• The vehicle type is different from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted.
  • Other road users could be endangered.
  • The exhaust gas or noise level gets worse.

Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) ( page 496) when ordering Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts.

Owner's Manual

This Owner's Manual and the Digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle describe the following models and the standard and special equipment for your vehicle:

• The models and the standard and special equipment available at the time of this Owner's Manual going to press.
• The models and the standard and special equipment only available in certain countries.

- The models and the standard and special equipment, which will only be available at a later date.

Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for systems relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations.

The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of the equipment in your vehicle at the time of delivery.

Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

i Please note that all speed specifications in these operating instructions are approximate and the values are subject to a certain tolerance.

The Owner's Manual, Supplement, further supplementary documents and Service Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.

Touch-sensitive controls

In addition to conventional switches and buttons, your vehicle is equipped with touch-sensitive controls.

These are located in the following areas of your vehicle:

• Roof and door control panel
- Climate control
- Steering wheel
• MBUX multimedia system

The controls have touch-sensitive user interface surfaces. The surfaces are controlled by pressing or swiping to adjust settings or to trigger functions, forexample.

In the area of the touchscreen, you also receive haptic feedback in the form of a pulse or a vibration, or the surface structure changes on the touch-sensitive user interface surface, forexample.

You receive haptic feedback in the following situations, forexample:

• When pressing a button on the user interface surface
• When scrolling in a list or table
• When reaching a new area on the user interface surface, e.g. a pop-up window

When handling touch-sensitive user interface surfaces, observe the following points to avoid problems operating:

• Do not affix stickers or similar objects on the surfaces
• Keep the surfaces protected from moisture and wet conditions.
• Keep the surfaces free of dust and dirt (→ page 443).

Some touch-sensitive control elements have a symbol and integrated indicator lamps. When operating, make sure to press on the symbol of the control element.

Mercedes me App

Notes about the on-demand feature

You can also activate various functions (on-demand feature) subsequently via Mercedes me after purchasing your vehicle.

Information is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Activating on-demand feature using Mercedes me

Requirements:

• The vehicle has a wireless connection.
- The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user account.

Ordering and activating on-demand feature

Add the desired on-demand feature for the vehicle to the shopping basket in the Mercedes me Store.
Complete the order. The on-demand feature is activated when operating the vehicle.

Speeding up activation

▶ Switch the vehicle off and lock it.
Unlock the vehicle after about two minutes and switch on the vehicle. The on-demand feature has been activated. For some features, a notification also appears in the vehicle's multimedia system.

If the activation was not successful, repeat the process.

Operating safety

WARNING Risk of accident due to malfunctions or system failures

If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this could result in malfunctions or system failures.

Always have the prescribed service- and maintenance work or any required repairs carried out in a qualified workshop.

A WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to improper modifications to electronic components

Modifications to electronic components, their software or wiring can impair their functionality and/or the functionality of other networked components or safety-relevant systems.

This can endanger the vehicle's operating safety.

You must not tamper with wiring, electronic components, or their software.
▶ Always have work on electrical and electronic devices carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

If you modify the on-board electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid.

Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data".

A WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable material coming into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system

If combustible materials, e.g. leaves, grass or twigs, come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they may ignite.

When driving off-road or on unpaved surfaces, check the underside of the vehicle at regular intervals.
In particular, remove any trapped parts of plants or other flammable material.
If damage should occur, immediately inform a qualified specialist workshop.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driving too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody or suspension components

In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle:

• the vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road
• the vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb, speed bump or pothole
• a heavy object strikes the underbody or suspension components

In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tyres may not be visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no longer absorb the resulting force as intended.

If the underbody panelling is damaged, flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and the underbody panelling. These materials may

ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system.

Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

or

If driving safety is impaired while continuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid

Hybrid vehicles have an internal-combustion engine and at least one electric motor. The energy supply for operating the vehicle electrically is provided by the high-voltage on-board electrical system.

DANGER Risk of death and fire due to modified and/or damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system

The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted. In addition, modified and/or damaged components may cause a fire.

In the event of an accident or impact to the vehicle underbody, components of the high-voltage electrical system may be damaged although the damage is not visible.

▶ Never make any modifications to the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its high-voltage on-board electrical system components have been modified or damaged.

▶ Never touch damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
After an accident, do not touch any components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
After an accident, have the vehicle transported away.
Have the components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system checked at a qualified specialist workshop and replaced if necessary.

The components of the vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system are marked with yellow warning stickers. The cables of the high-voltage on-board electrical system are orange.

Warning symbols including warning triangle, lightning bolt, and hand gesture with an open book and warning icon

High-voltage components that can become very hot are marked with an additional warning sticker:

Warning symbol image showing warning signs for electrical hazard, electrical hazard, and safety symbols with warning symbols and icons

Example

vehicles with hybrid systems generate significantly less noise than vehicles with internal-combustion engines.

When you are driving in electric mode, the vehicle may not be heard by other road users due to the significantly lower noise generated.

For this reason the vehicle is equipped with a sound generator, which serves as an acoustic vehicle alerting system (AVAS). This protective equipment is prescribed by law.

The outside sound produced by the sound generator (AVAS) can be heard in the passenger compartment at low speeds and does not represent a malfunction.

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system

DANGER Risk of fatal injury by touching damaged high-voltage components

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain individual high-voltage components. These high-voltage components are under high voltage.

If you modify component parts of these high-voltage components or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted.

High voltage components may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible.

▶ Never perform modifications to component parts of high-voltage components.
▶ Never touch damaged component parts of high-voltage components.
▶ Never touch component parts of high-voltage components after an accident.

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain high-voltage components. These components are marked with a high-voltage label:

Safety warning symbols including warning triangle, lightning bolt, and hand gesture

All work on high voltage components must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on assembling the number plate on the front licence plate holder

NOTE Malfunctions and system failures due to incorrect assembly of the licence plate on the front licence plate holder

If the licence plate is incorrectly assembled on the front licence plate holder, sensors, cameras or driving and safety systems may malfunction or fail.

Observe the following points when assembling the licence plate on the front licence plate holder:

Assemble the licence plate directly on the licence plate holder without advertising media or other holders.
Assemble the licence plate so that it does not protrude above or to the side of the licence plate adapter.

Declarations of conformity and notes on driving in different countries

Electromagnetic compatibility

The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified according to the currently valid version of Regulation UN-R 10.

National information for components subject to radio regulations

Only for EU and EFTA countries and countries that recognise the EU manufacturer's declaration of conformity:

The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle and of the information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle:

The manufacturers of the wireless components ensure that all wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full texts of the EU declarations of conformity are available at the following web address:

https://moba.i.mercedes-benz.com/markets/ece-row/baix/cars/certificates-of-conformity/en_GB/index.html

QR code image containing encoded data, no visible human-readable text

You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

For Israel only:

It is prohibited to make any change to a vehicle-installed radio component that could affect the wireless specifications of the device, including software changes, replacement of the original antenna, or adding the option to connect the device to an external antenna, without first obtain-

ing approval from the Communica-tions Ministry, because of concern about wireless interference.

For the United Kingdom only:

The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle and of the information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle:

The manufacturers of the radio components declare that all radio equipment installed in the vehicle is in compliance with the relevant statutory requirements. The full texts of the declarations of conformity are available at the following web address:

https://moba.i.mercedes-benz.com/markets/ece-row/baix/cars/certificates-of-conformity/en_GB/index.html

QR code image containing encoded data, no visible human-readable text

For Brazil only:

Note on two-way radio systems in the vehicle:

These systems are not protected against harmful interference and must not cause interference in properly approved systems.

For Jamaica only:

All wireless vehicle components have received type approval from the SMA.

For Nigeria only:

Connection and use of this communications equipment is permitted by the Nigerian Communications Commission

Connection and use of the radio communications equipment in this vehicle is permitted by the Nigerian Communications Commission

For Russia only:

EAC EAC

The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby declare that all wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with the technical regulations for two-way radios. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

For Ukraine only:

The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby declare that the wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with the technical regulations for two-way radios. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Jack

Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity:

EC declaration of conformity

1.

The undersigned, representing

Manufacturer:

BRANO a.s.

herewith declares under our sole responsibility that the product:

1. a)

Name:

Jack

Type, Number:

A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18

B) A 240 580 00 18

C) A 639 580 02 18

D) A 639 580 03 18

E) A 910 580 00 00

F) A 247 580 00 00, A 293 580 00 00

G) A 247 580 01 00, A 293 580 01 00

H) A 247 580 02 00, A 293 580 02 00

Year of manufacture: 2022

Complies with all relevant provisions

Directive No. 2006/42/EC

b)

Description and purpose of use:

Car jack is intended solely for lifting of the concrete car, in accordance with the instruction label on the car jack.

3.

References of harmonized and other standards or specifications

ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, AS 2693, DBL 8230.10, DBL 7382.20, DBL 7392.10, DBL 8451.15, MBN 10435,

Technical documentation of the product is stored at the premise of the manufacturer. The person responsible for assembling the technical documentation of the product: Head of the Technical Department Brano a.s.

4.

Hradec nad Moravici

Place

5.

14.03.2022

Date

Dipl. Engineer Michal Kobersky

[Signature]

Director SBU-CJ

TREFIT kit

Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity:

EC declaration of conformity

In accordance with EC Directive 2006/42/EC

We hereby declare that the product

Product designation: Daimler electric air pump

Model designation: 0872, DT/UW 200077 - IBK-LK2P

MB part no.: A 000 583 9204

complies with the following relevant regulations:

2014/30/EU

Applied harmonised standards, in particular:

DIN EN 55014-1:2017

Manufacturer: Dunlop Tech GmbH

Address: Offenbacher Landstrasse. 8, 63456

Hanau

Authorised representative: IMS dept.

Date: March 2020

Signature: IMS-AE, IMS-AE-L

Diagnostics connection

The diagnostics connection is a technical interface in the vehicle. It is used, for example, during repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data in a specialist workshop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only be connected in a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING Risk of accident due to connecting devices to the diagnostics connection

If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired.

For safety reasons, we recommend that you only use and connect products approved by a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.

This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection

Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery.

▶ Check the charge level of the battery.

If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance.

Please also note the information about the 12 V battery and short-distance trips in the "Driving and Parking" chapter ( page 212).

Diagram showing a car interior with a highlighted component and a close-up of a mechanical component (no text or symbols present)

Connecting and using another device with the diagnostics connection can have the following effects:

• Malfunctions in the vehicle system
  • Permanent damage to vehicle components

Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions for this matter.

Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshop

A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant work.

Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a qualified specialist workshop:

- Safety-relevant work

• Service and maintenance work
- Repair work
- Modifications as well as installations and conversions
• Work on electronic components
- Plug-in hybrid: work on the hybrid system
- Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: work on the high-voltage component of the 48 V on-board electrical system

Mercedes-Benz recommends a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Vehicle registration

Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection.

Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if Mercedes-Benz has your registration data.

It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been registered in your name in the following cases:

• if your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer.
• if your vehicle has not yet been examined at a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz service centre, for example.

Correct use of the vehicle

If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position.

Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle:

- the safety notes in this Owner's Manual, vehicle-specific supplements and further supplementary documents

• technical data for the vehicle
- traffic rules and -regulations
- laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles

Information on the REACH regulation

EU and EFTA countries only:

the REACH regulation (Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006, Article 33) stipulates a duty to supply information about substances of very high concern (SVHCs).

Mercedes-Benz AG acts to the best of its knowledge to prevent these SVHCs from being used and to enable customers to safely handle these substances. There are SVHCs known to

Mercedes-Benz AG, according to supplier information and internal product information, found in individual components of this vehicle in quantities of over 0.1 percent by weight.

Further information can be obtained at the following addresses:

- https://reach.daimler.com/de/home/

- https://reach.daimler.com/en/home/

Notes for persons with electronic medical aids

Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers.

In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of the vehicle, can generate magnetic fields on a par with permanent magnets. These fields can be found, for example, in the area around the multimedia and sound system or also in the area of the seats, depending on the vehicle equipment.

For this reason, the following can occur in isolated cases, depending on the aids used:

• Medical aids malfunctioning
- Adverse health effects

Observe the notes and warnings of the manufacturer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibility of medical aids malfunctioning, Mercedes-

Benz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components.

Plug-in hybrid

When charging the high-voltage battery, keep a distance of at least an arm's length between the medical aid and the following components:

• the power supply equipment
This includes charging stations in the form of a wallbox or a public charging point, for example.
- vehicle components carrying live voltage This includes the charging cable and the charging control box, for example.

Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop:

• vehicle components carrying live voltage
• transmission aerials
• multimedia system and sound system

If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Implied warranty

NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instructions.

Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation of these operating instructions.

This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New- or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Follow the instructions in these operating instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehicle damage.

QR code for rescue card

QR codes are attached in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle (e.g. the routing of the electric lines) in compact form.

Further information can be obtained at https://www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code

Data storage

Data processing in the vehicle

Electronic control units

Electronic control units are fitted in your vehicle. Control units process data which, forexample, they receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe operation of your vehicle, some assist you when driving, such as driver assistance systems, while others enable convenience or infotainment functions.

The following provides you with general information regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties, and for what purpose, can be found in the information directly related to the functional characteristics in question in their respective operating instructions. This information is also available online and, depending on the vehicle equipment, digitally.

Personal data

Every vehicle is identified by a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the country, this vehicle identification number can be used by, forexample, governmental authorities to determine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the licence plate number.

Therefore, data generated or processed by control units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to a person. Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make inferences about, forexample, your driving behaviour, your location, your route or your use patterns.

Legal requirements regarding the disclosure of data

If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide governmental entities, upon request and to the extent required, data stored by the manufacturer. Forexample, this may be the case during the investigation of a criminal offence.

Governmental entities are themselves, in individual cases and within the applicable legal framework, authorised to read out data from the vehicle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the airbag control unit, forexample.

Operational data in the vehicle

This is data regarding the operation of the vehicle, which have been processed by control units.

This includes the following data, forexample:

• vehicle status information such as the speed, longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration, number of wheel revolutions or the fastened seat belts display
• ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain sensor or distance sensor

Generally, the use of these data is temporary; they will not be stored beyond the period of operation and will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units often contain data memories for vehicle keys, forexample. Their use permits the temporary or permanent documentation of technical information about the vehicle's operating state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or faults.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following data are stored:

• operating status of system components, such as fill levels, tyre pressure or battery status
• malfunctions or faults in important system components, such as lights or brakes
• system reactions in special driving situations, such as airbag deployment or the intervention of stability control systems
  • information on events leading to vehicle damage

In certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been used only temporarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, forexample.

If you use services, such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identification number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service network employees, such as workshops and manufacturers or third parties, such as breakdown services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures.

In general, the readout is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To that end, these data, in particular information about component loads, technical events, malfunctions and other faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle identification number to the manufacturer. Furthermore, the manufacturer is subject to product liability. For this reason the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, forexample, for recalls. These data can also be used to examine the customer's warranty and guarantee claims.

Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work.

Convenience and infotainment functions

You can store convenience settings and individual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, forexample:

• seat and steering wheel positions
• suspension and climate control settings
  • individual settings, such as interior lighting

Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data, forexample:

• multimedia data, such as music, films or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system
• address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system
• entered navigation destinations
  • data about the use of Internet services

These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time.

This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in particular, when you use online services in accordance with the settings that you have selected.

Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay®)

If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smartphone can be output via the multimedia system. Certain information is simultaneously transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type and integration, this includes position data, day/night mode and other general vehicle statuses. For more information please consult the Owner's Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system.

This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The type of additional data processing is determined by the provider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the specific app and the operating system of your smartphone.

Online services

Wireless network connection

If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wireless network connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, forexample, a smartphone. Online functions can be used via the wireless network connection. This includes online services and applications/apps provided to you by the manufacturer or by other providers.

Manufacturer's services

Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, forexample, in the Owner's Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data are exchanged via a secure connection, such as the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected, processed and used, other than for the provision of services, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, forexample, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a contractual agreement or when consent has been given.

You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactivated. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system.

Third party services

If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged.

For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of personal data.

Data protection rights

Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on offer, you are entitled to different data protection rights. Further information on data protection and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and service offers. There you will also find the contact information for the manufacturer and its data protection officers.

At a workshop, forexample, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle.

Copyright

Information on licences for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website:

https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Brief overview of most important points

Basic information

Make sure that the following prerequisites in particular have been met so that the components of the restraint system are able to provide the intended level of protection:

• Sit correctly (→ page 42).
• Fasten the seat belt correctly (→ page 43).
• Function of the □ seat belt warning lamp (→ page 45).
  Function of the rear seat belt status display ( page 45).

- The ☐ restraint system warning lamp is not lit up after the self-test (→ page 44).

- The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of the front passenger airbag ( page 46).

- The REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of the rear airbags ( page 48).

For clear understanding

The chapter "Occupant safety" includes information on equipment, functions and behaviours that contribute directly to safety of vehicle occupants. The information is structured as follows:

• The most important information in brief: in this chapter, you are provided with an overview of the relationship between the restraint system and the correct behaviour of all vehicle occupants.
• Specific information: in further sections of the chapter "Occupant safety", you can find specific information on the equipment and functions of the restraint system.
• Keyword directory: you can also find certain subjects in this Owner's Manual using the keyword directory.

Information on the following subjects, among others, are not provided in the chapter "Occupant safety":

• Children in the vehicle ( page 63)

- Driving and driving safety systems (→ page 261)

• Stowage areas ( page 147)

Defining generic terms clearly

In this Owner's Manual, the following generic terms are used:

• Occupant safety: comprises the components and system functions which help to minimise, as much as possible, the stresses on and consequences for vehicle occupants during an accident.
• Restraint system: comprises those components which, along with the vehicle structure, help prevent vehicle occupants from potentially coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior. The seat belts and airbags, for example, are components of the restraint system.
• Child restraint system: you can find all information on this subject in the chapter "Children in the vehicle" (→ page 63).

Be diligent

For the components of the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, it is

essential that your posture is correct and that the seat belt is correctly fastened.

Bear in mind that negligence when adjusting your sitting position and fastening the seat belt may have serious consequences. Be diligent and make sure that all vehicle occupants are sitting correctly and have fastened their seat belts properly before starting every journey.

Information on the correct seat position

The seat position must be correct in order for the components of the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection.

The seat position influences both the protection provided by the seat belt and the additional protection provided by the airbag.

A correct seat position in which the seat is nearly perfectly upright and a correctly fastened seat belt reduce the risks posed by the airbag when it is deployed.

Keep space considerations in mind when choosing a seat. With the seat in the correct, nearly

upright position, your head should not touch the roof.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot provide its intended protective function.

Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following.

Put the seat in the correct position.
▶ Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen.
▶ Observe the following information.

In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, observe the following information:

- Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly ( page 116).

When doing so, make sure you are able to fasten your seat belt correctly. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet over the centre of your shoulder.

• Keep your distance from the airbags, especially the front airbags. Set the driver's seat and front passenger seat as far back as possible while making sure the seat belt is fastened correctly.
• If persons are sitting on the rear seats, vehicle occupants should maintain an sufficient distance to the parts of the vehicle interior in front of them.
• Make sure there are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an airbag.
• If you are the driver, observe the following information on the correct position of the driver's seat ( page 116).

Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the driver's airbag to fully deploy.

- Assume a nearly upright sitting posture, with your buttocks positioned as far back as possi-

ble in the gap between the seat cushion and the seat backrest.

Your back must lie as flatly and as firmly as possible against the seat backrest.

- While driving, do not lean forward and do not lean against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags.

- Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if possible. Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion

Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag.

- Fasten the seat belt correctly.

Notes on wearing the seat belt correctly

Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt

If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function.

In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly.

▶ Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.

WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature

Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system.

Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in a suitable restraint system.

Each vehicle occupant must observe the following notes in particular:

• The seat belt must not be twisted.
- The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet over the centre of your shoulder.
- The shoulder belt strap should neither touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back.
- The lap belt must be routed as low down across the hips as possible.

In addition, push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoulder belt strap. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen.

Pregnant women must also take particular care with this.

• After being tightened, the shoulder belt strap and lap belt must fit snugly against the body.
- Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat.
- Never route the seat belt across sharp, pointed, abrasive or fragile objects.

• Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.
• Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants.

Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat.

Fastening and adjusting seat belts

If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap cannot be pulled out any further.

Vehicles with illuminated design seat belt buckles: the illumination on the seat belt buckle does not indicate that the seat belt buckle is functioning correctly.

Diagram showing car seatbelt usage with numbered instructions for setting seatbelt positions

Always engage seat belt tongue ① of the seat belt into seat belt buckle ② of the corresponding seat.
To adjust the seat belt height: press button 3 on the seat belt outlet and slide the seat belt outlet to the desired position.
To engage the seat belt outlet: release button and ensure that the seat belt outlet engages.

NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is buckled

When the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle, components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side, e.g. the seat belt tensioner.

▶ Only buckle the seat belts as intended.

Function of the restraint system warning lamp

When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the 🎨 restraint system warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional.

A malfunction has occurred in the restraint system if:

• the restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on
• the restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey

If components of the restraint system have been deployed, the ☐ restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously.

WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid vehicles: if the restraint system is malfunctioning, the automatic high voltage emergency shutoff may not function.

A DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to malfunctioning automatic high-voltage emergency shutoff

In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.

You may receive an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.

Have the automatic high-voltage emergency shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop.

Function of the seat belt warning lamp

The 4 seat belt warning lamp in the driver's display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly.

In addition, a warning tone may sound.

As soon as the driver and front passenger fasten their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out.

Function of the rear seat belt status display

The rear seat belt status display in the driver's display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly.

In addition, a warning tone may sound.

If a person unfastens a seat belt in the rear passenger compartment while the vehicle is motion, the rear seat belt status display appears again.

Display in the driver's display

Every time the vehicle is switched on, the rear seat belt status display informs you for a certain amount of time which rear seat belt is not fastened.

Three types of car seat connectors shown in grayscale, no text or symbols present

You can determine the status of the rear seat belt by the colour of the seat symbol in the driver's display as follows:

• Grey: the rear seat belt is not fastened.
• Green: the seat belt tongue of a rear seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the displayed seat.
• Red: the person in the rear seat has unfastened their seatbelt.

Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (front passenger airbag)

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ON

The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag.

If the front passenger seat is occupied or a child restraint system is fitted on the front passenger seat, you must make sure both before, and also during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the situation.

WARNING Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the front passenger seat

Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the system.

Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat.
When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger seat.

Self-test: when the vehicle is switched on, both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously for several seconds. After the self-test, you can determine the status of the front passenger airbag as follows:

- Front passenger airbag disabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continuously.

The front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an accident. If

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is lit, no one may use the front passenger seat.

If a rearward-facing child restraint system is fitted on the front passenger seat, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continuously.

- Front passenger airbag enabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for up to 60 seconds or until both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps go out.

The front passenger airbag may be deployed during an accident. If the front passenger airbag is in this status, no rearward-facing child restraint system may be fitted on the front passenger seat.

If you are driving with a child in the vehicle, observe the information in the chapter "Children in the vehicle" ( page 63)

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag

The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit.

A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit.

If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that:

• the classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat.
• the front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible.
  • the person is seated correctly.
  Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

Malfunction of the automatic front passenger air-bag shutoff

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 📄 restraint system indicator lamp light up simultaneously.

In this case, no one may use the front passenger seat and no child restraint system may be fitted on the front passenger seat.

Have the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

• Child restraint system on the front passenger seat ( page 68)
• Suitable positioning of the child restraint system ( page 74)

Disabling or enabling the front passenger airbag

The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff can disable or enable the front passenger airbag according to the situation.

This happens automatically as a result of the classification of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

You cannot manually disable or enable the front passenger airbag.

Also observe the following information:

• The status of the front passenger airbag, see "Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps" (→ page 46)
• Notes on using the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff, see "Information on the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff" (→ page 49)
• If you are driving with a child in the vehicle, observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle" (→ page 63)

Function of the REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps

REAR SEAT AIR BAG L R OFF ON ON OFF

L Left rear seat

R Right rear seat

You can disable or enable the rear airbags individually via the multimedia system ( page 49).

Self-test: when the vehicle is switched on, both the REAR SEAT AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously for several seconds.

After the self-test, you can determine the status of the rear airbag as follows:

• Rear airbag disabled: REAR SEAT AIR BAG OFF lights up continuously.
  The rear airbag will not be deployed in the event of an accident.
• Rear airbag enabled: REAR SEAT AIR BAG ON lights up for up to 60 seconds or until both the REAR SEAT AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps go out.
  The rear airbag may be deployed during an accident.

Information on the rear airbag in the seat back-rest of the front seat

Before beginning the journey, observe the information on the rear airbag ( page 61). Make sure the status of each rear airbag is correct for the situation.

Enabling/disabling the rear airbag via the multi-media system

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Vehicle

▶▶ Occupant protection

Enable or disable the desired rear airbag under Rear airbags.

Information on the child restraint system

When fitting a child restraint system, observe the notes in "Children in the vehicle" ( page 63).

Notes on the child restraint system on the front passenger seat

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an enabled co-driver airbag

If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the co-driver airbag during an accident.

▶ NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENA-

BLED FRONT AIRBAG. DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Also pay particular attention to the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat ( page 68).

Notes for vehicles with rear airbag If you fit a child restraint system on the left or right rear seat, pay particular attention to the notes for vehicles with rear airbag: (→ page 70).

Notes for vehicles with belt airbag If you fit a child restraint system on the left or right rear seat, pay particular attention to the information on the belt airbag in the rear seat belt: (→ page 59).

Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system

Function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff

A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information:

• Sit correctly (→ page 42).
• Fasten the seat belt correctly (→ page 43).

The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff can disable or enable the front passenger airbag according to the situation.

Make sure you observe the following information:

• Status of the front passenger airbag, see "Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps" (→ page 46).
• When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information ( page 68).

Status of the front passenger airbag in relation to the stature of the person:

- Front passenger airbag disabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continuously.

The front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an accident. If PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is lit, no one may use the front passenger seat.

- Front passenger airbag enabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for up to 60 seconds or until both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps go out.

The front passenger airbag may be deployed during an accident. Observe the following information on the correct seat position ( page 42).

Vehicles with rear seats: a person of smaller stature should use a rear seat.

System limits

The front passenger airbag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example, in the following situation:

• The front passenger transfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest.
• The front passenger sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat surface.

NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied

In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if:

• There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat.
• The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied.

Stow objects in a suitable place.

Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.

Depending on the detected accident situation, the window airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied.

Function of PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection)

PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driving situations and implement pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.

PRE-SAFE ^® can implement the following measures independently of each other:

• Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat.
• Closing the side windows.
• Vehicles with sliding sunroof: closing the sliding sunroof.

• Vehicles with memory function: moving the front passenger seat to a more favourable seat position.

• Vehicles with memory function in the rear compartment: moving the outer rear seats to a more favourable seat position.

• Vehicles with multicontour seat: increasing the lateral support by inflating the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest.
• PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multimedia system is switched on, generating a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate protective mechanism of a person's hearing.

NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat

The automatic adjustment of the seat position may result in damage to the seat and/or the object.

Stow objects in a suitable place.

Reversing the PRE-SAFE® system measures

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings yourself.

If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases.

Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)

PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take preemptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact.

PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other:

• Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat.
• Activating the rear hazard warning lights at a higher flashing frequency.
• Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is stationary. This brake application is cancelled automatically when the vehicle pulls away.

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed.

System limits

The system will not initiate any action in the following situations:

• when reversing
  or
• when the vehicle is towing a trailer and there is a risk of a rear impact

The system will not initiate any braking application in the following situations:

• whilst driving
  or
• when entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist

Function of PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side

If an imminent side impact is detected, PRE-SAFE ^® Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the front seat vehicle occupant's upper body towards the centre of the vehicle. It does this by rapidly inflating an air cushion in the outer seat side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on which the

impact is anticipated. This increases the distance between the door and the vehicle occupant.

Vehicles with E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: the body can also be slightly raised.

If PRE-SAFE ^® Impulse Side has been deployed or is faulty, the PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual(→ page 513) display message appears.

Seat belt adjustment function

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: after you have fastened the seat belt of the front seat, it may adjust itself against your body by pulling at the shoulder until somewhat tight. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting.

This function is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly.

You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia system ( page 52).

Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system

Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle

▶▶ Occupant protection

▶ Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment.

Function of the rear seat belt feeder

The seat belt feeder for the rear seat helps you fasten your seat belt.

When the door is closed, the seat belt feeder extends.

If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX Interior Assistant, the seat belt feeder can extend when you reach for the seat belt tongue.

The seat belt feeder retracts again in the following cases:

• the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle
• the seat belt tongue is not engaged in the seat belt buckle within a certain time
  • the respective door is opened

• a certain speed is exceeded after pulling away

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an extended seat belt extender while the vehicle is in motion

If the seat belt does not sit correctly on the body, it cannot perform its intended protective function.

▶ Always ensure that the seat belt extender is retracted while the vehicle is in motion.

If the seat belt feeder does not automatically retract, you must push it back by hand against the resistance all the way to the stop before starting the vehicle.

You can deactivate the seat belt feeder. Activate the child safety lock for the rear side windows ( page 84).

When fitting a child restraint system to the rear seat, observe the vehicle-specific information ( page 63).

Overview of the automatic measures after an accident

Depending on the type and severity of the accident, and depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following measures can be implemented, for example:

• automatic braking (post-collision brake)
• activating the hazard warning lights
- triggering an automatic emergency call (→ page 416)
- switching off the engine
To start the vehicle again, switch the vehicle off and on once more ( page 208). Depending on the type and severity of the accident, you may no longer be able to start the vehicle.
- switching off the fuel supply
- Plug-in hybrid: switching off the hybrid system and high-voltage on-board electrical system
- unlocking the vehicle doors
• lowering the side windows
- displaying the emergency guide in the central display

• switching on the interior lighting

Function of the post-collision brake after an accident

Depending on the accident situation, the post-collision brake can minimise the severity of a further collision or even avoid it.

If an accident is detected, the post-collision brake can initiate automatic braking. When the vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric parking brake is automatically applied.

The driver can cancel automatic braking by taking the following actions:

• braking more strongly than automatic braking
- fully depressing the accelerator pedal with force

Purpose and function of the restraint system

Overview of deployment situations (restraint system)

Make sure that the following prerequisites in particular have been met so that the components of the restraint system are able to provide the intended level of protection:

• Sit correctly (→ page 42).
• Fasten the seat belt correctly ( page 43).
• Function of the seat belt warning lamp ( page 45).
• Function of the rear seat belt status display ( page 45).
• The restraint system warning lamp is not lit up after the self-test (→ page 44).
• The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of the front passenger airbag ( page 46).
• The REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of the rear airbags ( page 48).

Depending on the detected deployment situation, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other:

• Seat belt tensioner: frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover
• Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: frontal impact
• Knee airbag: frontal impact
• Side airbag: side impact
• Centre airbag in the driver's seat backrest: side impact, rollover
• Window airbag: side impact, rollover, frontal impact
• Rear airbag in the seat backrest of the front seat: frontal impact
• Belt airbag in the rear seat belt: frontal impact
• Cushionbag in the reclining rear seat: frontal impact
• PRE-SAFE ^ Impulse Side: side impact

The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol ( page 60).

Observe the information on the function of the restraint system ( page 54).

Information on how the restraint system works

How the restraint system functions depends on the severity of the impact detected and the apparent type of accident.

For more information about types of accidents, see "Overview of deployment situations" ( page 53).

The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the collision.

Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred cannot play a decisive role in airbag deployment. Nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment.

The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle deceleration.

Depending on the apparent type of accident and the detected deployment situation, seat belt tensioners and/or airbags supplement the protection offered by a correctly worn seat belt.

When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant. Potential protection provided by each airbag:

• Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg
• Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head and ribcage
• Window airbag: head
• Side airbag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat occupants
  • Centre airbag: head and ribcage
• Rear airbag: head

However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, particularly if a seat belt tensioner is triggered or an airbag deployed.

If the seat belt tensioners are triggered or an air-bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released:

• The bang will not generally affect your hearing.
- In general, the powder released is not hazardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions.

Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.

Information on the limited protection provided by the restraint system

Risk due to the incorrect behaviour of vehicle occupants

Every vehicle occupant must make sure of the following in particular:

• They observe the information on the correct seat position ( page 42).
• There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of their clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position

The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position.

In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that

the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder.

Risk due to objects in the vehicle interior

Every vehicle occupant must make sure of the following in particular:

• They observe the information on the correct seat position ( page 42).
• There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar).
• There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.
• There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of their clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to blocked seat belt buckle or seat belt anchorage

Objects next to the front seat that block the seat belt buckle or the moving seat belt

anchorage on the front seat impair the function of the seat belt tensioners.

Before starting the journey, make sure that there are no objects around the seat belt buckle or between the front seat and door.

WARNING Risk of injury from objects in the deployment area of an airbag

Objects in the deployment area of an airbag can hinder or prevent the correct deployment of the airbag.

The airbag may then deploy in an uncontrolled manner and may even cause additional injuries to the vehicle occupants by deploying. This may be the case in particular if the airbag is integrated into the seat.

Always stow and secure objects correctly.
Before commencing your journey, make sure that no objects are stowed in the deployment area of an airbag.

The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG ( page 60) symbol.

Observe the following information:

• Notes on loading the vehicle (→ page 147)
• Information on the centre airbag in the driver's seat backrest ( page 60)
• Information on the rear airbag in the seat backrest of the front seat ( page 61)

Risk due to fitting accessories

Do not attach accessories such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim.

In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsuitable protective covers

Due to unsuitable protective covers, the air-bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do.

You should only use protective covers that have been approved for the corresponding seat by Mercedes-Benz.

In addition, the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff could be restricted due to an unsuitable protective cover. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of the front passenger airbag ( page 46).

Risk due to pets in the vehicle interior

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unattended in the vehicle

If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could press buttons or switches, for instance.

An animal may:

• activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example
- switch systems on or off and endanger other road users

Unsecured animals may be thrown about the vehicle in the event of an accident, or sudden steering and braking manoeuvres, and injure vehicle occupants.

▶ Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle.
Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal carrier.

Risk due to modification, damage or wear to the components of the restraint system

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system

Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system.

▶ Never alter the parts of the restraint system.
▶ Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component parts or their software.

If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use driving aids which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts

Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations:

• the seat belt is damaged, has been modified, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
• the seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty
• modifications have been made to the seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters.

Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example.

Modified seat belt tensioners could accidentally trigger or fail to function as intended.

▶ Never modify the seat belt system, for example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor.

Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean.
▶ Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

WARNING Risk of injury due to modifications to the cover of an airbag

If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag can no longer function as intended.

▶ Never modify the cover of an airbag.

Do not attach any objects to the cover.

The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol ( page 60).

WARNING Risk of injury due to a damaged rear airbag cover

If a rear airbag cover is damaged, the rear airbag can no longer function correctly and can even cause additional injuries when deployed.

Before starting a journey, make sure the covers for the rear airbags are not damaged. If a rear airbag cover is damaged, disable the rear airbag. Have a damaged rear airbag cover replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

You can disable or enable the rear airbag via the multimedia system ( page 49).

Observe the information on the rear airbag in the seat backrest of the front seat ( page 61)

WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctioning sensors in the door

The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or incorrect work performed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged.

▶ Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door trim carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Risk due to components of the restraint system which have already been deployed

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident.

WARNING Risk of burns from hot airbag components

The airbag parts are hot after an airbag has been deployed.

Do not touch the airbag parts.
Have a deployed airbag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag

A deployed airbag no longer offers any protection.

Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced.

Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.

WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners

Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function.

Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Seat belts

Information on the belt airbag in the rear seat belt

The BELTBAG identification indicates that a rear seat belt is equipped with a belt airbag. When activated, the belt airbag increases the protected area of the vehicle occupant's ribcage.

A WARNING Risk of injury or death due to use of a non-approved child restraint system

In an accident, the belt airbag may damage a non-approved child restraint system or a child restraint system which has not been approved for use in conjunction with the belt airbag.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use a child restraint system which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz in combination with a belt airbag.

Information on child restraint systems ( page 73).

Straightening out a twisted rear seat belt with a belt airbag

If the rear seat belt with a belt airbag is twisted, you must straighten it out before fastening the seat belt tongue.

Slide the seat belt tongue upward to the seat belt outlet and hold it.
Pull out the seat belt completely and hold it. The seat belt tongue is now at the more narrow part of the seat belt strap.
▶ Turn the seat belt strap in the seat belt tongue slit until it is in the correct position.
Slide the seat belt tongue downward and allow the seat belt to retract completely.

Releasing seat belts

Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue.

NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt

If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.

Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted.

Airbags

Overview of airbags

Diagram of a car dashboard with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating flow or movement

Driver's/front passenger seat: Knee airbag

2 Driver's airbag
3 Front passenger airbag
4 Window airbag
5 Side airbag
6 Centre airbag ^1

1) Only for certain countries.

Diagram of car interior with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating flow or movement

Rear seats:

4 Window airbag
7 Side airbag
Rear airbag

The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. An additional arrow sym-

bol ▶ indicates the installation location for certain airbags.

Observe the information in "Overview of deployment situations" ( page 53).

Information on the centre airbag in the driver's seat backrest

When triggered, the centre airbag deploys between the front seats. Do not stow any objects in the deployment area of the centre airbag.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 147).

Information on the cushionbag in the reclining rear seat

The cushionbag offers additional occupant protection in the event of frontal impacts. When triggered, the cushionbag deploys under the seat cushion. This helps prevent the vehicle occupant from slipping off the seat cushion.

If you install a child restraint system on the reclining rear seat, always observe the additional notes ( page 76).

Information on the rear airbag in the seat back-rest of the front seat

The rear airbag offers the occupants on the outer rear seats additional occupant protection in the event of certain types frontal impacts. When triggered, the rear airbag deploys between the rear seat occupant and the front seat. The rear airbag can help prevent the occupants on the rear seats from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident.

Always observe the legal requirements for the relevant country. If you are driving with a child in the vehicle, you can disable the rear airbag according to the legal requirements.

Observe the following information:

R Inform persons in the rear seats about the rear airbag in the seat backrest of the front seat.
R A person in the rear seat must adopt the correct sitting posture:
R Make sure that the covers for the rear airbags are not damaged.

& WARNING Risk of injudue to a damaged rear airbag cover

If a rear airbag cover is damaged, the rear airbag can no longer function correctly and can even cause additional injuries when deployed.

Before starting a journey, make sure the covers for the rear airbags are not damaged. If a rear airbag cover is damaged, disable the rear airbag. Have a damaged rear airbag cover replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

To avoid risks resulting from the deployment of a rear airbag, observe the following information on the correct sitting posture:

R The occupants must always keep their feet on the floor. Otherwise, feet and legs of occupants may be in the deployment area of the rear airbag.

If an occupant's feet cannot reach the floor, they must adopt the correct sitting posture and their legs must hang down the front of the seat.

R The feet or legs of the person on the rear seat must not rest against the seat backrest of the front seat, for example. Otherwise, their feet and legs are in the deployment area of the rear airbag. This should be taken into consideration especially if you are travelling with a child on the rear seat.

If you are travelling with a child in the le or right rear seat, observe the information on the child restrain systems (/ page 74).

Objects behind the front seat

Objects in the deployment area of the rear airbags may prevent the rear airbags from functioning correctly.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects placed in front of the rear airbag cover

Objects in front of the rear airbag cover can hinder or prevent the correct deployment of the rear airbag which is integrated into the front seat.

The rear airbag can potentially deploy in an uncontrolled manner and can cause additional injury to the person on the front seat.

▶ Always stow and secure objects correctly.

- Objects are stored behind the front seat which are in the deployment area of the rear airbags.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 147).

Disabling the rear airbag

You can disable or enable the rear airbags individually via the multimedia system ( page 49). You can determine the status of the rear airbag via the REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamp in the overhead control panel ( page 48).

Disable the rear airbags in the following situations in particular:

• A rearward-facing child restraint system is secured on the left or right rear seat.
• The person in the rear seat, for example a child, cannot sit in the correct seat position. Their feet and legs are potentially in the deployment area of the rear airbag.
• Due to the position of the front seats, an occupant's legs for example, are in the deployment area of the rear airbag.

Brief overview of most important points

Safely transporting children in the vehicle

Always observe the following when transporting children:

- Never leave children unattended in the vehicle ( page 65).

• Secure children up to a height of 1.50 m on the respective seat (see illustration above) properly with a suitable and approved child restraint system ( page 71), and secure small children in a rearward-facing child restraint system.
• Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

Left/right rear seat (preferred seats)

Preferred securing system:

ISOFIX mounting bracket ( page 74) or

i-Size mounting bracket ( page 76)

and

Also secure Top Tether if present ( page 81).

Alternative securing system:

Vehicle seat belt

Additionally attach Top Tether if recommended by the manufacturer of the child restraint system ( page 81).

Be sure to observe:

- If the rear seat is occupied, before commencing the journey ensure that the status of the rear airbag is correct for the current situation ( page 48).

The following child restraint systems within the Universal category are approved: U, UF, i-U, IUF. Observe the other alternatives for use ( page 74).

Front passenger seat

Securing system:

Vehicle seat belt

Be sure to observe:

- If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation ( page 46).

The following child restraint systems within the Universal category are approved: U(^), UF.

Observe the other alternatives for use ( page 76).

(*) rearward-facing child restraint system only in combination with automatic airbag shutoff

Centre rear seat

Securing system:

Vehicle seat belt

The following belt-secured child restraint systems within the Universal category are approved: U, UF. Observe the other alternatives for use ( page 82).

Important safety notes

Basic information

Be diligent

Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have serious consequences. Always be diligent in securing a child carefully before every journey.

Never allow babies and children to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant.

To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 1.50 m in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information:

• Always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle.
- The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.
- The vehicle seat must be suitable for the child restraint system to be fitted:

- ISOFIX mounting brackets: (→ page 74)

- i-Size mounting brackets: (→ page 76)

- Securing with the vehicle seat belt: (→ page 76)

Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you fit a child restraint system to a rear seat.

The generic term child restraint system

The generic term child restraint system is used in this Owner's Manual. A child restraint system is, for example:

• a baby car seat
  • a rearward-facing child seat
  • a forward-facing child seat

- a child booster seat – Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a back-rest and seat belt guide.

Observe laws and legal requirements

Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle.

Make sure that the child restraint system is approved in accordance with the valid test specifications and guidelines. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.

Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle

Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems:

• the ISOFIX or i-Size mounting brackets
• the vehicle's seat belt system
• the Top Tether anchorages

Simply attaching to the ISOFIX mounting brackets or i-Size mounting brackets on the vehicle can reduce the risk of fitting the child restraint system incorrectly.

When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint system ( page 80).

Important warning notices

Always secure a child restraint system correctly

A WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system

The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended.

Be sure to comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use.
▶ Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat.
▶ Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.
▶ Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them.
Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.

• Always observe the vehicle-specific information.
- Fitting an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system on the rear seat ( page 80).
Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt ( page 82).

- Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle

If the child restraint system is incorrectly fitted or not secured, it can become detached.

The child cannot then be protected or restrained as intended.

The unused child restraint system can be become detached and strike vehicle occupants.

Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use.

Always fit child restraint systems correctly, even if they are transported unused in the vehicle.

Do not modify the child restraint system

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury due to modifications to the child restraint system

The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury.

▶ Never modify a child restraint system.
Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer.

Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition

A WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems

Child restraint systems or their retaining systems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function.

It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained.

▶ Always immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or involved in an accident.
Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again.

Avoid direct sunlight

WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight

If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly on metallic parts of the child restraint system.

Always make sure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight.
Protect the child restraint system with a blanket, for example.
If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Observe when stopping or parking

WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.

▶ Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
• Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
- change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Keep the key out of reach of children.

Overview of warning stickers in the vehicle

Diagram showing three safety warning signs with icons and labels, likely illustrating vehicle safety rules or hazard zones.

① Front passenger airbag warning (on the front passenger sun visor) (→ page 68)
2 Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (visible when the front passenger door is open) (→ page 70)
③ Rear airbag (visible when the left or right rear door is open) (→ page 70)

Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat

WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.

The child could be struck by the airbag.

Always ensure that the front passenger airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
▶ NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.

Observe the specific instructions for the rear-ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems ( page 78).

If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the additional notes.

• The notes on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff ( page 47).
• When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously ( page 46).
• The front passenger airbag is enabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is not lit. The front passenger airbag may be deployed during an accident. In that case, do not use rearward-facing child restraint systems.

Information on the automatic front passenger air-bag shutoff

If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system

Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff.

Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system.
Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system is always resting on the seat surface of the co-driver seat.
The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the co-driver seat.

It is essential to comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information ( page 68).

Rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat

If a rearward-facing child restraint system is fitted on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must be disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up continuously ( page 46).

WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.

The child could be struck by the airbag.

Always ensure that the front passenger airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
▶ NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.

The front passenger airbag is enabled depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up. The front passenger airbag may be deployed during an accident. If the front passenger airbag is in this status, no rearward-facing child restraint system may be fitted on the front passenger seat. Instead, fit the rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat.

Forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat

If a forward-facing child restraint system is fitted on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag may be automatically enabled or disabled. The status of the front passenger airbag depends on the child restraint system and the stature of the child.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is either lit continuously, or it is not lit ( page 46). Always observe the following information.

A WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the child restraint system

If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the co-driver seat and you position the co-driver seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could:

- come into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example

• be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
  Always move the co-driver seat as far back as possible. In doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the co-driver seat accordingly.
  Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

• Function of the automatic front passenger air-bag shutoff ( page 46)
- Suitable positioning of the child restraint system

Notes on vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff

Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff have a special sticker affixed to the side of the cockpit on the front passenger side ( page 67).

Make sure you observe the following information:

• Never fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat
  • Always fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat
• Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat ( page 68)

Notes for vehicles with rear airbag

When securing a child in a child restraint system on an outer rear seat, it is essential to observe the following instructions:

- The information on the rear airbag in the seat backrest of the front seat if the rear seat is occupied ( page 61)

• The information on recommended child restraint systems ( page 73).
• Secure a rearward-facing child restraint system with the ISOFIX or the i-Size child seat anchor.
• Secure a forward-facing child restraint system with the ISOFIX or the i-Size child seat anchor and, if present, the Top Tether anchorage.

You can disable or enable the rear airbags individually via the multimedia system ( page 49). You can determine the status of the rear airbag via the REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamp in the overhead control panel ( page 48).

If using a forward-facing child restraint system with enabled rear airbag: make sure that the child's feet are not placed in front of the rear airbag cover or on the seat backrest. The child's legs can otherwise be flung upward if the rear airbag is deployed.

Notes for vehicles with belt airbag

When securing a child in a child restraint system on an outer rear seat with a belt airbag, it is essential to observe the following instructions:

• Do not use belt-secured child restraint systems other than the approved KIDFIX XP and AMG KIDFIX XP.
• Secure a rearward-facing child restraint system using the ISOFIX or i-Size mounting brackets.
• Secure a forward-facing child restraint system with the ISOFIX or i-Size mounting brackets and, if present, the Top Tether anchorage.
• Observe the notes in "Belt airbag in rear seat belt" (→ page 59).

Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children

Information on the advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system

Transport a baby in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system only. It is also preferable to

transport a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the opposite direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards.

Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cervical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system.

Approval categories for child restraint systems

Only child restraint systems that meet the following UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle:

• UN-R44
• UN-R129

Identification on the child restraint system

The following information, e.g., is available on the approval label on the child restraint system:

• Approval category
• Child weight group
  • Authorisation number

• Child restraint size class

Approval categories in accordance with UN-R44

universal 9 - 18 kg E1 03301095 HERSTELLER 0007386

Example of an approval label

- Universal: child restraint systems in the "Universal" category are approved for installation in vehicles. They can be used, in accordance with overviews of the suitability of seats for

securing child restraint systems, on seats labelled U, UF or IUF.

The identification IUF refers to ISOFIX child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems must also be secured with Top Tether.

• Semi-Universal: child restraint systems in the "Semi-Universal" category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
• Vehicle-specific: child restraint systems in the "vehicle-specific" category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Approval categories in accordance with UN-R129

Example of an approval label

- i-Sizechild restraint systems and booster seats with backrest: suitable for attachment to i-Size mounting brackets. They can be used on the seats marked i-U.

Child restraint systems in this category can also be attached to ISOFIX bars if approved by

the child restraint system manufacturer. i-Size booster seats with backrest can be used on seats marked U if the seat is approved for category B2/B3.

• Belted child restraint systems and belted booster seats without backrest of the Universal category: suitable for attachment to the seats marked U.
• Vehicle-specific child restraint systems (ISO-FIX or belted attachment as well as child booster seats with and without backrest): suitable for attachment to the seats marked i-U or U if this is approved by the child restraint system manufacturer.

Observe the suitability of vehicle seats

• Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems ( page 74)
• Suitability of seats for securing i-Size child restraint systems ( page 76).
• Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems ( page 76)

Overview of recommended child restraint systems

Further information on the correct child restraint system can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.

Securing with ISOFIX

Weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approximately 15 months)

Type1	BABY SAFE plus (including base)
Size category E
Approval E1 04 301 146
Order number2	B6 6 86 8224
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code: 9H95.

Weight category I (9 to 18 kg and from approximately 9 months to 4 years)

Type1	DUO plus
Size category B1
Approval E1 04 301 133
Order number2	A 000 970 43 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer, 2 With colour code 9H95.

Securing with the vehicle seat belt Observe the notes for vehicles with belt airbag: (→ page 71).

Weight category 0 (up to 10 kg and approximately 6 months) and weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg and approximately 15 months)

Type1	BABY SAFE plus II
Approval E1 04 301 146
Order number2	A 000 970 38 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.

Weight category I (9 to 18 kg and from approximately 9 months to 4 years)

Type1	DUO plus
Approval E1 04 301 133
Order number2	A 000 970 43 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.

Weight category II/III (15 to 36 kg and from approximately 3 to 12 years)

Type1	KIDFIX XP
Approval E1 04 301 304
Order number2	A 000 970 49 02
Type1	AMG KIDFIX XP
Approval E1 04 301 304
Order number2	A 000 970 33 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.

Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems

Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems

ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems.

The symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in accordance with UN R44 ( page 71).

ISOFIX child restraint systems can also be installed on seats with i-Size markings ( page 76).

Attach only ISOFIX child restraint systems that are approved in accordance with UN R44 as per the following ISOFIX tables.

Legend for the following ISOFIX tables

X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight group and/or size class.

IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight group.

U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.

L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.

Carry cot

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
F - ISO/L1 X
G - ISO/L2 X

Weight group 0 (up to 10 kg and up to approx. 6 months)

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
E - ISO/R1	IL^1
E - ISO/R1	X^2
1 Vehicles without rear airbag and vehicles with disabled rear airbag
2 Vehicles with enabled rear airbag

Weight group 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approx. 15 months)

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
E - ISO/R1	IL^1
E - ISO/R1	X^2
D - ISO/R2, ISO/R2X	IL^1

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
D - ISO/R2, ISO/R2X	X^2
C - ISO/R3	IL^1,3
C - ISO/R3	X^2
1 Vehicles without rear airbag and vehicles with disabled rear airbag
2 Vehicles with enabled rear airbag
3 When using a child restraint system in this size class, move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the seat back-rest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system.

Weight group 1 (9–18 kg and approx. 9 months to 4 years)

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
D - ISO/R2, ISO/R2X	IL^1
D - ISO/R2, ISO/R2X	X^2
C - ISO/R3	IL^1,3
C - ISO/R3	X^2
B - ISO/F2 IUF
B1 - ISO/F2X IUF
A - ISO/F3 IUF

1 Vehicles without rear airbag and vehicles with disabled rear airbag

Size class -

Left/right rear seat

Equipment

2 Vehicles with enabled rear airbag

3 When using a child restraint system in this size class, move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the seat back-rest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system.

Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching i-Size child restraint systems

i-Size is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems.

i-Size child restraint systems can be attached to a seat with the i-Size marking ( page 71).

Child restraint systems that are approved in accordance with the following i-Size table may be attached.

Legend for the following i-Size tables

X Not suitable for an i-Size child restraint system in the "Universal" category.

i-U Suitable for forward-facing and rearward-facing i-Size child restraint systems in the "Universal" category.

Left and right rear seat (vehicles without rear airbag)

i-Size child restraint systems (ISO/R1, ISO/R2, ISO/R2X, ISO/R3, ISO/F2, ISO/F2X, ISO/F3, ISO/B2, ISO/B3)

Left and right rear seat (vehicles with rear airbag)

i-Size child restraint systems (ISO/R1, ISO/R2, ISO/R2X, ISO/R3)

Rear airbag disabled1	i-U
Rear airbag enabled X
i-Size child restraint systems (ISO/F2, ISO/F2X, ISO/F3, ISO/B2, ISO/B3)
Rear airbag disabled1	i-U

Rear airbag enabled i-U

1 The REAR SEAT AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp for the rear seat on which the child restraint system is fitted must be lit.

Front passenger seat

i-Size child restraint systems (ISO/R1, ISO/R2, ISO/R2X, ISO/R3, ISO/F2, ISO/F2X, ISO/F3, ISO/B2, ISO/B3)

Overview of the suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems

Legend for the following tables

U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.
X Not suitable for children in this weight category.

L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.

Rear seats

Different child restraint systems are approved depending on whether the vehicle is equipped with belt airbags or rear airbags. Before fitting, make sure that the child restraint system is approved for your vehicle. Further information on the belt airbag ( page 59) and rear airbag ( page 61).

Rear seats without belt airbag and without rear airbag

Left/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat1	U
1 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are not suitable for this seat.

Rear seats with a belt airbag

Left/right rear seat	L^1
1 Only use the approved child seats KIDFIX XP and AMG KIDFIX XP

Observe the notes on Vehicles with belt airbags: (→ page 73).

Rear seats with rear airbag

Rearward-facing child restraint systems
Rear airbag enabled(left/right rear seat)	X

Rear airbag disabled1(left/right rear seat)	U, L
Forward-facing child restraint systems
Rear airbag enabled U,	UF, L
Rear airbag disabled1	U,UF, L
I The REAR SEAT AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp for the rear seat on which the child restraint system is fitted must be lit.

Vehicles with a reclining rear seat: the bottom and back of a forward-facing child restraint system must make full contact with the reclining rear seat sitting surface and seat backrest. The child restraint system must not touch the roof. Adjust the seat backrest inclination accordingly. Also observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

Notes on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat

• If it is absolutely necessary for you to fit a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat.
• Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation ( page 46).

Front passenger seat

Rearward-facing child restraint systems
Front passenger airbag enabled1	X
Front passenger airbag disabled1,2	U, L
Forward-facing child restraint systems
Front passenger airbag enabled1	U,UF, L

Front passenger airbag disabled ^1, 2

U, UF, L

1 Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.
2 The vehicle must be equipped with automatic front passenger air bag shutoff. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

Securing the child restraint system

Adjusting the seat correctly

When fitting a child restraint system on the left or right rear seat, always observe the following:

Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.

If the head restraint of the child restraint system cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for certain child restraint sys-

tems. Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

When fitting an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system, also observe the following:

When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system.
When using a forward-facing child restraint system with integrated child seat belt: adjust the head restraint of the respective seat so that it does not push the child restraint system forwards. If necessary, the respective head restraint can be removed. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the vehicle head restraint immediately and adjust correctly.
The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat

cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.

Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is not put under strain by the head restraint.
When fitting a belt-secured child restraint system, also observe the following:
When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system.
When using a forward-facing child restraint system with integrated child seat belt: adjust the head restraint of the respective seat so that it does not push the child restraint system forwards. If necessary, the respective head restraint can be removed. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the vehicle head restraint immediately and adjust correctly.

The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat.
The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.
Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is not put under strain by the head restraint.
Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, always observe the following when fitting a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat:

Observe the notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat ( page 68).
When using a forward-facing child restraint system integrated child seat belt: remove the

head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, immediately replace the head restraint and adjust correctly.

The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat.
The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction.
Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is not put under strain by the head restraint.
▶ Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.
Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest possible position. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for-

wards from the seat belt outlet and, where possible, downwards to the child restraint system.

Fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment.

4 Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.
Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible.

Fitting an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is exceeded.

Too much load may be placed on the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint systems and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example.

If the child is secured in an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system with integrated seat belts, the total mass of the child and child restraint system must not exceed 33 kg.

Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system:

R in the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used
R on a label on the child restraint system, if present

Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with.

When tting a child restraint system, observe the following:

O Always observe the correct use of the seats and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system.

ISOFIX mounting brackets (/ page 74)

or

i-Size mounting brackets (/ pag e 76)

Before every journey, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system or the i-Size child restraint system is engaged correctly in both ISOFIX or i-Size mounting brackets.

NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the centre seat during installation of the child restraint system

Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped.

Vehicles with reclining rear seats: before an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system is installed, tilt the backrest of the reclining rear seat back slightly.
Fold upholstered lining ① upwards.
Pull the tab on upholstered lining ① upwards and position it on the support surface. Upholstered lining ① will remain folded upwards.
Attach the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system to both mounting brackets ② in the vehicle.
To close, fold upholstered lining ① upwards.
Lift the tab from the support surface and slide it back into the upholstery slot between the seat backrest and seat cushion. Close the upholstery flap.

▶ Vehicles with reclining rear seats: return the reclining rear seat backrest to an upright position. The reclining rear seat backrest must be in contact with the child restraint system.

Fastening a Top Tether

WARNING Risk of injury or death from adjusting the seat after fitting a child restraint system

Vehicles with electrically adjustable rear bench seats:

The following may occur:

• The Top Tether belt may sit either too loose or too tight
• The child restraint system may be loose, incorrectly positioned or damaged and then not perform its intended protective function.
  ▶ Never adjust the seat after the child restraint system has been installed.

If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt: The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with ISOFIX or i-Size and the vehicle.

1 2 3 TOP TETHER

If necessary, slide head restraint ① upwards (→ page 131).
Remove cover ② of Top Tether anchorage ③.
Fit the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system with Top Tether. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts labeled 3, 4, and 5

Guide Top Tether belt ④ under head restraint ① between the two head restraint bars.
Hook Top Tether hook ⑤ of Top Tether belt ④ into Top Tether anchorage ③ without twisting.

Tension Top Tether belt ④. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
If necessary, slide head restraint ① downwards (→ page 131). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt ④.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt

For a child restraint system in the "Universal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that the system has been approved for the vehicle seat.
Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the seat.
Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards from the seat belt outlet and, where

possible, downwards to the child restraint system.
When fitting on the rear seat: also secure Top Tether if present.
When fitting on the front passenger seat: if necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly.

Child safety locks

Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
• Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
- change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Keep the key out of reach of children.

WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.

▶ Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are travelling in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

• open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users
  • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic
  • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example

▶ Always activate the child safety locks installed if children are travelling in the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows.

Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the important safety notes in the "Notes on the additional door lock" section.

The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside.

Diagram showing car interior with labeled directional arrows and numbered annotations

Press the lever in direction ① (activate) or ② (deactivate).
Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly.

Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows

Diagram showing car interior and vehicle control panel with numbered labels pointing to a device icon

To activate/deactivate: press button 2.

The rear side window can be opened or closed as follows:

- Indicator lamp ① is lit: via the switch on the driver's door

- Indicator lamp ① is off: via the switch on the corresponding rear door or driver's door

When the child safety lock is activated, the controls in the rear compartment are disabled for:

• the rear side windows

• the adjustment of the front passenger seat from the rear compartment
  • the rear seat belt extender
  • the roller sunblinds:

• of the rear side windows
  of the rear window

• in the roof

Key

Overview of key functions

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
• Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
- change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Keep the key out of reach of children.

NOTE Damage to the key caused by magnetic fields

Keep the key away from strong magnetic fields.

Diagram of a car keychain with numbered labels pointing to key components

Vehicle key
① Indicator lamp
2 To lock

3 Unlocks (with embossed surface)
4 Opens/closes the boot lid

If indicator lamp i does not light up after pressing the ☐ or 🔒 button, the battery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible.

Replace the key battery ( page 87).

The key locks and unlocks the following components:

• Doors
• Fuel filler flap
• Socket flap (plug-in hybrid)
• Boot lid

If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Anti-theft protection is primed again.

Do not keep the key together with electronic devices or metal objects. This can affect the key's functionality.

Indicator lamp of the vehicle locking system

Diagram of a car interior showing steering wheel and dashboard, with an inset highlighting a specific component (no text or symbols present)

Indicator lamp ① in the trim on the driver's side flashes when the vehicle is locked from outside. In the following cases, indicator lamp ① remains off:

• when the vehicle is locked from inside
• whilst driving

Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal

Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle

▶ Open/close

▶ Activate or deactivate the Acoustic lock.

i Please observe:

The selected setting for the acoustic locking verification signal must comply with the relevant national road and traffic regulations. In some countries, including Germany, using the acoustic locking verification signal is forbidden by traffic laws (in accordance with §16 Para. 1 and §30 Para. 1 of the German national road traffic regulations). The driver of the vehicle must comply with these regulations. In countries where the use of this function is forbidden, this function is not activated in the vehicle and must not be activated.

Changing the unlocking settings

Possible unlocking functions of the key:

- Central unlocking

• Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap
• Plug-in hybrid: unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap/socket flap
  To switch between settings: press the ☑ and ⏻ buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes twice.

Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap has been selected:

• To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the button twice.
• Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked.

Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap/socket flap has been selected (plug-in-hybrid):

• To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the button twice.
• Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driv-

er's door, only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap/socket flap are unlocked.

Deactivating the function of the key

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the function of the key, the KEYLESS-GO functions are also deactivated. Access or drive authorization by KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that particular key. Activate the function of the key so that all its functions will again be available.

You can also deactivate the function of the key to reduce the energy consumption of the key if you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time.

Press and hold the key 📁 button.

With the key button pressed, immediately press key button twice in quick succession. The indicator light of the key lights up once briefly and once for a long time.

i You have the following options to reactivate the key:

- Press any key on the key.

- Start the vehicle with the key in the centre console storage compartment ( page 209).

Removing/inserting the emergency key

Removing the emergency key

Diagram illustrating two-step mechanical or electrical process steps with labeled components and directional arrows

Press release button ①. Emergency key ② is pushed out slightly.
Fully remove emergency key ②.

Inserting the emergency key

Diagram showing a mechanical component with labeled parts and an arrow indicating transformation or assembly.

Insert emergency key ② at marking ③ until it engages.
① You can use emergency key ② to attach the key to a key ring.

Replacing the key battery

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to swallowing batteries

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed or otherwise

enter the body, severe internal burns can occur within two hours.

There is a risk of fatal injury.

Keep batteries out of the reach of children.
If the battery compartment cover and/or lid do not close securely, stop using the key and keep it away from children.
If batteries are swallowed or otherwise enter the body, seek immediate medical attention.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal, pose of them with the household rub-

Dispose of batteries in an entally responsible manner, charged batteries to a qualified workshop or to a collection used batteries.

Requirements:

• You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Remove the emergency key ( page 87).

Diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts and directional arrow indicating movement or force

Press emergency key ② into the opening in the key in the direction of the arrow until cover ① opens. When doing so, do not hold cover ① closed.

Diagram showing a disassembled device with labeled parts 2, 3, and 4, likely illustrating a mechanical or electrical assembly.

Insert emergency key ② into the opening and lift up covering ③ and remove it.
Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until battery ④ falls out of the key.
Insert the new battery with the positive pole facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.
Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other impurities.
Insert the front tabs of covering Ⓐ into the housing and then press on both sides to close it.
Make sure that covering ③ is completely closed.
Insert the front tabs of cover Ⓞ into the housing and then press until it is completely closed.
Insert the emergency key again ( page 87).

Problems with the key, troubleshooting

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle Possible causes:

• The key battery is weak or discharged.
Check the battery using the indicator lamp ( page 85).
Replace the key battery, if necessary ( page 87).
▶ Use the replacement key.
Use the emergency key to lock or unlock ( page 94).
Have key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

There is interference from a powerful radio signal source

Possible causes if the function of the key is impaired:

• high voltage power lines
- mobile phones
• electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)

• shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers
  Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the key and the potential source of interference.
  You have lost a key
  Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
  If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced as well.

Doors

Notes on the additional door lock

The additional door lock is only available for vehicles for the United Kingdom.

WARNING Risk of injury to persons inside the vehicle when the additional door lock is activated

If the additional door lock is activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside.

▶ Never leave persons, in particular children, unattended in the vehicle.
If there are persons in the vehicle, do not activate the additional door lock.

The additional door lock is automatically activated in the following situations:

• The vehicle is locked using the key.
• The vehicle is locked using KEYLESS-GO.

If the vehicle has been locked via Mercedes me connect, the additional door lock is not activated ( page 410).

If the additional door lock is activated, the doors cannot be opened from the inside.

i After locking you can issue a signal with the horn.

You can prevent the additional door lock from being activated by deactivating interior protection before locking the vehicle ( page 115).

Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside

United Kingdom only: observe the notes on the additional door lock ( page 89).

Diagram of a car interior showing a directional arrow and a circular icon (no text or symbols)

Pull the door ① handle.

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside

Diagram showing a device with labeled parts and a close-up of its component, likely illustrating a mechanical or electrical assembly.

To unlock: press ⓘ button.

To lock: press button ②.

The red indicator lamp on button ② lights up once the vehicle is locked.

The buttons are also on the rear doors.

This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.

Plug-in hybrid: the socket flap is also locked and unlocked. The socket flap can be opened even if a key is detected in the car.

The vehicle is not unlocked:

• if you have locked the vehicle using the key
- if you have locked the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Recessed door handles extend or retract

The door handles extend automatically:

• when you unlock the vehicle with the key
• when you touch the outer sensor surface of the door handle (when the vehicle is unlocked)

The door handles retract automatically:

• when you lock the vehicle with the key
• when pulling away
  • after waiting for a time

Line drawing of a car exterior with a blue-lit door and a close-up of the door handle (no text or symbols)

Extend the door handle: Touch the outer sensor surface.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO

Requirements:

• The key is outside the vehicle.
- The distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.

- The driver's door and the door on which the door handle is used are closed.

The door handles extend automatically:

• when a vehicle key is detected (the vehicle is then not yet unlocked)
• when you unlock the vehicle with the key
• when you touch the outer sensor surface of the door handle to unlock it

The door handles retract automatically:

• when you lock the vehicle with the key
• when you touch the recessed sensor surface of the door handle to lock it
  • after comfort locking (→ page 105)
• when pulling away
  • after waiting for a time

NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the boot lid or a door

- when using an automatic car wash

• when using a high pressure cleaner
  ▶ Deactivate the function of the key in these situations.
  or
  Make sure that the key is at a minimum distance of 3 m (high-pressure cleaner) or 6 m (automatic car wash) away from the vehicle.

Observe the notes:

• on washing the vehicle in a car wash ( page 437)
• on using a high pressure cleaner ( page 439)

Diagram of a car interior showing the front and side views, with an inset close-up of a device labeled 'I' (no text or symbols on the device itself)

Unlocking the vehicle: With the door handle extended, touch the inside surface Ⓞ of the door handle.

If the door handle is not extended, e.g. after a waiting period:

Diagram of a car interior showing the door panel and a close-up of the door panel with a numbered label (no text or symbols present)

▶ Touch the sensor surface ② to unlock.

Illustration of a car door with a blue circular badge and a numbered button (no text or symbols)

To lock the vehicle: touch recessed sensor surface ③.
▶ Convenience closing: touch recessed sensor surface ③ for an extended period.

(i) Further information on convenience closing ( page 105).

Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Possible causes:

• The function of the key has been deactivated.
• The key battery is weak or discharged.
▶ Activate the function of the key ( page 87).
Check the battery using the indicator lamp ( page 85).
Replace the key battery, if necessary ( page 87).
▶ Use the replacement key.
Use the emergency key to lock or unlock ( page 94).
Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

There is interference from a powerful radio signal source

Possible causes if the function of KEYLESS-GO is impaired:

• high voltage power lines

• mobile phones
  • electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)
• shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers

Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the key and the potential source of interference.

Activating or deactivating the automatic locking feature

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Vehicle

Open/close

The vehicle is locked automatically when the vehicle is switched on and the wheels are turning faster than walking pace.

▶ Activate or deactivate Automatic locking. In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated:

• The vehicle is being towed or pushed.

- If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dynamometer.

Power closing function

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the doors close automatically

Body parts or objects can become trapped, causing injuries.

Ensure that no body parts or objects are in the closing area.
▶ Automatic closing of the doors can be cancelled by pulling the outer or inner door handle.

If you push the door into the lock to the first detent position, the power closing function will automatically pull the door into the lock.

If the vehicle is locked from the outside, or while pulling away, an automatic closing of the doors can be triggered.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the emergency key

Unlocking a left-hand vehicle door with the emergency key element

If you unlock and open the driver's door with the emergency key, this triggers the burglar alarm system.
If you unlock the driver's door with the emergency key, the boot lid will not be unlocked.

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO

Remove the emergency key ( page 87).

Diagram showing car door handle with blue arrows indicating movement, labeled with a numbered icon and directional arrow.

▶ Pull and hold the door handle.
Insert the emergency key into the lock cylinder.
Turn the emergency key anti-clockwise to position 1.
▶ Turn the emergency key back to its starting position.

Remove the emergency key and release the door handle.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO

Remove the emergency key ( page 87).

Illustration of a car exterior with a blue location pin icon and directional arrow inside a battery (no text or symbols)

If the door handle is retracted:

- Insert a flat, non-metallic object behind door handle ① from above and pry it slightly outward. - Reach behind door handle ① from below, pull it outward to the pressure point and hold it there.

Side view of a car with a parking meter inset showing the door and seat (no text or symbols)

If the door handle is extended:

Pull door handle ① outward to the pressure point and hold it there.
Insert the emergency key into the lock cylinder.
Turn the emergency key anti-clockwise to position 1.
Forcefully pull door handle Ⓞ outward past the pressure point.
▶ Turn the emergency key back to its starting position.
Remove the emergency key and release the door handle.

Locking the doors

Diagram of a car interior showing a close-up of the door handle and a blue circular arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols present)

Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency key, into opening ⓚ on the door lock.
To lock the left-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key clockwise as far as it will go.

To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key anti-clockwise as far as it will go.

If the locked door is then closed, it can no longer be opened from the outside.

Boot

Opening the boot lid

DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.

Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid.
▶ Never drive with the boot lid open.

NOTE Damage to the boot lid by obstacles above the vehicle

The boot lid swings upwards when it is opened.

Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid.

Pull the boot lid handle.
▶ Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper ( page 100).

Vehicles with boot lid convenience closing

Diagram showing a car interior with a highlighted control panel labeled '1' pointing to the screen area.

Pull remote operating switch ① until the boot lid opens.
or
Press and hold the 📄 button on the key. If the boot lid is stopped in an intermediate position, pull it upwards. Release it as soon as it begins to open.

With the boot lid opening limiter activated, manually pull the stopped boot lid upwards.

If an obstacle obstructs the boot lid during the automatic opening process, blockage detection will stop the boot lid. The automatic blockage detection function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

Closing the boot lid

WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
▶ Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.

Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

Notes on closing the boot lid: your vehicle is equipped with automatic key recognition. If a key belonging to the vehicle is detected in the vehicle, the boot lid will not be locked and will pop open again.

Note that the boot lid will not be locked if the following situation occurs:

• You have locked the vehicle and close the boot lid while a key belonging to the vehicle is inside the vehicle. and
• A second key belonging to the vehicle is not detected outside the vehicle.

Automatic key recognition is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

Before locking, ensure that at least one key belonging to the vehicle is outside the vehicle.

To close the boot lid: pull the boot lid downwards using the handle recess and push it closed.
① Vehicles with boot lid convenience closing: if you lightly push the boot lid closed, the power closing function will automatically pull the boot lid into the lock.

Vehicles with boot lid convenience closing

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the boot lid

Parts of the body could become trapped. There may be people in the closing area.

Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area.
▶ Use one of the following options to stop the closing process:

- Press the 📋 button on the key.

• Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door.
• Press the closing or locking button on the boot lid.

- Pull the boot lid handle.

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by making a kicking movement below the rear bumper.

Pull the boot lid handle. Release it as soon as it begins to close.
If the boot lid is stopped in an intermediate position, push it downwards.

The boot lid will continue to close.

Diagram showing a car interior with a highlighted car key and a control panel labeled '1' pointing to the right side.

Push remote operating switch ① until the boot lid is fully closed.

Line drawing of a rear view of a car back panel with two labeled buttons (1 and 2) pointing to the front panel (no text or symbols on the main body)

Press closing button ① on the boot lid.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO

Press locking button ② on the boot lid. If a key is detected outside the vehicle, the boot lid will close and the vehicle will be locked.

With the boot lid completely open, press and hold the 📄 button on the key. The key must be in the vicinity of the vehicle.

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS

With the boot lid completely open, make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper ( page 100).

Boot lid automatic reversing function

The boot lid is equipped with automatic blockage detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle obstructs the boot lid during the automatic closing process, it will automatically open again. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function

The reversing function will not react:

• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
• towards the end of the closing procedure

In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trapped.

▶ Ensure that no body parts are in the closing area.
If someone is trapped, use one of the following options:
- Press the button on the key.
- Press the remote operating switch on the driver's door.
- Press the closing or locking button on the boot lid.
- Pull the boot lid handle.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS function

Illustration of a person using a tool to lift a car, showing motion and change (no text or symbols)

With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close or interrupt boot lid movement by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper.

The kicking movement triggers the opening or closing process alternately.

Observe the notes when opening ( page 96) and closing ( page 97) the boot lid.

i A warning tone sounds while the boot lid is opening or closing.

WARNING Risk of bums caused by a hot exhaust system

The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system.

Always ensure that you only make a kicking movement within the detection range of the sensors.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the boot lid or a door

• when using an automatic car wash
• when using a high pressure cleaner
  ▶ Deactivate the function of the key in these situations.
  or
  Make sure that the key is at a minimum distance of 3 m (high-pressure cleaner)

or 6 m (automatic car wash) away from the vehicle.

When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. Observe the following notes:

• The key is behind the vehicle.
- Stand at least 30 cm away from the vehicle while performing the kicking movement.
- Do not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement.
- Do not carry out the kicking movement too slowly.
- The kicking movement must be towards the vehicle and back again.

Front view of a car with a blue circular marker labeled '1' pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols on the car itself)

① Detection range of the sensors

If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds.

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases:

• The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or snow.
• The kicking movement is made using a prosthetic leg.

The boot lid could be opened or closed unintentionally, in the following situations:

• A person's arms or legs are moving in the sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects.
• Objects are moved or placed behind the vehicle, e.g. the hose of a fuel dispenser, a charging cable or luggage
• Clamping straps, tarpaulins or other coverings are pulled over the bumper.
• A protective mat with a length reaching over the boot sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used.
  • The protective mat is not secured correctly.
  • Work is being done on the trailer hitch, trailers or rear bicycle racks.

Deactivate the function of the key ( page 87) or do not carry the key about your person in such situations.

Switching separate boot locking on and off

Multimedia system:

Switching separate boot locking on

Select Block boot.
Create a PIN.
▶ Confirm the PIN with OK.
Enter the PIN again and confirm it. The boot will remain locked if you unlock the vehicle centrally.
If an accident has been detected, the boot will unlock even if separate locking is switched on.

Switching separate boot locking off

Select Block boot.
Enter the PIN. If the PIN is correct, separate boot locking will be switched off and the PIN deleted.

Resetting the PIN

If you have forgotten the PIN, you can switch off separate boot locking with the emergency key.

Select Block boot.

Confirm Forgotten PIN?

Unlock the boot within three minutes with the emergency key.

Separate boot locking will be switched off and the PIN deleted.

Unlocking the boot lid with the emergency key

Take the emergency key element out of the key ( page 87).

Insert the emergency key into the boot lock as far as it will go.

Line drawing of a car front view with a magnified inset showing a circular dial (no text or symbols)

Turn the emergency key anti-clockwise from position 1 to position 2.
Turn the emergency key back to position 1 and remove it.
If you use the emergency key to unlock and open the boot lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered.

Activating/deactivating the boot lid opening limiter

Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle

▶ Other functions

▶ Activate or deactivate Opening height limiter.

This function prevents the boot lid from hitting a low garage ceiling, for example.

Side windows

Opening and closing the side windows

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when opening a side window

When you open a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame.

When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window.

If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window

When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process.

When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows

Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly when unattended.

Activate the child safety lock for the rear side windows.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Requirements

- The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on.

Diagram showing car interior with a car seat, directional arrows indicating movement, and a close-up of the seat.

① Closing
2 Opening

The buttons on the driver's door take precedence.

To start automatic operation: press the button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.
To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the ☐ button again.

When the vehicle is switched off, you can continue to operate the side windows.

The function is also available until the doors are closed again.

① Vehicles with electric sunblinds on the left and right rear doors: the buttons for the rear side windows also open and close the roller sunblinds ( page 111).

Automatic reversing function of the side windows If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window

The reversing function does not react:

• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.

• during resetting.

The reversing function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

If someone becomes trapped, press the button to open the side window again.

Automatic function of the side windows

In the following cases, the side windows will be closed automatically when the vehicle is switched off:

- if it starts to rain

Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the wind-screen.

• in extreme temperatures

• after a certain time (depending on the onboard electrical system voltage)

• if there is a malfunction in the power supply

The side windows will be closed as far as the ventilation position.

Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: the side windows will be closed completely if the sliding sunroof is open.

If the side windows are obstructed during automatic closing, the side window concerned will open again slightly. After another automatic closing process, the automatic function may be deactivated. The automatic function will be active again the next time the vehicle is started.

Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey)

WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window

When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame.

When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window.
Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

Requirements

• The key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.
  Press and hold the 📊 button on the key. The following functions are performed:

• The vehicle is unlocked.
• The side windows are opened.
• The panoramic sliding roof is opened.
- The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on.

If the roller sunblinds of the panoramic sliding sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first.
If the roller sunblinds of the rear doors are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first.

To interrupt convenience opening: release the button.
To continue convenience opening: press and hold the 🔒 button again.

Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside)

WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing

When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof.

When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

Requirements

- The key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.

Press and hold the 📁 button on the key. The following functions are performed:

• The vehicle is locked.
• The side windows are closed.
• The panoramic sliding roof is closed.

To interrupt convenience closing: release the button.
To continue convenience closing: press and hold the ⏻ button again.

i Convenience closing also functions with KEY-LESS-GO ( page 91).

Resolving problems with the side windows

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated

If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped.

Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side window.

A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide.
Adjust the side windows.

Adjusting the side windows

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately:

Immediately after this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment).
The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately:

Immediately after this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening feature.

Possible causes:

• The key battery is weak or discharged.
▶ Check the battery using the indicator lamp ( page 85).
Replace the key battery, if necessary ( page 87).

Sliding sunroof

Opening and closing the sliding sunroof

The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama sliding sunroof.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed

Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement.

During the opening and closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the sliding sunroof.
If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately.

or

▶ Touch the control panel during automatic operation. The opening/closing process will be stopped.

WARNING Risk of entrapment if the sliding sunroof is operated by children

Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

A WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being opened and closed

Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof.

During the opening or closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the roller sunblind's range of movement.
If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately.

or

▶ Touch the control panel during automatic operation. The opening/closing process will be stopped.

NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice
Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction.
Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free of snow and ice.

NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects

Objects that protrude from the sliding sunroof may damage the seals.

Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof.

NOTE Damage to panorama sliding sun-roof caused by roof luggage rack

If the panorama sliding sunroof is opened when a roof luggage rack is fitted, the panorama sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof luggage rack.

Do not open the panorama sliding sun-roof if a roof luggage rack is fitted.

Diagram showing a device with a labeled component and a close-up of its internal structure (no text or symbols present)

The sliding sunroof and the front roller sunblind are operated using control panel ①.

The panorama sliding sunroof can be operated only when the roller sunblind is open.

To open: swipe backwards across control panel ① and hold.
To close: swipe forwards across control panel ① and hold.

To raise or lower: press control panel briefly.
To start automatic operation: swipe forwards or backwards across control panel ①.
To cancel automatic operation: press control panel ① again. The opening/closing process will be stopped.

Operating the rear roller sunblind from the front

Diagram showing car interior with labeled control panel and location pin icon

To open or close: press button 1.

To stop: press button ① again.

If you stop the opening or closing process, the roller sunblind will first be closed again when the process is resumed.

Operating the rear roller sunblind from the rear

Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt and door panel, with an inset close-up of a device labeled 'E' (no text or symbols on main components)

To open/close manually: push or pull button ① to the point of resistance and hold it until the roller sunblind has reached the desired position.
To open/close fully: push or pull button ① beyond the point of resistance and release it.

Automatic reversing function of the sliding sun-roof

If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function

The reversing function will not react:

• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.
• towards the end of the closing procedure.
- during resetting.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately.

or

▶ Touch the control panel during automatic closing.

The closing process will be stopped.

Automatic reversing function of the roller sun-blinds

If an obstacle obstructs a roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

When closing the roller sunblinds, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function

In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.

When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.
If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately.
or ▶ Touch the control panel during automatic closing. The closing process will be stopped.

Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof

① The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama sliding sunroof.

The sliding sunroof will be closed automatically when the vehicle has been switched off in the following situations:

- if it starts to rain

Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the windscreen.

• in extreme temperatures
• after a certain time (depending on the onboard electrical system voltage)
• if there is a malfunction in the power supply

The sliding sunroof will rise at the rear in order to continue ventilating the vehicle interior.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during an automatic closing procedure, the roof will be opened again slightly. The automatic function for the sliding sunroof and the side windows will then be deactivated.

Rain closing function when driving

Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion.

Automatic lowering function

Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will automatically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it will be raised again automatically.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof

At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered slightly at the rear.

Make sure that nobody reaches into the sliding sunroof's range of movement while the vehicle is in motion.
If someone becomes trapped, touch the control panel.

Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed again

If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof will close with increased or maximum force.

There is a risk of becoming trapped or even of fatal injuries!

Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately.
or
▶ Touch the control panel during automatic closing. The closing process will be stopped.

The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

① The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama sliding sunroof.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:

Immediately after automatic reversing, swipe forwards across the control panel (→ page 106) and hold until the sliding sun-roof is closed. The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly:

Repeat the previous step.
The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force.
The sliding sunroof or the front roller sunblind is not operating smoothly.
Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sun-blind.
Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sun-blind
Swipe forwards across the control panel ( page 106) and hold repeatedly until the sliding sunroof is completely closed.
Press and hold the control panel for another second.
Press and hold the control panel until the front roller sunblind is completely closed.
Press and hold the control panel for another second.
Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.

The rear roller sunblind is not operating smoothly.

Reset the rear roller sunblind.

Resetting the rear roller sunblind

Diagram showing car interior with a blue lock and a labeled door panel with number 1 and symbol 3

Pull and hold button ① repeatedly until the rear roller sunblind is fully closed.

▶ Pull button ① for another second.

Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the rear roller sunblind.

Roller sunblinds

Extending or retracting the roller sunblinds on the rear side windows

The roller sunblinds for the rear side windows can be operated with the buttons for the side windows.

Diagram showing car interior with labeled buttons and a highlighted connector, alongside an inset of a device with two buttons labeled 1 and 2.

① Rear left side window/roller sunblind
② Rear right side window/roller sunblind
To close fully: pull the corresponding button when the side window is closed or is in the process of closing.
To open fully: press the corresponding button.

Extending or retracting the rear-window roller sun-blind

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when extending or retracting the roller sunblind

Body parts may become trapped in the roller sunblind's range of movement.

▶ Ensure there are no body parts in the range of movement.
If someone becomes trapped, briefly press the button again.
The opening or closing process will briefly be stopped. The roller sunblind will then return to its starting position.

Extending or retracting from the driver's seat

NOTE Damage caused by objects

Objects can cause the roller sunblind to malfunction.

Do not place any objects on the rear shelf.

▶ Ensure that the roller sunblind can move freely.

Diagram showing car interior with labeled buttons and a highlighted section containing icons

Press button ①.

Extending or retracting from the rear compartment

NOTE Damage caused by objects

Objects can cause the roller sunblind to malfunction.

Do not place any objects on the rear shelf.
▶ Ensure that the roller sunblind can move freely.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and seat area with a highlighted device (no text or symbols visible)

To extend: pull switch ①.
To retract: press switch ①.

When the child safety lock for the rear side windows is activated, switch ① cannot be operated.

Anti-theft protection

Function of the immobiliser

The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key.

The immobiliser is automatically activated when the vehicle is switched off, and deactivated when the vehicle is switched on.

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Function of the ATA system

If the ATA system is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations:

• when a door is opened
• when the boot lid is opened
• when the bonnet is opened
• when interior protection is triggered (→ page 114)
• when tow-away protection is triggered (→ page 114)

The ATA system is primed automatically after approximately ten seconds in the following situations:

• after locking the vehicle with the key
• after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Diagram showing a car interior with a highlighted control panel labeled '1' and directional arrows, likely indicating navigation or movement.

Indicator lamp ① flashes when the ATA system is primed.

The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations:

• after unlocking the vehicle with the key
• after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
- after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (→ page 209)

Deactivating the ATA

Press the ☑, 🔒 or 📄 button on the key.

or

Press the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment ( page 209)

Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO

With the key outside the vehicle, touch the inner surface of the door handle.

Function of tow-away protection

An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while tow-away protection is primed.

Tow-away protection is automatically primed after approximately 60 seconds:

• after locking the vehicle with the key
• after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Tow-away protection is only primed when the following components are closed:

• Doors
• Boot lid

Tow-away protection is automatically deactivated:

• after pressing the ☑ or ⚪ button on the key
• after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment ( page 209)
  • after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
• when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle ( page 259).

Priming/deactivating tow-away protection

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ ▷ Settings ▷ Vehicle ▶ Opening/closing ▷ Vehicle protection

▶ Prime or deactivate Tow-away protection.

Tow-away protection is primed again in the following cases:

• The vehicle is unlocked again.
- A door is opened.
• The vehicle is locked again.

Function of interior protection

When interior protection is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior.

Interior protection is primed automatically after approximately ten seconds:

• after locking the vehicle with the key
• after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Interior protection is only primed when the following components are closed:

• Doors
• Boot lid

Interior protection is automatically deactivated:

• after pressing the ☑ or ☑ button on the key
• after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment ( page 209)
  • after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
• when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

The following situations can lead to a false alarm:

• when there are moving objects such as mascots in the vehicle interior
  • if a side window is open
  • if the panoramic sunroof is open

Priming/deactivating interior protection

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Vehicle
▶ Opening/closing ▶ Vehicle protection

▶ Prime or deactivate Interior motion sensor.

Interior protection is primed again in the following cases:

• The vehicle is unlocked again.
- A door is opened.
• The vehicle is locked again.

Notes on the correct driver's seat position

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
• if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion

Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

Diagram of a car interior with numbered labels pointing to the driver's seat and dashboard area

Ensure the following when adjusting steering wheel ①, seat belt ② and driver's seat ③:

• You are sitting as far away from the driver's airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration:
  • You are sitting in an upright position
• Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion
• Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly

• The back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint

• You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent
  • You can move your legs freely

• You can see all the displays on the driver's display clearly
• You have a good overview of the traffic conditions
• Observe the notes on correctly fastening the seat belt.

Notes on grab handles

WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive load on the grab handles

If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage. This may result in injuries.

Use the grab handles only to stabilise the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat.

Seats

Adjusting the front seat electrically

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children

Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

You can adjust the seats when the vehicle is switched off.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during seat adjustment

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail.

Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Children in the vehicle".

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
• if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
  Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured.

Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped.

While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.

WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrectly adjusted head restraints

If head restraints have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position

The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position.

In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder.

WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive load on the grab handles

If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage. This may result in injuries.

▶ Use the grab handles only to stabilise the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat.

WARNING Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the front passenger seat

Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the system.

Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat.
When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger seat.

NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back

The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back.

When moving the seats back, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats.

The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no direct feedback on the switch while pressing the switch. Feedback is provided only by the movement of the seat.

Diagram showing car interior with numbered directional arrows and a location pin icon, likely illustrating vehicle movement or traffic flow.

① Head restraint fore-and-aft position (vehicles with an EASY ADJUST luxury head restraint)
2 Head restraint height
3 Seat height
④ Seat cushion inclination
5 Seat cushion length
6 Seat fore-and-aft position
⑦ Seat backrest inclination

Save the settings with the memory function ( page 143).

The head restraint height will be adjusted automatically when you adjust the seat height or the seat fore-and-aft position.
① Vehicles with EASY ADJUST luxury head restraints: the fore-and-aft position of the head restraint will be adjusted automatically when you adjust the backrest angle.

Adjusting the front passenger seat electrically from the driver's seat

Diagram showing car interior and dashboard layout with a highlighted seat component (no text or symbols)

You can call up the following functions for the front passenger seat:

• Seat adjustment
• Seat heating
• Seat ventilation
• Memory function

To select the front passenger seat: press button ①.
When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.
Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the driver's side door operating unit.

Adjusting the front passenger seat electrically from the rear

Diagram showing car interior with labeled directional arrows and a highlighted vehicle section

Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats
① Selects the front passenger seat
2 Head restraint height
3 Seat backrest inclination
④ Seat height
5 Seat fore-and-aft position

Diagram showing a vehicle interior with numbered directional arrows and a control panel, likely illustrating flight or navigation system.

Vehicles with an EASY ADJUST luxury head restraint
1 Selects the front passenger seat
2 Head restraint fore-and-aft position
Head restraint height
4 Seat backrest inclination
5 Seat height
6 Seat fore-and-aft position

Diagram showing car interior with numbered directional arrows and a vehicle icon, likely illustrating flight or movement directions.

Vehicles with seat for chauffeur mode and long wheelbase

① Selects the front passenger seat
② Head restraint fore-and-aft position
3 Head restraint height
④ Seat backrest inclination
5 Seat height
6 Front passenger seat footrest
⑦ Seat fore-and-aft position

The footrest can be adjusted only when one of the following conditions has been fulfilled:

• Depending on the equipment, the front passenger seat will be in one of the following positions:
• Vehicles without leg rest: the front passenger seat has moved into a random position.
• Vehicles with leg rest: the front passenger seat has been moved fully forward.
• The front passenger seat is in the position for chauffeur mode.

Adjust the rear seat ( page 122).
Adjust the reclining rear seat ( page 123).
To select the front passenger seat: press button ①.

When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.

Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the door operating unit in the rear passenger compartment.

① You can use the rear-compartment child safety lock to disable this function ( page 84).

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

Diagram showing a car interior with labeled parts and an inset highlighting a central circular component with numbered pins 1, 2, 3, and 4.

① Higher
② Softer

Use buttons ① to ④ to adjust the contour of the backrest.

Adjusting the rear seats electrically

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position

The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position.

In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder.

The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no direct feedback on the switch while pressing the switch. Feedback is provided only by the movement of the seat.

You can electrically adjust only the outer seats in the rear compartment.

Diagram showing vehicle airflow direction with numbered arrows and directional indicators in a car interior

① Fore-and-aft position of the head restraint (vehicles with active multicontour seat)
② Head restraint height
3 Seat backrest inclination
4 Combined seat cushion inclination and length
Save the settings with the memory function ( page 144).

Adjusting reclining rear seats electrically

The reclining rear seat is available in long-wheel-base vehicles equipped with "Executive seats". In vehicles without a reclining rear seat, the button for setting the angle and fore-and-aft position of the leg rest is inoperative.

The reclining rear seat is on the front passenger side.

Diagram showing a vehicle interior with numbered directional arrows and a highlighted path, likely illustrating vehicle movement or navigation.

① Fore-and-aft position of the head restraint (vehicles with active multicontour seat)
2 Head restraint height
③ Seat backrest inclination
4 Combined seat cushion inclination and length
5 Fore-and-aft position of the leg rest
6 Angle of the leg rest

Save the settings with the memory function ( page 144).
The leg rest will fold down if overloaded. If this is the case, fold up the leg rest and engage it.
① Vehicles with a long wheelbase and the Chauffeur/Rear Seat Memory Package also have a footrest. This is located on the lower part of the front passenger seat backrest ( page 127).

Setting the fully reclined position

Interior view of a car with a highlighted flight suit and passenger seat (no text or symbols)

To set the fully reclined position: press button ①.

• The rear seat will move into the fully reclined position.

• The front passenger seat will move into the position for chauffeur mode.

• The footrest will move out from under the front passenger seat.
  • If available, the leg rest will rise.

Interior view of a car with a monitor, keyboard, and a small electronic device (no visible text or symbols)

To restore the standard seat settings: press button ①.
① You can use the rear-compartment child safety lock to disable this function ( page 84).

① The leg rest will fold down if overloaded. If this is the case, fold up the leg rest and engage it.

Chauffeur mode

Information on chauffeur mode

WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrectly adjusted head restraints

If head restraints have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

A WARNING Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the front passenger seat

Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the system.

Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat.
When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger seat.

NOTE Damage to objects in the luggage net of the front passenger footwell when adjusting the front passenger seat to the chauffeur position

Objects in the luggage net in the front passenger footwell can become damaged when the front passenger seat is adjusted to the chauffeur position.

Remove the objects from the luggage net.
! NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back

The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back.

When moving the seats back, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats.

The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no direct feedback on the switch while pressing the switch. Feedback is provided only by the movement of the seat.

Observe the following:

- Adjust the front passenger seat for chauffeur mode before the journey

For chauffeur mode, the following settings are made for the front passenger seat:

• The seat is moved forwards
• The backrest is tilted forwards

• The head restraint is folded forwards

The front passenger seat will automatically move from the chauffeur position back into the normal position in the following situations:

• The front passenger seat is adjusted using the buttons in the door operating unit on the front passenger side
  • The front passenger seat belt is fastened
• An occupant is detected on the front passenger seat
• The front passenger head restraint is folded back from the rear seat or driver's seat.

Positioning the front passenger seat for chauffeur mode

Requirements

• The front passenger seat is not occupied.
• The front passenger seat belt is not inserted in the buckle.

Diagram showing car seatbelt components with numbered labels and directional arrows, including a zoomed-in inset view.

Diagram showing car seatbelt insertion steps with numbered labels and directional arrows

1 Selects the front passenger seat
② Adjusts the seat fore-and-aft position
To select the front passenger seat: press button 1.
When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.

Setting the chauffeur position

Push button ② forwards and hold it in this position.
The front passenger seat will move forward and stop at the threshold of the area for chauffeur mode.
Release button 2.
Push button ② forward and hold it again until the front passenger seat is in the position for chauffeur mode.
The front passenger seat head restraint will fold forwards. The front passenger seat will move forward.
If the front passenger seat is already at the threshold to the area for chauffeur mode, the position for chauffeur mode will be set immediately.
Save the settings with the memory function ( page 144).
You can use the rear-compartment child safety lock to disable this function ( page 84).

Using the footrest on the front passenger seat

Requirements

• Depending on the equipment, the front passenger seat will be in one of the following positions:
• Vehicles without leg rest: the front passenger seat has moved into a random position.
• Vehicles with leg rest: the front passenger seat has been moved fully forward.
• The front passenger seat is in the position for chauffeur mode.

Using the footrest

The footrest is located on the lower part of the front passenger seat backrest.

Interior view of a car with a highlighted seatbelt and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Push button ① towards the rear. The footrest will move out from under the front passenger seat.
Push the extended footrest upwards with your foot until it releases.
Allow the footrest to lower. The footrest will position itself on the floor.

Storing the footrest

Diagram of a car interior showing a black rectangular seatbelt with a blue arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols)

Push the footrest upwards with your foot until it engages.
Push button ① forwards. The footrest will retract underneath the front passenger seat.

Folding the head restraint on the front passenger side down or folding it into position (chauffeur mode)

Requirements

• The front passenger seat is not occupied.
- The front passenger seat belt is not inserted in the buckle.

Diagram showing car door and steering wheel components with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating movement or positioning.

Diagram showing car interior with labeled parts and a highlighted connector, likely for vehicle safety or safety instructions.

To select the front passenger seat: press button ①. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.

Folding the head restraint down

Push button ② forwards and hold it in this position. The head restraint will move forwards slightly and stop.
Release button 2.
Push button ② forwards again. The head restraint will fold forwards.
To fold the head restraint into position: push button ② back. The head restraint will fold into position.
(i) You can also fold the front passenger head restraint into position from the front passenger seat. To do so, press any button on the door operating unit on the front passenger side.
If the head restraint is already in the foremost position, it will fold forward immediately.
You can use the rear-compartment child safety lock to disable this function ( page 84).

■ Moving the front passenger seat into the normal position (chauffeur mode)

Diagram showing car interior components with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating movement or flow

Diagram showing car seatbelt insertion steps with numbered instructions and directional arrows

To select the front passenger seat: press button ①. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.

Setting the normal position

Push button ③ towards the rear and hold it in this position. The front passenger seat will move to the threshold of the area for chauffeur mode. The

head restraint on the front passenger side will be moved into the upright position. The front passenger seat will then move further towards the rear.

or

Briefly push button ② towards the rear. The front passenger seat will move automatically to the threshold of the area for chauffeur mode. The head restraint on the front passenger side will be moved into the upright position.
(i) You can also set the normal position from the front passenger seat. To do so, press any button on the door operating unit on the front passenger side.
Call up the settings with the memory function ( page 144).
① You can use the rear-compartment child safety lock to disable this function ( page 84).

Head restraints

Adjusting the front seat luxury head restraints manually

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
• if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
  Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrectly adjusted head restraints

If head restraints have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

Diagram of a car interior showing a black door and directional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols)

To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards.
To move backwards: press release knob and push the head restraint backwards.

■ Attaching and removing the additional cushion of the front-seat luxury head restraint

Diagram illustrating car seatbelting process with numbered steps and directional arrows

Position head restraint ② as far forwards as possible.

To attach the additional cushion: open Velcro strip ④ on the rear of additional cushion ①.
Guide Velcro strip ④ between head restraint ② and strip ③.
Close Velcro strip 4.
To change the position of the additional cushion: move additional cushion ① up or down.
To remove the additional cushion: open Velcro strip ④ of additional cushion ①.
Remove additional cushion ①.

Lowering and positioning the rear seat head restraints electrically from the front compartment Multimedia system:

Tap on 📊. The outer head restraints will lower.
Tap on 📂 again. The outer head restraints will move into the last stored position.

Adjusting the rear seat outer head restraints manually

Diagram showing car door seat adjustment with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement

To raise: pull the head restraint upwards and let it engage.
Lowering
Push release button ⓘ in the direction of the arrow.

Push the head restraint down and let it engage.
To adjust the angle of the head restraint: pull or push the head restraint in the direction of arrow ②.
Adjusting the outer luxury head restraints of the rear seats manually

Diagram of a car interior showing a black seatbelt with a blue circular icon and arrow, no text or symbols present.

To adjust the head restraint angle: pull or push the head restraint in the direction of arrow ①.

■ Attaching and removing the additional cushion of the head restraint in the rear compartment (individual seats)

Diagram showing car interior and seatbelt mechanism with numbered labels pointing to key components

Position head restraint ② as far forwards as possible.
To attach the additional cushion: open Velcro strip ④ on the rear of additional cushion ①.

Guide Velcro strip ④ between head restraint ② and strip ③.
Close Velcro strip 4.
To change the position of the additional cushion: move additional cushion ① up or down.
To remove additional cushion: open Velcro strip ④ of additional cushion ①.
Remove additional cushion ①.

Attaching a heated additional cushion In vehicles with electrically adjustable head restraints, you can heat the additional cushion.

Attach the additional cushion to the head restraint as described.
Move the head restraint to the very top.

Diagram showing two blue circular components labeled 1 and 2 connected by lines, with no visible text or symbols.

Push press-studs ② on the additional strap into counterpieces ① on the head restraint.
Move the head restraint to the desired height.
To switch neck heating from the additional cushion on/off: make sure that press-studs ② on the additional strip are correctly pushed into counterpieces ① on the head restraint.
Ensure that the "Couple neck heating to seat heating" function is active in the multimedia system ( page 134).
Activate or deactivate the seat heating ( page 136).

Folding the centre head restraint into position and folding it down manually (premium seats) The centre head restraint has a usage position and a non-usage position. The usage position is the upright position in which the head restraint is locked; the non-usage position is the position in which the head restraint is folded downwards. When the centre seat is used, the head restraint must be in the upright, locked usage position.

Line drawing of a car interior showing the seat and dashboard (no text or symbols)

To fold into position: pull the head restraint upwards until it engages.

Folding down

Diagram showing car seatbelt adjustment with blue arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Press button 1.
▶ Fold down the head restraint completely.

Folding the centre head restraint into position and folding it back manually

Diagram of a car interior showing seatbelt and dashboard with blue directional arrow (no text or symbols)

To fold into position: pull the head restraint upwards until it engages.

Folding down

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and key inserted into the seat (no text or symbols)

Press button 1.

Fold down the head restraint completely.

The centre head restraint has a usage position and a non-usage position. The usage position is the upright position in which the head restraint is locked; the non-usage position is the position in which the head restraint is folded downwards.

When the centre seat is used, the head restraint must be in the upright, locked usage position.

Configuring the seat settings

Multimedia system:

Comfort

Seat

Adjusting the air cushions

On the corresponding menu, adjust the air cushions for Lumbar, Shoulders or Side bolsters.

Setting the seat heating balance

Select Heating settings.
▶ Select Seat heating balance.
Adjust the heat distribution for the desired seat.
The seat heating balance can be set in the Seat climate control menu in the rear.

Coupling neck heat to seat heating

▶ Select Additional neck warmer.

Switch the function for the desired seat on or off. If the function is active, the neck heat of the additional cushion has been coupled to the seat heating.

Setting automatic seat adjustment

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile

Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process.

Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement.

If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, immediately stop the adjustment process by:

a) Pressing the warning message on the central display.
or
b) Pressing a position button of the memory function or a seat adjustment switch in the driver's door. The adjustment process is stopped.

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Comfort ▶ Seat

▶ Position seat automatically

Manually adjusting driver's seat and steering wheel position to body size

The vehicle calculates a suitable driver's seat and steering wheel position on the basis of the driver's body size and sets this directly.

To set the unit of measurement: select cm or ft/in.
▶ Set the size using the scale.
Select Start positioning.
The driver's seat and steering wheel position is adjusted to the body size that has been set.

You can also configure these settings via the Mercedes me user account for your user profile. By synchronising the profiles in the vehicle and the Mercedes me connect profiles, you can carry over these settings for your vehicle. Further information about synchronising user profiles.
If the driver's seat and steering wheel position calculated by the vehicle is not practical or comfortable, it can be manually adapted at any time via the control buttons.
The outside mirrors are not set via this function. Instead, they have to be set manually via the operating switches.

Setting automatic adjustment of the lateral support (active multicontour seat)

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Comfort ▶ Seat

▶ Select Dynamic multicontour seat.

With this function, the lateral support of the active multicontour seat is automatically adjusted to the driving and cornering dynamics of the vehicle.

Select the desired setting.

Overview of massage programmes

• Classic Massage Calming back massage programme.
• Mobilizing Massage Mobilising massage programme with upward-moving massaging waves. Can promote slower, deeper respiration. This can improve the supply of oxygen to cells and the brain.
• Activating Massage Activating massage programme with upward-moving massaging waves.
• Hot Relaxing back: Based on hot stone massage, the programme combines heat and massage. It starts by massaging the back. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area.

• Hot Relaxing shoulders Combination of heat and massage. It starts by massaging the shoulders. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area.

• Wave Massage Regenerating massage programme via soothing waves across the back and in the seat cushion.

• Depth waves: Wave-like movements in the cushion can promote blood flow and metabolic processes in the lower back and legs.
• Deep workout: Connect the Workout, backrest to the Workout, cushion. The vibrations in the cushion intensify the effectiveness of tensing and releasing muscles when you tense against the pressure point. This supports metabolic processes and blood flow in the buttocks and legs.
• Workout, backrest and Workout, cushion These programmes require your cooperation. Alternating between tensing and releasing helps to improve blood flow to your muscles. Press against a pressure point as soon as you feel it to activate back, abdominal and leg muscles.

Selecting a massage programme for the front seats

Multimedia system:

→ Comfort >> Massage

Select a massage programme ( page 135).
Start the programme for the desired seat ▶.
To set the massage intensity: switch High intensity on or off.
The availability of this function is dependent on the vehicle's equipment.
For the rear seats, the massage programmes can be selected on the following devices (if available):

- On the rear displays

• On the MBUX rear tablet

Resetting seat settings

Multimedia system:

Comfort Seat

Select Reset.

Select 📊 for the desired seat.

Switching the seat heating on/off

⚠ WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot.

In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries.

Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating.

To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it has been switched on repeatedly.

NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heater is switched on

When the seat heater is switched on, overheating may occur due to objects or documents placed on the seats e.g. seat cushions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface.

Make sure that no objects or documents are on the seats when the seat heater is switched on.

Requirements

• The power supply is switched on.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a control panel and a digital display showing a hand cursor (no text or symbols visible)

Interior view of a car with a digital display showing a numbered icon (no text or symbols present)

Press button ① repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off.

The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating switches off.

If you switch the power supply off and on again within 20 minutes, the previous setting of the seat heating for the driver's seat will remain active.
You can set the heat distribution of the heated sections among the seat cushions and seat backrests on the front and rear seats using the multimedia system ( page 134).
① Vehicles with the Warmth Comfort Package: you can adjust the heating of the centre console and door armrests using the multimedia system ( page 138).

Setting the panel heating

Multimedia system:

When the seat heating is switched on, the armrests, the centre panels of the doors and the centre console can be heated.

Switch the function for the desired seats on or off.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Requirements:

• The power supply is switched on.

Diagram showing car interior with a control panel and directional arrow icon, likely indicating navigation or system control.

Interior view of a car with dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Press button ① repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off.

If you switch the power supply off and on again within 20 minutes, the previous seat ventilation setting for the driver's seat will remain active.

Steering wheel

Adjusting the steering wheel electrically

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
• if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
  Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

WARNING Risk of entrapment for children when adjusting the steering wheel

Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

The steering wheel can be adjusted when the power supply is disconnected.

Diagram showing car steering wheel and directional control panel with numbered arrows and a central diagram of bidirectional arrows.

To move up
② To move back
3 To move down
4 To move forward

Save the settings with the memory function ( page 143).

Switching the steering wheel heater on/off

Requirements

• The vehicle is switched on.

Diagram showing car interior with lock and directional arrows, highlighting key points 1, 2, and 3.

Push the switch into position ① or ②. If indicator lamp ③ lights up, the steering wheel heater is switched on.

When you switch the vehicle off, the steering wheel heater will switch off.

Linking the steering wheel heater to the seat heating

Requirements

- The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on.

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Comfort ▶ Seat ▶ Heating settings

Tap on Additional steering wheel heater. The steering wheel heater will be linked to the seat heating.

When the function has been activated, the steering wheel heater will automatically be activated and deactivated when you switch the seat heating on and off.

Easy entry and exit feature

Using the easy entry and exit feature

WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process of the easy entry and exit feature

You could lose control of the vehicle.

Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the easy entry and exit feature

You and other vehicle occupants, particularly children, may become trapped.

Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the range of movement of the steering wheel and driver's seat.

If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel:

Move the steering wheel adjustment lever.
The adjustment process is stopped.

If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat:

Press the switch for seat adjustment. The adjustment process is stopped.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

Vehicles with memory function: you can stop the adjustment process by pressing one of the memory function position switches.

A WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and exit feature

Children could become trapped if they activate the easy entry and exit feature, particularly when unattended.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

In order to use the easy entry and exit feature, the automatic seat adjustment function must have been switched on ( page 134).

When the easy entry and exit feature is active, the steering wheel and driver's seat will move as follows:

• The steering wheel will move upwards.
- The driver's seat will move forward or backward to a seat position suitable for getting out of the vehicle.

This will occur in the following situations:

• You switch off the vehicle when the driver's door is open.
• You open the driver's door when the vehicle is switched off.

The steering wheel will then move upwards only if it is not already as high as it will go.

The driver's seat will then move backwards only if it is not already at the rear of the seat adjustment range.

The steering wheel and the driver's seat will move back to the last driving position in the following cases:

• You switch the power supply or the vehicle on when the driver's door is closed.
• You close the driver's door when the vehicle is switched on.

The last drive position will be saved when:

• You switch off the vehicle.
• Vehicles with memory function: you call up the seat settings via the memory function.
• Vehicles with memory function: you save the seat settings via the memory function.

Vehicles with memory function: press one of the memory function position switches to stop the adjustment process.

Setting the easy entry and exit feature

Requirements

- The automatic seat adjustment has been activated ( page 134).

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Vehicle Easy entry and exit feature

Select Steering wheel and seat, Steering wheel only or Off.
If you are using an individual user profile, this information is used for the easy entry and exit feature. This will cause the driver's seat and steering wheel to move into the correct position automatically.

Memory function

Function of the memory function

WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving

If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made.

Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.
A WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory function

When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped.

During the adjusting process of the memory function, ensure that no body

parts are in the area of movement of the seat or the steering wheel.

If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button or seat adjustment switch immediately. The adjustment process is stopped.

WARNING Danger of entrapment when memory function is activated by children

When children activate the memory function, they can get trapped, especially if they are unsupervised.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

You can use the memory function when the vehicle is switched off.

Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function.

You can save the following settings for the front seat:

• Seat, backrest, head restraint position and contour of the seat backrest in the lumbar region
  • Vehicles with an active multicontour seat:

• Side bolsters of the seat backrest

• Shoulder of the seat backrest

• Contour of the seat backrest
  Dynamic function level

• Seat heating: distribution of the heated sections of the seat cushion and seat backrest

• Driver's side: steering wheel position and position of the outside mirrors on the driver's and front passenger sides
• Head-up display (depending on vehicle equipment)

Operating the memory function

Storing

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted control panel (no text or symbols visible)

Set the seat, the steering wheel, the head-up display and the outside mirror to the desired position.
Press the M button and then release it.

Press one of the preset position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored.
To call up: press the preset position button 1, 2 or 3. The seat is moved to the stored position. After releasing the button, the front seat, outside mirror, head-up display and steering column continue to move into the stored position automatically.

Memory function in the rear compartment

Function of the memory function in the rear passenger compartment

Operating the rear seat

Rear seat settings for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function in the rear compartment.

You can save the following settings for the rear seat:

- Position of the seat, backrest and head restraint

• Vehicles with active multicontour seats: the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest as well as the contour of the seat backrest in the lumbar region
• Seat heating: distribution of the heated sections of the seat cushion and seat backrest

Operating the front passenger seat and rear seat Front passenger seat adjustments and rear seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function in the rear compartment.

You can save the following settings for the front passenger seat:

- Position of the seat, backrest and head restraint

You can save the following settings for the rear seat:

• Position of the seat, backrest and head restraint
• Vehicles with active multicontour seats: the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest as well as the contour of the seat backrest in the lumbar region

- Seat heating: distribution of the heated sections of the seat cushion and seat backrest

The following settings are also stored to a memory position, if the indicator lamp in the 📄 button lights up:

• Position of the footrest of the front passenger seat, if available
  • Position of the screen, if available

Using the preset position buttons, you always store the current setting of each seat.

Operating the rear seat via the memory function in the rear passenger compartment

Storing

Interior view of a car with a highlighted navigation panel and a small device on the side (no text or symbols)

Press the ① button. The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button does not light up.
Adjust the rear seat using the buttons in the door control panel ( page 122).

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and rear panel with a close-up of the front panel (no text or symbols visible)

Example: vehicles without a reclining rear seat

Press the M button and then release it.
Vehicles without reclining rear seat: press one of the preset position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored.

▶ Vehicles with reclining rear seat: press one of the preset position buttons 1 or 2 within three seconds. The settings are stored.

① Vehicles with reclining rear seat: you cannot store any settings on the 📋 and 🏻 buttons for adjusting the reclined and standard positions.

Calling up

Press the ① button. The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button does not light up.
Vehicles without reclining rear seat: press preset position button 1, 2 or 3. The seat is moved to the stored position. After releasing the button, the rear seat is automatically moved into the stored position.
Vehicles with reclining rear seat: press one of preset position buttons 1 or 2. The seat is moved to the stored position. After releasing the button, the rear seat is automatically moved into the stored position.

Operating the front passenger seat and rear seats via the memory function in the rear compartment

Storing

Diagram showing a car interior with a highlighted location pin labeled '1' and a vehicle icon, likely indicating navigation or status.

Press the ① button. The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button does not light up.
Adjust the rear seat using the buttons in the door control panel ( page 122).

Press the ① button. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.
Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the door control panel in the rear passenger compartment ( page 117).
Ensure that the indicator lamp in button lights up.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and rear vent (no text or symbols visible)

Example: vehicles without a reclining rear seat

Press the M button and then release it.
▶ Vehicles without reclining rear seat: press one of the preset position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds.
The settings for the front passenger seat and the rear seat are stored in the selected preset position.

▶ Vehicles with reclining rear seat: press one of the preset position buttons 1 or 2 within three seconds.
The settings for the front passenger seat and the rear seat are stored in the selected preset position.
Vehicles with reclining rear seat: you cannot store any settings on the 📋 and 🏠 buttons for adjusting the reclined and standard positions.

Calling up

Press the ① button.
When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.
▶ Vehicles without reclining rear seat: press one of preset position buttons 1, 2 or 3.
The seat is moved to the stored position. After releasing the button, the front seat and rear seat are moved automatically into the stored position.

▶ Vehicles with reclining rear seat: press one of preset position buttons 1 or 2. The seat is moved to the stored position. After releasing the button, the front seat and rear seat are moved automatically into the stored position.
The preset positions in the area for chauffeur mode can only be set when the conditions for chauffeur mode are fulfilled ( page 124).
You can use the rear-compartment child safety lock to disable this function ( page 84).

Stowage areas

Notes on loading the vehicle

DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.

▶ Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid.
▶ Never drive with the boot lid open.
Objects in the deployment area of an airbag may prevent the airbag from functioning correctly. Observe the notes on the protection provided by the airbag.
Vehicles with rear airbag: Also observe the notes on the rear airbag.

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.

Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
▶ Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
▶ Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

▶ Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot.

Observe the observations on the cup holders. Vehicles with automatic front-passenger airbag shutoff: Objects trapped under the front-passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front-passenger airbag shutoff or damage the system. Please observe the observations on the function of the automatic front-passenger airbag shutoff ( page 47).

NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight

When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight.

Do not sit or support yourself on the rear seat armrest.

WARNING - Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion

The cup holder cannot hold a container secure while the vehicle is in motion.

If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in motion, the container may be flung around and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle.

Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary.
Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size.
Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot.

NOTE Damage to the cup holder

The cup holder can be damaged when folding back the rear seat armrest. When open, the cup holder can be damaged by body weight.

The rear seat armrest can only be folded back when the cup holder is closed.
Do not sit or support yourself on the cup holder when it is open.

! NOTE Damage to the stowage compartment under the ashtray due to intense heat

The stowage compartment under the ashtray is not heat resistant and could be damaged if you rest a lit cigarette on it.

Make sure that the ashtray is fully engaged.

WARNING Risk of fire and injury from hot cigarette lighter

You can suffer burns if you touch the hot heating element or the hot socket of the cigarette lighter.

In addition, flammable materials can catch fire if:

• you drop the hot cigarette lighter.
• children e.g. hold the hot cigarette lighter to objects.
  ▶ Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
  Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of the reach of children.
  ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of bums from the tailpipe and tailpipe trims

The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself.

Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area.

▶ Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.

The handling characteristics of your vehicle depend on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle:

• Do not exceed the permissible total mass or the permissible axle loads of the vehicle (including load and occupants).
  information can be found on the vehicle identification plate ( page 496).
• The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests.
• Always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible.
• Secure the load using the luggage net hooks. Distribute the load on the luggage net hooks evenly.

Notes on driving with a roof load

- Distribute the roof load and the load inside the vehicle evenly, placing heavy objects at the

bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 147).

• Drive attentively, avoiding abrupt starts, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering.
• When transporting roof loads and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied, select drive programs E and C. These are designed to focus on stability ( page 223).

For more information on stowage compartments and stowage areas, please refer to the Digital Operator's Manual.

Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior

Overview of the front stowage compartments

Diagram of car interior with numbered positions indicating vehicle positions or navigation points

Stowage spaces in the doors
2 Stowage and telephone compartment beneath the armrest with charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones, multimedia and USB ports as well as stowage space, e.g. for an MP3 player
3 Stowage compartment in the front centre console with cup holders, USB ports and charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones
4 Stowage compartment in front of the central display of the multimedia system
5 Glove compartment

The rubber mat in the stowage compartment in front centre console can be removed for cleaning with clean, lukewarm water. Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior ( page 443).
Locking/unlocking the glove compartment

Diagram of a car interior with labeled diagnostic zones and a control panel showing two components

Turn the emergency key a quarter turn clockwise 2 (to lock) or anti-clockwise 1 (to unlock).
Folding the folding table out or in

WARNING Risk of injury when the folding table is folded out

Vehicle occupants may bump into the folding table and injure themselves.

Use the folding table only when the vehicle is stationary.
Stow the folding table before each journey.

WARNING Risk of injury from the rear airbag when the folding table is folded out.

When the rear airbag is deployed, objects may slide from the folding table toward the vehicle occupants.

Switch off the rear airbag when using the table.

Stow the folding table before each journey.
! NOTE Damage to the folding tables when moving the seats back

Open folding tables may be damaged when the seats are moved back.

Make sure that the folding tables are folded in when moving the front seats back.
NOTE Damage to objects when the folding tables are folded out or in

Objects such as tablets and displays could be damaged when the folding tables are folded out or in.

Make sure that the folding tables are folded out and in properly.

Folding out

i Observe the notes on the rear airbag.

Diagram of car seatbelt mechanism with numbered components and directional arrow indicating rotation

Open the stowage compartment in centre console ① of the rear compartment.
Pull folding table ② up and forwards by handle recess ③ and swing it outwards.
Fold the table panels apart.
The table panels can be rotated forwards or backwards to bring them into a comfortable position for the vehicle occupants in the rear.
To fold in: fold the table panels together and swing in the folding table.

Removing the handset from the rear stowage compartment

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with a blue circular indicator labeled '1' (no text or symbols beyond the number)

Vehicles with electrically adjustable rear outer seats

▶ Fold down the rear armrest.
Open the stowage compartment in the rear armrest.
Tap handset ①.

Handset ① will rise.

Remove handset ①.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with a highlighted device (no text or symbols)

Vehicles with individual rear seats

Open the stowage box in the rear-compartment backrest.
Press button 1.
Remove the handset.

Overview of the luggage net hooks

Observe the following notes:

• secure the load using the luggage net hooks.
• Do not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load. These are intended only as anti-slip protection for light loads.
• Do not route lashing materials across sharp edges or corners.
• pad sharp edges for protection.

Depending on the equipment installed, the boot contains up to four luggage net hooks.

Diagram of a car trunk with a highlighted gear component and mounting points (no text or symbols)

Luggage net hooks

Opening the through-loading feature in the rear compartment

Requirements:

• The loading flap is unlocked ( page 154).

Diagram showing car seatbelt switch mechanism with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement

Vehicles with individual rear seats Vehicles with electrically adjustable rear outer seats

Diagram showing car seatbelt with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement or force

▶ Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats: fold down the rear armrest.
Pull handle ① and fold down cover ②. The stowage box in the rear-compartment backrest will be opened.

Diagram showing a car interior with two labeled parts (① and ②) pointing to a device, likely illustrating seat or seat positioning.

Vehicles with individual rear seats

Diagram of car seatbelt with numbered labels pointing to a device, showing front and side views.

Vehicles with electrically adjustable rear outer seats

Slide release catch ② in the handle recess of loading flap ① upwards.
Loading flap ① will be unlocked.
Push loading flap ① with release catch ② up as far back as possible until the flap locks in the highest position.
The through-loading feature in the rear compartment will be opened.

If the through-loading feature is to be used as a stowage compartment again:

Fold down loading flap ① and lock it in the boot (→ page 154).

Locking the through-loading feature in the boot

Requirements:

• The refrigerator box is removed.

Line drawing of a car backrest with a blue circular icon labeled '1' pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols beyond the label)

Slide the release catch on loading flap ① in the boot to the right. The loading flap is locked.

Using the bag hooks

WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects

The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage.

Objects or items of luggage may be flung around and hit vehicle occupants.

▶ Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
▶ Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks.

Diagram showing car seatbelt components with numbered labels pointing to specific parts

Pull the bag hook ② down by the tab ①.
① Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 147).

EASY-PACK boot box

Adjusting the height of the EASY-PACK boot box to any position

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped and injured when raising the floor

Your hands may become trapped on the frame of the EASY-PACK boot box and objects may be thrown upwards.

▶ Ensure that your hands are not in the range of movement of the floor.
If someone becomes trapped, carefully push the centre of the floor downward.
Remove all objects from the floor before raising it.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when pressing the EASY-PACK boot box in

Your hands may become trapped when you are pressing the boot box into the retracted position. Children, in particular, may injure themselves when doing so.

▶ Ensure that your hands are not in the range of movement of the EASY-PACK boot box.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

NOTE Damage to the extended EASY-PACK boot box

The EASY-PACK boot box may be damaged when it is extended.

Do not place any objects on or press down on the EASY-PACK boot box frame.
Do not close the boot lid when the EASY-PACK boot box is extended.

NOTE Damage to the EASY-PACK boot box by objects

Objects that are sharp-edged, pointed, fragile, rounded or heavy and objects that roll can

damage the EASY-PACK boot box and be thrown out.

Do not transport objects that are sharp-edged, pointed, rounded or fragile and objects that roll in the EASY-PACK boot box.
Always stow and secure such objects outside of the box in the boot.
Always observe the maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK boot box.
Do not use the EASY-PACK boot box when the rear seats are folded forwards.

The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK boot box is 10 kg. To prevent the box from being overloaded, the box floor will lower onto the boot floor when the load reaches approximately 5 kg.

Diagram showing car interior components with numbered labels and a magnified inset view of the lower portion.

To remove: pull handle ② on the box.
To increase the load capacity: push the centre of floor ① downwards to the desired position and box size.
To reduce the load capacity: press button ③.
To stow: push the box in completely using handle ② until it locks in place.

i Observe the notes on cleaning the EASY-PACK boot box ( page 443).

Installing and removing the EASY-PACK boot box

Installing

Diagram showing car interior components with numbered parts and a close-up of a hand holding a knob, likely illustrating a door or seat.

Diagram showing car interior components with numbered parts and an upward arrow indicating a specific location.

▶ Turn rotating catches ⑥ outward.
Insert retainers ③ of box ① into holes ②.
Raise box ① in the direction of the arrow and press hooks ⑤ into the anchorages of rear shelf ④.
▶ Turn rotating catches ⑥ inward.

Removing

Diagram illustrating airflow or ventilation process with labeled components and directional arrows

▶ Turn rotating catches ⑥ outward.
Lower box ① in the direction of the arrow and pull it out of the anchorages on the rear shelf.
Pull box ① back out of the openings in the direction of the arrow.

Attaching a roof luggage rack

WARNING Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load

The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter.

If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.

▶ Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style.

You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted head-room clearance

If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged.

Observe the signposted headroom clearance.
If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter.
Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.

NOTE Vehicle damage from non-approved roof luggage racks

The vehicle could be damaged by roof luggage racks that have not been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Only use roof luggage racks tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
▶ Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof luggage rack is fitted, the boot lid can be fully opened.
▶ Position the load on the roof luggage rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion.

NOTE Damage to panorama sliding sun-roof caused by roof luggage rack

If the panorama sliding sunroof is opened when a roof luggage rack is fitted, the panorama sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof luggage rack.

Do not open the panorama sliding sun-roof if a roof luggage rack is fitted.

Diagram showing car interior with directional arrows and a warning sign, indicating traffic flow or navigation instructions.

NOTE Damage to the covers

The covers may be damaged and scratched when being opened.

Do not use metallic or hard objects.

Carefully fold covers ① upwards in the direction of the arrow.
Secure the roof luggage rack to the fastening points beneath covers ①.
Comply with the installation instructions of the roof luggage rack manufacturer.
▶ Secure the load on the roof luggage rack.

Cup holders

Switching the cooling or heating function for the temperature-controlled cup holder on or off

When the heating function is used, the metal insert of the cup holder is heated. For this reason, you must not reach into the cup holder insert.

When placing glasses in the temperature-controlled cup holder, do not close the cover of the stow-

age compartment in the rear centre console because the glasses may tip over.

Diagram of a car gear shift mechanism with labeled parts 1 and 2

To switch on: press button ② until the blue (keep cool) or red (keep warm) indicator lamp on the button lights up.
To switch off: press button ② until the indicator lamp on the button goes out.
i Clean the removable rubber mat only with clean, lukewarm water and the temperature-controlled cup holder ① only with a soft cloth.

Sockets

Using the 12 V socket

Requirements:

- Only connect devices up to a maximum of 180 W (15 A).

Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are 12 V sockets in various places in the vehicle, such as the centre console, the glove compartment and the boot.

Fold up the socket cover.
Insert the plug of the device.

If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage compartment open.

Using the 230 V socket in the rear passenger compartment

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to damage from a connecting cable or socket

You could receive an electric shock when pulling the connecting cable or the 230 V power socket out of the trim, or if it is damaged or wet.

Use only connecting cables that are dry and free of damage.
When the vehicle is switched off, make sure that the 230 V power socket is dry.
Immediately have the 230 V power socket checked or replaced at a qualified specialist workshop if it is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.
▶ Never plug the connecting cable into a 230 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.

DANGER Risk of death due to using the socket incorrectly

In particular, you could receive an electric shock:

• if you touch the inside of the socket
- if you insert unsuitable devices or objects into the socket
Do not touch the inside of the socket.
Only connect suitable devices to the socket.

Requirements

• Only connect devices with a suitable plug which conforms to the standards specific to the country you are in.
• Do not use multiple socket outlets.

① Only devices up to a maximum of 150 watts (0.65 A) can be connected.

Diagram showing a device with labeled buttons and a close-up of its internal components, likely illustrating a medical or diagnostic setup.

Vehicles with a rear bench seat or electrically adjustable outer seats in the rear

Diagram showing car interior and door panel with numbered labels pointing to a device component

Vehicles with individual rear seats

▶ Vehicles with a rear bench seat or electrically adjustable outer seats: open the electronics compartment in the rear centre console.
▶ Vehicles with individual rear seats: open the stowage compartment in the rear centre console.
Open socket flap ③.

Insert the plug of the device into 230 V socket ②.
When the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient, indicator lamp ① lights up.
When the 230 V socket is not in use, keep socket flap ③ closed.

USB port in the rear passenger compartment

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following USB ports in the rear passenger compartment:

• On vehicles with individual rear seats: in the stowage compartment of the rear centre console.
• On vehicles with a rear bench seat or electrically adjustable rear outer seats: in the electronics compartment in the rear centre console.
• On vehicles with a rear bench seat or electrically adjustable rear outer seats: in the stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest.

These USB ports in the rear passenger compartment can be used to charge a mobile end device.

You can charge a USB device, such as a mobile phone, at the USB ports using a suitable charging cable. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the devices can be charged with up to 20 V (5 A) and when the vehicle is switched on.

Coolbox

Using the refrigerator box

WARNING Risk of fire due to a covered ventilation grille on the coolbox

If you cover the ventilation grille for the cool-box, it may overheat.

Always make sure that the ventilation grille is not covered.

The ventilation grille for the refrigerator box is in the boot.

The refrigerator box can bear a maximum load of 3.5 kg.

The upper compartment of the refrigerator box can accommodate, for example, plastic bottles with a maximum capacity of 0.5 litres and cans with a capacity of up to 0.33 litres

If you do not need to use the refrigerator box for an extended period, you should switch it off, defrost it and clean it. After doing so, leave the lid open for a time.

More condensation may occur during heavy use. Cleaning may be required.

The refrigerator box will reduce its cooling capacity or switch off in the following cases:

• Too many electrical consumers are turned on.
• The starter battery is not sufficiently charged.

If this is the case, the indicator lamps will flash on the button for switching the refrigerator box on and off. The cooling function will automatically switch back on as soon as there is sufficient voltage.

Diagram showing car seatbelt mechanism with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement or force

Example: vehicles with individual rear seats

Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats: fold down the rear armrest.
Pull handle ① on the storage box and fold down cover ② of the storage box.

Diagram showing car seatbelt with labeled buttons and a highlighted key, likely for navigation or diagnostic reference.

Example: vehicles with individual rear seats

To open: pull the handle on refrigerator box ① and fold down the cover of the refrigerator box.
To switch on: press button ② repeatedly until an indicator lamp (low cooling) lights up or two indicator lamps (high cooling) light up.

To switch off: press button ② repeatedly until both indicator lamps go out.

Removing or fitting the refrigerator box

Installing

Diagram of a car interior showing dashboard and side-mounted control panel with directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Remove cover cap ①.

Diagram showing a vehicle interior with numbered components and directional arrows indicating movement or flow.

Open loading flap ② in the rear compartment until the loading flap locks in the highest position (→ page 152). Pull upwards and hold handle ⑦. The connection to refrigerator box ④ is unlocked.

Slide the refrigerator box with handle ⑦ up into the open through-loading feature. Connection ④ and the electrical contacts of refrigerator box ③ are inserted into sockets ⑤ and ⑥ of the through-loading feature. Once the refrigerator box has been connected in the vehicle, push down handle ⑦. The refrigerator box is locked.

Removing

▶ Pull up and hold handle ⑦. ▶ Pull the refrigerator box with handle ⑦ up out of sockets ⑤ and ⑥ of the though-loading compartment. Connection ④ and the electrical contacts of refrigerator box ③ are separated from sockets ⑤ and ⑥ of the through-loading feature.

Opening and closing the stowage compartment of the refrigerator box in the boot

Interior view of a vehicle showing a car's rear lift with a blue arrow pointing to the load (no text or symbols present)

To open: pull the stowage compartment in refrigerator box ① out backwards by the handle in the direction of the arrow. Stowage compartment ① will be open.
To close: slide the stowage compartment in refrigerator box ① forwards in the direction of the arrow. Stowage compartment ① will be closed.

Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial

Notes on wirelessly charging a mobile phone

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
▶ Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment

Placing other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment could constitute a fire hazard.

Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment, especially those made of metal.

NOTE Damage to objects caused by plac- ing them in the mobile phone stowage compartment

If objects are placed in the mobile phone stowage compartment, these may be damaged by electromagnetic fields.

Do not place credit cards, storage media, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone stowage compartment.

NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids

If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged.

▶ Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment.

Always observe the notes for persons with electronic medical aids ( page 36).

• Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior aerial via the charging module.

• The charging function and wireless connection of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior aerial are only available if the vehicle is switched on.

• Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of the mobile phone stowage compartment.

• Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in the mobile phone stowage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior aerial.
• The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This may also depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background.
• To ensure more efficient charging and connection with the vehicle's exterior aerial, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone. Protective covers which are necessary for wireless charging are an exception.

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front

Requirements:

- The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging.

A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com/

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the vehicle has the following options for wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the cockpit:

• In the front stowage compartment
- In the stowage compartment of the cockpit armrest

Line drawing of a car interior with a highlighted blue button labeled '1' (no text or symbols beyond the label)

Example: wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front stowage compartment

Place the mobile phone as close to the centre of mat ① as possible with the display facing upwards.

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front stowage compartment: when a charging symbol is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. In addition, faults when charging the mobile phone are shown in the central display.

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the centre console below the armrest: the mobile phone is charging when the indicator lamp is lit. In addition, malfunctions during the mobile phone's charging process are shown by the indicator lamp flashing three times.

① The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water.

Radio equipment approval numbers for Brazil This device operates on a secondary basis, that is to say it has no protection against harmful interference, not even from the same type of stations, and must not cause interference with systems operating on a primary basis.

This product is permitted in accordance with the procedure defined in Directive 242/2000 by the Brazilian telecommunications agency ANATEL and meets the applicable technical requirements.

Further information is available on the ANATEL website. https://www.anatel.gov.br

For further information on the declaration of conformity for vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves see ( page 30).

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the rear passenger compartment

Requirements:

- The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging.

A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com/

Line drawing of a mechanical gear or lever mechanism with a blue circular component labeled '1' (no text or symbols beyond the label)

Example: vehicles with individual rear seats

Open the stowage compartment in the rear centre console.
Place the mobile phone as close to the centre of mat ① as possible with the display facing upwards.
When the indicator lamp at the front of the mobile phone system lights up, the mobile phone is being charged. In addition, malfunctions during the mobile phone's charging process are shown by the indicator lamp flashing three times.
The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water.

i Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 147).

Fitting and removing floor mats

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.

This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

Fitting floor mats

Diagram of car interior components with numbered labels pointing to specific parts

Slide the corresponding seat backwards and lay the floor mat in the footwell such that it fits.
Press studs ① onto holders ②.
Adjust the corresponding seat.

Removing floor mats

Slide the corresponding seat backwards and pull the floor mat off holders ②.
Adjust the corresponding seat.

Exterior lighting

Notes on adjusting the lights when driving abroad

As a convenience function, the headlamps automatically adjust when the vehicle crosses the border into a country where traffic drives on the other side of the road. If necessary, the headlamps can also be adjusted manually in the Low beam menu ( page 177).

The automatic light adjustment function is available:

• If Automatic is activated in the Low beam menu
• If the navigation and the navigation position are available

In the following cases, check the headlamp setting and change it manually if necessary:

• If the Low beam setting (left/right-side traffic) Manual adjustment only display message is displayed.
• If the Check low beam setting (left/right-side traffic) display message is displayed.

Following manual adjustment:

• Oncoming traffic will not be dazzled.
• The edge of the road will not be illuminated as far or as high.
• The "motorway mode" and "enhanced fog light" functions will not be available.

Information about lighting systems and your responsibility

The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation.

Light switch

Operating the light switch

Diagram of car interior with numbered UI controls and a circular dial showing 'AUTO' status

1 ←P← Left-hand parking lights
2 P←→ Right-hand parking lights
3 300≤ Standing lights and licence plate lighting
4 AUTO Automatic driving lights (preferred light switch position)

5 D Low beam/high beam
6 0‡ Switches the rear fog light on/off.

When low beam is activated, the 5 indicator lamp for the standing lights will be deactivated and replaced by the low-beam indicator lamp.

Always park your vehicle safely using sufficient lighting, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations.

NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights

Do not have the standing lights switched on over a period of several hours.

For vehicles that are wider than 2 m or longer than 6 m, single-sided parking lighting is not permitted in some countries. In this case, the standing lights are also switched on in the parking lights position.

If the battery is insufficiently charged, the standing lights or parking lights will be switched off automatically to facilitate the next engine start.

The exterior lighting (except standing and parking lights) will switch off automatically when the driver's door is opened.

- Observe the notes on locator lighting (→ page 177).

Switching on accident scene lighting

Switch off the vehicle.
Switch on the hazard warning lights ( page 171).
Turn the light switch from the AUTO position to the D position. The low beam will be switched on despite the vehicle being switched off.

The accident scene lighting will be switched off if:

• you switch off the hazard warning lights.
  • you turn the light switch back to AUTO.
  • the battery is insufficiently charged.

Automatic driving lights function

When the vehicle is switched on, the standing lights, low beam and daytime running lights will be switched on automatically depending on the light conditions.

WARNING Risk of accident when the dipped beam is switched off in poor visibility

When the light switch is set to AUTO, the dipped beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray.

In such cases, turn the light switch to 📋D.

The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for the vehicle lighting.

Switching the rear fog light on/off

Requirements:

• The light switch is in the ☑ or AUTO position.
  Press button 0¢.

Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps.

Operating the combination switch for the lights

Diagram showing car interior with numbered instructions for fuel injection or fuel transfer, including a magnified inset of the component.

High beam
② Turn signal light, right
3 Headlamp flashing
Turn signal light, left
Use the combination switch to select the desired function.

Switching on high beam

Turn the light switch to the 📄 or AUTO position.

Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow ①.

When high beam is activated, the indicator lamp for low beam 📋D will be deactivated and replaced by the indicator lamp for high beam 📋D.

Switching off high beam

Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow ① or pull it in the direction of arrow ③.

Headlamp flashing

Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3.

Turn signal light

To indicate briefly: push the combination switch briefly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ② or ④. The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times.

To indicate permanently: push the combination switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ② or ④.

Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist:

• A turn signal indicator activated by the driver may continue to operate for the duration of the lane change.
• If the driver indicated directly beforehand but a lane change was not immediately possible, the turn signal indicator may activate automatically.

Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights

Diagram of a car interior showing steering wheel and dashboard with a warning sign (no readable text or symbols)

Press button 1.

The hazard warning lights will switch on automatically if:

• the airbag has been deployed.
- the vehicle is braked heavily from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill.

When you pull away again, the hazard warning light system will switch off automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning light system using the warning lamp button.

Adaptive functions MULTIBEAM LED and DIGITAL LIGHT

Intelligent Light System function

With this system, the headlamps adapt to the driving and weather situation. It also provides extended functions for improved illumination of the road.

The system comprises the following functions:

• Active headlamps ( page 171)
• Cornering light ( page 172)
• Motorway mode ( page 172)
• Enhanced fog light function ( page 172)
• Bad weather light (→ page 173)
• City lighting (→ page 173)
- Topographical compensation (vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT) ( page 173)

The system is active only when it is dark.

Active headlamps function

Illustration of a car driving on a curved road with trees and a traffic sign (no text or symbols)

• The headlamps follow the steering movements.
• Relevant areas are better illuminated during a journey.

The functions are active when the low beam is switched on.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course of the lane in which you are driving will also be evaluated and the active headlamps function will adjust the light in advance.

Cornering light function

Illustration of a person standing on a crosswalk beside a road with trees and a car in the background (no text or symbols)

The cornering light improves the illumination of the carriageway over a wide angle in the turning direction, enabling better visibility on tight bends, for example. The cornering light will be activated only when low beam is switched on.

The function will be active in the following cases:

• At speeds below 40 km/h when the turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned
• At speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h and when the steering wheel is turned

Roundabout and junction function: the cornering light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current navigation position. It will remain active until after the vehicle has left the roundabout or junction.

Motorway mode function

Motorway mode increases the range and brightness of the cone of light, enabling better visibility.

Illustration of a multi-lane highway with vehicles and trees (no text or symbols)

The function will be active if a motorway journey is detected by means of:

• the vehicle's speed
  • the multifunction camera
• the navigation system

The function is not active in the following cases:

• at speeds below 80 km/h

Enhanced fog light function

The enhanced fog light function reduces self-dazzling and improves the illumination of the edge of the carriageway.

Illustration of a road scene with cars and trees, no text or symbols present

The function is automatically activated under the following conditions:

- At speeds below 70 km/h and when the rear fog light is switched on.

The function is automatically deactivated under the following conditions:

• When speeds greater than 100 km/h are reached.
• When the rear fog light is switched off.

Function of the bad weather light

The bad weather light reduces reflections in rainy conditions by dimming individual LEDs in the headlamps. The driver and other road users are dazzled less as a result.

The city lighting function

City lighting improves the illumination of roadsides in urban areas using a broad distribution of light. The function will be active in the following cases:

• At low speeds
  • In illuminated parts of urban areas

Function of the topographical compensation

Based on available map data, the lighting system responds pre-emptively to different road heights. This means that the headlamp range remains virtually constant when you are driving on uphill or downhill gradients.

■ Assistance functions of DIGITAL LIGHT

① Only vehicles with a multimedia system with navigation have this function.
DIGITAL LIGHT visually expands on the driver assistance systems by projecting the assistant displays in front of the vehicle while it is in motion. DIGITAL LIGHT can therefore help the driver in critical situations.
The availability of the functions is dependent on the country.
The system will be active in the following cases:

• The light switch is in the AUTO position.

• High beam is switched on.

If you activate the head-up display with augmented reality, the projections can be deactivated depending on the situation.
Depending on the country in which you are currently driving, certain functions may be disabled due to different legal requirements, even if they are enabled in the multimedia system. When you cross a border, the vehicle will automatically adapt to the applicable requirements.

Spotlight

Illustration of a person standing on a road next to a car, with trees and buildings in the background (no text or symbols)

The spotlight function runs in the background and flashes the headlamps in four short bursts at persons detected within the lane markings. You will be made aware of the position of oncoming pedestrians by a projected symbol.

The function will be active in the following circumstances:

• You are driving outside illuminated areas.
• The system detects a lane marking.

Warnings

Diagram showing a road with stop signs and a car, likely illustrating vehicle lane rules or traffic conditions.

If Traffic Sign Assist detects a corresponding situation, a triangle will be projected onto the road in the following cases at speeds of at least 30 km/h:

• You are driving in the opposite direction to the permissible direction of travel, e.g. on a motorway slip road.
• You are driving towards a stop sign without reducing your speed.
• You are driving towards a red traffic light without reducing your speed.

Observe the system limitations of Traffic Sign Assist ( page 291).

Notes

Illustration of a road with cars and trees, no visible text or symbols

If Traffic Sign Assist detects a roadworks zone, the system will provide support as follows:

• A corresponding symbol will be projected onto the road when you enter a roadworks zone.
• When you drive through a roadworks zone, guide lines that roughly match the width of the vehicle will be projected onto the road. The guide lines will be switched off temporarily on tight bends.

Illustration of a highway with vehicles and trees, no visible text or symbols

Observe the system limitations of Traffic Sign Assist ( page 291).

Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off

Requirements

- The vehicle is switched on.

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Lights ▶ MULTIBEAM LED

Activate or deactivate Dynamic low beam. In vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT headlamps, the Intelligent Light System can be switched on and off on the DIGITAL LIGHT menu.

Activating or deactivating enhanced assistance functions

① The availability of the functions is dependent on the country.
▶ Select Supporting projections.
▶ Activate or deactivate the desired projection.
Switch Projection for locator lighting/vehicle stop on or off.
If the locator lighting or the exterior switch-off delay time is activated, a high-resolution greeting or farewell scene will be played back for a short period of time when the vehicle is opened or locked. You can choose between the Digital Rain and Star Wave sequences.
(i) More information on locator lighting ( page 177)
More information on the exterior switch-off delay time ( page 177)

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function

WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react to:

• road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
• road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
- road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late.

In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users.

▶ Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions.

Detection may be restricted in the following cases:

• In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
- if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions.

Illustration of a road scene with cars and trees, no visible text or symbols

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically switches between the following types of light:

• Low beam
• Partial high beam
• High beam
• ULTRA RANGE Highbeam (only vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT)

ULTRA RANGE Highbeam increases the brightness of the cone of light to the legally permitted maximum.

Partial high beam does not include other road users in the high beam area. It does not dazzle them but enables full high-beam illumination for the driver apart from the excluded vehicles. Highly reflective signs are also illuminated with reduced brightness.

At speeds below 25 km/h or when there is sufficient street lighting:

- Partial high beam and high beam will be switched off automatically.

At speeds greater than 30 km/h:

• If no other road users are detected, high beam will switch on automatically.
• If other road users are detected, partial high beam will switch on automatically.

at speeds below 40 km/h:

- The ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will switch off automatically.

At speeds above 50 km/h:

• If no other road users are detected, the road is straight and it is not raining heavily, the ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched on automatically.
• If other road users are detected, the ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will automatically switch off and the partial high beam will switch on.
• If highly reflective signs are detected, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched off automatically.

The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel.

■ Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus on/off

Switching on

Turn the light switch to the AUTO position.
Switch on high beam using the combination switch.
If Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is activated, the □ indicator lamp will light up on the

driver's display. When partial high beam or high beam is active, the corresponding blue indicator lamp will also light up.

Switching off

Switch off high beam using the combination switch.

Setting low beam

Multimedia system:

Settings Lights MULTIBEAM LED Low beam

Select Right-side traffic, Left-side traffic or Automatic.

In vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT headlamps, the Intelligent Light System can be adjusted on the DIGITAL LIGHT menu.

Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Lights

▶ Interior/exterior lighting

Exterior lighting delayed switch off

Set the switch-off delay time. When the vehicle's engine is switched off, the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time.

Activating/deactivating the locator lighting

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Lights ▶ Interior/exterior lighting

▶ Activate or deactivate Locator lighting.

When the function is activated, the exterior lighting will light up for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked or the driver's door is opened when the vehicle is parked and not locked. When you start the vehicle, the locator lighting will be deactivated and the automatic driving lights activated.

Interior lighting

Adjusting the interior lighting

Diagram of car intake system with numbered components for vehicle control or safety

Switches the front interior lighting on/off.

② Switches the rear interior lighting on/off.

3 Switches automatic interior lighting control on/off.

To switch reading lamps on/off: hold your hand under the respective reading lamp ④ or ⑤.

Operating unit inside the grab handle (rear)

Diagram of a car seatbelt with labeled parts 1 and 2

Reading lamp on the respective side of the vehicle

Rear interior lighting

To switch reading lamps on: press button ①. The reading lamp, the interior lighting in the grab handle and the dome lamp on the respective side of the vehicle will light up.

To switch reading lamps off: press button once or twice. When you press it once, the interior lighting in the grab handle and the dome lamp on the respective side of the vehicle will go out.

When you press it twice, the reading lamp on the respective side of the vehicle will go out.

To switch the rear interior lighting on/off: press button ②. The reading lamps, the interior lighting in the grab handle and the dome lamps on both sides of the vehicle will light up or go out.

Adjusting the ambient lighting

Multimedia system:

Setting the colour

Select Colour.

Select Monochrome or Multi-colour.

Set the desired colour or colour scheme.

Adjusting the brightness

Select Brightness.

Adjust the brightness.

Depending on the ambient light conditions, the ambient lighting will automatically switch between day and night modes.

Activating the brightness for zones

Select Brightness.

Switch off Link zones.

The Direct, Indirect and Accents zones can be set separately.

The Light strip zone can also be set in vehicles with active ambient lighting.

Activating effects

WARNING Risk of accident despite ambient lighting and active ambient lighting effects switched on.

The warning assistance effects are fully active only if the respective driving or driving safety systems are switched on in the Driving Assistance menu.

Ensure that the respective driving or driving safety systems are switched on.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 261).

Select Effects.

Activate the desired effect.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, different effects are available.

Operating feedback effects

• Climate: If changes are made to the temperature setting in the vehicle, the colour of the ambient lighting will change briefly.
• Voice assistant: For vehicles with active ambient lighting, the voice assistant is visually animated.
• Greeting: When you get into the vehicle, a special colour animation will play.

Warning assistance effects

• Warning when exiting: If an object is detected in the blind spot while you are getting out of the vehicle, the ambient lighting in the affected door will flash red.
  Further information on the exit warning ( page 295).
• Active Lane Keeping Assist: If there is a warning from Active Lane Keeping Assist, the active ambient lighting will flash red.

Further information on Active Lane Keeping Assist ( page 298).

• Active Brake Assist: If there is an Active Brake Assist warning, the active ambient lighting in the centre of the cockpit will flash bright red. Further information on Active Brake Assist ( page 286).
• Active Blind Spot Assist: In vehicles with active ambient lighting, the ambient lighting on the affected side will flash red if there is a warning from Active Blind Spot Assist.
  Further information on Active Blind Spot Assist ( page 295).

Multi-colour animation

• The chosen colour combination will change at predefined intervals.
  ① In vehicles with active ambient lighting, an animation will be played.
  The desired operating feedback and warning assistance can be activated or deactivated via the symbol. Depending on the equip-

ment, different operating feedback and warning assistance effects are available.

If the brightness is set to a low level, warning animations will be displayed at a higher basic brightness.

Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay time on/off

Multimedia system:

Settings Lights

▶ Interior/exterior lighting

▶ Interior lighting delayed switch off

▶ Activate or deactivate Interior lighting delayed switch off. If this function is active, the interior lighting will be switched on for a short time after the end of the journey.

Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer sys- tem

Switching the windscreen wipers on/off

Diagram illustrating car wheel assembly with numbered parts and a magnified detail view showing internal components.

1 0 Windscreen wipers off
2 ⋯ Automatic wiping, normal
3 .... Automatic wiping, frequent

4 — Continuous wiping, slow
5 = Continuous wiping, fast

Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position 1 - 5.
Single wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow

• Single wipe
  • Wipes with washer fluid

① Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash ( page 437).

Vehicles with MAGIC VISION CONTROL: in position 2 or 3, the windscreen washing process is automatically triggered if dirt is detected on the windscreen unless the Top up washer fluid message is being displayed.

Deep-cleaning the windscreen

In the case of heavy soiling, you can deep-clean the windscreen above outside temperatures of 5^ C.
In a stationary vehicle, turn the combination switch to position 1, 2 or 3.

Press the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow ① and hold it for approximately two seconds.

The wiper arms will move into their replacement positions and washer fluid will be distributed on the windscreen.

After approximately 30 seconds, the wiper arms will move back again and wipe the wind-screen several times. Deep-cleaning will now have finished.

Replacing the windscreen wiper blades

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced

If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.
Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades.

Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position

Switch the vehicle on and then off again immediately.
Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds (→ page 180). The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.

Removing the wiper blades

Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-screen.

Diagram illustrating car fuel injection process with numbered steps and directional arrows

Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow Ⓞ as far as it will go.
Slide catch ② in the direction of arrow ③ until it engages in the removal position.
Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 4.

Fitting the wiper blades

Diagram illustrating car component assembly with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating assembly steps

Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow ①.
Slide catch ② in the direction of arrow ③ until it engages in the locking position.
Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly.

Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind-screen.
Switch on the vehicle.
Press the button on the combination switch.
The wiper arms will return to their original positions.
▶ Switch off the vehicle.
Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly and replace them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing.

Maintenance display

Diagram showing a car with two blue square markers and a magnified view of the engine plug (no text or symbols)

Remove protective film ① from the maintenance displays on the tips of the newly fitted wiper blades.

When the colour of the maintenance displays changes from black to yellow, replace the wiper blades.

The duration until the colour changes varies depending on the usage conditions.

Replacing the windscreen wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL)

Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position

▶ Switch off the vehicle.
Within around 15 seconds, press the button on the combination switch (→ page 180). The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.

Removing the wiper blades

Diagram showing car interior with a blue box, tool, and labeled parts (①, ②, ③) alongside a diagram illustrating airflow or pollution control.

To bring the wiper blade into position to be removed: hold the wiper arm firmly with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direction of arrow ① beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade will engage in the removal position with a click.

To remove the wiper blade: press release knob ②, pull the wiper blade in the direction of arrow ③ and remove.

Fitting the wiper blades

Diagram showing car exterior with a blue rectangle and numbered instructions for cleaning or repair steps, including arrows and icons.

Push the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm in the direction of arrow ① until release knob ② engages.

- Press the wiper blade onto the wiper arm beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ③. The wiper blade will engage with a noticeable click and move freely again. - Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen. - Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly and replace them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing.

Mirrors

Operating the outside mirrors

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

- if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion

• if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
  Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

A WARNING Risk of accident due to misjudgement of distance when using the outside mirror

The outside mirrors reflect objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear.

Therefore, always look over your shoulder in order to ensure that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the road users driving behind you.

Adjusting the outside mirrors

Diagram showing car interior with labeled parts and a highlighted location, likely for navigation or diagnostic purposes.

Use button ② or ④ to select the desired mirror.
In vehicles with MBUX Interior Assistant and driver camera, the required outside mirror can also be preselected automatically via a natural head movement to the left or right(→ page 374).

Use button ① to adjust the position of the selected mirror.

Folding the outside mirrors in/out

Briefly press button 3.

If the battery has been disconnected or has discharged, the outside mirrors must be moved briefly using button. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly.

Engaging the outside mirrors

If an outside mirror has been forcibly disengaged, proceed as follows.

Press and hold button 3.

You will hear a click and the mirror will audibly engage. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position.

Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors function

WARNING Risk of acid bums and poisoning due to the anti-dazzle mirror electrolyte

Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks.

The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.

If you come into contact with electrolyte, observe the following:

• Immediately rinse the electrolyte from your skin with water and seek medical attention.
• If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention.

• If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately.

• Immediately change out of clothing which has been contaminated with electrolyte.
  • If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

The inside rearview mirror and the outside mirror on the driver's side will automatically go into anti-dazzle mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rearview mirror.

System limits

The system will not go into anti-dazzle mode if:

• The vehicle is switched off.
- Reverse gear is engaged.
• The interior lighting is switched on.

Front-passenger outside mirror parking position function

The parking position makes parking easier.

The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side when:

• the parking position is stored ( page 186).
• the front-passenger mirror is selected.
• reverse gear is engaged.

The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when:

• you shift the transmission to another transmission position.
• you are travelling at a speed greater than 15 km/h.
• you press the button for the outside mirror on the driver's side.

Storing the parking position of the front-passenger outside mirror using reverse gear

Storing

Diagram showing car interior with labeled buttons and a highlighted sensor device, likely for diagnostic or testing purposes.

Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2.
Engage reverse gear.
Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking position using button ①.

Calling up

Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2.
Engage reverse gear. The front-passenger outside mirror will move into the stored parking position.

Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Vehicle
▶ Open/close

Activate or deactivate Automatic mirror fold-in.

Area permeable to radio waves on the wind-screen

Diagram of a car interior with labeled parts, showing two blue circular indicators pointing to the dashboard area.

Radio-controlled equipment such as toll systems can be mounted only on areas ① of the wind-screen that are permeable to radio waves.

Areas permeable to radio waves ① are best visible from outside the vehicle when the windscreen is illuminated with an external light source.

Note this position for vehicles with:

• Windscreen heater
  • Infra-red reflective windscreen

Infrared-reflective windscreen function

The infrared-reflective windscreen is coated and reduces the build-up of heat in the vehicle interior. The coating shields the vehicle interior from radio waves.

Overview of climate control systems

Notes on climate control

An interior filter in combination with the prefilter in the engine compartment must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollution level monitoring and the air filtration work correctly. Use filters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Overview of the THERMOTRONIC climate bar

The indicator lamps indicate that the corresponding functions are activated.

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    B --> C["3"]
    C --> D["4"]
    D --> E["5"]
    E --> F["6"]
    F --> G["7"]
    G --> H["8"]
    H --> I["9"]
    I --> J["10"]
    J --> K["11"]
    K --> L["12"]
    L --> M["12.5"]
    M --> N["22.5"]
    N --> O["22.5"]
    O --> P["22.5"]
    P --> Q["22.5"]
    Q --> R["22.5"]
    R --> S["22.5"]
    S --> T["22.5"]
    T --> U["22.5"]
    U --> V["22.5"]
    V --> W["22.5"]

Front climate bar on the central display (example)

1 ▲ Increases the temperature
Upper display area of the climate bar with the examples of _ switching off climate control (→ page 190), /C switching the A/C function on/off (→ page 191) and SYNC synchronisation function (→ page 192)

3 Demists the windscreen (→ page 195, 191)
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (→ page 193) or PMZS Calls up the fine particulate status display (→ page 190) or Activates/deactivates residual heat utilisation (→ page 193)
Plug-in hybrid vehicles: ☐ Activates/deactivates pre-entry climate control (→ page 199)
5 Switches the rear window heater on/off
6 Depending on vehicle equipment and settings: temperature display, display for the defrost function, airflow, pre-entry climate control or auxiliary heating
7 Increases the airflow or switches on climate control (→ page 190)
B ▼ Reduces the temperature 9 AUTO Sets climate control to automatic mode, right (→ page 191)
10 MENU Calls up the air conditioning menu (→ page 190)

AUTO Sets climate control to automatic mode, left ( page 191)
12 ☒ Reduces the airflow or switches off climate control(→ page 190)
The climate bar will remain visible even when the vehicle is parked or the air conditioning is switched off ( page 190).
(i) The availability of individual functions depends on the country and equipment.
① Vehicles with Distance Assist DISTRONIC: if Distance Assist DISTRONIC intervenes, the climate bar display on the central display will be made smaller.

Overview of the rear operating unit

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 AUTO 22,0 KSYNC AUTO 22,0 AUTO 12 11 10

① Sets air distribution to the centre and side air vents in the rear passenger compartment, left
② Sets the temperature in the rear passenger compartment, left
Sets the airflow in the rear passenger compartment, left, or switches climate control on/off ( page 190)

4 Switches climate control on/off ( page 190)
or switches residual heat on/off ( page 193)
Sets the airflow in the rear passenger compartment, right, or switches climate control on/off ( page 190)
6 Sets the temperature in the rear passenger compartment, right
7 Sets air distribution to the centre and side air vents in the rear passenger compartment, right
8 Sets rear climate control to automatic mode, right
9 Sets the air distribution to the right rear foot-well vents
10 Synchronisation is activated ( page 192)
⑪ Sets the air distribution to the rear left foot-well vents
Sets rear climate control to automatic mode, left

The settings for the second row of seats can be configured via the rear operating unit, the multi-

media system ( page 192) or the MBUX rear tablet depending on the vehicle's equipment.

Operating the climate control system

Switching climate control on/off

Switching on climate control

Set the airflow to level 1 or higher via 📁 on the climate bar on the central display

or

Press AUTO, ▲, ▼ or MENU.

Switching off climate control

Set the airflow to level 0 via ☐ on the climate bar on the central display

or

Press

If climate control is switched off, the windows may mist up more quickly. Switch climate control off only briefly.

If climate control is switched off via OFF will be shown on the climate bar.

Switching climate control on/off via the rear operating unit

Switching on

Press the ④ button.

or

Set the airflow to level 1 or higher using buttons ③ and ⑤.

or

Press buttons 2, 6, 8 or 12.

Switching off

Press the ④ button.

or

Set the airflow to level 0 using buttons ③ and ⑤.

① rear climate control is switched off via button ④, OFF will be shown on the display.

Calling up the air conditioning menu using the climate bar

The air conditioning menu can be called up via the climate bar. The climate bar is always shown on the lower edge of the central display.

Select the Climate menu entry in the air conditioning bar. The First row of seats menu is opened.

Jumping directly to the Air quality menu

Select the PM2.5 fine particle status display in the air conditioning bar. The Air quality menu is opened. An animation of the automatic air cleaning taking place is shown.

The fine particle status display is on the home screen next to the temperature display on the right and it informs you of the current particulate levels inside and outside of the vehicle. The measurement values are shown with the g / m^3 units (microgrammes per cubic metre).

Strong acceleration after longer parking periods will lead to a detachment of the dust covering the

vehicle. This dust measured by the PM2.5 sensor might lead to a short rise of outside values.

Defrosting the windscreen via the climate bar

Switching on

Press MAX on the climate bar on the central display.

Switching off

Press MAX, AUTO or 📄 on the climate bar on the central display

or

set the airflow to 0.

When the defrost function is activated, some functions (e.g. the temperature setting) will automatically be deactivated.

Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the multimedia system

Multimedia system:

Climate menu First row of seats

Depending on the external conditions, support for improved cooling and dehumidification of the interior air will be provided when the A/C function is activated.

Select A/C (A/C).

Setting climate control to automatic mode via the climate bar

In automatic mode, the set vehicle interior temperature is controlled automatically and maintained at a constant level by the air supply.

Press AUTO on the climate bar on the central display.

You can increase or reduce the airflow by pressing ⚙ on the climate bar on the central display.

To switch to manual operation: switch off automatic mode or adjust an aspect of air distribution, e.g.

Setting air distribution using the air conditioning menu

Multimedia system:

Climate menu

Select First row of seats or Second row of seats.
To set the air distribution: select 📄, 🙏 or 📋.
Set the airflow.

When the air conditioning system is switched on, at least one zone is always active. However, several air distribution options can be selected at the same time, for example to set the climate control for the interior and the footwells simultaneously. In doing so, the climate control for the windscreen can only be selected for the first seat row. When automatic mode is active, the buttons for setting the air distribution are automatically deactivated. When the air conditioning system is switched off, the buttons remain operable and the last setting is saved.

Setting the footwell temperature

Multimedia system:

Climate menu

Select 📋 and set the desired footwell temperature using the slider.

Setting rear climate control using the air conditioning menu

Multimedia system:

Climate menu

Setting the temperature

▶ Select Second row of seats.
Set the temperature.
Setting the airflow
▶ Select Second row of seats.
Set the air flow with ▲ or ▼.

Controlling the rear climate control automatically

Select AUTO.

When the defrost function is activated, some functions (e.g. the temperature setting) will automatically be deactivated. To deactivate the defrost function, press either MAX, AUTO or _1 set the air flow to level 0 ( page 191).

Deactivating rear climate control

Select REAR OFF.

Switching the synchronisation function on/off via the air conditioning menu

Multimedia system:

▶ Climate menu ▶ First row of seats

The synchronisation function controls the climate control centrally. The driver's settings for temperature, airflow and air distribution are automatically adopted for each climate zone.

Select SYNC (SYNC).

Demisting the windows

Windows misted up on the inside

Press AUTO on the climate bar on the central display.
If the windows remain misted up: press on the climate bar on the central display.
Windows misted up on the outside
Switch on the windscreen wipers.
Press AUTO on the climate bar on the central display.

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off

Press 📄 on the climate bar on the central display.

The interior air will be recirculated.

Air-recirculation mode will automatically switch to fresh air mode after a while.

If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may mist up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly.

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off via the multimedia system

Requirements:

• Vehicles with fine particulate prefilter

Multimedia system:

Climate menu Air quality

Press 📄 on the upper display area of the climate bar.

The interior air will be recirculated.

Air-recirculation mode will automatically switch to fresh air mode after a while.

If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may mist up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly.

Switching residual heat mode on/off via the climate bar

Requirements

• The residual heat function is available.
• The vehicle is parked.
• The coolant temperature is sufficiently high.

It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilating the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes, depending on the temperature set.

To switch on or off: select Residual heat on the climate bar of the central display.

The residual heat function will automatically switch off after some time.

① If residual engine heat utilisation is activated, the two buttons for setting the temperature

and air distribution will automatically be deactivated.

Switching residual heat on/off via the rear operating unit

Requirements

• The residual heat function is available.
• The vehicle is parked.
• The coolant temperature is sufficiently high.

When the residual heat of the engine is activated in the rear compartment, you can heat or ventilate the front and rear compartments for approximately 15 minutes.

Press button REST.

Activating/deactivating ionisation

Multimedia system:

Climate menu Air quality

When ionization is activated, the indoor air is enriched with negatively charged oxygen ions.

These can promote the well-being of the occupants.

Select Ionisation.

The function can only be performed if the AUTO mode is activated or the air distribution is set to the side air vent. The function is restricted if the side air vents on the driver's side are closed.

Fragrance system

Activating/deactivating the fragrance system using the multimedia system

Requirements

• Automatic climate control is activated.
• The glove compartment will close.
- A flacon is inserted.

Multimedia system:

Climate menu Air quality

The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fragrance throughout the vehicle interior from a flacon located in the glove box.

Navigate down until the climate control bar is active.
Select Air freshener.
▶ Activate or deactivate scenting.
Setting the fragrance system using the multi-media system

Requirements

• A flacon is inserted.
  • The glove compartment will close.
  • Climate control is activated.

Multimedia system:

Climate menu Air quality

The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fragrance throughout the vehicle interior from a flacon located in the glove compartment.

Select Air freshener.
Keep pressing until the desired intensity is reached.

Inserting or removing the flacon of the fragrance system

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury from liquid perfume

If children open the flacon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it could come into contact with their eyes.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Consult a doctor immediately if liquid perfume has been drunk.
If liquid perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with clean water.
If symptoms continue, consult a doctor.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of full flacons

Full flacons must not be disposed of ehold waste.

Full flacons must be taken to a substance collection point.

Diagram showing car interior and component insertion, with numbered arrows indicating parts of the device.

1 Cap
② Flacon
To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as far as it will go.
To remove: after opening the glove box, wait for approximately seven seconds and pull out the flacon.

If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging.

Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill it.

Refillable flacon

Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon.
▶ Fill the flacon with a maximum of 15 ml.
Screw the cap back onto the flacon.

Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the same perfume. Observe the separate information sheet with the flacon.

Information on the windscreen heater

WARNING Risk of bums from touching the windscreen when the windscreen heater is switched on

The windscreen can become very hot when the windscreen heater is switched on.

The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries.

Do not touch the windscreen while the windscreen heater is switched on.
Allow the windscreen to cool down before touching it.

The windscreen heater will be enabled automatically if _MAX is activated on the climate bar on the central display.

After the vehicle is started, the windscreen heater will be switched on automatically as required.

Pre-entry climate control when the vehicle is unlocked

Function of pre-entry climate control when the vehicle is unlocked

The seats can be briefly pre-warmed or pre-cooled before you get into the vehicle.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following functions will be activated as needed during pre-cooling:

• Automatic climate control
- Blower
- Seat ventilation

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following functions will be activated as needed during pre-warming:

• Automatic climate control
- Blower
- Seat heating
- Steering wheel heater
- Panel heating
- Mirror heater
- Rear window heater
- Windscreen heater

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following functions will also be adjusted during pre-entry climate control if they have already been switched on during regular vehicle operation:

• Fragrancing
• Ionisation

Setting pre-entry climate control when the vehicle is unlocked in the multimedia system Multimedia system:

Climate menu ▶ Pre-entry climate ctrl
Activate or deactivate the function.

Selecting seats

Select Driver, Passenger, Rear left or Rear right.

The seat-specific functions of pre-entry climate control, such as seat heating, will be performed for the selected seats.

If pre-entry climate control is enabled, an LED on the climate bar of the central display will light up blue for a cooled vehicle and red for a heated vehicle.

Activating/deactivating pre-entry climate control when the vehicle is unlocked

Requirements

• The high-voltage battery is charged sufficiently.
• The function has been activated via the multimedia system.
  To switch on: unlock the vehicle. The climate control functions are activated for up to five minutes for pre-heating and pre-cooling.

Pre-entry climate control when the vehicle is unlocked cannot be activated more than twice when the vehicle is switched off.

To switch off: press 📁 on the climate bar on the central display.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following functions will remain active once the vehicle has been started:

• Seat heating
• Seat ventilation

• Panel heating

• Fragrancing

• Ionisation

Pre-entry climate control for departure time

■ Pre-entry climate control for departure time function

WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.
▶ Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot.

In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to

react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries.

Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating.

To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it has been switched on repeatedly.

This function is available only for Mercedes-AMG vehicles, plug-in hybrids or vehicles with a 48-V on-board electrical system.

The air inside the vehicle can be heated, ventilated or cooled to the set temperature when the vehicle is parked.

Plug-in hybrid: When the vehicle is connected to power supply equipment, priority will be given to charging the high-voltage battery to a specified minimum charge.

The running time of pre-entry climate control may be reduced in the following circumstances:

- Plug-in hybrid: The vehicle is not connected to power supply equipment.

- The high-voltage battery or the 48 V battery is not fully charged.

Plug-in hybrid: With active pre-entry climate control, the charge level of the high-voltage battery may be reduced, even if the charging cable connector is connected.

If present, seat ventilation will be activated in cooling and ventilation modes.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following functions will be activated in heating mode, if available:

• Seat heating
  • Steering wheel heater
• Panel heating
• Mirror heater
• Rear window heater
• Windscreen heater

When the set temperature is changed, climate control mode will automatically be updated and switched from heating mode to ventilation or cooling mode, from cooling mode to ventilation or

heating mode or from ventilation mode to heating or cooling mode.

Setting pre-entry climate control for departure time via the climate bar Multimedia system:

Climate menu ▶ Pre-entry climate ctrl

Setting the departure time

Plug-in hybrid: The set departure times are used for the vehicle's pre-entry climate control and for predictions regarding the approximate state of charge and range at the time selected. Additional information on the charging settings ( page 391).

- Select Edit departure time .
- Select a departure time or set a new departure time.

Setting the repeat days

Select Edit departure time
Set the desired departure time and select the corresponding weekdays on which this departure time is to apply.
▶ Press OK to confirm.

Selecting seats

Select Driver, Passenger, Rear left or Rear right. Pre-entry climate control will take place for the selected seats.

If a departure time is set, a yellow LED will appear on the climate bar of the central display. In addition, an LED on the climate bar will indicate when pre-entry climate control is activated. It will light up blue when the vehicle is being cooled and red when it is being heated.

Activating/deactivating pre-entry climate control for departure time

Requirements

• The high-voltage battery or the 48 V battery is charged sufficiently.
• The function has been activated via the multimedia system.

To activate: set the departure time ( page 198). Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: Pre-entry climate control at departure time

switches on a maximum of 5 minutes before the selected departure time.

Plug-in hybrid: Pre-entry climate control at departure time switches on a maximum of 55 minutes before the selected departure time. It will remain active for another five minutes if departure is delayed.

To deactivate the pre-entry climate control for departure time early: press on the climate bar on the central display or switch off the preselection of the time in the climate menu.

If present, the following functions will remain active once the vehicle has been started:

• Seat heating
• Seat ventilation
• Panel heating

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following functions will also be adjusted during pre-entry climate control if they have already been switched on during regular vehicle operation:

• Fragrancing
• lonisation

Activating/deactivating immediate pre-entry climate control

WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.

▶ Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot.

In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries.

Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating.

To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it has been switched on repeatedly.

Requirements

• The vehicle is switched off.

i Immediate pre-entry climate control is available only for plug-in hybrids or vehicles with a 48-V on-board electrical system.

The vehicle interior can continue to be air-conditioned, e.g. during a break in driving, for up to 50 minutes for plug-in hybrids and up to 5 minutes for vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system.

Press 📄 on the climate bar on the central display. The red or blue indicator lamp below 📄 on the climate bar on the central display will light up or go out.
Set the temperature using the ▲ and ▼ arrows on the climate bar on the central display.

The colours of the indicator lamp have the following meanings:

• Blue: ventilation or cooling mode is switched on.
  • Red: heating mode is switched on.
  • Yellow: the departure time is preselected.

Stationary heater/ventilation

Stationary heater/ventilation function

The following function is equipment-dependent.
- The air inside the vehicle is heated or ventilated to the set temperature.
- The air inside the vehicle cannot be cooled down to temperatures below the outside temperature.
- If the outside temperature changes, ventilation mode will automatically switch to heating mode or heating mode will automatically switch to ventilation mode.

The stationary heater and the exhaust gas outlet are situated behind the right front wheel.

■ Switching the stationary heater/ventilation on/off via the operating unit

DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases

If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case in enclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example.

▶ Always switch the stationary heater off in enclosed spaces without an air extraction system, e.g. in garages.
Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the vehicle or the auxiliary heating is running.
Open a door or a roof hatch on the windward side of the vehicle to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.

WARNING Risk of fire due to hot stationary heater components and exhaust gases

Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite.

When the stationary heater is switched on, make sure that:
- hot vehicle parts do not come into contact with flammable materials.
- the exhaust gas can flow out of the stationary heater exhaust pipe unhindered.
- the exhaust gas does not come into contact with flammable materials.

NOTE Battery discharge caused by stationary heater or stationary ventilation operation

Operating the stationary heater or stationary ventilation drains the battery.

▶ After heating or ventilating the vehicle twice, drive for a longer period of time.

Requirements

• The vehicle has a stationary heater.
• The outside temperature is below 15^ C.
• The fuel tank is sufficiently full.

① If the fill level of the fuel tank is too low, auxiliary heating mode may be restricted.

Set the temperature using the ▲ and ▼ arrows on the climate bar on the central display.
Press the button. The red or blue indicator lamp on button will light up or go out.

The colours of the indicator lamp have the following meanings:

• Blue: stationary ventilation is switched on.
• Red: the stationary heater is switched on.
• Yellow: the departure time is preselected.

The stationary heater/ventilation will switch off automatically after 50 minutes.

Setting the stationary heater/ventilation via the multimedia system

Requirements

- The vehicle is fitted with the stationary heater equipment.

Multimedia system:

Climate menu ➤ Stationary heater

Selecting the departure time

▶ Select Time A, Time B or Time C.

Setting the departure time

▶ Select Time A, Time B or Time C.
▶ Select the pen beside the time.
Set a time.

Air vents

Adjusting the front air vents

⚠ WARNING Risk of bums or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents

Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents.

Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents.
If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

To guarantee the flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, note the following:

• Always keep the vents and ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior clear.
- Keep the air inlet grille free of residue build-up ( page 437).

Diagram of car interior showing dashboard, steering wheel, and rear seats with numbered labels for identification

To open the centre and side air vents: press button ①. The three indicator lamps on the button will light up. The air vents will be opened completely.

To close the centre and side air vents: press button ① again.
The three indicator lamps on the button will go out one by one. The air vents will be closed completely.
To adjust the airflow direction of the side air vents: hold the centre of outer side air vent ② and move it up or down or to the left or right.
To adjust the airflow direction of the centre air vents: hold the centre of air vent ③ and move it up or down or to the left or right.

Adjusting the rear air vents

WARNING Risk of bums or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents

Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents.

Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents.
If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

Diagram of a car seatbelt with numbered labels pointing to internal components

To open the rear air vents in the centre console: press button ①.
The air vents will be opened completely and the three indicator lamps on the button will light up.
To close the rear air vents in the centre console: press button ① again.
The three indicator lamps on the button will go out one by one. The air vents will be closed completely.
To adjust the airflow direction of the rear air vents in the centre console: hold the centre of air vent ② and move it up or down or to the left or right.

Diagram showing car interior with labeled parts, including a zoomed-in section and a separate close-up of the main component.

To open the side air vents in the rear: press button ①.

If the button is flush with the side trim, the side air vent is open.

To close the side air vents in the rear: press button ① again. If the button protrudes from the side trim, the side air vent is closed.

To adjust the airflow direction of the side air vents in the rear: hold the centre of air vent ② and move it up or down or to the left or right.

Opening or closing the air vent in the glove box

NOTE Damage to temperature-sensitive objects in the glove box

Temperature-sensitive objects stored in the glove box may be damaged by the air vent located inside the glove compartment.

Close the air vent when you heat the vehicle.
At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and switch on the A/C function.

The automatic climate control must be switched on to cool the glove box.

Diagram showing a car interior with labeled parts and a blue circular component with directional arrows indicating rotation or movement.

① Air vent controller
② Air vent
To open or close: tum controller ① to the right or left.

Driving

Notes on Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes on the following topics in the Supplement, otherwise you may fail to recognise dangers.

① The availability of certain functions depends on the equipment and model of the vehicle.

• Emotion Start
  • AMG Real Performance Sound
  • AMG ceramic high-performance composite brake system
• RACE START
  • AMG RIDE CONTROL +
  • AMG ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL
  • AMG steering-wheel buttons

Notes on plug-in hybrids

Notes on plug-in hybrid operation

WARNING Risk of chemical burns and poisoning from damaged high-voltage battery

If the housing of the high-voltage battery has been damaged, electrolyte and gases may leak out.

Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes off with water and seek medical attention straight away.

DANGER Risk of fire and explosion from excessive internal pressure of the high-voltage battery

In the event of a vehicle fire, flammable gas can escape and ignite.

▶ Stop the charging process immediately in case of unusual odours, smoke or burn marks.

Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger zone at a sufficient distance.
▶ Call the fire service.

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

The hybrid system combines a combustion engine with an electric motor.

Characteristics when the vehicle is at a standstill:

• The combustion engine is generally switched off.
• Idle speed occurs only in certain instances.

Characteristics when the vehicle is started:

- If the high-voltage battery is sufficiently charged, the vehicle can be started with the electric drive system without the combustion engine (noiseless start).

- If the high-voltage battery for the electric drive system is not sufficiently charged or the vehicle conditions for a silent start are not met, the vehicle will start with the combustion engine.

Depending on the system, it may happen that even though the high-voltage battery is charged, electric mode has restricted or no availability. Once the combustion engine has been operated for long enough and ambient conditions permit, electric mode is again available without restriction.

Characteristics with moderate power output requests:

• The combustion engine is switched off as often as possible during the journey.
• The vehicle can, depending on the drive program selected and the state of charge of the high-voltage battery, be accelerated electrically up to a speed of approximately 140 km/h.

Characteristics with high power output requests:

• The electric motor supports the combustion engine (boost effect), e.g. when you pull away or accelerate.
  • The high-voltage battery is discharging.

Characteristics when the accelerator pedal is released during the journey:

• The electric motor will be operated as an alternator when in overrun mode and during braking.
  • The high-voltage battery is charging.

Notes on electric mode:

• Vehicles with hybrid systems generate significantly less noise when stationary and when being driven than vehicles with combustion engines.
• When you are driving in electric mode, the vehicle may not be heard by other road users due to the significantly lower noise generated. For this reason, the vehicle is equipped with a sound generator, which serves as an acoustic

vehicle alerting system (AVAS). This safety device is prescribed by law.

The external noise of the sound generator is perceptible in the vehicle interior at low speeds and does not represent a malfunction.

• If not all of the vehicle conditions for electric mode are met, then the combustion engine is switched on.
• Performance restrictions in electric mode are possible as a result of the operating temperature of the high-voltage battery and drive system, the ambient temperature and aging of the high-voltage battery.
• In electric mode, the maximum power is not permanently available and may drop to continuous output.

Notes on the acoustic vehicle alerting system:

- The sound generator generates speed-dependent vehicle noise emissions at a speed of up to around 30 km/h when the vehicle is driving both forwards and in reverse.

• This helps other road users, particularly pedestrians and cyclists, to hear your vehicle better.
• When you drive at speeds above 20 km/h the acoustic vehicle alerting system will gradually switch off.
• The sound generator will be off when the vehicle is stationary.

■ Manually disconnecting the high-voltage on-board electrical system

DANGER Risk of death and fire due to modified and/or damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system

The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted. In addition, modified and/or damaged components may cause a fire.

In the event of an accident or impact to the vehicle underbody, components of the high-voltage electrical system may be damaged although the damage is not visible.

▶ Never make any modifications to the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its high-voltage on-board electrical system components have been modified or damaged.
▶ Never touch damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
After an accident, do not touch any components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
After an accident, have the vehicle transported away.
Have the components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system checked at a qualified specialist workshop and replaced if necessary.

Requirements

Only disconnect the high-voltage on-board electrical system manually in the following situations:

• The restraint system warning lamp lights up in the driver's display, e.g. after an accident.
• The vehicle is badly damaged, e.g. after an accident, and the restraint system components have not been triggered.

Operating the high-voltage disconnect device

Top-down view of a car's front engine compartment with internal components and a close-up inset showing internal components (no text or symbols)

▶ Switch off the vehicle.
▶ Switch the transmission to position P.
Apply the electric parking brake.
▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
Open the bonnet.

Press release tab ① in the direction of the arrow and pull it out.
Pull high-voltage disconnect device ② in the direction of the arrow until it engages. The high-voltage on-board electrical system is switched off.

All work on the hybrid drive system (including after disconnecting the high-voltage on-board electrical system manually) may only be carried out in a qualified specialist workshop.

Switching on the power supply or the vehicle

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
• Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
• change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Keep the key out of reach of children.

Requirements

• The key is in the vehicle and is recognised.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.

ENGINE START / STOP

To switch on the power supply: press button once. You can, for example, switch on the wind-screen wipers.

The power supply will be switched off again if the following conditions are met:

• You open the driver's door.
- You press button ① twice more.

To switch on the vehicle: press button twice. Indicator and warning lamps will light up of the driver's display.

The vehicle will be switched off again if one of the following conditions is met:

• You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the transmission is in position P or the electric parking brake is applied.
• You press button ① once.

Starting the vehicle

Starting the vehicle with the start/stop button

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and results in poisoning.

▶ Never leave the engine and, if present, the stationary heater, running in an

enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.

WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system

Flammable materials may ignite.

Therefore, regularly check that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system.

Requirements

• The key is in the vehicle and is recognised.
Shift the transmission to position P or N.
Depress the brake pedal and press button once.
If the vehicle does not start: switch off non-essential consumer equipment and press button ① once.
If the vehicle still does not start and the Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual display message appears on the driv-

er's display: start the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation mode) ( page 209).

You can switch off the vehicle while driving. To do this, press and hold button ① for about three seconds or press button ② three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes concerning this under "Driving tips" (→ page 212).

Observe any information regarding display messages that may be shown on the driver's display.

Starting the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation mode) If the vehicle does not start and the Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual display message appears on the driver's display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.

Diagram showing car gear shift mechanism with labeled parts and directional arrows

Make sure that the cup holder ② is empty.
Remove key ① from the key ring.
Place key ① in cup holder ②. The vehicle will start after a short time. If you remove key ① from cup holder ②, the vehicle can be driven. For further vehicle starts, however, key ① must be located in cup holder ② during the entire journey.
Have key ① checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the vehicle does not start:

Leave key ① in cup holder ②.

Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop button.
① You can switch on the power supply or the vehicle with the start/stop button.
Observe any information regarding display messages that may be shown on the driver's display.

Starting the vehicle via Remote Online Services

Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before starting a journey

Ensure the following before starting the engine:

• The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone.
• It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked.
  • The fuel tank is sufficiently full.
  • The starter battery is sufficiently charged.

Charging the starter battery before starting a journey

You can receive a message on your smartphone when the state of charge of the starter battery is

low. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched off after ten minutes.

Ensure the following before starting the engine:

• The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone.
• It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked.
  • The fuel tank is sufficiently full.

Starting the vehicle (Remote Online)

WARNING Risk of crushing or entrapment due to unintentional starting of the engine

Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work.

Always secure the engine against unintentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work.

Requirements

- Park position is selected.

• The anti-theft alarm system is not activated.
- The hazard warning light system is switched off.
• The bonnet is closed.
• The doors are closed and locked.
• The windows and sliding sunroof are closed.

Start the vehicle using the smartphone. After every engine start, the engine runs for ten minutes.

You can carry out a maximum of two consecutive starting attempts. You must start the engine with the key before trying to start the vehicle again with the smartphone.

You can switch off the vehicle at any time as follows:

• Via the Smartphone App
- By pressing the ☑ or ⏻ button on the key

i Further information can be found in the smartphone app.

Securing the vehicle against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work:

▶ Switch on the hazard warning light system.

or

Unlock the doors.

or

Open a side window or the sliding sunroof.

Running-in notes

To preserve the engine during the first 1500 km:

• Drive at varying road speeds and engine speeds.
  • No faster than 140 km/h.
• Drive the vehicle in Drive mode [C] or [E].
• Shift to the next higher gear at the very latest when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the rev counter.
• Do not shift down manually in order to brake.

• Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at full throttle.

• Do not depress the accelerator pedal past the pressure point (kickdown).

• Only increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed after 1500 km.

This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced.

Please also observe the following running-in notes:

• In certain handling and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is only reached when this teaching-in process has concluded.
• Brake pads, brake disks and tyres that are either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking effect and grip after driving several hundred kilometres. Compensate the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

Notes on optimised acceleration

If all necessary requirements and activation conditions are fulfilled, the best possible acceleration can be achieved from a standstill.

Do not use optimised acceleration on public roads. Individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and/or accident.

Be sure to observe the safety notes and information on ESP® (→ page 264).

Pulling away with optimised acceleration

WARNING Risk of skidding and accidents due to wheelspin

If you pull away with optimised acceleration, individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle.

There is a higher risk of skidding and accidents when ESP ^® is deactivated in particular.

Make sure that there are no persons or obstacles in the vicinity of the vehicle.

Requirements

• the vehicle is run in (→ page 210).
• the vehicle and tyres are in good condition.
• the road surface is high-grip.
- the engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature.

NOTE Increased wear due to optimised acceleration

When pulling away with optimised acceleration, all components of the drivetrain are subjected to a very high load.

This can lead to increased component wear.

Do not always pull away with optimised acceleration.

Engage drive position D (→ page 229).
Move the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position.
Select drive program S (→ page 225).
Deactivate ESP® (→ page 266).

Depress and hold the brake pedal firmly with your left foot.
With your right foot, fully depress the accelerator pedal.
After no more than five seconds, take your left foot quickly off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle will pull away at maximum acceleration.
Switch on ESP ^® once the acceleration procedure is complete.

Ending optimised acceleration

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

Reactivate ESP®.

After you pull away with optimised acceleration, components of the drivetrain can become very hot, which means that optimised acceleration values may be reached again only after a few minutes.

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Reactivate ESP®. After you pull away with optimised acceleration, components of the drivetrain can become very hot, which means that optimised acceleration values may be reached again only after a few minutes.

Notes on driving

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect footwear

Incorrect footwear includes, for example:

• shoes with platform soles

• shoes with high heels
• slippers
  There is a risk of an accident.
  Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the pedals safely.

WARNING Risk of accident if the vehicle is switched off while driving

If you switch off the vehicle while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available.

This may affect the power steering system and the brake force boosting, for example.

You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example.

Do not switch off the vehicle while driving.

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and results in poisoning.

▶ Never leave the engine and, if present, the stationary heater, running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.

A WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces

If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction.

Do not shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect.

DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases

If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case, for example, if the vehicle gets stuck in the snow.

Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater is running.
Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.

WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating

If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may overheat.

This increases the braking distance and the brake system can even fail.

▶ Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.

Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.

NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds

The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range.

Do not drive with the engine in the over-revving range.

NOTE Causing wear to the brake linings by permanently depressing the brake pedal

Do not permanently depress the brake pedal while driving.
To use braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time.

!

NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away

Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immediately.
Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature.

!

NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel

The engine is not running smoothly and is mis-firing.

Non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter.

Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

!

NOTE Reduced battery life due to frequent short distance trips

The 12 V battery may not be sufficiently charged when the vehicle is used only for short-distance trips. This reduces the life of the battery.

▶ Drive longer distances regularly to charge the battery.

!

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance

If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged.

Observe the signposted headroom clearance.
If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter.

▶

Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.

i

Please bear in mind that all the speed values stated in this Operator's Manual are approximate and are subject to a certain tolerance.

Notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle

When driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or trailer as well as with a fully laden or fully occupied vehicle, the vehicle's driving and steering characteristics change.

You should bear the following in mind:

• Do not exceed the permissible roof load and towing capacity. Also observe the information in the Technical Data.
• Distribute the roof load and the load inside the vehicle evenly, placing heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 147).
• Drive attentively, and avoid abrupt starts, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering.

Advice on driving on salt-strewn roads

The braking effect is limited on salt-strewn road surfaces.

Therefore, observe the following notes:

• Due to salt build-up on the brake disks and brake pads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in one-sided braking.
• Maintain a much greater safety distance to the vehicle travelling ahead.

Remove salt build-up as follows:

• Brake occasionally, paying attention to the traffic conditions
• Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey

Notes on aquaplaning

Aquaplaning can take place if a certain depth of water has built up on the road surface.

Observe the following notes during heavy precipitation or in conditions in which aquaplaning may occur:

- Reduce speed

• Avoid tyre ruts
• Avoid sudden steering movements
• Brake carefully

Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tyres ( page 473).

Notes on driving through water on the road

Water ingress can damage the engine, electrics and transmission.

Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage.

Observe the following if you have to drive through water:

• The water, when calm, may reach no higher than the lower edge of the vehicle body.
• Drive at walking speed at most; water can otherwise enter the vehicle interior or the engine compartment.
• Vehicles travelling ahead, or oncoming vehicles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of the water.

The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after fording. Brake carefully, paying attention to the

traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored.

Function of rear axle steering

The rear axle steering is an electromechanical auxiliary steering on the rear axle which adjusts the steering of the rear wheels according to the position of the front wheels, depending on the speed. This results in greater manoeuvrability and improved driving stability, e.g. when cornering.

Rear axle steering has the following characteristics:

• reduced steering effort and turning circle resulting in reduced parking effort
• improved driving stability, e.g. when cornering
• more direct steering resulting in improved handling of the vehicle

Observe the notes on snow chains and snow chain mode ( page 474).

ECO start/stop function

ECO start/stop function

Depending on the engine, the ECO start/stop function is not available in all drive programs. Observe the status display on the driver's display concerning this.
i Plug-in hybrid: this function is not available.

The engine will be switched off automatically in the following situations if all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met:

• You brake the vehicle to a standstill in transmission position [D] or [N].
• Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system: you depress the brake pedal when travelling at a low speed.

If the system has detected one of the following situations, the engine will not stop:

• You stop at a stop sign and there is no vehicle in front of you.

• The vehicle that stopped in front of you starts up again.

• You manoeuvre, turn the steering wheel sharply or engage reverse gear.
  If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibitor, e.g. a stop sign, the engine will not stop. If you activate the HOLD function or engage the park position P, the engine can be switched off despite an intelligent stop inhibitor.

The engine will restart automatically in the following cases:

• You engage transmission position [D] or [R].
• You depress the accelerator pedal.
• The vehicle requires an automatic engine start.
  • You release the brake pedal.

- Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system:

• You release the brake pedal on a downhill gradient and the vehicle does not roll.
• The vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient and does not automatically enter glide mode at 20 km/h.

ECO start/stop function symbols on the driver's display:

• The (A) symbol (green) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
• The symbol (yellow) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle conditions for an engine stop have been met.
• Neither the Ⓐ symbol nor the Ⓐ symbol appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelligent stop inhibitor, e.g. a stop sign, has been detected.
• The ^OFF symbol appears: the ECO start/stop function is deactivated or there is a malfunction.

If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warning tone will sound and the engine will not be restarted. In addition, the following display message will appear on the driver's display:

Vehicle is operational Switch off vehicle before exiting

If you do not switch off the vehicle, it will automatically be switched off after three minutes.

Switching the ECO start/stop function on/off

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

▶ Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

ENGINE START / STOP

Press the Ⓞ button. A display will appear on the driver's display when you switch the ECO start/stop function on/off. i 📐 ^OFF will be continuously shown on the driver's display while the ECO start/stop function is deactivated.

ECO display function

ECO display 1 2 3

The ECO display shows an evaluation of your driving style on the driver's display depending on the situation. This enables you to check the efficiency of your driving style and adjust it if necessary. The ECO display menu shows a ball ② that will roll

forwards or backwards on a stylised road in the direction of travel according to the driving characteristics.

Above and below the road, lines mark the area for an efficient driving style ③. Ball ② will light up in green if it is rolling within these lines. Outside the lines, the ball will light up in orange.

The ECO display assesses the following criteria for an economical driving style:

• coasting at the right times
- consistent speed
• moderate acceleration

The overall assessment of your driving style "from start" is indicated using stars ①. It starts with five empty stars, which you can fill one after the other if you drive efficiently. When all five stars are filled, a glow will appear in the background.

① You can call up the ECO display function via the Classic and Exclusive menus (→ page 344).

ECO Assist function (vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system)

For plug-in hybrids, note the ECO Assist information ( page 220).

i ECO Assist is active only in drive programs [E] and [C].

ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expected route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save fuel and recuperate. If the system detects an event ahead and the vehicle nears the event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimum speed for maximum fuel economy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and downhill gradient.

If the deceleration provided by ECO Assist is not sufficient, you must also brake with the service brake. This is especially the case if, for example, you pull away again in slow-moving traffic and the distance to the vehicle in front is very short.

125.3 km/h 24967 ① ② 公差

① "Foot off the accelerator" recommendation ② Route event ahead

If a route event or vehicle that requires an adjustment of your driving style for more efficiency is detected ahead, corresponding symbol ② and the □ symbol (grey) will be displayed.

If you release the accelerator pedal, the symbol will turn green and recuperation in over-run mode will be initiated. If the deceleration is not sufficient, also apply the service brake. If ECO Assist intervenes for a route event ahead (not for a vehicle in front) and you then press the accelerator pedal again, you end ECO Assist's control.

The ECO Assist display is hidden again in the following cases:

• You do not react to the ECO Assist recommendation for a long time.
• You press the accelerator pedal while ECO Assist is intervening for a route event ahead (not for a vehicle in front).
  • ECO Assist cannot identify any further recommendations from the route ahead.

In addition to a vehicle in front ☐, ECO Assist can detect the following route events ② depending on the vehicle's equipment:

Roundabout
S-bend
Sharp bend
T-junction
Downhill gradient
Speed limit

In drive program C, ECO Assist only reacts to the route event "Vehicle in front".

System limits

If the calculated route is adhered to when route guidance is active, ECO Assist will operate with greater accuracy. The basic function is also available without active route guidance. Not all information and traffic situations can be foreseen. The quality depends on the map data.

ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time.

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

• If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
• If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
• If the windscreen is dirty in the vicinity of the multifunction camera.

• If the multifunction camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.

• If road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are obscured.

• If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out of date.
• If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in road-works or in adjacent lanes.
  • If the radar sensors are dirty or obscured.
• When you drive on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients.
• If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles.

Recuperative brake system (plug-in hybrid)

Function of the recuperative brake system Depending on the selected recuperation level, the electric motor is operated as an alternator when in overrun mode and during braking in order to charge the high-voltage battery while driving. As soon as you take your foot off the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is in motion and in transmission position [D], recuperation in overrun mode is initiated.

The higher the recuperation, the more sharply the vehicle is braked when coasting and the more electrical energy is fed into the high-voltage battery.

The deceleration in overrun mode may not be sufficient depending on the driving conditions. Decelerating to a standstill is not possible. Also brake with the service brake if necessary. Always adapt your speed to the driving conditions and keep a sufficient distance.

The recuperative brake system has the following characteristics:

• supports braking with electronically controlled brake force boosting
- converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into electric energy

If you brake hard, the mechanical brake is also used. This means that the maximum recuperative energy cannot be recovered. The more you drive and brake in an anticipatory manner, the more efficiently energy can be recuperated.

System limits

The braking effect of the electric motor during recuperation in overrun mode may be reduced or may not be available at all in the following situations:

• when the high-voltage battery charge level increases
• if the high-voltage battery is not yet at a normal operating temperature

In these cases, the desired deceleration is set by the brake control system.

nually setting recuperative deceleration

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

▶ Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

You can use the steering wheel gearshift paddles to adjust the intensity of recuperation in drive programs H, B and EL.

Diagram of a car steering wheel with two blue circular indicators labeled 1 and 2, showing dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols beyond labels)

The following recuperation levels are available:

• D AUTO Intelligent and anticipatory recuperation with ECO Assist ( page 220)
• D + No recuperation: the vehicle rolls freely
• D Normal recuperation
- D - Increased recuperation: strong deceleration in overrun mode, e.g. for driving on downhill gradients

Standard setting:

• D AUTO: if the ECO Assist function is activated in the multimedia system ( page 222).
- D: if the ECO Assist function is deactivated in the multimedia system.

i D AUTO is only available if the ECO Assist function is activated in the multimedia system and if the function of the radar sensors is not impaired. Also observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras ( page 262).
To increase recuperation: briefly pull gearshift paddle ①.
To reduce recuperation: briefly pull gearshift paddle 2.
Standard setting: pull and hold gearshift paddle ① or ②, or engage transmission position D again.
When the vehicle is started again, the standard setting is also set.

The driver's display shows the currently selected recuperation level next to the transmission position display.

ECO Assist (plug-in hybrid)

ECO Assist function

The following function depends on the equipment and the country.

ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expected route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save fuel and recuperate. If the system detects an event ahead and the vehicle nears the event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimum speed for maximum fuel economy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and downhill gradient.

If the deceleration provided by ECO Assist is not sufficient, you must also brake with the service brake. This is especially the case if, for example, you pull away again in slow-moving traffic and the distance to the vehicle in front is very short.

The function will be active in the following circumstances:

• The function is activated in the multimedia system ( page 222).
• The D AUTO recuperation level is selected (→ page 220).
• Manual gearshifting M is not activated.
• Drive program [S] is not selected.

125.3 km 24967 ① ② 恢复

① "Foot off the accelerator" recommendation
② Route event ahead

If a route event that can be dealt with more efficiently by adjusting your driving style is detected ahead, corresponding symbol ② and the symbol will be displayed in grey.

If you release the accelerator pedal, the symbol will turn green and recuperation in overrun mode will be initiated. If the deceleration is not sufficient, also apply the service brake.

If ECO Assist intervenes for a route event ahead and you press the accelerator pedal, you end ECO Assist's control. This does not apply in the case of a vehicle in front.

The ECO Assist display is hidden again in the following cases:

• You do not react to the ECO Assist recommendation for a long time.
• You press the accelerator pedal while ECO Assist is intervening because of a route event ahead. This does not apply in the case of a vehicle in front.
  • ECO Assist cannot identify any further recommendations from the route ahead.

In addition to a vehicle in front ☐, ECO Assist can detect the following route events ② depending on the vehicle's equipment:

Roundabout
S-bend
Sharp bend
T-junction
Downhill gradient
km/h Speed limit

System limits

If the calculated route is adhered to when route guidance is active, ECO Assist will operate with greater accuracy. The basic function is also available without active route guidance. Not all information and traffic situations can be foreseen. The quality depends on the map data.

ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time.

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

• If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
• If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
• If the windscreen is dirty in the vicinity of the multifunction camera.

• If the multifunction camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.

• If road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are obscured.

• If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out of date.
• If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in road-works or in adjacent lanes.
  • If the radar sensors are dirty or obscured.
• When you drive on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients.
• If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles.

■ Activating and deactivating ECO Assist Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ Assistance

Driving

▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

Function of the route-based operating-mode strategy (plug-in hybrid)

The following function is country-dependent and available only in conjunction with an integrated navigation system.

The route-based operating-mode strategy is active under the following conditions:

• Drive program [H] is selected.
• The "route based" option ( page 225) is selected for drive program [H] in the DYNAMIC SELECT menu.
• Route guidance is active.
• The state of charge of the high-voltage battery is sufficient.

If the function is active, data on the further course of the route is evaluated. This includes e.g. road type, speed limitations and altitude data. The hybrid system then adapts the operating strategy to the further course of the route:

- Use of electrical energy and the combustion engine is adapted.

• The state of charge of the high-voltage battery is controlled accordingly.
• Electrical energy is reserved especially for electric mode, e.g. urban route sections or areas with low emission zones.
• The vehicle automatically selects the operating mode.

Function of the haptic accelerator pedal (plug-in hybrid)

The haptic accelerator pedal has an additional point of resistance followed by increased pedal resistance to help you drive in all-electric mode. Characteristics of the additional point of resistance:

• Available only in drive program EL
- Is used when the electric motor power availability display (POWER) is full
- Indicates the maximum available electric performance

The subsequent increased pedal resistance indicates that the journey is being continued with the combustion engine.

DYNAMIC SELECT button

Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT button

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

▶ Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

Depending on the engine and equipment, the vehicle has different drive programs.

Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change between the following drive programs:

The drive program selected will appear on the driver's display.

Individual

• Individual settings (→ page 225)
- Individual settings (plug-in hybrid) (→ page 225)

S+ Sport+

• Very sporty driving with lowered suspension
- Emphasises the vehicle's own oversteer and understeer characteristics for an even more active driving style
- Suitable only for good road conditions, a dry surface and a clear stretch of road

Sport

• Maximum output is available
• Sporty driving with lowered suspension
- Sporty, but with an emphasis on stability
- Enables a sporty driver to adopt a more active driving style
- Suitable only for good road conditions, a dry surface and a clear stretch of road

Hybrid (plug-in hybrid)

• Comfortable and economical driving
• Balance between traction and stability
- Recommended for all road conditions
• Full development of all intelligent hybrid functions

• Adjustable recuperation in overrun mode
• The selection of the appropriate drive type by the hybrid system depends on the driving conditions and the distance

Comfort

• Comfortable and economical driving
• Balance between traction and stability
- Recommended for all road conditions

Curve

• Available only for vehicles with E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL
• Comfortable driving with curve tilting function
• Balance between traction and stability
• Recommended for all road conditions

Electric (plug-in hybrid)

• Electric mode – driving without the combustion engine is possible up to approximately 140 km/h

• Adjustable recuperation in overrun mode

• Adaptation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC for electric mode

• Depending on the equipment, the maximum set speed for cruise control, the limiter and Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC can be limited to the maximum speed possible in electric mode
• Activation of the combustion engine via the point of resistance of the accelerator pedal (kickdown)

Hold battery (plug-in hybrid)

• Prioritises maintaining the state of charge of the high-voltage battery, e.g. for subsequent journeys in inner-city/low-emission zones
• The selection of the appropriate drive type by the hybrid system depends on the driving conditions and the distance
• Adjustable recuperation in overrun mode

Eco

• Particularly economical driving
• Balance between traction and stability
• Recommended for all road conditions

The ESP® settings in the drive programs E and C are designed for stability. Therefore, choose one of these drive programs especially when transporting roof loads, in trailer operation and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied. Plug-in hybrid: This also applies for drive programs H, EL and B.

Depending on the drive program, the following systems will change their characteristics:

• Drive
• Engine and transmission management
• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
• Availability of Glide mode

- ESP®

• Vehicles with AIRMATIC: suspension

- Suspension and damping

- Vehicle level

- Steering

Selecting the drive program

DYNAMIC

Press the DYNAMIC SELECT button Ⓞ on the left or right. The drive program selected will appear on the driver's display.

Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT in the multimedia system

Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle

DYNAMIC SELECT

Setting drive program I

Select Individual.

Select and set a category.

Switching the reset display on/off

▶ Activate or deactivate Ask when starting.

This function must be activated for each user profile separately. Only when this function is activated will the drive program and ECO start/stop setting for the previous journey be saved for the respective user profile.

Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop function was deactivated, an additional prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated.

① The prompt only appears if the previously active settings deviate from the standard settings.

Function off: the next time the vehicle is started the C drive program is set automatically. The ECO start/stop function is activated automatically.

Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT in the MMS (plug-in hybrid and electric vehicles)

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Vehicle

DYNAMIC SELECT

Setting drive program I

Select Individual.

Select and set a category.

Setting the H drive program

Select Hybrid.

Select Route-based or Standard. If route guidance is active and the Route-based option has been activated, the electri-

cal energy is distributed intelligently over the entire route. In built-up areas, electric mode is preferred, while on the motorway the combustion engine is used.

With the Standard option, the vehicle drives in its standard drive program (EL) Electric or

Hybrid). There is no distribution of electrical energy over the entire route. The high-voltage battery is exhausted and the vehicle is then driven by the combustion engine.

Switching the reset display on/off

▶ Activate or deactivate Ask when starting.

This function must be activated for each user profile separately. The drive program for the respective user profile of the last driver is only stored if this function is activated.

Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored.

The prompt only appears if the previously active settings deviate from the standard settings.

Function off: if the EL drive program was the last one active, and all requirements for the drive program are fulfilled, this will be automatically selected the next time the vehicle is started. If another drive program was active, then the H drive program is set automatically.

Function off: the next time the vehicle is started the C drive program is set automatically.

Displaying vehicle data

Multimedia system:

Select Vehicle. The vehicle data is displayed.

Displaying engine data

Multimedia system:

Select Engine. The engine data is displayed.

The actual (maximum) values that can be achieved for engine output and engine torque

may deviate from the certified values within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines).

Variables that can influence this are, for example:

• Sea level
• Fuel quality
• Outside temperature
• Operating temperature of the engine

Adjust your driving style accordingly.

The warning lamp in the driver's display is on until the engine has reached operating temperature.

The values displayed serve only as orientation. The values for engine output and engine torque shown on the central display may deviate from the actual values.
The warning lamp to show the power output limitation after starting the vehicle is not available in all vehicle models.

Calling up the fuel consumption indicator

Multimedia system:

Info

Select Consumption.

The current and average fuel consumption will be displayed.

Automatic transmission

DIRECT SELECT lever

Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshifting

If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission position [D] or [R], the vehicle may accelerate sharply.

If you engage the transmission position D or R when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time.

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
• Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
- change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Keep the key out of reach of children.

Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position will be shown on the driver's display.

Diagram showing car steering wheel and directional control buttons with labels R, N, P, D, and arrows indicating movement or navigation.

P Park position
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position

Engaging reverse gear R

Engaging neutral N

Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance.
Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance.
To shift into neutral N with the vehicle switched on, push the selector lever up or down for several seconds to the first point of resistance.

Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away.

Proceed as follows if you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, even if the vehicle is switched off or the driver's door is opened:

Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral N when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Release the brake pedal.
▶ Switch off the vehicle.

The Risk of vehicle rolling away N activated manually No automatic switch to P message appears in the driver's display.

If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in the vehicle, the automatic transmission remains in neutral N.

The park position P is automatically re-engaged as soon as one of the following conditions is met:

• You switch to transmission position D or R.
• You press the button P.

Engaging park position P

NOTE Damage due to engaging park position P while the vehicle is rolling

If you shift the transmission into park position P while the vehicle is rolling, the transmission may be damaged.

If the vehicle is rolling, do not open a door.
Only engage the park position P when the vehicle is stationary.

Observe the notes on parking the vehicle ( page 255).
Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill.
When the vehicle is stationary, press button [P]. When the transmission position display shows [P], the park position is engaged. If the transmission position display [P] does not appear, apply the parking brake and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.
Depending on the situation, it may take a short time until is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission position display.

Park position will be engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met:

• You switch the stationary vehicle off in transmission position D or R.

• You open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary in transmission position D or R.

• When the vehicle is rolling, you switch if off in transmission position [D] or [R] and bring it to a standstill.

• When the vehicle is rolling, you shift to transmission position N, bring the vehicle to a standstill and open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary.
• Engaging park position P automatically is required by the vehicle.

To manoeuvre with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while the vehicle is stationary and engage transmission position D or R again.

Engaging drive position D

Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.

When the automatic transmission is in transmission position , it will shift gears automatically. This depends, among other things, on the following factors:

• The selected drive program
• The position of the accelerator pedal

• The driving speed

Manual gearshifting

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

▶ Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

For plug-in hybrids, observe the information regarding the regenerative brake system ( page 219).

Diagram of a car steering wheel with two blue indicator lights labeled 1 and 2, showing dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols beyond labels)

When the automatic transmission is shifted to position D, you can manually shift it with the

steering wheel gearshift paddle. If permitted, the automatic transmission will shift to a higher or lower gear depending on the steering wheel gearshift paddle being pulled.

You have two options for manually shifting the automatic transmission:

• Temporary setting
• Permanent setting

The gears will shift automatically when manual shifting is deactivated.

Temporary setting:

To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle ① or ②. Manual shifting will be activated for a short time. The transmission position display will show M and the current gear.
How long manual shifting stays activated depends on various factors.

Manual shifting can be deactivated automatically in the following cases:

• When the drive program is changed

• When the vehicle is restarted

• When transmission position D is engaged again

• Driving style

To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2.

To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1.

To deactivate: pull and hold steering wheel gearshift paddle ②. The transmission position display will show [D].

You can also activate or deactivate manual shifting permanently in the multimedia system.

Permanently activating or deactivating manual gearshifting

Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle Driving

▶ Permanently switch the function on or off.

Gearshift recommendation

The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style.

50 100% R N P C M9↓8

If gearshift recommendation Ⓞ appears next to the transmission position display, shift to the recommended gear.

Using kickdown

▶ Maximum acceleration: depress the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance.

To protect against engine overrev, the automatic transmission will shift up to the next gear when maximum engine speed has been reached.

Glide mode function

With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption.

Glide mode is characterised by the following:

• The combustion engine is disconnected from the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral.
• The transmission position display D is shown in green.
• Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: The combustion engine can be switched off. All of the vehicle functions remain active.

Glide mode will be activated if the following conditions are met:

• Drive program E is selected.
  • The speed is within a suitable range.

• The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep uphill or downhill gradients or tight bends.

• There is no trailer hitched up to the trailer hitch, and no bicycle rack fitted.

• You do not depress the accelerator or brake pedal (except for light brake applications).

Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the drive program.

Glide mode will be deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met.

Glide mode can also be prevented by the following parameters:

• Incline
• Downhill gradient
• Temperature
• Height
• speed
• Traffic situation

• Operating status of the engine

Function of 4MATIC

4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insufficient traction.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather or traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible especially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane.

In wintry road conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if necessary.

Refuelling

Refuelling the vehicle

⚠ WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel

Fuels are highly flammable.

▶ Fire, naked flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided.
Before refuelling, switch off the vehicle and, if fitted, the stationary heater and keep switched off during filling.

WARNING Risk of injury from fuels

Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.

Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not inhale fuel vapour.
▶ Keep children away from fuel.
Keep doors and windows closed during the refuelling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following:

Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.
If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.
If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do not induce vomiting.
Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.

WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapour.

Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body.

To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process.

WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture

Vehicles with a diesel engine:

If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.

While the vehicle is running, component parts in the exhaust system may overheat without warning.

▶ Never refuel using petrol.
▶ Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.

NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Vehicles with a petrol engine:

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free spark-ignition engine fuel that conforms

to European EN 228, or an equivalent specification.

Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel.

Never refuel with one of the following fuels:

• Diesel
  • Regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON
• Petrol with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100
• Petrol with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30
  • Petrol with additives containing metal

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

▶ Do not switch on the vehicle.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Vehicles with a diesel engine:

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel fuel that conforms to European standard EN 590, or an equivalent specification. In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 50 ppm.

Never refuel with one of the following fuels:

• Petrol
• Marine diesel
• Heating oil
  • Pure bio-diesel or vegetable oil
• Paraffin or kerosene

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

Do not switch on the vehicle.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

! NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

- Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

! NOTE Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

• Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.
  Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
  Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

NOTE Damage to the fuel system due to overfilling the fuel tank

Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

If too much fuel has been added due, for example, to a faulty filling pump:

▶ Do not switch on the vehicle.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle

Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

Requirements

• The vehicle must be unlocked.
- Plug-in hybrid with petrol engine: The fuel tank was vented before refuelling ( page 235). This function is country-dependent.

Observe the notes on service products and fuel. The recommended octane number for your vehicle can be found on the information label in the fuel filler flap.

Diagram showing car seatbelt adjustment steps with numbered labels and directional arrows

① Fuel filler flap
② Bracket for fuel filler cap
3 Tyre pressure table
QR code for rescue card
5 Fuel type

i Plug-in hybrid with a petrol engine: The fuel filler flap opens automatically after the fuel tank has been vented (→ page 235).

Press on the rear part of fuel filler flap ①.
Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it.
Insert fuel filler cap from above into bracket ^2 .
Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel.
Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

Vehicles with a diesel engine: The tank filler neck is designed for refuelling at diesel filling pumps. Your vehicle is equipped with a system that prevents filling up with the wrong fuel. This function may be deactivated in some countries due to local circumstances. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

① Vehicles with a diesel engine: Refuel with at least 5 litres of diesel if the fuel tank has been run dry completely.

① Vehicles with a diesel engine: Use a filler neck with a large diameter for vehicles with a diesel engine when topping up fuel from a fuel can. Otherwise, the filler neck cannot be pushed into the tank shaft.
Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly.
Close fuel filler flap ①.

Depressurising the fuel tank (plug-in hybrid with petrol engine)

Diagram showing car interior with labeled parts and a zoomed-in view of the door panel

Pull switch ① once briefly. Indicator lamp ② will flash and the Please wait Depressurising fuel tank message will appear on the driver's display. When the fuel tank is depressurised, indicator lamp ② will light up continuously.

The Fuel tank is depressurised Ready for refuelling message will appear on the driver's display and the fuel filler flap will open automatically.

(i) Depressurising the fuel tank may take several minutes.

The fuel tank can be depressurised only if the conditions described above are fulfilled. Otherwise, drive the vehicle at least 0.5 km and repeat the process.

① In the following situations, there is a malfunction:

• Indicator lamp ② flashes initially and then goes out.
• The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp lights up.

NOTE Damage to the fuel filler flap when opening it

If an attempt is made to open a fuel filler flap that is not unlocked, the fuel filler flap or the opening mechanism may be damaged.

▶ Only refuel when the fuel filler flap has opened automatically.

AdBlue ^® (vehicles with a diesel engine only)

Notes on topping up AdBlue®

AdBlue ^® is a water-soluble fluid for the NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. In order for the exhaust gas aftertreatment to function properly, only use AdBlue ^® in accordance with ISO 22241.

AdBlue ^® is characterised by the following:

• non-toxic
  • colourless and odourless
• non-flammable

If you open the AdBlue ^® tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may be released. Only fill the AdBlue ^® tank in well-ventilated areas.

Do not let AdBlue ^® come into contact with skin, eyes or clothes. Keep AdBlue ^® away from children.

Do not ingest AdBlue®. If AdBlue® is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Drink plenty of water. Seek medical attention at once.

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 497).

AdBlue ^® is available here:

• AdBlue® can be topped up by fast service at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
• AdBlue® is available at many filling stations from AdBlue® filling pumps.
• Alternatively, AdBlue ^ is available at qualified specialist workshops, e.g. Mercedes-Benz Service Centres, and at many filling stations in AdBlue ^ refill canisters or AdBlue ^ refill bottles.

i Ensure the connection between the refill container and vehicle filler neck does not drip.

Topping up AdBlue®

NOTE Engine damage due to AdBlue® being in the fuel

AdBlue® must not be used to fill the fuel tank.
Only use AdBlue ^® to fill the AdBlue ^® tank.
Do not overfill the AdBlue ^® tank.

NOTE Contamination of the vehicle interior due to AdBlue® leakage

After topping up, carefully close the AdBlue® refill container.
Avoid carrying AdBlue® refill containers permanently in the vehicle.

Requirements

• The vehicle is unlocked.

The following messages appear in order in the driver's display when the AdBlue ^® tank requires refilling:

• Refill AdBlue See Owner's Manual. The AdBlue® level has fallen into the reserve range. Refill AdBlue® immediately.
• Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX km See Owner's Manual. The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance after the remaining distance displayed has been covered. Refill AdBlue® immediately.
• Top up AdBlue XX,X | Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km. The low AdBlue® level will lead to an output restriction from the speed displayed. After the remaining distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle. Refill at least the indicated amount of AdBlue®.
• Top up AdBlue XX,X | Switch vehicle on, wait 60 sec. or engine start not poss.. The AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the vehicle. Refill at least the indicated amount of AdBlue®. Switch on the vehicle and

wait for approximately 60 seconds. Start the vehicle.

You can see the AdBlue ^® range and level in the Service menu in the driver's display.

The AdBlue ^® range shown depends strongly on the driving style and operating conditions. The actual range can therefore differ from the calculated range.

Opening the AdBlue ^® filler cap

Diagram showing car charging plug with labeled parts and directional arrow indicator

Press on the rear part of fuel filler flap ①.
Turn AdBlue ^® filler cap ② anti-clockwise and remove it.
You can also place the AdBlue® filler cap in the fuel filler cap holder in the fuel filler flap hinge arm.

Topping up AdBlue®

Mercedes-Benz recommends refilling AdBlue ^® at a filling pump. If no AdBlue ^® filling pump is available, you can also top up AdBlue ^® using a canister.

Diagram showing a car charging plug with labeled parts, including cable routing and battery connections.

Screw on the fastener of AdBlue® refill canister ④.

Screw the disposable hose ③ onto the opening of AdBlue® refill canister ④ until hand-tight.
Screw the disposable hose ③ onto the filler neck of the vehicle until hand-tight.
Lift up and tip AdBlue ^® refill canister ④. The filling process stops when the AdBlue ^® tank is completely full.
The AdBlue ^® refill canister ④ can be removed even if it has been only partially emptied.
Unscrew and close the disposable hose ③ and AdBlue® refill canister ④ in reverse order.
Replace AdBlue® filler cap ② and turn it clockwise until it audibly engages.
Close fuel filler flap ①.
▶ Switch on the vehicle for at least 60 seconds.
If the vehicle could not be started because the AdBlue ^® tank was empty, it can take up to 60 seconds for the refill to be detected.
Start the vehicle.

Avoid storing AdBlue ^® refill containers permanently in the vehicle.

Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

Notes on charging the high-voltage battery

NOTE High-voltage battery damage due to leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods of time

Lithium-ion batteries experience a natural self-discharge.

Exhaustive discharging can therefore occur if the vehicle is idle for several months. This can damage the high-voltage battery.

To avoid damage, please observe the following recommendations when handling the high-voltage battery.

NOTE Accelerated ageing of the high-voltage battery due to not observing the following recommendations

As a result of its basic characteristics, the storage capacity of and the amount of energy available from the high-voltage battery decreases over the course of its life. Due to this, both the maximum electrical range that can be achieved by the vehicle and its maximum electrical output can be impaired.

The following factors could accelerate the ageing of the high-voltage battery:

• a high level of charge, especially if the vehicle is idle for a lengthy period of time
• frequent rapid charging with direct current (mode 4)
  • leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods at high ambient temperatures

To avoid accelerated ageing, please observe the following recommendations when handling the high-voltage battery.

Recommendations when handling the high-voltage battery:

• Only charge the high-voltage battery with direct current (mode 4) if necessary.
• If leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods, park up the vehicle with a high-voltage battery charge level between 25% and 30%. Do not keep the high-voltage battery continuously connected to power supply equipment.
• If leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods of time avoid, if possible, high ambient temperatures.
• Check the high-voltage battery's charge level every six weeks ( page 255).
• Charge the high-voltage battery if the charge level is below 15%.
• Do not disconnect the 12 V battery even if the vehicle is left idle for a lengthy period. Otherwise, the condition of the vehicle's high-voltage battery cannot be monitored.
• If the high-voltage battery is only used with low charge levels, fully charge the high-voltage battery every six months.

Depending on the equipment and national version, your vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets:

• Type 1 for charging with alternating current (mode 2/3)
• Combo 1 for charging with alternating current (mode 2/3) and charging with direct current (mode 4)
• Type 2 for charging with alternating current (mode 2/3)
• Combo 2 for charging with alternating current (mode 2/3) and charging with direct current (mode 4)

Technical line drawing of a car interior showing a close-up of the engine compartment with numbered components (no text or symbols)

Combo 1 vehicle socket Combo 2 vehicle socket

Technical diagram of an electric vehicle's electrical plug with labeled components (no text or symbols present)

① Type 1 or type 2 connection for charging with alternating current
② Socket extension for charging with direct current
When using a CCS (Combined Charging System) charging cable to charge with direct current at a combo vehicle socket, both vehicle

socket connections ① and ② are used for charging.

Charging options for the high-voltage battery (mode 2, 3 or 4):

• Charging through recuperation while the vehicle is in motion
• Charging with alternating current when stationary:
• at a mains socket (mode 2)
• at a wallbox or charging station (mode 3)
• Charging with direct current when stationary (vehicles with combo vehicle sockets):
• at a rapid charging station (mode 4)

Depending on the country-specific vehicle equipment and your vehicle's charging cable, single phase AC charging is also possible.

Observe the different grid requirements of your current location when charging. Only use charging cables which conform to the grid requirements.

Consult a qualified electrician or your local grid operator if you have any questions.

It is recommended that you charge the high-voltage battery at a wallbox or charging station due to the improved charging performance and better charging efficiency offered.

System limits

The power output of the high-voltage battery may be impaired by the following:

• High or low outside temperatures
- Electrical auxiliary consumers in the vehicle being switched on, e.g. operating the air conditioning system
• Extended periods without charging

The charging time of the high-voltage battery may be increased by the following:

• High or low outside temperatures
• Extended periods without charging
- The maximum available charge current of the charging facility

Stowing the charging cable

Always stow the vehicle's charging cable in the charging cable bag provided in the boot.

Place the charging cable bag on the boot floor. Otherwise, the charging cable bag with the charging cable is not sufficiently secured.

Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at the mains socket (mode 2)

DANGER Risk of fatal injury from incorrectly installed component parts

Connecting the charging cable to a mains socket using incorrectly installed component parts could cause a fire or an electric shock, for example.

Only connect the charging cable to a mains socket that:
- Has been properly installed and
- Has been inspected by a qualified electrician

For safety reasons, only use the charging cable supplied with the vehicle or an original Mercedes-Benz charging cable.
Purchase these parts at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre and obtain advice there.

Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these original charging cables for their suitability for high-voltage charging of your vehicle.

▶ Never use a damaged charging cable.

Do not use:

• Extension cables
• Extension reels
• Multiple sockets

▶ Never use socket adapters to connect the charging cable to the mains socket. The only exception being if the adapter has been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery of an electric vehicle.

Observe the safety notes in the operating instructions for the socket adapter.

Only the following charging cables may be used:

• The charging cable supplied with the vehicle.
- A charging cable that has been approved for the vehicle.

The charging process can vary depending on the power supply equipment. The charging times when charging the high-voltage battery at the mains socket are considerably longer than when charging at a wallbox or charging station.

When doing so, always observe the local information.

Do not leave the charging cable controls hanging loose from a mains socket.

Do not lift the controls by the following component parts:

• the charging cable connector
- the mains plug

When charging, protect the charging cable control element from excessive heat such as direct sun-

light. Otherwise, the charging process may be cancelled.

Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at a wallbox or charging station (mode 3)

DANGER Risk of fatal injury from incorrectly installed component parts

Connecting the charging cable to a wallbox using incorrectly installed component parts could cause a fire or an electric shock, for example.

▶ Only connect the charging cable to a wallbox that:
- Has been properly installed and
- Has been inspected by a qualified electrician
For safety reasons, only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.

▶ Never use damaged charging cables.
Do not extend the charging cable.
Do not use adapters.
Observe the safety notes in the operating instructions for the wallbox.

If charging at a wallbox without pre-installed cable, use the optionally available charging cable for wallbox and charging station (mode 3). The charging cable is stowed in a bag in the boot/luggage compartment.

Only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to damaged components

If you use a damaged component to connect the vehicle to the charging station, this can result in fire or an electric shock, for example.

Perform a visual inspection of the charging station for obvious defects, e.g. dam-

age to the housing or on the charging cable connection.
At charging stations without a pre-installed cable, for safety reasons, only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.
Do not use a damaged charging cable.
Do not use an extension for the charging cable.
Do not use an adapter.
▶ Always observe the safety information on the charging station.

Most charging stations must be activated before the charging process, e.g. using an RFID card. Observe the on-site operator's instructions for the charging station.

The amount of energy dispensed for the charging process, shown by the charging station, may be higher than the amount of energy actually absorbed by the high-voltage battery. This is the result of different levels of charging losses and is descri-

bed as recharge efficiency. Charging losses occur, for example, due to heat that builds up when the vehicle is charging or from auxiliary consumers that are switched on. Further information on recharge efficiency can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at a rapid charging station (mode 4)

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to damaged components

If you use a damaged component to connect the vehicle to the charging station, this can result in fire or an electric shock, for example.

Perform a visual inspection of the charging station for obvious defects, e.g. damage to the housing or on the charging cable connection.
At charging stations without a pre-installed cable, for safety reasons, only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for

charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.

Do not use a damaged charging cable.
Do not use an extension for the charging cable.
Do not use an adapter.
▶ Always observe the safety information on the charging station.

A DANGER Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during the charging process

During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage.

Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging process.

Most charging stations must be activated before the charging process, e.g. using an RFID card. Observe the on-site operator's instructions for the charging station.

The charging cable for the vehicle must not be longer than 30 m due to the legal requirements in some countries. This is to prevent the interference of signals being received by radio communication devices in the vehicle or in close proximity to the charging station. Be aware that parts of the charging cable may be routed underground. If in doubt, ask the charging station operator if this is the case before charging the high-voltage battery.

The amount of energy dispensed for the charging process, shown by the charging station, may be higher than the amount of energy actually absorbed by the high-voltage battery. This is the result of different levels of charging losses and is described as recharge efficiency. Charging losses occur, for example, due to heat that builds up when the vehicle is charging or from auxiliary consumers that are switched on. Further information on recharge efficiency can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting the maximum permissible charging current for charging at a mains socket

NOTE Overloading the mains socket due to excessive charging current

If the charging current is too high, the fuse could be tripped or the external mains supply could overheat.

▶ Ensure that the external mains supply has been designed to handle the charging current provided.
For safety reasons, only use the charging cable supplied with the vehicle or an original Mercedes-Benz charging cable. Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these original charging cables for their suitability for high-voltage charging of your vehicle.
Purchase these parts at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre and obtain advice there.

Check the maximum charging current using the charging capacity shown in the driver's display.

The charging cable supplied is set to a country-specific maximum charging current value. When charging abroad, the maximum value may exceed the permitted value for that country.

Before charging at a mains socket, have the maximum permissible charging current for the relevant mains socket or the building inspected by a qualified electrician.
When abroad, observe the country-specific laws when charging.

If you have questions concerning the charging current or if there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Overview of the charging cable control panel

The charging cable control panel shows the current status of the charging process.

① ② ③ ④

① Supply voltage indicator
② Charging process indicator
3 Temperature monitor indicator
4 Safety system indicator

Supply voltage indicator ①

Display Meaning

Lights up white The supply voltage is connected.

Charging process indicator ②

Display Meaning

Flashes green The high-voltage battery is charging.

Temperature control indicator ③

Display Meaning

Lights up red The green LED flashes simultaneously: over-temperature - the charging performance is reduced. The green LED does not flash: overtemperature - the charging process is stopped.

Flashes red Overtemperature at the mains plug - the charging process is stopped.

Safety system indicator ④

Display Meaning

Flashes red Charging cable mal- function - cannot carry out the charging process, reset the charging cable operat- ing unit.

Lights up red White LED is off: power supply malfunction - cannot carry out the charging process, replace the mains socket. White LED is on: vehicle malfunction - cannot carry out the charging process, reset the charging cable operating unit.

When all four displays light up, the charging cable operating unit performs a self-test.

If temperature monitor ③ indicates a malfunction, it may help to protect the charging cable from direct sunlight.

To reset the charging cable operating unit: if safety system ④ indicates a charging cable malfunction or a vehicle malfunction, first reset the charging cable operating unit. To do this, disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle and from the mains socket and wait for approximately five seconds. If the malfunction persists after the charging cable is reconnected, charging at the mains socket is not possible. The charging cable must be replaced or the vehicle plug must be checked at a qualified specialist workshop, depending on the indicator.

Functions of the indicator lamps on the vehicle socket

Depending on the national version, your vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets.

The socket flap is centrally locked and unlocked together with the vehicle.

Technical diagram of a car interior with labeled parts and an inset view showing a device dial.

Combo 1 vehicle socket

① Socket lamp
② Charging process indicator lamp
③ Locking status indicator lamp

Technical diagram showing a car's internal components with numbered labels and an inset close-up of the connector pin.

Combo 2 vehicle socket

1 Socket lamp
2 Charging process indicator lamp
3 Locking status indicator lamp

The upper arch of socket lamp ① is used for the lighting and flashes or lights up as with indicator lamp ③. The lower arch is used for the status

display and flashes or lights up as with indicator lamp ②.

Overview of the locking status

Locking sta- 3	Display Meaning
	Lights up white	Vehicle socket unlocked, insert or remove charging cable
	Flashes white Malfunction	during locking or unlocking

Overview of the charging process status

Status of the charging process 2	Display Meaning
	Flashes	Connection is being estab-lished
	Flashes green Active energy flow
	Lights up orange	Interruption in charging
	Lights up green	Charging process com-pleted
	Flashes red (for approx. 90 s)	Vehicle mal-function; charging is not possible

Starting the alternating current charging process (mode 2/3)

DANGER Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket

The charging process uses high voltage. If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are damaged, you could receive an electric shock.

▶ Only use an undamaged charging cable.
Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driving over the cable.
Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
▶ Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle socket.

NOTE Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charge port

During the charging process, the charging cable and charge port can heat up within the permissible limits.

The permissible limit values are influenced by the following factors:

• the power supply system and the charging cable are not damaged
• the instructions for handling the charging cable and the control element on the charging cable have been observed
  If the charging cable or charge port becomes too hot, have the power supply system checked.

NOTE Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket flap is open
Always keep the socket cover and the socket flap closed when there is no charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle socket from dirt and damage.

Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before closing the socket flap. This can otherwise result in damage which may prevent the socket flap from being opened again.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle socket or the charging cable connector due to incorrect handling

Do not use excessive force (maximum 300 N) to insert the charging cable connector into the vehicle socket to the stop. You may otherwise damage the vehicle socket, the charging cable connector or their contacts.

If you feel there is increased resistance, pull the charging cable connector out of the socket and reinsert it.

Requirements

• The transmission is in position P.

• The vehicle is unlocked or the distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.

• The vehicle is switched off. The READY display in the driver's display is off.
  • The charging cable is not taut.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment and on the national version, your vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets:

• Type 1 for charging with alternating current (mode 2 or 3)
• Combo 1 for charging with alternating current (mode 2 or 3) and charging with direct current (mode 4)
• Type 2 for charging with alternating current (mode 2 or 3)
• Combo 2 for charging with alternating current (mode 2 or 3) and charging with direct current (mode 4)

Diagram of car interior components with numbered labels pointing to a specific component, including a zoomed-in inset view.

Combo 1 vehicle socket Combo 2 vehicle socket

Diagram of car interior with numbered component labels and an inset close-up showing internal wiring or wiring connections.

Press the centre rear section of socket flap ① and swing the socket flap forwards and open.
The 📊 indicator lamp ③ and upper status display ④ light up white.
i Socket flap ① can also be opened via the multimedia system ( page 391).

When the vehicle is switched on (the READY display is lit in the driver's display), socket flap ① cannot be opened.

Press catch ⑦ to the right and fold up socket cover ②.
① Vehicles with a vehicle socket combo require only connection ⑥ for the charging cable connector. Open only the upper part of socket cover ②.
To charge at a mains socket, insert the mains plug into the mains socket of the external power source as far as it will go.
Insert the charging cable connector into vehicle socket connection ⑥ to the stop. If the wallbox/charging station is not equipped with a charging cable, insert the plug of the vehicle's charging cable into the wallbox/charging station socket to the stop. Make sure that the charging cable is not taut when inserted.

The indicator lamp ⑤ and lower status display ④ flash orange and, as soon as the high-voltage battery is charged, green.

When the charging sequence for the ambient lighting is activated, the ambient lighting lights up for approximately 30 seconds as with the indicator lamp (→ page 178).

When the charging cable is connected to the vehicle, the vehicle cannot be started or moved.

At the start of the charging process, the charge level display is shown in the driver's display with a charging prediction. The charging prediction refers to the time at which the high-voltage battery will be fully charged.

Depending on the temperature, the fan and battery cooling system may audibly switch on during the charging process.
If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and connected to the mains supply, the high-voltage battery will be recharged automatically as needed or when electrical consumers are activated (e.g. the pre-entry climate control).
The vehicle is equipped with an electrical fuse which protects it against overvoltage in the mains supply. This electrical fuse may trip during severe thunderstorms, for example, and may cause the fuse in the building to trip or

may interrupt the charging process. These functions protect the vehicle. After the fuse in the building is switched on again, the charging process resumes automatically. Following an interruption in the power supply without the fuse in the building being tripped, it may take up to ten minutes for charging to resume automatically.

Ending the alternating current charging process (mode 2/3)

Requirements

- The distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.

Combo 1 vehicle socket

Diagram showing car electrical plug with labeled parts and a magnified inset highlighting a component

① Vehicles equipped with a type 1 vehicle socket for AC charging have no charging interruption button ③.

Combo 1 vehicle socket: press charging interruption button ③.
The charging process is ended. The indicator lamp lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.
Type 1 vehicle socket: unlock the vehicle. The charging process is ended. The indicator lamp lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.
Press and hold button ② on the charging cable connector and remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket.
If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, repeat the unlocking procedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Close the socket cover and the socket flap.
Remove the charging cable connector from the mains socket, or from the socket on the wallbox/charging station, and stow the vehicle's charging cable safely in the vehicle (→ page 241).

Combo 2 vehicle socket

Line drawing of an electric vehicle's rear panel showing internal components and a close-up view of the plug (no text or symbols)

① Vehicles only equipped with a type 2 vehicle socket for AC charging have no charging interruption button ②.

Combo 2 vehicle socket: press charging interruption button ②.
The charging process is ended. The indicator lamp ① lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.
Type 2 vehicle socket: unlock the vehicle. The charging process is ended. The indicator lamp lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.
Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket within 30 seconds. After the 30 seconds have elapsed, the vehicle socket will be locked again.
If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, repeat the unlocking procedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Close the socket cover and the socket flap.
Remove the charging cable connector from the mains socket, or from the socket on the wallbox/charging station, and stow the vehicle's charging cable safely in the vehicle ( page 241).

After the charging cable connector has been disconnected, the indicator lamp on the vehicle socket remains lit for some time before switching off.

Starting the direct current charging process (mode 4)

DANGER Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket

The charging process uses high voltage. If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are damaged, you could receive an electric shock.

▶ Only use an undamaged charging cable.
Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driving over the cable.
Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
▶ Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle socket.

NOTE Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charge port

During the charging process, the charging cable and charge port can heat up within the permissible limits.

The permissible limit values are influenced by the following factors:

• the power supply system and the charging cable are not damaged
• the instructions for handling the charging cable and the control element on the charging cable have been observed
  If the charging cable or charge port becomes too hot, have the power supply system checked.

NOTE Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket flap is open
Always keep the socket cover and the socket flap closed when there is no charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle socket from dirt and damage.

Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before closing the socket flap. This can otherwise result in damage which may prevent the socket flap from being opened again.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle socket or the charging cable connector due to incorrect handling

Do not use excessive force (maximum 300 N) to insert the charging cable connector into the vehicle socket to the stop. You may otherwise damage the vehicle socket, the charging cable connector or their contacts.

If you feel there is increased resistance, pull the charging cable connector out of the socket and reinsert it.

Requirements

• The transmission is in position P.
- The vehicle is unlocked or the distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.

• The vehicle is not switched on. The READY display in the driver's display is off.
  • The charging cable is not taut.

Depending on the national version, the vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets.

Diagram of car interior with numbered parts and a magnified inset showing internal components

Combo 1 vehicle socket

Diagram of car interior with numbered component labels and an inset close-up showing internal wiring or wiring connections.

Combo 2 vehicle socket

Press the centre rear section of socket flap ① and swing the socket flap forwards and open.
The 📊 indicator lamp ③ and upper status display ④ light up white.

i Socket flap ① can also be opened via the multimedia system ( page 391).

When the vehicle is switched on (the READY display is lit in the driver's display), socket flap ① cannot be opened.

Press catch ⑦ to the right and fold up socket cover ②.
The CCS charging cable connector requires connections 6 and 8. Therefore, it is necessary to open both parts of socket cover 2.
Insert the CCS charging cable connector into the vehicle socket to the stop. Make sure that the charging cable is not taut when inserted.

The indicator lamp 5 and lower status display 4 flash orange and, as soon as the high-voltage battery is charged, green.

When the charging sequence for the ambient lighting is activated, the ambient lighting lights up for approximately 30 seconds as with the indicator lamp (→ page 178).

When the charging cable is connected to the vehicle, the vehicle cannot be started or moved.

At the start of the charging process, the charge level display is shown in the driver's display with a

charging prediction. The charging prediction refers to the time at which the high-voltage battery will be fully charged.

Depending on the temperature, the fan and battery cooling system may audibly switch on during the charging process.
If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and connected to the mains supply, the high-voltage battery will be recharged automatically as needed or when electrical consumers are activated (e.g. the pre-entry climate control).

Ending the direct current charging process (mode 4)

Requirements

- The distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.

Combo 1 vehicle socket

Diagram showing car electrical plug with labeled parts and a magnified inset highlighting a component

Press charging interruption button ③. The charging process is ended. The indicator lamp ① lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.
Press and hold button ② on the charging cable connector and remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket.

If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, unlock the vehicle and repeat the procedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Close the socket cover and the socket flap.

Combo 2 vehicle socket

Diagram of an electric vehicle charging plug with labeled parts, showing internal wiring and mounting bracket (no text or symbols present)

Press charging interruption button ②. The charging process is ended. The indicator lamp ① lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.
Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket.

If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, unlock the vehicle and repeat the procedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Close the socket cover and the socket flap.
After the charging cable connector has been disconnected, the left 📋 indicator lamp on the vehicle socket remains lit for some time before switching off.

Function of the charge level display in the driver's display

1 Dutyary Display 85 um 2 400% max 30% 3 4 Standard Display 50 min 6

① Range at current charge level
2 Current state of charge of the high-voltage battery
3 Maximum state of charge (depending on the setting)
4 Time remaining until completely charged (until the selected maximum charge level is reached)
5 Dynamic charge level display
6 Current charging capacity

① Specified remaining range ① may vary due to different factors, e.g. driving style or topography.
When the vehicle is connected to the mains supply and is switched off, the driver's display shows the charge level display for approximately two minutes.
① The value of current charging capacity ⑥ can differ from the display on the charging station.

Parking

Parking the vehicle

WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured vehicle rolling away

If the vehicle is not securely parked sufficiently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient.

On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the kerb if it starts moving.

apply the parking brake.
▶ Switch the transmission to position P.

WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts

Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite.

Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components.
In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields.

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.

- Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
- change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Keep the key out of reach of children.

! NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away

Always secure the vehicle against rolling away.

NOTE Damage due to the vehicle lowering

Vehicles with AIRMATIC or E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: The vehicle can lower because of temperature differences or longer non-operational times. This can cause damage to parts of the body.

When stopping the vehicle and when driving off, make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs under or in the immediate vicinity of the body.

ENGINE START / STOP

Bring the vehicle to a standstill by depressing the brake pedal.
On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the kerb if it starts moving.
Apply the electric parking brake.

Engage transmission position P in a stationary vehicle with the brake pedal depressed ( page 228).
Switch off the vehicle by pressing button ①.
Release the service brake slowly.
▶ Get out of the vehicle and lock it.
When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed.

Electric parking brake

Function of the electric parking brake (applying automatically)

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle
If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular
- Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.

• get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
- Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.

• change the gearbox setting.

- start the vehicle.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Keep the key out of reach of children.

The electric parking brake is applied if the transmission is in position P and one of the following conditions is fulfilled:

• The vehicle is switched off.
- The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.

To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake ( page 259).

In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also applied:

• The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary.
  • Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary.
  • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing the vehicle to a standstill.
• In addition, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled:
• The vehicle is switched off.
• The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.
  There is a system malfunction.
• The power supply is insufficient.
• The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.

When the electric parking brake is applied, the red Ⓗ indicator lamp lights up in the driver's display.

The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the vehicle is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

■ Function of the electric parking brake (releasing automatically)

The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are fulfilled:

• The driver's door is closed.
• The vehicle has been started.
- The transmission is in position D or R and you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission position P to D or R when on level ground.
- If the transmission is in position , the boot lid must be closed.
- The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat.

If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled:

• You shift from transmission position [P]. or
• You have previously driven at speeds greater than 3 km/h.

When the electric parking brake is released, the red indicator lamp in the driver's display goes out.

■ Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually

Applying

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and parking seat (no visible text or symbols)

Push handle ①. The red (P) indicator lamp lights up in the driver's display.

The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the red (P) indicator lamp is lit continuously.

Releasing

Switch on the vehicle.

Pull handle ①. The red (P) indicator lamp in the driver's display goes out.

Emergency braking

Press and hold handle Ⓐ. As long as the vehicle is in motion, the Release parking brake message is displayed and the red Ⓞ indicator lamp flashes. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The red Ⓟ indicator lamp lights up in the driver's display.

Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle

If a collision is detected on the locked vehicle when towing protection is switched on and colli-

sion detection is switched on, you will receive a message in the multimedia system when the vehicle is switched on.

You will receive information about the following points:

• The area of the vehicle that may have been damaged.
  • The force of the impact.

The following situation can lead to inadvertent activation:

- The parked vehicle is moved, forexample, in a two-storey garage.

i Deactivate tow-away protection in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deactivate tow-away protection, collision detection will also be deactivated. You can permanently deactivate collision detection via the multimedia system ( page 260).

System limits

Detection may be restricted in the following situations:

• the vehicle is damaged without impact, forexample, if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is damaged by a key
  • an impact occurs at low speed
  • the electric parking brake is not applied

You are responsible for your vehicle. Convince yourself that your vehicle is free of damage and roadworthy.

Setting collision detection on a parked vehicle

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Vehicle → Open/close → Vehicle protection

Activate or deactivate the function via Collision notification.
A maximum of three incidents can be registered. Up to 15 photos are taken for every incident. In the event of another incident, the

photos of the first incident will be overwritten if they have not been deleted already.

Activating or deactivating the collision photos function

Note possible legal restrictions in some countries regarding automatic recording of the vehicle surroundings.

▶ Activate or deactivate Collision photos.

Transferring the collision photos with the Mercedes me App

▶ Select Upload collision photos.
▶ Select Upload automatically.
Scan the generated QR code on the central display with the Mercedes me App. The encrypted collision photos will then be uploaded to Mercedes me.
① Any device that can scan QR codes can be used to view the collision photos in the Mercedes me App.

Copying the collision photos to a USB flash drive

Connect a USB flash drive.

▶ Select Manage collision photos.
Select Copy (USB). All collision photos are copied to the USB flash drive.
To ensure secure operation, only use with FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage devices.

Deleting collision photos

▶ Select Manage collision photos.
Select Delete. All collision photos will be deleted.

Notes on parking up the vehicle

If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse.

The 12 V battery may also be impaired or damaged by heavy discharging.

i Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Standby mode (extension of the starter battery's period out of use)

Standby mode function

This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimised during extended periods of non-operation.

Standby mode is characterised by the following:

• The starter battery is preserved.
- The maximum non-operational time appears in the driver's display.
- The connection to online services is interrupted.

If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system:

• The vehicle is switched on.
• The vehicle has not been started.

Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-operational time may cause inconvenience; i.e. it cannot be

guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the vehicle.

Charge the starter battery in the following situations:

• The vehicle's non-operational time has to be extended.
• The starter battery charge level is insufficient for standby mode.

i Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the vehicle is switched on.

Activating/deactivating standby mode (parking up the vehicle)

Requirements:

• The power supply is switched on.
• The vehicle is not switched on.

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Vehicle
▶ Other functions

▶ Activate or deactivate Standby mode.

Driving and driving safety systems

Driving systems and your responsibility

Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and manoeuvring the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for you paying attention to your surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems.

Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into account road, weather or traffic conditions.

Some driving systems can regulate or limit the speed to a previously set value. Draw attention to the stored speed when changing drivers.

Information on vehicle sensors and cameras

Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle.

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦

Diagram of a car's front view with numbered components and labeled parts, likely for electronics or diagnostic purposes.

1 Multifunction camera
② Cameras in the outside mirrors
3 Front radar
4 Front camera
5 Corner radars
6 Ultrasonic sensors
7 Reversing camera

WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted detection performance of vehicle sensors and cameras

If the area around vehicle sensors or cameras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. There is a risk of an accident.

Keep the area around vehicle sensors or cameras clear of any obstructions and clean.
Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.

Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush ( page 442). The sensors and cameras must not be covered and the detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional licence plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras.

Make sure that there are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range.

If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grille, or after an impact, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.

The reversing camera can extend and retract automatically for the purpose of calibration, even though there is no camera image in the display.

Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems

• ABS (→ page 264)
• BAS (→ page 264)
• ESP ^ (→ page 264)
• ESP® Crosswind Assist (→ page 265)
• ESP ^ trailer stabilisation (→ page 266)
  • EBD ( page 266)
  • STEER CONTROL ( page 266)

• HOLD function ( page 267)
• Hill Start Assist ( page 268)
• Adaptive Brake Lights ( page 268)
• ATTENTION ASSIST ( page 269)
- Limiter (→ page 271)
• Traffic Sign Assist ( page 291)
• Traffic light view ( page 294)
• AIRMATIC ( page 301)
• E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL ( page 303)

Driving Assistance Package

The availability of some functions or sub-functions of the Driving Assistance Package is equipment- or country-specific. The functions of your Driving Assistance Package may differ from the functions listed here.

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( page 272)
• Active Speed Limit Assist ( page 277)
• Route-based speed adaptation ( page 278)
• Active Brake Assist ( page 286)
• Active Steering Assist ( page 280)

• Active Emergency Stop Assist ( page 282)
• Active Lane Change Assist ( page 284)
• Active Stop-and-Go Assist ( page 280)
• Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning ( page 295)
• Active Lane Keeping Assist ( page 298)
- PRE-SAFE ^ Impulse Side (→ page 51)

Parking Package

The availability of individual functions depends on the country and equipment.
• Reversing camera ( page 306)
• 360° Camera ( page 308)
• Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( page 314)
• Active Parking Assist ( page 318)
• Remote Parking Assist ( page 323)
• Memory Parking Assist (country-dependent) ( page 330)

Functions of ABS

The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations:

• During braking, for instance, at maximum full-stop braking or if there is insufficient tyre traction, the wheels are prevented from locking.
  • Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving.

System limits

• ABS is active from speeds of approx. 5 km/h.
- ABS may be impaired or may not function if a malfunction has occurred and the yellow ABS warning lamp lights up continuously after the vehicle is started.

Function of BAS

WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist System)

If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased.

Depress the brake pedal with full force in emergency braking situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force.

If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated:

• BAS automatically boosts the brake pressure.
• BAS can shorten the braking distance.
• ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

Function of ESP®

⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated

If you deactivate ESP ^® , ESP ^® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation.

ESP® should only be deactivated in the following situations.

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP ^® ) can monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations within physical limits:

• When pulling away on wet or slippery carriageways.
• When braking.

If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP ^® can stabilise the vehicle by intervening in the following ways:

• One or more wheels are braked.
- The engine output is adapted according to the situation.

When ESP® is deactivated, the □ Off warning lamp lights up continuously:

• Driving stability will no longer be improved.
  • The drive wheels could spin.
  • ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.

When ESP ^® is deactivated, you are still assisted by ESP ^® when braking.

When the warning lamp flashes, one or several wheels has reached its grip limit:

• Adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions.
• Do not deactivate ESP ^ .
• Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary when pulling away.

Deactivate ESP ^® in the following situations to improve traction:

• When using snow chains.
• In deep snow.
• On sand or gravel.

i Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction.

If the ESP® warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.

Observe the following information:

• Indicator and warning lamps (→ page 591)
• Display messages ( page 512)

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP® and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery carriageway.

ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways:

- The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin.

- More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.

Influence of drive programs on ESP®

The drive programs enable ESP ^® to adapt to different weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate ESP ^® mode will be activated. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch ( page 225).

Function of ESP ^® Crosswind Assist

ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehicle in the lane:

• ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds between approx. 80 km/h and 200 km/h when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly.
• The vehicle is stabilised by means of individual brake application on one side.

Function of ESP ^® trailer stabilisation

WARNING Risk of accident in poor road and weather conditions

In poor road and weather conditions, the trailer stabilisation cannot prevent lurching of the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a high centre of gravity may tip over before ESP ^® detects this.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions.

When driving with a trailer, ESP ^® can stabilise your vehicle if the trailer begins to swerve from side to side:

• ESP® trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of 65 km/h.
• Slight swerving is reduced by means of a targeted, individual brake application on one side.
• In the event of severe swerving, the operating energy output is also reduced and all wheels are braked.

ESP ^® trailer stabilisation may be impaired or may not function if:

- The trailer is not connected correctly or is not detected properly by the vehicle.

Activating or deactivating ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Multimedia system:

① ESP® can only be activated/deactivated using quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP® can otherwise be found in the Assistance menu.

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

Select ESP.
Select On or Off.

ESP® is deactivated if the OFF ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up continuously in the driver's display.

Observe any information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the driver's display.

Function of EBD

Electronic Brakeforce Distribution (EBD) is characterised by the following:

• Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure on the rear wheels.
- Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends.

Function of STEER CONTROL

STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation.

This steering recommendation is given in the following situations:

• both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake
  • the vehicle starts to skid

System limits

STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

• ESP ^ is deactivated.
• ESP® is malfunctioning.
  • The steering is malfunctioning.

If ESP ^® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering.

HOLD function

HOLD function

The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a standstill without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic.

The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver.

System limits

The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary.

• The incline must not be greater than 30%.

Activating/deactivating the HOLD function

WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle

If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away:

• If there is a malfunction in the system or in the power supply.
• If the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

▶ Always secure the vehicle against rolling away before you leave it.

Requirements

• The vehicle is stationary.
- The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on the driver's side is fastened.
- The vehicle has been started or has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
• The electric parking brake is released.
• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
- The transmission is in position D, R or N.

Activating the HOLD function

Depress the brake pedal, and after a short time quickly depress further until the HOLD display appears in the driver's display.
Release the brake pedal.

Deactivating the HOLD function

Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.

or

Depress the brake pedal until the HOLD display disappears from the driver's display.

The HOLD function is deactivated in the following situations:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.
• The transmission is shifted to position P.
- The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.

In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission position P and/or by the electric parking brake:

• The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is opened.
  • The vehicle is switched off.
  • There is a system malfunction.
  • The power supply is insufficient.

In addition, the Brake immediately message may appear in the driver's display and a horn tone may sound at regular intervals.

Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the warning message disappears. The HOLD function is deactivated.
Additionally secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Function of Hill Start Assist

Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the following conditions:

• The transmission is in position D or R.
• The electric parking brake is released.

This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away

After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle.

Swiftly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not

leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist.

Function of Adaptive Brake Lights

Adaptive Brake Lights warn following traffic in an emergency braking situation with the following actions:

• flashing the brake lamps
• activating the hazard warning lights (→ page 171)

If the vehicle is braked sharply from speeds above 50 km/h, the brake lamps flash rapidly. This provides traffic travelling behind you with an even more noticeable warning.

ATTENTION ASSIST

Function of ATTENTION ASSIST

Depending on the country and equipment, ATTENTION ASSIST has the sub-function microsleep detection. This function is only available in conjunction with the driver camera in the driver display (→ page 375).

ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monotonous journeys, e.g. on motorways and trunk roads. If indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver are detected, the system suggests taking a break.

ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation.

You can choose between two settings:

• Standard: normal system sensitivity.
- Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver is warned earlier and the attention level detec-

ted by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accordingly.

If fatigue or increasing inattention is detected, the warning appears in the driver display: ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!. you can acknowledge the message and take a break if necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes.

If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System suspended message appears.

If the driver display shows a warning, a service area search is offered in the multimedia system. You can select a rest area and start navigation to this rest area.

When you restart the vehicle, ATTENTION ASSIST is automatically switched on. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored.

ATTENTION ASSIST ① ②

The following information is displayed in the driver's display:

• The length of the journey since the last break
- The attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST:
- The more segments ② of the circle displayed, the higher the detected attention level.
Fewer segments ② are displayed in the circle as the attention level decreases.
- The status of microsleep and distraction detection ①:
- Deactivated: display ① is hidden.

Activated but not operational: display ① is grey.

Activated and operational: display ① is green.

Microsleep detection

If the system, which uses the driver camera, detects indicators of microsleep, the ATTENTION ASSIST Microsleep Take a break! warning message appears in the driver's display and a warning tone sounds simultaneously. This warning message must be confirmed by Touch Control. It is recommended that you take a break immediately.

System limits

ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to 200 km/h speed range.

The microsleep detection function is available at a speed of 20 km/h and above.

If the system is not available due to an error, the ATTENTION ASSIST warning light lights up continuously in the driver display.

Particularly in the following situations, ATTENTION ASSIST only functions in a restricted manner and warnings may be delayed or not occur:

• If you have been driving for less than approximately 30 minutes.
• If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes).
  • If there is a strong side wind.
• If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration).
• If the Steering Assist function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active.
  • If the clock is set to the incorrect time.
• If you change lanes and vary your speed frequently in active driving situations.
• if ESP ^ is not available

Microsleep detection also does not function when the driver camera cannot detect the driver's eyes, forexample as a result of the following factors:

• The driver's eyes are covered due to the steering column position, forexample.
• Poor lighting conditions.

• Some types of spectacles or sunglasses.
- The driver's line of vision is outside the driver camera's field of vision.

Also observe any information regarding display messages that can be displayed in the driver's display.

The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness assessment is reset and restarted when continuing the journey in the following situations:

- You switch off the vehicle.

- If you unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break).

Setting ATTENTION ASSIST

Multimedia system:

Settings ▶ Assistance

▶ Assistance ▶ ATTENTION ASSIST

Setting the sensitivity

Select next to ATTENTION ASSIST.

▶ Select Standard or Sensitive.

Activating/deactivating the microsleep warning

▶ Activate or deactivate Microsleep warning.

Limiter

Function of the limiter

The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. To reduce the speed to the set speed, the limiter applies the brakes automatically.

You can limit the speed as follows:

• Variable: for a short-term speed restriction, e.g. in built-up areas
• Permanent: for a longer-term speed restriction, e.g. in winter tyre mode

You operate the variable limiter with the left-hand control group on the steering wheel ( page 275).

You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed or up to the set winter tyre limit. You can also perform settings while the vehicle is stationary if the vehicle has been started.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 261).

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the limiter is available up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h.

Displays in the driver's display

• LIM (grey): variable limiter is selected but not yet activated.
• LIM (flashes grey): variable limiter is temporarily passive.
  • LIM (green): variable limiter is activated.

A stored speed appears under the LIM display and is indicated in the speedometer.

If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the variable limiter switches to passive mode. The message LIM passive appears in the driver's display and the display LIM flashes.

The variable limiter is reactivated in the following situations:

- If the vehicle speed drops below the stored speed.

• If the stored speed is called up.
• If you store a new speed.

Information on the permanent limiter

If the vehicle should never exceed a specific speed (e.g. for driving in winter tyre mode), you can set this speed with the permanent limiter.

You do this by limiting the speed between 160 km/h and 240 km/h in the multimedia system ( page 272).

Shortly before the set speed is reached, it appears in the driver's display. When you confirm the message, display messages no longer appear until you switch off the vehicle. The speed will only be displayed again once the vehicle has been restarted or if the set speed is changed.

The permanent limiter does not switch to passive mode even during kickdown and the driven speed remains below the set speed.

Setting the speed limit for winter tyres Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Vehicle

▶ Winter tyre limit

▶ Activate or deactivate Winter tyre limit.

Setting a speed

Select Winter tyre limit.

Select a speed.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist maintains the set speed when driving freely. If vehicles are detected ahead, the set distance is maintained, if necessary until the vehicle comes to a standstill. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depending on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel.

Available speed range:

• Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: 20 km/h - 160 km/h

• Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: 20 km/h - 210 km/h
The adjustable set speed may differ if a limit speed (e.g. winter tyre limit) ( page 271) is stored.

Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:

• Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program (energy-saving, comfortable or dynamic) (→ page 223)
• Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane

• Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:

• Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles)
• Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on motorways or on multi-lane roads with separate carriageways (country-dependent)

In the DYNAMIC SELECT menu, it is possible to set the driving mode of the Active Distance

Assist DISTRONIC. Depending on which drive program is selected, the driving characteristics can be geared towards energy economy, comfort or dynamic performance. In the Active Distance Assist menu, the driving style can be permanently set to Comfort or Dynamic ( page 279).

Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and Driving Assistance Package: if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has braked the vehicle to a standstill, it can automatically follow the vehicle in front when driving off again within 30 seconds. If a critical situation is detected in the surrounding area when driving off, such as a person in the vehicle path, a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 261).

DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist maintains the set speed when driving freely. If vehicles are detected ahead, the set distance is maintained, if necessary until the vehicle comes to a standstill. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depending on

the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel.

DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist is available in the speed range from 20 km/h - 210 km/h.

Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:

• Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program (fuel-saving, comfortable or dynamic) ( page 223)
• Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane
• Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles)
• Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on motorways or on multi-lane roads with separate carriageways (country-dependent)

Additional function available in certain countries: if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has braked the vehicle to a standstill, it can automatically fol-

low the vehicle in front when driving off again within 30 seconds. If a critical situation is detected in the surrounding area when driving off, such as a person in the vehicle path, a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ready to drive when the green vehicle symbol flashes cyclically.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 261).

Display in the driver's display in the Assistance menu

1 2 3 40m 25m 0m

① Vehicle in front
② Distance indicator
③ Set specified distance

Vehicle detected in front ① is highlighted in green. It may also be in the lane to the left of your vehicle in situations where it is not permitted to overtake on the right, for example on motorways.

Permanent status display

- (grey): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected but not yet active

• (green speedometer, white vehicle): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, speed set
• (green): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active and vehicle detected

The stored speed is shown under the permanent status display and highlighted on the speedometer. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the status display is greyed out.

If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment is less than the stored speed due to the route event ahead, the segments in the speedometer light up.

When the set specified distance is increased or decreased, the △ display briefly appears under the vehicle in the permanent status display.

On motorways or high-speed major roads, the green vehicle symbol is displayed cyclically when the vehicle is ready to pull away.
If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to passive

mode. The following message appears briefly in the driver's display 📞 suspended.

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example:

• In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions.
• The windscreen in the area of the camera is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered.
  • If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
• In multi-storey car parks or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients.
• If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles.

In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accelerating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid.

Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.

A

WARNING Risk of accident from acceleration or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accelerate or brake in the following cases, for example:

• If the vehicle pulls away using Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
• If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed.
• If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects.

▶ Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and be ready to brake at all times.

Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.

WARNING Risk of accident due to insufficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning.

Adjust your speed and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front.
Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action.

WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction:

- when driving on a different lane or when changing lanes

• to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or stationary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles
• to complex traffic conditions
• to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic

As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations.

▶ Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react accordingly.

Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the variable limiter

Requirements

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:

• The electric parking brake is released.
- ESP® is activated and is not intervening.
• The transmission is in position D.
• All the doors are closed.
- Check of the radar sensor system has been successfully completed.
- Snow chain mode is not active (→ page 474).

Variable limiter:

• The variable limiter is selected.

Diagram showing a Mercedes-Benz car interior with steering wheel and dashboard, alongside a close-up of its dashboard display panel.

RES/® Adopts the stored/detected speed

CANCEL Deactivates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC/ the variable limiter

1 Increases/decreases the speed

Increases/decreases the specified distance Switches between the variable limiter and Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the variable limiter: press the respective button with only one finger or swipe on the control panel.

Switches between the variable limiter and Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Press

Activating the variable limiter or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

To activate without a stored speed: press SET/+, SET/- or RES®. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current vehicle speed is stored and maintained (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) or limited (variable limiter) by the vehicle.

or

To activate with a stored speed: press[RES/8]. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The last stored speed is called up and the vehicle maintains this speed (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) or does not exceed it (variable limiter). If the stored speed has been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored.

When you switch off the vehicle, the stored speed is deleted. When you activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is deleted.

Increasing or reducing the speed

To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel ①.
• The stored speed is increased by 1 km/h.
To decrease the stored speed: swipe downwards from the top of control panel ①. The stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h.

or

Briefly press SET/+ on the upper section or SET/- on the lower section of control panel ①. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 10 km/h.

or

Press and hold SET/+ on the upper section or SET/- on the lower section of control panel ①. The stored speed is increased or reduced in increments of 10 km/h.

or

Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
Press SET/+ on the upper section of control panel ①.

Adopting the limit speed shown in the driver's display

Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the variable limiter: press SET/+, SET/- or RES/.

Accept the displayed speed limit: press RES/®. The limit speed displayed in the driver's display is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed, or limits its speed accordingly.
A speed limit shown in the driver display is only adopted while driving, not when stationary.

Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and remove your foot from the brake pedal.
Press RES/®.

or

Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and firmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.

Reducing or increasing the specified distance from the vehicle in front

Press □. The □ display appears. The specified distance is reduced by one level. If the lowest level is already selected, the selection jumps to the highest level.

Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the variable limiter

WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.

Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat.
Press CANCEL.

If you brake, deactivate ESP ^ or if ESP ^ intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. The variable limiter is not deactivated.

Function of Active Speed Limit Assist

If a changed speed limit is detected and the automatic adoption of speed limits is switched on, this is automatically adopted as the stored speed ( page 279). Speed limits below 20 km/h are not accepted.

The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display in the driver's display is always updated when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign.

If you are driving on German motorways and there is no speed limit, the system uses the speed stored for a stretch of road with no speed limit as the set speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on a stretch of road with no speed limit, the recommended speed of 130 km/h is adopted.

If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelerator pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted.

The maximum permissible speed does not take the road condition and current weather and traffic conditions into account. Adjust your speed accordingly, when necessary.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 261).

System limits

The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to the detection of traffic signs ( page 291).

Speed limits below 20 km/h are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system.

The maximum permissible speed applying to a vehicle with a trailer is not detected by the system.

Adjust the speed in these situations.

A

WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed

The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as:

• at speed limits below 20 km/h
• in wet conditions or in fog
- when towing a trailer
▶ Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations.
Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions.

Function of route-based speed adaptation

When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accordingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negotiates a route event ahead in an energy-saving, comfortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in

front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account.

Route-based speed adaptation can be activated in the multimedia system ( page 279).

The following route events are taken into account:

• Bends
• Roundabouts
• T-junctions
• Turns and exits

• Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic)

Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indicator is switched on and one of the following situations is detected:

- Turning at junctions

- Driving on slowing-down lanes

- Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down lanes

The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to junctions, roundabouts and

traffic lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a standstill.

Speed adaptation is cancelled in the following cases:

• If the turn signal indicator is switched off before the route event and it is therefore assumed that the route event is not relevant to the driver.
• If the driver depresses the accelerator or brake pedal during the process.

System limits

Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations and driving at a suitable speed.

In difficult conditions, the speed selection made by the system may not always be suitable. This applies to the following situations, forexample:

• the road's course not clearly visible
- Road narrowing
• varying maximum permissible speeds in individual lanes, forexample at toll stations
- wet road surfaces, snow or ice

- If transport equipment, forexample a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established.

In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly.

WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation

Route-based speed adaptation can malfunction or be temporarily unavailable in the following situations:

• If the driver does not follow the calculated route
  • If map data is not up-to-date or available
  • In the event of roadworks
  • In bad weather or road conditions
  • If the accelerator pedal is depressed
• In the event of electronically displayed speed limitations
  Adapt the speed to the traffic situation.

Setting Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC driving styles

Requirements

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ Assistance
▶ Driving ▶ Active Distance Assist

Selecting a driving style

Select Based on DYNAMIC SELECT, Dynamic or Comfortable.
i Further information about Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( page 275).

Setting speed adaptation

Select Adopt speed limit or Route-based speed adapt..

When these functions are active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depending on the route events ahead.

When one of the following systems is active, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
- Variable limiter

i Further information on speed adaptation ( page 278).

Function of Active Stop-and-Go Assist

Active Stop-and-Go Assist helps you when in traffic jams on multi-lane roads with separate carriageways by automatically pulling away within up to 60 seconds and with moderate steering manoeuvres. It orients itself using the vehicle in front and lane markings. Active Stop-and-Go Assist automatically maintains a safe distance from the vehicle in front and vehicles cutting in.

Active Stop-and-Go Assist requires you, as the driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times so that you are able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 261).

Active Stop-and-Go Assist activates automatically when all of the following conditions are met:

• You are in a traffic jam on a motorway or high-speed major road.
  • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated and active ( page 275).
  • Active Steering Assist is activated and active ( page 282).
  • You are travelling no faster than 60 km/h.

When Active Stop-and-Go Assist is active the status display appears in the driver's display.

System limits

The system limitations of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist apply to Active Stop-and-Go Assist ( page 280).

Active Steering Assist

Function of Active Steering Assist

Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 210 km/h. The system helps you to stay in the centre of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a reference.

Depending on the country, in the lower speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding traffic as a reference. If necessary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance when driving outside the centre of the lane.

If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case.

Permanent status display in the driver's display

Grey: activated and passive

Green: activated and active

Red, flashing: prompt to the driver to actively confirm or transition from active to passive status, system limit detected

During the transition from active to passive status, the symbol is shown as enlarged and flashing. Once the system is passive, the symbol is shown as grey in the driver's display.

Contact detection

The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time.

Interior view of a car steering wheel with hands, no visible text or symbols

If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, an optical warning is given first. Display ① appears in the driver's display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message.

If the driver does not react to this warning for a considerable period, an emergency stop is initiated ( page 282).

The warning is not issued or is stopped as soon as the system detects that the driver has touched the steering wheel.

The touch detection may be limited or without function if there is no direct contact between the hand and the steering wheel, e.g. when wearing gloves or if there is a steering wheel cover on the steering wheel.

If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 261).

System limits

Active Steering Assist has a limited steering torque for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane.

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances:

• There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly varying light conditions or strong shadows on the carriageway.
• There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.

• Insufficient road illumination.
- The windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker.
- No, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, forexample, in a construction area or junctions.
- The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
- If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected.
• The road is narrow and winding.
- There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, such as object markers.
- If transport equipment, forexample a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established.

The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions:

• On very tight bends and when turning.

• When crossing junctions.
• At roundabouts or toll stations.
• When actively changing lane without switching on the turn signal indicator.
• When the tyre pressure is too low.

WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops functioning

If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane.

Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and observe the traffic carefully.
▶ Always steer the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions.

WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes

The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steering interventions.

▶ Steer according to traffic conditions.

Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist

Requirements:

• ESP ^ is activated, but is not intervening.
  • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.

Multimedia system:

Settings Assistance
Driving

▶ Activate or deactivate Active Steering Assist.

Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist

Active Emergency Stop Assist uses touch sensors to monitor whether the driver holds the steering wheel and initiates an emergency stop if necessary.

If Active Steering Assist is deactivated, the accelerator and brake pedal are monitored as well as the steering wheel. A warning is issued when the steering wheel is not being held or when a pedal

is not depressed, and the vehicle is in danger of leaving the lane.

If Active Steering Assist is switched off, the system is available from a speed of approx. 60 km/h.

Illustration of a car steering wheel with hands and a numbered label (1) pointing to the steering wheel (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

Active Emergency Stop Assist issues the following warnings in order:

• Display message ① appears in the driver's display.
• In addition to display ① a warning tone sounds.
• The message Beginning emergency stop will appear in the driver's display, a continuous warning tone will sound, the vehicle will no

longer accelerate and, if necessary, slight belt tensioning will be produced.

• The vehicle speed is reduced in increments until it is at a standstill. Sharp brake impulses are also produced.
  ① Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active and the driver unfastens the seat belt and driver's door, an emergency stop can be initiated immediately.

Depending on the country, a lane change to the adjacent right-hand lane is carried out, if possible.

When automatic braking is initiated, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. Depending on the country, the hazard warning light system is switched on.

When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out:

• The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.
  • The vehicle is unlocked.
• If possible, an emergency call is placed to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.

Before automatic braking is initiated, you can cancel Active Emergency Stop Assist by steering.

You can cancel the intervention by Active Emergency Stop Assist after automatic braking is initiated by one of the following actions:

• Accelerating or braking: the emergency stop is cancelled, but the warning message, warning tone and power steering remain active
• Steering: power-assisted steering is cancelled, the warning message and warning tone remain active and the vehicle continues to be braked

Active Emergency Stop Assist can initiate an emergency stop a maximum of three times within a driving cycle. After that, Active Steering Assist and Active Emergency Stop Assist are disabled until the vehicle has been restarted.

System limits

For the detection of vehicles and other obstacles, observe the system limits of the following functions:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( page 272)

• Active Steering Assist ( page 280)
• Active Lane Change Assist ( page 284)
• Active Brake Assist ( page 286)

Active Lane Change Assist

Function of Active Lane Change Assist

Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver when changing lanes and is activated by indicating briefly.

Active Lane Change Assist is only an aid and not a substitute for your attention. It is essential that you observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility in the vehicle Owner's Manual; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

The following conditions must be fulfilled for a lane change:

• You are on a motorway or high-speed major road.
• The vehicle speed is between approximately 80 km/h and 180 km/h.

• The neighbouring lane is separated by a broken lane marking.

• No vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adjacent lane.

• Since the last time the vehicle was started, the sensors have detected a vehicle at a suitable distance behind your vehicle.
  • Active Lane Change Assist is selected in the multimedia system.
  • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are activated on motorways.

The system is not available and must be reactivated in the following situations:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist were already activated before entering the motorway.
- The system briefly does not detect the road you are on as a motorway or a motorway-like road, e.g. on a motorway junction.

As soon as Active Lane Change Assist detects a suitable road, you can reactivate it with _1^® , SET/+ or SET/-.

Driver display in the Assistance menu

① Green arrow: lane change initiated
2 Red arrow: lane change cancelled

When Active Lane Change Assist is available, the display appears along with green arrows in the driver display. If the system has been activated but is not currently available, the display

appears along with grey arrows in the driver display.

If no vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adjacent lane and a lane change is permitted, the lane change begins after the driver has indicated briefly. The lane change is shown to the driver with a flashing green arrow next to the steering wheel symbol. Green arrow is displayed in the appropriate adjacent lane in the Assistance menu in the driver display. Theme-sage, for Lane change to the left example, also appears.

Active Lane Change Assist can be cancelled in various situations, including the following:

• Change in the surrounding conditions (e.g. detected obstacle).
• The driver removes their hands from the steering wheel.
• The driver steers with too much force or in the opposite direction.
• The driver moves the turn signal indicator in the opposite direction.

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or Active Steering Assist is deactivated.
- The vehicle cannot make the lane change as planned.

Cancellation of Active Lane Change Assist is displayed as follows:

• The arrow in the selected direction of travel turns red.
• A corresponding message appears on the driver display.
• In certain circumstances a warning tone sounds.

WARNING Risk of accident when changing lane to an occupied adjacent lane

Lane Change Assist cannot always clearly detect if the adjacent lane is free.

The lane change might be initiated although the adjacent lane is not free.

Before changing lanes, make sure that the neighbouring lane is free and there is no danger to other road users.

▶ Monitor the lane change.

WARNING Risk of accident if Lane Change Assist unexpectedly stops functioning

If the system limitations for Lane Change Assist have been reached, there is no guarantee that the system will remain active.

Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by applying steering torque.

▶ Always monitor the lane change and keep your hands on the steering wheel. Observe the traffic conditions and steer and/or brake if necessary.

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances:

• There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly varying light conditions or strong shadows on the carriageway.

• There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.

• Due to insufficient illumination of the road, or if the exterior lighting indicates a malfunction.

• The windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker.
  • The sensors are damaged, covered or dirty.
• No, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, forexample, in a construction area or junctions.
• The system does not detect a suitable road, e.g. in tight bends or shortly after a slip road.
• The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
• If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected.
• There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, such as object markers.
• When the tyre pressure is too low.

Also observe the system limits of Active Steering Assist and the information on vehicle sensors and cameras in the vehicle Owner's Manual.

The Active Lane Change Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered.
Active Lane Change Assist is unavailable or only partially available during this teach-in process, and no arrows are displayed next to the Active Steering Assist symbol.

Setting Active Lane Change Assist

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ Assistance
▶ Driving ▶ Active Lane Change Assist

▶ Select Active Lane Change Assist.

Select between the On, Also automatically or Off setting options.

The Also automatically setting option can also be switched on or off in the quick access menu.

If Active Steering Assist has been deactivated, Active Lane Change Assist cannot be operated.

Active Brake Assist

Function of Active Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions:

• Distance warning function
- Collision warning
• Autonomous braking function
• Situation-dependent brake force boosting
• Evasive Steering Assist (country-specific)

Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of collision, a warning tone sounds and the △ distance warning lamp lights up.

Side-by-side comparison of a car on a road, showing two scenarios with numbered annotations (1 and 2) highlighting the lane and side views.

In the Assistance menu, an insufficient distance ① to the vehicle in front is displayed in red. If you further reduce the distance, the vehicle in front is also highlighted in red. When the system detects a risk of collision, red radar waves ② appear in front of the vehicle.

① Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt.
① Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if Warning assistance is activated, the Active Brake Assist warning is also accompanied by ambient lighting ( page 178).

If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. In particularly critical situations, Active Brake Assist can also initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning tone is sounded and the distance warning lamp lights up simultaneously with the brake application. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation or apply the brake during autonomous braking, situation-dependent brake force boosting occurs. The brake pressure increases up to maximum full-stop braking if necessary.

Camera interface screenshot showing sensor signal detection with a car ahead and speedometer display

If autonomous braking or situation-dependent brake force boosting has occurred, pop up

appears in the driver's display and then automatically goes out after a short time.

If the autonomous braking function or situation-dependent brake force boosting is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant protection (PRE-SAFE®) may also be initiated.

WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, Active Brake Assist might:

• Give a warning or brake without reason
  • Not give a warning or not brake

Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a sufficiently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone.

Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary.

If Active Brake Assist is deactivated or the functions are restricted, e.g. due to activation of another driving system, the Active Brake Assist warning lamp appears in the driver's display.

If the system is unavailable due to dirty or damaged sensors or due to a fault, or if the functions are restricted, the ▶!Active Brake Assist warning lamp appears in the driver's display.

Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist.

The individual subfunctions are available in the following speed ranges:

Distance warning function

You are warned by the distance warning function from approximately 30 km/h if, over several seconds, the distance maintained to the vehicle travelling in front is insufficient for the driven speed. In this case, the distance warning lamp in the driver's display lights up. If the distance to the vehicle in front continues to decrease at higher

speeds, the △ distance warning lamp begins to flash.

Collision warning

Collision warning can assist you in the following situations from approximately 7 km/h with an intermittent warning tone and the △ distance warning lamp.

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt.

• at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 120 km/h when approaching crossing vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists
• at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles
• at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists

Autonomous braking function

The autonomous braking function can intervene from speeds of approximately 7 km/h:

• at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
- at speeds up to approximately 120 km/h when approaching crossing vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists
• at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles
- at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead
- at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists

Situation-dependent brake force boosting

Situation-dependent brake force boosting can intervene from speeds of approximately 7 km/h:

• at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead

• at speeds up to approximately 120 km/h when approaching crossing vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists
• at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles
• at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists

Cancelling a brake application of Active Brake Assist

You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by:

• Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or with kickdown.
  • Releasing the brake pedal.

Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake application when one of the following conditions is fulfilled:

• you manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle
  • there is no longer a risk of collision

- an obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle

Reaction to oncoming road users

Active Brake Assist can also react to detected oncoming road users:

• Reaction up to speeds of approximately 100 km/h
• Warning for oncoming road users through acoustic warning and distance warning lamp
  • Autonomous braking application in order to reduce the severity of an accident

Evasive Steering Assist

WARNING Risk of accident despite Evasive Steering Assist

Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recognise objects or complex traffic situations clearly.

Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not sufficient to avoid a collision.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone.
Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary.
▶ End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations.
▶ Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle.

Evasive Steering Assist has the following characteristics:

• Detection of pedestrians, cyclists and vehicles.
- Assistance through power-assisted steering if it detects a swerving manoeuvre.
- Activation by an abrupt steering movement during a swerving manoeuvre.
- Assistance during swerving and straightening of the vehicle.

- Reaction from a speed of approximately 20 km/h up to a speed of approximately 110 km/h.

The steering support of Evasive Steering Assist can be cancelled at any time by counter steering.

System limits

Full system performance is not available for a short time after switching on the vehicle or after driving off. As long as the functions are restricted, the Active Brake Assist warning lamp can also be shown in the driver's display. Depending on the environmental conditions, it may take a few minutes before full system performance is available.

The system may be impaired or may not function, particularly in the following situations:

• In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions.

• If the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged or covered. (→ page 262)

• If the sensors are impaired due to interference from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar reflections in multi-storey car parks.

• If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed.
• In complex traffic situations where objects cannot always be clearly identified.
• If pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detection range.
• If road users are hidden by other objects or are located close to other objects.
• If the typical outline of a pedestrian or cyclist cannot be distinguished from the background.
• If a pedestrian or cyclist is not detected as such, e.g. due to special clothing or other objects.
• If the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
• On bends with a tight radius.

Setting Active Brake Assist

Requirements:

• The vehicle is switched on.

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Settings ▶ Assistance

▶ Collision avoidance

▶ Activate or deactivate the function.
It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist activated.

When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the distance warning function, the collision warning, the autonomous braking function and Evasive Steering Assist are deactivated.

If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the symbol appears in the status bar of the driver's display, and the system is reactivated the next time the vehicle is started.

Setting the time of the warnings

Select next to Active Brake Assist.
▶ Select Early, Medium or Late.
If ATTENTION ASSIST has detected indications of fatigue or a microsleep, the system can issue a warning earlier than the set time (country-dependent). Further information about ATTENTION ASSIST ( page 269).

Traffic Sign Assist

Function of Traffic Sign Assist

The traffic sign assistant detects the traffic signs with the multifunction camera and compares them with the information on the digital road map of the navigation system. It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions in the driver's display and in the head-up display. The system can issue a warning when you exceed the maximum permissible speed.

In some countries, the system can provide you with further functions and can warn you when you are approaching pedestrian crossings or when you are about to drive past stop signs or red lights unintentionally.

The camera also detects and analyses traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet).

Traffic Sign Assist portrays only selected signs in the driver's display. Actual traffic signs and speed limits have priority over traffic signs and speed limits shown in the driver's display.

Also observe the following information:

• select a speed adapted to the traffic, surroundings and weather conditions
  • observe actual traffic signs
• observe applicable traffic rules and regulations

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 261).

Displays in the driver's display

120 80 120 km/h

① Permissible speed
② Permissible speed when there is a restriction
③ Additional sign with restriction

The system can show up to two traffic signs in the driver's display simultaneously. The system always prioritises displaying speed limits. Up to one traffic sign with a maximum permissible speed can be shown in the head-up display. If two speed signs are shown in the driver's display, forexample when speed limits are detected, the value of left-hand speed limit is transmitted to the limiter or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC for adoption and is shown in the head-up display.

80 No House

Examples of traffic signs which can be displayed

Traffic Sign Assist can detect and display following traffic signs ⓘ:

• speed limits
  • end of the speed limit
  • overtaking restrictions
• play streets
  • depending on the country: signs showing the start or end of motorways and dual carriageways

Traffic Sign Assist can detect following additional signs ③ and, if necessary, analyse the relevance of the restrictions using other vehicle sensors:

• when wet
• slippery road surfaces
• in fog
  • temporary restrictions
• exits
  • restrictions for car/trailer combinations

Traffic Sign Assist also uses data from the digital street map in the navigation system. When you leave or enter a municipality or change roads, on a motorway exit or slip road forexample, or after you turn at a junction, the display in the driver's display can thus be updated without a traffic sign having been detected.

i Regularly update the digital road map of the navigation system so that the traffic sign assistant can work optimally.

If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the currently applicable maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the driver's display:

Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. If the vehicle is in a country where Traffic Sign Assist is not supported, this is displayed continuously.

i Please also note the information on the display messages of the traffic sign assistant ( page 512).

Additional functions of Traffic Sign Assist (country-specific)

Warning for no-entry signs: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you if you drive the wrong way down a section of road, forexample on motorway slip roads or one-way streets.

Warning at pedestrian crossings: if you approach pedestrian crossings, provided that pedestrians are in the danger zone or are moving towards it, Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h.

Warning at stop signs: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h if

you are about to drive past a stop sign unintentionally. For this to be possible, the signs must be clear, forexample if the system detects more than one stop sign, or a stop sign can be confirmed using the digital navigation map. No warning can be issued if several different signs are detected.

Warning at red lights: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h if you are about to drive through a red light unintentionally.

The following conditions must be fulfilled:

• Several traffic lights have been detected.
• All traffic lights detected are red.
- At least one of the red traffic lights detected is on the front passenger side beside the vehicle's own lane.
- The traffic lights are in the following sequence (from top to bottom): red, yellow, green.

Further warnings If the function is available, you can activate or deactivate the warnings at pedestrian crossings, stop signs and red lights in the Traffic Sign Assist menu under ( page 294).

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:

• If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or heavy spray.
• If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
• If there is dirt on the windscreen in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or if the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.
• if the traffic signs are difficult to see because, forexample, they are dirty, obscured, faded, iced over, damaged, inconveniently positioned, insufficiently illuminated or distorted.
• Active traffic signs with LED displays may not be detected correctly or at all due to technical factors, such as transmission frequency.

• If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect, incomplete or out of date.

• if the signs, road markings or road layout are ambiguous, e.g. in the case of traffic signs in construction sites, at exits and driveways, in the case of adjacent lanes or parallel roads, in the case of pedestrian crossing markings at traffic lights

• if the road marking or road markings do not comply with the standard
• if the road marking, road markings or road guidance is country-specific and deviates from the route guidance of the navigation system, e.g. in or after road works
  • After sharp turns and tight bends, when traffic signs are outside the camera's field of vision.
• If you overtake vehicles with traffic signs which are affixed or attached to them.
• If you are using transport equipment secured to the vehicle with a trailer coupling, such as a bicycle rack, restrictions for car/trailer combinations may be considered valid if applicable.

Setting Traffic Sign Assist

Multimedia system:

Settings ▶ Assistance

▶ Assistance ▶ Traffic Sign Assist

Activating or deactivating the speed warning

① The speed warning is switched on by default (depending on the country).

Switch off Speed limit warning. The speed warning remains off according to country-specific legislation until the next time the vehicle is switched on or off and the driver's door is opened.

The audible speed warning can also be switched off and on by quick access, by pressing and holding the mute button on the steering wheel, by pressing the speed icon in the status line of the central display or via a voice control command (functions are available depending on the country).

Change the type of speed warning

Modify the warning to Visual or Visual & audible.

Setting the warning threshold

This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded.

Set the desired speed under Warning Threshold.
(i) The availability of the function is subject to country-specific legislation.

Switching the advisory tone for a new speed limit on or off

The advisory tone for a new speed limit is switched off at the factory.

The function determines whether each change of the displayed speed in the driver's display is supported with a subtle, non-intrusive sound.

▶ Activate or deactivate the function.
(i) The availability of the function is dependent on the country.

Activating or deactivating further functions of Traffic Sign Assist

Switch further warning contents on or off. The available functions are switched on or off.

Set the type of warning for other functions

▶ Select Visual or Visual & audible.

Traffic light view

Information about the traffic light view The traffic light view supports the driver when waiting in front of a red light by displaying the camera image on the central display. The camera image is displayed when the driver is the first vehicle in front of the red light and faded out when the vehicle drives off.

Displaying traffic light view

Requirements:

• The Traffic light view option is switched on.
• A traffic light view is available.

Multimedia system:

Settings Assistance
▶ Assistance ▶ Traffic light view

① This function is not available in all countries.

If the vehicle is in first position at a traffic light, the camera image with traffic light view is shown on the central display.

When the vehicle pulls away, the camera image is faded out.

Activate or deactivate Traffic light view.
Using other available functions
Select
Select On request or Automatic. If On request is set and a traffic light view is available, the Please tap here for traffic light view. message is displayed. The camera image is shown after confirmation of the message. When Automatic is set, the camera image is automatically displayed when the traffic light view is available.

Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning

■ Function of Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning

Active Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors to monitor the area up to 40 m behind and 3 m next to your vehicle.

The system can detect vehicles travelling from speeds of approximately 12 km/h and issue a warning if they move into the monitoring range. Status display in the driver's display

Grey: the system is activated but inoperative.
Green: the system is activated and operational.

Diagram showing a car on a road with two numbered annotations pointing to it, likely indicating sensor or navigation points.

Driver display in the Assistance menu

If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range, the red warning lamp lights up in the corresponding outside mirror. In the Assistance menu, the lamp in outside mirror ① also lights up red, and the lane in which the vehicle is detected is hatched out.

If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a warning tone sounds twice and the warning lamp flashes red in the respective outside mirror. Red radar waves ② are displayed next to your vehicle in the assistance graphic.

If the turn signal indicator remains on, the display in the outside mirror flashes for all other detected vehicles, but no further warning tone sounds. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given.

① Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if Warning assistance is activated, the Active Blind Spot Assist warning is also accompanied by ambient lighting ( page 178).

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 261).

WARNING Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist

Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to the following:

• if you overtake a vehicle too closely so that it is in the blind spot area
• if vehicles travelling at a much faster speed approach and then overtake

Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings or intervene in such situations.

▶ Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.

Exit warning

The exit warning is an additional function of Active Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occupants attempting to leave the stationary vehicle about approaching vehicles.

WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning

The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or road users approaching you at a greatly differing speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations.

Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clearance.

If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range, the red warning lamp lights up in the corresponding outside mirror.

If a vehicle occupant pulls the door handle on the side of the warning, a warning tone sounds twice and the ambient lighting in the respective door and the warning lamps in the corresponding outside mirror flash red.

Vehicles with MBUX Interior Assistant: the visual warning begins as soon as the hand of a vehicle occupant moves into the area of the door.

① Vehicles with ambient lighting or active ambient lighting: the Warning assistance of the ambient lighting can be activated and deactivated (→ page 178).

The warning assistance can differ depending on the equipment and may vary according to the setting.

The exit warning is only available when Blind Spot Assist is active.

After the vehicle is switched off, the exit warning continues to function for a few minutes. When the outside mirror warning light flashes three times, the exit warning is no longer available.

The exit warning is only an aid and not a substitute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehicle occupants.

System limits

Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations, in particular:

• if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured
• in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow
• if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or motorbikes
  • if the road has very wide or narrow lanes
• if vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane

Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles.

Warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time.

Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged.

Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational if transport equipment, for example a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established.

Additionally, the exit warning may be limited in the following situations:

• when the sensors are covered by adjacent vehicles in narrow parking spaces
• when people approach the vehicle
• in the event of stationary or slowly moving objects

■ Function of the brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist

If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision.

The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between approximately 30 km/h and approximately 200 km/h.

WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist

A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision.

Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application.
Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.

Top-down view of a car detection interface showing two cars and a speedometer (no readable text or symbols)

If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mirror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a display

① indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the driver's display.

In rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.

System limits

Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur especially in the following situations:

• Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are located on both sides of your vehicle.
• A vehicle approaches too closely on the side.
- You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds.
- You brake or accelerate significantly.
- A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP ^ or Active Brake Assist.
- ESP® is deactivated.

• A loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected.
• Transport equipment, for example a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established.

Activating/deactivating Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ Assistance

Collision avoidance

▶ Active Blind Spot Assist

Select Active Blind Spot Assist.

Select On or Off.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

■ Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunction camera ( page 262) and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. The system can guide you back into your lane through a course-correcting steering intervention and addi-

tionally warns you with vibration pulses in the steering wheel. Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h.

The system can intervene in the following situations:

• Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane marking.
- One of your front wheels goes over a lane marking.

If you activate the turn signal indicator, a steering intervention does not occur on the corresponding side.

If the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, a steering intervention will occur regardless of the turn signal indicator. If you leave the lane without activating the turn signal indicator, but danger of a collision with a moving obstacle is detected in your lane, a steering intervention does not occur.

In the following situations (country-dependent), Active Lane Keeping Assist may already react from a speed of approximately 45 km/h:

• If your own vehicle is overtaken by another road user and the danger of a collision is detected, a lane-correcting steering intervention occurs.
• If you drive over a detected lane marking, the system warns you with vibration pulses in the steering wheel.

Interior view of a car steering wheel with hands and a numbered indicator (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

Display ① will appear in the driver's display and a warning tone will sound in the following situations:

• A steering intervention by Active Lane Keeping Assist lasts longer than approximately ten seconds.
• The system carries out two or more steering interventions within approximately three minutes without any steering intervention from the driver.

In the Active Lane Keeping Assist settings, you can set the sensitivity of the system and set the level of support. Additionally, you can set whether the system should react to discontinuous lane markings or only continuous lane markings ( page 301).

If ATTENTION ASSIST has detected indications of fatigue or a microsleep, the most sensitive setting is automatically selected ( page 269).

Status displays for Active Lane Keeping Assist

White: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated.

If ESP® is deactivated or a tyre pressure loss warning is displayed, Active Lane

Keeping Assist is automatically deactivated.

Z: Yellow: there is a malfunction. Please also observe the display messages.
7:1 Grey: Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated, but not operating.
Green: Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated and operating. If the system is operational on only one side, the lane marking is shown in green on the corresponding side.
Red: Active Lane Keeping Assist has guided you back into your lane with a course-correcting steering intervention. The status display will flash if there is also a haptic warning in the steering wheel. The lane marking is shown in red only on the side for which there is a warning.

Active Lane Change Assist display in the "Assistance" menu

Black and white photo of a car driving on a curved road (no visible text or symbols)

If the front wheel of the vehicle drives over a detected lane marking, this will be highlighted red in the Assistance menu in the driver's display.

① Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if Warning assistance is activated, the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning is also accompanied by ambient lighting ( page 178).

System limits

In the following situations, a lane-correcting steering intervention may not occur but rather a warning may be given on the steering wheel, depending on the situation:

• You clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate.
• If a driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist.
• You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration.
• If transport equipment, for example a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established.

The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:

- If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.

• If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections.
• If there is dirt on the windscreen in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or if the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.
• If there is dirt on the bumper in the area of the radar sensors, or if they are damaged or covered.
• If there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks.
• If the lane markings are worn, dark or covered.
• If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected.
• If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge.
  • If the carriageway is very narrow and winding.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 261).

Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping

Assist

Multimedia system:

Settings

Assistance

Collision avoidance

[Non-Text]

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activate or deactivate the function.

Alternatively, Active Lane Keeping Assist can be activated and deactivated via the 📄 quick vehicle access.

After starting the vehicle, the settings are country-specific.

Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist

Multimedia system:

Settings

Assistance

Collision avoidance

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Setting the sensitivity

Select

Select Early, Med. or Late.

The last selected setting will be adopted the next time the vehicle is started.

The standard setting for this function is dependent on the country.

Activating or deactivating assistance on discontinuous lane markings

Select Advanced support.

The last selected setting will be adopted the next time the vehicle is started.

The standard setting for this function is country-specific.

This function must be activated in vehicles without Driving Assistance Package, so that Emergency Stop Assist is fully available. Further information on Emergency Stop Assist ( page 282)

AIRMATIC

Function of AIRMATIC

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving comfort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level.

AIRMATIC includes the following components and functions:

• air suspension with automatic all-round level control

- speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel consumption

• increased vehicle level for greater ground clearance, selected via the multimedia system
• ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with constant damping force adjustment)

Suspension setting depending on the drive program

Drive program S and S+ :

• The suspension setting is firmer.
• The vehicle is set to low level -1.
- The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when driving at speeds above 120 km/h.
- When driving at speeds below 80 km/h, the vehicle is raised again to low level -1.

Drive program C and E

• The suspension setting is comfortable.
- The vehicle is set to the normal level.
- The vehicle is lowered to low level -1 when driving at speeds above 120 km/h.
- The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when driving at speeds above 160 km/h.

• When driving at speeds below 120 km/h, the vehicle is raised again to low level -1.
• When driving at speeds below 80 km/h, the vehicle is raised again to the normal level.

Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack: if transport equipment, such as a trailer or a bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established, the vehicle remains at normal level irrespective of speed or the drive program selected.

Setting the vehicle level

WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high

Driving characteristics may be impaired. The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering.

Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions.

WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehicle lowering

When lowering the vehicle, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.

Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering

Vehicles with AIRMATIC or level control: when you unload luggage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards.

You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped.

The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked.

When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody.

NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering

Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered.

Make sure that there are no obstacles such as kerbs underneath or in the immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered.

Requirements

• The vehicle has been started.
- The vehicle is not moving faster than 60 km/h.
- When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack): the vehicle is not moving faster than 30 km/h.

Multimedia system:

Raising the vehicle

Select 📄. The indicator lamp lights up continuously. The vehicle is raised to high level +1.

Your selection is saved. High level +1 set remains stored even after the vehicle has been switched off.

The vehicle is lowered again in the following situations:

• When driving faster than 80 km/h.
• When driving briefly between 60 km/h and 80 km/h.
• After selecting a different drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. In this case, the vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program.
• When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack): the vehicle is moving faster than 30 km/h.

Lowering the vehicle

Select . The indicator lamp goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program.

In the Sport drive program, only the normal vehicle level is possible when the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack).

E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL

Function of E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL

! NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

▶ Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL is an electrohydraulic suspension system with variable damping for improved driving comfort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is low-

ered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. The suspension setting is adjusted depending on the road surface, vehicle load and the drive program selected.

The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function detects areas of unevenness in the road before you drive over them by means of a multifunction camera. This reduces chassis movements.

The damping is adjusted individually to each wheel and depends on the following factors:

• Driving style, e.g. sporty
  • Road condition, e.g. bumps
• Drive program

E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL is comprised of the following functions and components:

• Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: ROAD SURFACE SCAN
• Curve inclination function CURVE
• Air suspension with automatic level control
- Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel consumption

• ADS PLUS: Adaptive Damping System with constant adjustment of damping characteristics
  • DYNAMIC SELECT button for selecting a drive program ( page 225)
• Manual level adjustment via the multimedia system

Drive program S and S+

• The suspension setting is firmer.
• The vehicle is set to low level -1.
- The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when driving at speeds above approx. 120 km/h.
- When driving at speeds below approx. 80 km/h, the vehicle is raised again to low level -1.
• ROAD SURFACE SCAN is active.

Drive program C, CV and E

• The suspension setting is comfortable.
• The vehicle is set to the normal level.
- The vehicle is lowered to low level -1 when driving at speeds above 120 km/h.

• The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when driving at speeds above 160 km/h.
• When driving at speeds below 120 km/h, the vehicle is raised again to low level -1.
• When driving at speeds below 80 km/h, the vehicle is raised again to the normal level.
• C and CV: ROAD SURFACE SCAN is active.
  • CV: the curve inclination function is active.

Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack: if the electrical connection has been correctly established, the vehicle, irrespective of speed or the drive program selected, is not automatically lowered or raised but rather remains at normal level.

Function of ROAD SURFACE SCAN

This function is not available in all countries. The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function monitors the road in front of your vehicle using a multifunction camera ( page 262). ROAD SURFACE SCAN detects unevenness in the road surface, e.g. bumps, before the vehicle drives over them. Chas-

sis movements are reduced and driving comfort is increased.

ROAD SURFACE SCAN is automatically activated if the following conditions are met:

• Drive program E is not selected.
  • No raised vehicle level is set.
• You are driving at a speed between 7 km/h and 180 km/h.

System limits

ROAD SURFACE SCAN can be impaired in the following situations or can stop functioning:

• If the carriageway is insufficiently lit, e.g. at night.
• In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions.
• If the windscreen in the area of multifunction camera is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered.

• If the road surface has no optic structure or reflects light.

• If you are driving too close to the vehicle in front.

• If sections of the route have a very small radius of curvature.
• During abrupt driving manoeuvres, e.g. heavy braking or sudden acceleration.

Observe the notes on cleaning the multifunction camera ( page 442).

Setting the vehicle level

WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high

Driving characteristics may be impaired.

The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering.

▶ Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions.

WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehicle lowering

When lowering the vehicle, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.

Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

⚠ WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering

Vehicles with AIRMATIC or level control: when you unload luggage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards.

You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped.

The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked.

When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody.

NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering

Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered.

Make sure that there are no obstacles such as kerbs underneath or in the immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered.

Requirements

• The vehicle has been started.
- The vehicle is not moving faster than 60 km/h.
- When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack): the vehicle is not moving faster than 30 km/h.

Multimedia system:

Raising the vehicle

Select 📄. The indicator lamp lights up continuously. The vehicle is raised to off-road level +1.

Your selection is saved. Off-road level+1 set remains stored even after the vehicle has been switched off.

The vehicle is lowered again in the following situations:

• When driving faster than 80 km/h.
• When driving briefly between 60 km/h and 80 km/h.
• After selecting a different drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. In this case, the vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program.
• When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack): the vehicle is moving faster than 30 km/h.

Lowering the vehicle

Select . The indicator lamp goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program.

In the Sport drive program, only the normal vehicle level is possible when the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack).

Reversing camera

Function of the reversing camera

The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.

The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rear view mirror.

graph TD
    A["Camera Views"] --> B["6"]
    B --> C["7"]
    C --> D["8"]
    D --> E["9"]
    E --> F["10"]
    F --> G["2"]
    G --> H["3"]
    H --> I["4"]
    I --> J["5"]
    J --> K["Pns"]

Camera views menu (top view)

① Menu Parking Assistance
② Reversing camera with top view
3 Wide-angle view
4 Trailer view
⑤ Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( page 317)

6 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( page 314)
7 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m from the rear area
B Lane marking the course the tyres will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)
9 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
10 Guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area
When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes are displayed in green ( page 318).

Camera views Parking Assist 6 Pcs

Wide-angle view

Camera views Parking Assist 1 2 3 Pres

Trailer view

① Yellow guide line, locating aid
2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch
3 Ball head of the trailer hitch

System limits

If the system is not ready for operation, the System inoperative message appears in the central display.

The reversing camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations:

• You are driving forwards at a speed greater than approximately 16 km/h.
  • The boot lid is open.
• The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or spray.
• The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night or if light is shining into the camera.
• The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or misted up. Observe the notes on cleaning the reversing camera ( page 442).
• The camera or rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this case, have the camera and its position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
• The detection range is limited by additional vehicle attachments at the rear, such as a licence plate bracket or bicycle rack.

Also observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras ( page 262).

Do not use the reversing camera in these types of situations. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.
The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.
i Have the display repaired or replaced if, forexample, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.

360° Camera

Function of the 360° Camera

The 360° Camera is a system that consists of four cameras which cover the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The cameras assist you when you are parking, forexample, or at exits with reduced visibility.

The 360° Camera includes the following cameras and evaluates their images:

• Reversing camera
• Front camera
• Two side cameras in the outside mirrors

The cameras are only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show them at all. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.

Menu overview Camera views

Camera views Parking Assist 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

① Menu Parking Assistance
② Top view with image from the front camera
3 Top view with image from the reversing camera
3D view, left-hand side of the vehicle
5 3D view, right-hand side of the vehicle
6 3D auto view

⑦ Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (→ page 317)
To set the GPS activation point ( page 314)
To switch between standard and wide-angle view
To switch between standard and trailer view
① In all views, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display is shown (→ page 314).

Function of the guide lines

Diagram showing four numbered points connected to a triangular structure, likely illustrating a geological or engineering concept.

Guide lines at a distance of approximately 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m Distance from the rear area
② Lane marking the course the tyres will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)
3 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
4 Guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area
When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes and guide lines are displayed in green instead of yellow ( page 318).

Top view with image from the front or reversing camera

Diagram showing a car on a road with numbered annotations pointing to its components.

① Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( page 314)

2 Your vehicle from above

3 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering angle

3D view, left/right-hand side of the vehicle

NOTE Risk of accident due to objects being severely distorted in the display or not displayed at all

Due to the projection of the cameras, objects in the 3D views may be severely distorted when displayed or not displayed at all.

Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc. in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.

Top-down view of a car on pavement with a circular sensor or sensor device (no visible text or symbols)

① Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( page 314)

In the 3D view, left-/right-hand side of the vehicle, the virtual camera moves to the respective side of the vehicle. When you change the transmission position, the view is automatically adapted.

3D auto view

The area behind the vehicle is not displayed as a mirror image as is usual in the 3D views.

Diagram showing a car on a road with two labeled points (1 and 2) indicating detection or sensor locations.

① Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (→ page 314)
2 Guide lines

In the 3D auto view, the virtual camera moves to the standard perspective, facing forward from the rear above the roof. The view changes automatically when approaching obstacles.

If you touch the touchscreen, the view changes to 3D view with free rotation. You can turn, tilt and zoom the views by touch.

Wide-angle view

Black-and-white street photo with numbered annotations pointing to a road intersection and vehicle lanes

① Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (→ page 314)
② To switch between standard and wide-angle view

Trailer view

① In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the trailer hitch.

If you select trailer view and no trailer is coupled to the vehicle, the following display appears:

Diagram showing a car with numbered points (1, 2, 3, 4) and connecting lines, likely illustrating a road or path scenario.

Trailer view: locating aid

To switch between standard and trailer view
② Yellow locating aid
③ Ball head of the trailer hitch
4 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch

When the electrical connection is established between the vehicle and the trailer, the display changes to the side camera view.

Medical imaging of a car with a blue circular marker labeled '1' and a grayscale close-up of the car's internal structure (no text or symbols present)

Trailer view: side view of the mirror cameras

To switch between standard and trailer view

System limits

If the system is not ready for operation, the System inoperative message appears in the central display.

The 360° Camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations:

• You are driving forwards at a speed greater than approximately 16 km/h.
  • The doors are open.

• An outside mirror is not completely folded out.
  • The boot lid is open.

• The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or spray.

• The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night or if light is shining into the camera.
• The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or misted up.
• If cameras or vehicle components in which the cameras are fitted are damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and their setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not use the 360° Camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.

For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images.

The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to additional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. licence plate bracket, bicycle rack).

The contrast of the display may be impaired by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.
i Have the display repaired or replaced if, forexample, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.

See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera (→ page 442).

Calling up the 360° Camera views using the button

Diagram showing a car interior with a parking pad labeled 'P' and a location pin icon, likely indicating parking or navigation.

Press button ①.
▶ Select Camera views menu.
Select the desired view in the multimedia system ( page 308).

Selecting a view for the 360° Camera (reverse gear)

Requirements

• The Activation in R setting is activated in the multimedia system (→ page 313).
  Engage reverse gear.
  Select the desired view in the multimedia system ( page 308).

Setting the reversing camera or 360° Camera The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. Pay attention to your surroundings and be ready to brake at all times.

Multimedia system:

▶ Activate or deactivate Activation in R.

The settings for deactivating the reversing camera are not available in every country.

360° Camera with GPS - managing activation positions

Multimedia system:

Renaming an activation position

① You can determine activation positions in the Camera views menu. (→ page 308)

Select for the desired activation position.
Select Edit.
Enter a name and confirm. The activation position is saved under the new name.

Deleting an activation position

Select for the desired activation position.
Select Delete entry.
Confirm the prompt. The activation position is deleted.

Opening the camera cover

Multimedia system:

▶ Select Open camera cover.

The camera cover closes automatically after some time or after the vehicle is switched on or off.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system which monitors the area surrounding your vehicle and shows you the distance between the vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly.

The passive side impact protection also warns you of obstacles to the side. These must be detected beforehand by the sensors in the front or rear bumper while driving by them. If you steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued. The pas-

sive side impact protection can be activated and deactivated via the multimedia system.

In order for front or rear obstacles to the side to be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the vehicle has travelled one vehicle length, obstacles on all sides can be shown.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking in/exitting parking spaces.

Displays in the central display

Three identical car parking lot diagrams with numbered arrows (1, 2, 3) indicating lane markings, no text or symbols present.

Vehicles with 360° Camera

Three identical diagrams showing a car parking in different parking areas, labeled 1, 2, and 3 (no text or symbols on the car itself)

Vehicles with reversing camera

As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is ready for display, the respective areas of the display are shown in blue.

1 Front and rear display ready
2 All-round display ready
3 All around display ready and obstacles detected

The colour of the display changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle:

• Blue: > 1 m (no obstacles detected)
• Yellow: approx. 1 m - 0.7 m
• Orange: approx. 0.7 m - 0.4 m
- Red: <0.4 m

Vehicles with 360° Camera: the boundary line shifts dynamically depending on the position and distance of the obstacles detected.

Depending on the distance to the obstacle detected, an intermittent warning tone also sounds. You can set the timing of the warnings in the multimedia system. In the Warn early setting, the system warns you from a distance of 1 m, in the standard setting only from 0.4 m.

Screenshot of a car management interface showing a car model with status bar and navigation controls

Vehicles with 360° Camera

Screenshot of a car management interface showing a car icon, navigation buttons, and status bar with Chinese text.

Vehicles with reversing camera

If you are not in the Camera & parking menu and an obstacle in the vehicle path is detected, pop-up window ① appears in the central display if the following requirements are met:

- Vehicles without Active Parking Assist: when driving no faster than 12 km/h.

- Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: when driving no faster than 18 km/h.

Diagram of a car interior with numbered labels pointing to the dashboard and seat area.

Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately 1.0 m in front ② and 0.7 m on sides ③ can also be displayed in the head-up display.

System limits

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessarily take into account the following obstacles:

- Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects.

• Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of lorries.
• Pedestrians or animals approaching the vehicle from the side.
• Objects placed next to the vehicle

Obstacles on the sides are not shown in the following situations, for example:

• You park the vehicle and switch it off.
- You open the doors.

After the engine is restarted, obstacles must be detected again by driving past them before a new warning can be issued.

Also observe the system limits of the following systems:

• Reversing camera ( page 306)
• 360° Camera ( page 308)

Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras; otherwise, the system cannot function properly ( page 262).

Vehicles with towbar: If a transport device, e.g. trailer or bicycle carrier, is attached to the towbar and the electrical connection is correctly established, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone.

Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights up red for approximately three seconds then goes out, and the symbol appears in the driver's display, the system may have been deactivated due to signal interference. Start the vehicle again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location.

If a warning tone also sounds, it may be due to one of the following causes:

• The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (→ page 442).
• Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunction: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range.

When parking or manoeuvring the vehicle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flowerpots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could otherwise be damaged.

Requirements:

• The camera menu is open.
• Or: Active Parking Assist is active.
• Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window appears.

Press P in the central display.

If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp does not light up or the symbol P_^OFF is displayed, PARKTRONIC Parking Assist is not active.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started.

Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu.

Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Multimedia system:

Adjusting warning tones

▶ Select Set warning tones.
Set the desired level under Volume or Tone pitch.

Activating/deactivating audio fadeout

Audio fadeout select and Audio fade for warnings switch on or off. The volume of the currently playing media source is reduced during a Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tone.

or

Audio fadeout select and Audio fadeout in trans. position R switch on or off. The volume of the currently playing media source is reduced when reverse gear is engaged.

Setting the time of the warnings

▶ Select Time of warning.
▶ Activate or deactivate Side warning.
Set the desired warning time for Front or Rear.

Active Parking Assist

Function of Active Parking Assist

Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system, which uses ultrasound with the assistance of the reversing camera and 360° Camera. When you are driving forwards up to approximately 35 km/h, the system automatically measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.

Active Parking Assist offers the following functions:

Vehicles with reversing camera

• Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road
• Reversing into parking spaces perpendicular to the road

Vehicles with 360° Camera

• Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road
• Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to the road (optionally either forwards or reverse)
• Parking in parking spaces that can only be detected as such due to markings (forexample at the roadside)
• Exiting a parking space parallel to the road
• Exiting a parking space perpendicular to the road (optionally either left or right)

Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range.

If Active Parking Assist is available, the message appears in the driver's display. When the

system detects parking spaces, 📄 appears. The arrows show on which side of the road free parking spaces are located. These are then shown in the central display.

When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated based on the calculated path of your vehicle. When you are entering or exiting a parking space, the procedure is assisted by acceleration, braking, steering and gear changes.

To start the parking procedure, press the button ( page 320).

Active Parking Assist will be cancelled in the following situations:

• You deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC.
- You press the button again.
- You begin steering.
- You engage park position P.
- ESP® intervenes.
• You open the driver's door.

System limits

If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active Parking Assist is not available.

Also observe the system limits of the following systems:

• Reversing camera ( page 306)
• 360° Camera (→ page 308)

Objects that are above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist, e.g. protruding loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks or boundaries of parking spaces, are not detected when measuring the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calculating the parking procedure. In some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space prematurely or brake too late. Certain environmental conditions, such as snowfall or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground.

A WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist

If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise:

• Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
- The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.

There is a danger of collision!

In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.

Active Parking Assist can also display unsuitable parking spaces, e.g. parking spaces in which parking is not permitted or parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.

Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations:

• In extreme weather conditions such as ice, packed snow or in heavy rain.

• When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle.

• If the parking space is on a steep downhill or uphill gradient.

• When snow chains are fitted.
• When a trailer or bicycle rack is attached.
• Directly after a tyre change or when spare tyres are fitted.
  • If the tyre pressure is too low or too high.
• If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g. after bottoming out on a kerb.
• On steep inclines of more than approximately 15%.

Parking with Active Parking Assist

Diagram showing a car interior with a blue icon labeled 'P' and a blue square with a camera symbol, likely indicating a parking or navigation interface.

Press ① button.

Camera views Parking Assist 2 3 P P

Select ② Parking Assistance menu.
Parking spaces ③ detected by the system are shown in the central display.

Camera views Parking Assist 5 4 P

When the vehicle is stationary, indicated vehicle path ④ into currently selected parking space ⑤ also appears.

If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehicle.
If necessary, select another parking space.

▶ Vehicles with 360° Camera: to change the parking direction, tap the selected parking space again.
To start the parking procedure: press button ① again. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.

The turn signal indicator is switched on automatically when the parking procedure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.

A WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space

While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane.

This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.

Pay attention to objects and other road users.

Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.

On completion of the parking procedure, the Active Parking Assist finished display message appears.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb.
You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking procedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is available, the transmission position can be changed again, or the process can be cancelled.

Immediate parking via the Camera views menu

Front view of a road with lane markings and a traffic light indicator (no readable text or symbols)

▶ Select the Camera views menu.
When the vehicle is stationary and in transmission position R, and symbol 6 appears in the camera image: press button 1 again. The parking procedure is initiated for the detected parking space.
The parking space and parking direction cannot be changed in immediate parking.
■ Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist

Requirements

• The vehicle is equipped with a 360° Camera.

• The vehicle has been parked with Active Parking Assist.
  ▶ Start the vehicle.
  Press button 1.

Camera views Parking Assist 2 3 3

▶ Select Parking Assistance ② menu.
If necessary, change direction of exit ③.

To start exiting the parking space: press button ① again.
If necessary, change the gearbox setting. Observe any messages displayed in the driver's display and central display. The vehicle moves out of the parking space.

The turn signal indicator is automatically switched on when exiting a parking space begins and switched off when it is completed. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.

After the parking space has been exited, a warning tone and the Active Parking Assist finished, take control of vehicle message prompt you to take control of the vehicle. You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear yourself again.

If you do not react to the prompt to take control of the vehicle, the system will brake the vehicle to a standstill.

Pausing Active Parking Assist

You can interrupt the parking or exiting procedure of Active Parking Assist by performing one of the following actions, forexample:

▶ Depress the brake pedal.
Open the front passenger door, a rear door, the boot or the bonnet.
Apply the electric parking brake or activating the HOLD function.
To resume the parking or exiting procedure: gently depress the accelerator pedal.
If the electric parking brake was applied before Active Parking Assist was activated, depress the accelerator pedal lightly to start the parking or exiting procedure.

Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming a paused parking procedure. Make sure that persons, animals or objects are no longer in the manoeuvring range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist.

■ Automatic braking function of Active Parking Assist

Persons or objects detected in the manoeuvring range could cause the vehicle to brake sharply and interrupt the parking or exiting procedure. The vehicle will then be held at a standstill. If you depress the accelerator pedal, the parking or exiting procedure is resumed.

Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming the parking or exiting procedure. Make sure that persons, animals or objects are no longer in the manoeuvring range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist.

Remote Parking Assist

Function of Remote Parking Assist

Remote Parking Assist is an additional function of Active Parking Assist. Comply with local traffic laws and regulations when using Remote Parking Assist on public roads. If it is required to turn the wheels toward the kerb, you cannot use Remote Parking Assist.

Please note that you can only use Remote Parking Assist if you have a valid driving licence and are in a fit state to drive.

Remote Parking Assist parks your vehicle or exits the parking space while you are outside of your vehicle. You can monitor the manoeuvring and parking procedure on your mobile phone.

With Remote Parking Assist, you can carry out all the parking procedures of Active Parking Assist. You can also position the vehicle directly in front of a garage or a driveway entrance and then use Remote Parking Assist to enter or exit a parking space.

Remote Parking Assist manages pulling away, braking and steering. While Remote Parking Assist is active, the vehicle is locked.

Remote Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Interrupt or terminate the parking procedure if necessary. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. Make sure to also pay attention to other vehicles.

System limits

If the system detects a malfunction or a system limit during the manoeuvring or parking procedure, the procedure will be cancelled:

• The vehicle is brought to a standstill.
- Transmission position [P] is selected and the electric parking brake is applied automatically.
• The vehicle is switched off.
• The vehicle remains locked.

If the parking manoeuvre is cancelled, a corresponding message is displayed on the mobile phone.

Depending on the situation, you can then take control of the procedure, manoeuvre the vehicle back to the starting position or manually take control of the vehicle.

The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply ( page 318).

Certain environmental conditions, such as snowfall or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately or to connection problems with the mobile phone. Only use Remote Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground.

During the parking procedure, you should not stand more than approx. 3.0 m away from the vehicle. At greater distances, the procedure will be interrupted and a corresponding message will be displayed on the mobile phone. If you move closer to the vehicle, you will be able to continue the procedure.

Operating Remote Parking Assist

Requirements

For the Remote Park Assist function you need:

• a Mercedes me user account
- the current Remote Park Assist app for your vehicle type
- a mobile phone

i A list of compatible phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/

The following operating systems are supported:

• Android™
• Apple® iOS

WARNING Danger due to insufficient view of the vehicle surroundings

If you manoeuvre, park or exit a parking space with the vehicle using Remote Parking Assist, observe the following:

Make sure that you have the best view possible of the vehicle and the vehicle's surroundings.
Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the path of your vehicle.
Make sure that you maintain a suitable distance to the vehicle and that neither you nor other road users could be endangered.
Be aware of the vehicle's surroundings at all times and identify possible dangers.
If necessary, cancel the parking procedure.

No persons or pets are permitted to remain in the vehicle during the parking procedure. Observe the system limits at all times. If necessary, cancel the

parking procedure. Always ensure that vehicle access by other road users is maintained.

Activate the "Remote Parking Assist" service e.g. via the Mercedes me homepage.
▶ Authorise the mobile phone using the Remote Parking Assist App in the vehicle ( page 326).

Selecting the parking manoeuvre in advance while inside the vehicle

Stop the vehicle and select transmission position P.

Diagram showing a car interior with a blue icon labeled 'P' and a blue square pointing to a camera symbol, likely indicating a parking or navigation interface.

Press button 1.

graph TD
    A["Camera view"] --> B["3"]
    B --> C["4"]
    C --> D["P"]
    D --> E["P"]
    E --> F["5"]
    F --> G["2"]
    G --> H["6"]
    H --> I["4"]
    I --> J["P"]
    J --> K["P"]
    K --> L["Parking Assist"]

Select ② Parking Assistance menu.
For further information on Remote Parking Assist: select ③.
If necessary, select another parking space ④ or select ⑤ to drive straight ahead into a garage, forexample.
If necessary, change parking direction 6.

Alternatively, you can begin parking with Active Parking Assist ( page 320) and continue with the Remote Parking Assist from any vehicle position. To do this, stop the parking process and adjust the gearbox setting [P].
▶ Switch off the vehicle and exit it with the key.

Starting the parking procedure without selecting in advance

Stop the vehicle and select transmission position P.
▶ Switch off the vehicle and exit it with the key.

Starting the parking procedure while outside the vehicle

Unlock the vehicle.

Carrying out a parking procedure with Remote Parking Assist

① Keep the vehicle key with you during the parking procedure. You can cancel the parking procedure and bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing a button on the key.
① On completion of the parking procedure, the vehicle is locked.

If you have started the parking procedure as described above, the vehicle is ready to connect to your mobile phone for a limited time.

Start the Remote Parking Assist App on the mobile phone and connect to the vehicle.
Follow the instructions of the Remote Parking Assist App.

The turn signal indicator is automatically switched on when starting parking and switched off when it is completed.

If the connection between the vehicle and the mobile phone is interrupted while a parking manoeuvre is being performed, the manoeuvre can be continued if the connection is re-established within a short time.

WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space

While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane.

This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.

Pay attention to objects and other road users.
Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Remote Parking Assist.
After ending the parking procedure, ensure that all vehicle doors, windows and the boot are closed. Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Cancelling the parking procedure

You can cancel the parking procedure of Remote Parking Assist at any time and bring the vehicle to a standstill.

Cancel the parking procedure in the Remote Parking Assist App.
or
▶ Press a button on the vehicle key.
or
▶ Pull a door handle.

Authorising/de-authorising a mobile phone for Remote Parking Assist Multimedia system:

Settings

Assistance

Parking

Authorising a new mobile phone

In order to be able to use the Remote Parking Assist function, you must authorise your mobile phone. You can authorise up to ten mobile phones.

▶ Select Remote Parking Assist.

Select Authorise a new device in the opened window. Remote Parking Assist is ready to connect.
Start the Remote Parking Assist App and additionally start the authorisation process. A connection prompt is displayed.
Scan the QR code on the central display. The mobile phone is authorised.

De-authorising mobile phones

▶ Select Remote Parking Assist.

In the opened window, select the device to be deauthorised.
To de-authorise a mobile phone: select a mobile phone. The mobile phone is deleted from the device list.
To de-authorise all mobile phones: selectDeauthorise all devices. All mobile phones are deleted from the device list.

Manoeuvring assistant

Function of Drive Away Assist

Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If the system detects an obstacle in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly reduced to approximately 2 km/h. A risk of collision may occur in the following situations, forexample:

• If the driver mixes up the accelerator and brake pedals.
  • If the driver engages an incorrect gear.

- If the driver depresses the accelerator pedal with too much force.

Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions:

• If the vehicle was stationary and the transmission position was changed to or .
• If the vehicle has rolled less than approximately 1.0 m since being at a standstill.
• If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 1.0 m away.

The Drive-away Assist can be deactivated or activated in the Manoeuvring assistance menu ( page 330).

If a critical situation is detected, the following symbol appears in red in the selected view in the Camera & parkingmenu:

If Drive Away Assist is not available, the same symbol appears in grey. If the Camera & parking menu is not opened in the central display,

the symbol and pop-up of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC both appear.

Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range.

A WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist

Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and traffic situations.

▶ Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone.
Be prepared to brake or swerve as necessary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take evasive action.

System limits

The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply ( page 318).

On uphill gradients, the performance of Drive Away Assist is restricted.

If a transport device, e.g. trailer or bicycle carrier, is attached to the hitch and the electrical connection is correctly established, the drive-away assistance is not available when reversing.

Function of cross traffic warning

The cross traffic warning can warn you of crossing traffic when you are exiting a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle.

The cross traffic warning is active under the following conditions:

• Warning for crossing traffic behind: the vehicle is driving in reverse at a speed slower than approx. 10 km/h.
• Warning for crossing traffic ahead: the vehicle is driving forwards at a speed slower than approx. 10 km/h and the camera image is shown in the central display ( page 313).

The Warning for crossing traffic ahead can be deactivated or activated in the Manoeuvring assistance menu.

Depending on the country, the Warning for crossing traffic behind can also be deactivated or activated ( page 330).

If a critical situation is detected, the following symbol appears in red in the selected view in the Camera & parkingmenu:

Warning for crossing traffic behind

• The vehicle can be braked automatically when crossing traffic is detected.
• If the Camera & parking menu is not opened and a critical situation is detected, a warning appears in the central display together with the PARKTRONIC Parking Assist pop-up.

Warning for crossing traffic ahead

• If Active Parking Assist is active, the vehicle can be braked automatically when crossing traffic is detected.
• If Active Parking Assist is not active but the Camera & parking menu is opened, a warning appears.
• If the Camera & parking menu is not opened, the system cannot react to crossing traffic.

The cross traffic warning is only an aid and not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range.

WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of the cross traffic warning

The cross traffic warning cannot always clearly identify objects and traffic situations.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on the cross traffic warning alone.
Be prepared to brake or swerve as necessary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take evasive action.

System limits

If the cross traffic warning is not available, the symbol appears in grey.

The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply ( page 318).

If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible.

In the following situations, the cross traffic warning is not available:

• on inclines
• Warning for crossing traffic behind: if a transport device, e.g. trailer or bicycle carrier, is attached to the hitch and the electrical connection is correctly established.

Manoeuvring brake function

The manoeuvring brake function can prevent collisions with pedestrians when the vehicle is reversing at slow speeds. If the reversing camera detects a person in the vehicle path, the vehicle can be braked to a standstill.

The manoeuvring brake function can intervene under the following conditions:

• The vehicle is reversing at a speed slower than 10 km/h.
• The camera image is shown in the central display ( page 313).

You can activate and deactivate the manoeuvring brake Manoeuvring assistance function in the menu ( page 330).

If the manoeuvring brake function is triggered, the following symbol appears in red in the selected view in the Camera & parkingmenu:

① If the manoeuvring brake function is not available, the same symbol appears in grey.

The manoeuvring brake function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range.

WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection by the manoeuvring brake function

The manoeuvring brake function cannot always clearly detect people. Other obstacles are not detected by the function.

In these cases, the function may brake unnecessarily or not brake at all.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on the manoeuvring brake function alone.
Be ready to brake.

System limits

Observe the system limits of the following functions:

• Active Parking Assist (→ page 318)
• 360° Camera (→ page 308)
• Reversing camera ( page 306)

The manoeuvring brake function is not available in the following situations:

• on inclines
• If transport equipment, forexample a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established.

Activating/deactivating manoeuvring assistance

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ Assistance
Parking

① This function is available on demand ( page 26).

Select Manoeuvring assistance.

Activate or deactivate the desired manoeuvring assistance.

Memory Parking Assist

Function of Memory Parking Assist

Memory Parking Assist can park your vehicle using a previously stored parking space. You can store parking procedures with a total distance of up to 500 m (100 m per parking or exiting procedure).

During parking or exiting, the system can travel a previously stored path of up to approximately 100 m to or out of the desired parking space, for example, from the driveway entrance into the garage.

Within a radius of approx. 150 m, only one parking or exiting procedure can be recorded.

Only use Memory Parking Assist on private property. Use on public roads, e. g. in public parking spaces, is not permitted.

Memory Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range.

System limits

Observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist ( page 318).

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Memory Parking Assist

If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise:

• Memory Parking Assist may steer too early.
- The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.

This result in a collision.

In these situations, do not use Memory Parking Assist.

Objects located above or below the detection range of Memory Parking Assist may not be detected during the parking procedure.

Drawbars of parked trailers, among other objects, that protrude into the parking space may not be detected.

Do not use Memory Parking Assist in the following situations, for example:

• In extreme weather conditions such as ice, packed snow or in heavy rain.
• When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle.
• If the parking space is on a steep downhill or uphill gradient.
• When snow chains are fitted.

Recording a parking procedure using Memory Parking Assist

Requirements

• The entire route is, forexample, within your own property and not on public roads.
• The system needs reference points in the surroundings to orient itself, suchas fences, walls or trees. Therefore, after starting the vehicle, a certain distance must first be driven. If not enough reference points are detected in the

surrounding area, no new route can be recorded.

Diagram showing a car interior with a blue icon labeled 'P' and a blue square button, likely indicating a parking or security feature.

Press button ①. The Camera & parking view opens in the central display.

Camera views Parkassistenz Memory Parking Assist 2 3 Pos

Select ② Memory Parking Assist menu.
Brake the vehicle to a standstill at the desired starting point of the assisted parking procedure, e.g. a driveway entrance.
Start recording: Tap 3.

① If not all conditions for a recording are met, symbol ③ is greyed out.

Park the vehicle in the desired parking space. Do not exceed 8 km/h.
End recording: Stop the vehicle and tap again. The recording is stored.
① In the Memory Parking Assist settings you can delete and rename stored parking procedures.
Parking with Memory Parking Assist

Requirements:

• A parking procedure has been recorded.
Press button ①.

The Camera & parking view opens in the central display.

Camera views Parkaslatenz Memory Parking Assist

Select Memory Parking Assist ② menu.
Brake the vehicle to a standstill at the starting point of the stored parking procedure.
To start the parking procedure: press ▶.
Select the stored parking procedure from the list.

Follow the instructions on the central display. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.
The turn signal indicator is not switched on automatically. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions.
After completion of the parking procedure, safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
■ Exiting a parking space with Memory Parking Assist

Requirements:

• The exiting procedure was recorded together with the respective parking procedure and stored separately within one driving cycle.
• The vehicle was parked using Memory Parking Assist.
  Press button 1

The Camera & parking view opens in the central display.
Select Memory Parking Assist ② menu.

Starting the exiting procedure

Press ▶.
▶ Confirm the saved exiting procedure.
Follow the instructions on the central display. The vehicle drives the recorded route.

The turn signal indicator is not switched on automatically. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions.

Take control of the vehicle after the exiting procedure has been completed.

Setting Memory Parking Assist Multimedia system:

Settings Assistance Parking Memory Parking Assist

Renaming a recording

Select Manage lanes.
Select □□□ next to the desired recording.
Enter a name and confirm with OK.

Deleting a recording

▶ Select Manage lanes.
Select □□□ next to the desired recording.
Select Delete entry.

Deleting all recordings

Select Manage lanes.
button next to one of the desired recordings.
Select Delete all.
① Alternatively, you can delete all data in Memory Parking Assist by resetting the multimedia system ( page 385).

Trailer hitch

Notes on trailer operation

NOTE The operating permit may be invalidated due to the illegal installation of trailer hitches

The installation – including retrofitting – of a non-folding or non-removable trailer hitch that even partially conceals the license plate or the lighting system is prohibited.

▶ Observe the applicable legal regulations for the installation of trailer hitches.

WARNING Risk of accident due to car/trailer combination swerving

If you drive too fast in trailer operation, the car/trailer combination may start to swerve. This could cause you to lose control of the car/trailer combination. The car/trailer combination may even overturn.

▶ Under no circumstances should you try to straighten the car/trailer combination by increasing your speed.
▶ Reduce the speed and do not counter-steer.

Brake if necessary.

NOTE Damage to the engine due to overheating
If you have a trailer hitch retrofitted, modifications to the engine cooling system may be necessary depending on the vehicle type.

If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the fastening points on the vehicle frame.

Retrofitting a trailer hitch is permissible only if a trailer load is specified in your vehicle documents. If this is not the case, the vehicle is not approved for trailer operation.

Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Observe the following notes on the tongue weight:

• Do not use a tongue weight that exceeds or falls below the permissible tongue weight
• Use a tongue weight as close as possible to the maximum tongue weight

Do not exceed the following values:

• Permissible towing capacity
- Permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle
• Permissible gross weight of the towing vehicle
- Permissible gross weight of the trailer
• Maximum permissible speed of the trailer

Ensure the following before starting a journey:

• The tyre pressure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle is set for a maximum load
• The lighting of the connected trailer is operational

In the event of increased rear axle load, the car/trailer combination must not exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for car/trailer combinations is above 100 km/h.

Extending and retracting the ball neck fully electrically

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged

If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose.

Make sure that the ball neck securely engages and locks into place.

NOTE Damage to the all-electric trailer hitch due to additional pressure

The all-electric trailer hitch could be mechanically damaged by applying additional pressure when the ball neck is being extended or retracted.

Do not make the ball neck extend/retract faster by applying additional pressure.

NOTE Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck

When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer hitch, retract the ball neck.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the trailer hitch

If a trailer hitch is used to recover the vehicle, the vehicle or the trailer hitch itself may be damaged in the process.

Use the trailer hitch only for pulling a trailer or attaching approved carrier systems (e.g. a bicycle rack). Exception: Since vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a fixture for a towing eye at the rear, towing or tow-starting is permitted.

When towing or tow-starting with the trailer hitch, observe the information in the section "Fitting and removing the towing eye."

Extending the ball neck fully electrically

Diagram of a car rearview with labeled parts, showing a camera icon and a zoomed-in view of the interior component.

▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
Keep the swivel range clear.
Pull button ②. Indicator lamp ① will flash and a message reading Trailer coupling in motion will appear on the driver's display.
The ball neck will extend fully electrically.

Wait until the ball neck has reached the swung-out position with a clear locking noise. When indicator lamp ① is continuously lit, the ball neck is securely locked in place. If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, indicator lamp ① will flash and a message reading Trailer coupling Check lock will appear on the driver's display.

Diagram of a car's front bumper with a close-up inset showing a mechanical component (no text or symbols)

Retracting the ball neck fully electrically

Remove the trailer cable or adapter plug.
Pull button 2

Indicator lamp ① will flash and a message reading Trailer coupling in motion will appear on the driver's display.

The ball neck will retract fully electrically.

Wait until the ball neck has reached the swung-in locked position.

When indicator lamp ① goes out, the ball neck is securely locked in place.

If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, indicator lamp Ⓞ will flash and a message reading Trailer coupling Check lock will appear on the driver's display.

Observe the information about the displays on the driver's display:

• Indicator and warning lamps (→ page 591)
• Display messages (→ page 512)

Extending and retracting the ball neck fully electrically (multimedia system)

WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged

If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose.

Always engage the ball neck as described.

NOTE Damage to the all-electric trailer hitch due to additional pressure

The all-electric trailer hitch could be mechanically damaged by applying additional pressure when the ball neck is being extended or retracted.

Do not make the ball neck extend/retract faster by applying additional pressure.

Requirements:

• The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
• The swivel range is clear.

- The trailer cables or adapter plugs have been removed.

Multimedia system:

Extending the ball neck fully electrically

Select
The Trailer coupling in motion display message will appear on the driver's display.
The ball neck will extend fully electrically.
▶ Wait until the ball neck has locked in place.

If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the Trailer coupling Check lock message will appear on the driver display.

Retracting the ball neck fully electrically

Select
The Trailer coupling in motion display message will appear on the driver's display.
The ball neck will retract fully electrically.
▶ Wait until the ball neck has locked in place.

If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the message Trailer coupling Check lock will appear on the driver's display.

Observe the information about the displays on the instrument cluster:

• Indicator and warning lamps ( page 591)
• Display messages (→ page 512)

Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer

WARNING Risk of injury due to a change in vehicle level

Vehicles with level control system: the vehicle level may be changed unintentionally, e.g. by other persons. If you couple or uncouple the trailer during this time, you may become trapped. In addition, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.

Observe the following when coupling or uncoupling:

Do not open or close any doors or the boot lid.
Do not initiate the level control system and do not operate the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
Do not lock or unlock the vehicle.

The trailer will be correctly detected by the vehicle only if the following conditions are met:

- The ball neck is extended and engaged in a securely locked position.

Trailers with a 7-pin plug can be connected to the vehicle with the following adapters:

• Adapter plug
• Adapter cable

The trailer will be correctly detected by the vehicle only if the following conditions are met:

• The trailer is connected correctly.
• The trailer lighting system is in working order.

A correctly connected trailer influences, among other things, the functions of the following systems:

• ESP® trailer stabilisation
  • Active Lane Keeping Assist
• Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
  • Active Parking Assist
  • Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist
• Drive Away Assist
• Cross traffic warning
  • Manoeuvring brake function
• Reversing camera
• 360° camera
• AIRMATIC
  • E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL

Coupling up a trailer

! NOTE Damage to the starter battery due to full discharge

Charging the trailer battery using the power supply of the trailer can damage the starter battery.

Do not use the vehicle's power supply to charge the trailer battery.

▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
Remove the cover cap from the ball head and store it in a safe place.
▶ Position the trailer on a level surface behind the vehicle and couple it up to the vehicle.

Two views of a black automotive electrical plug with labeled parts (no text or symbols present)

Open the socket cap.
Insert the plug with lug ① into groove ③ on the socket.
Turn bayonet coupling ② to the right as far as it will go.
Let the cap engage.
Secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties (only if you are using an adapter cable).
Make sure that the cable is always slack for ease of movement during cornering.

In the following circumstances, a message may appear on the driver's display even if the trailer has been connected correctly:

• LEDs have been installed in the trailer lighting system.
- The current has fallen below the trailer lighting system's minimum current (50 mA).

① Accessories can be connected to the permanent power supply up to 180 W and to the power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock.

Uncoupling a trailer

WARNING Risk of being crushed and becoming trapped when uncoupling a trailer

When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged inertia-activated brake, your hand may become trapped between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.

Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake.

NOTE Damage during uncoupling with an engaged overrun brake

The vehicle may be damaged if you uncouple with an engaged overrun brake.

Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when disconnecting the trailer cable

Vehicles with level control system: the vehicle may lower when you disconnect the trailer cable.

This could result in other people becoming trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.

Make sure nobody is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when you disconnect the trailer cable.

NOTE Damage to the rear bumper from installing adapter cables or adapter plugs

The following parts could be damaged when swiveling the ball neck fully electrically:

• Bumper
• Adapter cable
• Adapter plug
  ▶ Always remove the adapter cable or adapter plug before swiveling the ball neck fully electrically.

▶ Secure the trailer against rolling away.
Disconnect the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer.
Uncouple the trailer.
Place the cover cap on the ball head.
① Trailers with LED lighting: after uncoupling the trailer, switch the vehicle on and then off again.

Bicycle rack function

WARNING Risk of an accident if the bicycle rack is used incorrectly

The bicycle rack may become detached from the vehicle in the following cases:

• the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch is exceeded.
  • the bicycle rack is used incorrectly.
• the bicycle rack is secured to the ball neck beneath the ball head.

Observe the following for your own safety and that of other road users:

• always adhere to the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch.
  • always observe the permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle.

• use the bicycle rack only to transport bicycles.

• always mount the bicycle rack properly by attaching to the ball head and the ball neck guide pin, if possible.

• when transporting four bicycles, always use bicycle racks that have additional support on the ball neck guide pin.
  • use only bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz.
  • always observe the bicycle rack operating instructions.

NOTE Damage to or breakage of the trailer hitch due to unsuitable or improperly used bicycle rack.

Only use bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz properly as described below.

NOTE Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck

When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball

neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer hitch, retract the ball neck.

NOTE The operating permit may be invalidated due to the illegal installation of trailer hitches

The installation - including retrofitting - of a non-folding or non-removable trailer hitch that even partially conceals the license plate or the lighting system is prohibited.

Observe the applicable legal regulations for the installation of trailer hitches.

Diagram showing car front view with labeled parts and a magnified inset highlighting a mechanical component.

Trailer hitch (example with additional guide pin)

Depending on the bicycle rack's design, different numbers of bicycles can be transported.

The following bicycle rack designs are possible:

- When mounted by attaching to ball head ①, the maximum load capacity is 75 kg. You can transport up to three bicycles.

- When mounted on ball head ① and guide pin ②, the maximum load capacity is 100 kg. You can transport up to four bicycles.

The maximum load capacity is calculated from the weight of the bicycle rack and the bicycle rack load.

Observe the notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle ( page 212).

When using a bicycle rack, set the tyre pressure for increased load on the rear axle of the vehicle. Further information on the tyre pressure can be found in the tyre pressure table ( page 475).

Notes on loading

The larger the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the ball head, the greater the load on the trailer hitch.

Observe the following notes:

• mount heavy bicycles as close to the vehicle as possible
• always distribute the load on the bicycle rack as evenly as possible across the vehicle's longitudinal axis

Mercedes-Benz recommends removing all detachable parts from bicycles (e.g. baskets, child seats, rechargeable batteries) before loading them onto the bicycle rack. This will improve the aerodynamic resistance and centre of gravity of the bicycle rack.

Always secure the bicycles to prevent them from moving around and check them at regular intervals to ensure that they are secure.

Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. The driving characteristics and rear view may be impaired. In addition, aerodynamic resistance and the load on the trailer hitch will increase.

Diagram showing bicycle lift and front view with labeled components and structural details

Load distribution on the bicycle rack

① Vertical distance between centre of gravity and ball head
2 Horizontal distance between centre of gravity and ball head
③ The centre of gravity is on the vehicle's centre axis.

Observe the following information when loading the bicycle rack:

Loading the bicycle rack

	3 bicycles 4 bicycles
Total weight of bicycle rack and load	Up to 75 kg Up to 100 kg
Max. distance1	420 mm 420 mm
Max. distance2	300 mm 400 mm

When transporting four bicycles or a total weight between 75 kg and 100 kg, always use bicycle racks with additional support on both trailer hitch guide pins.

Vehicle towing instructions

The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems may result in damage to the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar systems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guar-

anteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side.

Observe the following information:

• Permitted towing methods (→ page 461)
- Plug-in hybrid: permitted towing methods (→ page 462)
- The notes on towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground (→ page 463)

Notes on the driver's display

WARNING Risk of accident if the driver display fails

If the driver display has failed or is malfunctioning, function restrictions in systems relevant to safety cannot be detected.

The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired.

▶ Drive on carefully.
Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

The driver's display shows basic information such as speed, engine speed, fuel level, coolant temperature as well as indicator and warning lamps.

Additional functions available include the following:

• Different menus, e.g. for assistance and navigation
  • Status displays for the driving systems
• Display messages
  • Information on speed, Consumption and range
• Power meter level and state of charge of the high-voltage battery
  • Indicator and warning lamps

Plug-in hybrid vehicles are additionally equipped with the following warning and indicator lamps:

• READY Drive is activated
• "Foot off the accelerator" (→ page 223)

Some menu content and settings can be customised.

Notes on the 3D driver display

The 3D driver's display enables a three-dimensional representation of the content of the driver's display. This requires the driver to be recorded by the driver camera.

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

• The driver camera is deactivated or is not working.
• The driver is outside the detection range of the driver camera.
• The operating conditions are not in place, e.g. if the outside temperature is too low or too high.

Operating the driver's display

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle

when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the driver's display.

Scrolling on the menu bar

Diagram showing car interior with a vehicle, a digital map interface with numbered annotations and directional arrows, and a small inset image of the dashboard.

1 Back button
② Main menu button
3 Touch Control

The content on the driver's display is controlled using the control elements on the left side of the steering wheel. You can use Touch Control ③ to navigate vertically and horizontally by swiping with

one finger. Confirm your selection by pressing the Touch Control.

To operate Touch Control ③ in the most effective way, use the tip of your thumb if possible. You can also set the sensitivity of the Touch Control on the central display.

Briefly press main menu button ②.
Select a menu by swiping to the left or right on Touch Control 3.
To confirm: press Touch Control ③.

Driver display menus

Notes on menus on the driver's display

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

▶ Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the driver's display.

The following menus can be called up via the menu bar on the driver's display:

• Understated
• Sport
• Exclusive
• Classic
• Navigation
• Assistance
• Service

On some of these menus, you can choose between different display content on the centre display area.

On most of the menus, you can use Options to configure further settings for the menu-specific display content.

You can find further information about the possible settings and selections on the menus in the Digital Owner's Manual.

Calling up displays on the Sport menu (plug-in hybrid)

Driver's display:

→ Sport

The Sport menu provides additional information about the operating energy as well as the recuperated output of the vehicle.

When you call up the Sport menu on the menu bar of the driver's display, the menu colour setting will automatically be applied to the MBUX multimedia system.
To call up the menu: press the left-hand Touch Control.

750 800 250 0 -500 3600 1 2 3

① Display range of recuperated power (recuperation)
② Display range of the output
3 Additional display range of the output

Head-up display

Function of the head-up display

The head-up display projects various content into the driver's field of vision, for example.

You can use the head-up display menu bar to select various contexts, e.g.:

- Minimal

• Sport
• Standard
• Augmented reality
  • ECO display (depending on model and equipment) ( page 217)
• Settings
  • Head-up display on/off

Depending on the equipment, the functions may differ from the description and images in this Owner's Manual. For example, route guidance with augmented reality is not available in all equipment variants.

The following image shows an example of the head-up display. You can choose what content is displayed ( page 348).

Head-up display content with navigation (6x2°)

Diagram showing labeled components of a device or system with numbered parts 1 through 5, including a central screen icon.

① Detected instructions and traffic signs
2 Navigation instructions (distance to the next route event)
Steer Assist status
4 Current speed
5 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC)

Head-up display with navigation and augmented reality (10x5°)

Diagram of a device with numbered components and labeled parts, likely for electronics or system labeling.

Navigation instructions
② Augmented reality navigation instructions
3 Navigation status displays, such as remaining distance to the destination, expected time of arrival
Active Lane Keeping Assist status
5 Steer Assist status
6 Current speed
7 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC)
8 Detected traffic signs (Traffic Sign Assist)

When you receive a call, the 📞 Call waiting message will appear on the head-up display and the driver's display.

System limits

Visibility is particularly influenced by the following conditions:

• Seat position
  • Image position setting
  • Light conditions
• Wet road surfaces
• Objects on the display cover
  • Polarisation in sunglasses

Function of the head-up display with augmented reality

① Augmented reality is available only in conjunction with the 10x5° head-up display.

The head-up display with augmented reality projects content into the driver's field of vision, such as:

• Information from and visualisation of the navigation system
• Information from and visualisation of the driver assistance systems, e.g. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
• Information from the menus of the driver's display

Highway navigation diagram with numbered lanes and vehicle image, showing traffic flow over a highway.

Head-up display with augmented reality (example)

① Marker for the detected vehicle in front (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC)
② Change-of-direction arrows for the route (navigation)
③ Driver assistance system status bar

The marker for the detected vehicle in front and the change-of-direction arrows for the route are dynamic displays. The vehicle marker stays with the vehicle in front, and Active Distance Assist regulates your speed based on this. The change-of-direction arrows point the way calculated by the navigation system.

System limits

The marker for the detected vehicle in front may be inaccurate or may not be applied to the correct vehicle in some situations. Always pay attention to the actual driving situation.

Route guidance with augmented reality will not be available in some situations, e.g. in the event of poor satellite reception or roads that have not been digitised.

Visibility is influenced by conditions including the following:

• Driver camera and multifunction camera recording
• The extent to which the windscreen in the area of the multifunction camera is dirty, or if the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured

Further system limits of the head-up display ( page 345).

Operating the head-up display

Selecting display content of the head-up display via the menu bar of the driver's display

Press the main menu button on the left.
To select the menu bar of the head-up display: swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

120 Speed 120 Battery 120 Battery 100 Status: 120 Battery 100 Battery 100 Status: 120 Battery 100 Battery 100

Switching between display content on the head-up display

Swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control. A preview of the selected display content will appear on the head-up display.

To confirm: press the OK button.

Switching back to the driver's display

Press the ↩ or □ button.

Setting the position and brightness

Swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control and select Settings on the menu bar of the head-up display.
Press the left-hand Touch Control. The current position and brightness settings will be displayed as graphics on the head-up display as well as on the driver's display.
To adjust the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
To adjust the brightness: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control. The settings configured for position and brightness will be saved automatically.
Press the ↩ or OK button to exit the settings.

① Vehicles with augmented reality function: when the position is adjusted, the status bar will be moved upwards and the display section made smaller. This may slightly affect the area on which the augmented reality content is displayed.

Selecting the head-up display with augmented reality

Press the main menu button 📋 on the left.
To select the menu bar of the head-up display: swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
To select the head-up display with augmented reality: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control to activate the desired content.

Switching the head-up display on/off

Driver's display:

Switching on

Swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Press left-hand Touch Control OK.

Switching off

Swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Swipe on the left-hand Touch Control and select Head-up display.
Press left-hand Touch Control OK.

Setting the Head-up Display in the multimedia system

Multimedia system:

Switching the 3D display for the driver display on or off

Select 3D Driver Display.
The 3D display of the driver display is switched on or off.

The 3D display for the driver display is only activated when the driver camera detects the driver. Otherwise, the driver display switches from the 3D display to the 2D display ( page 343).

Switching the Head-up Display on/off

Select Head-up display. The Head-up Display is activated or deactivated.

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system

Electric drive support
② Recuperation behaviour of the electric motor
Due to various system limits, the values displayed may temporarily differ slightly from the actual value.

Function of the power meter

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

① Start of the POWER display range
② End of the POWER display range
3 Current state of charge of the high-voltage battery
4 Maximum recuperated energy
5 Start of the display range of recuperated energy

The power meter has the following functions:

- In electric mode, the area ① - ② shows what percentage of the electrical drive is currently being used. The combustion engine is switched on at 100%. In boost mode, the elec-

trical power assistance of the drive is displayed.

• The area ④ - ⑤ shows the recuperation and charging behaviour using the combustion engine.
  Due to various system limits, the displayed value may temporarily differ slightly from the actual value.

Overview of status displays on the driver's display

The status displays for the driving and driving safety systems can be found in display sections

① to ④.

120 RPM 120rpm 4 3 2

Pedestrian detection (only on assistant display)
Active Parking Assist is available ( page 320)
Active Parking Assist has recognised a parking space ( page 320)
PFF Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (→ page 317)

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( page 272)
Specified distance for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( page 272)
Active Brake Assist switched off (→ page 290)
Active Brake Assist impaired or not functioning ( page 290)
Active Steering Assist ( page 280)
Active Lane Change Assist (→ page 284)
Active Lane Keeping Assist (→ page 298)
Active Blind Spot Assist (only on assistant display) (→ page 297)
READY Plug-in hybrid operation activated
Haptic accelerator pedal (→ page 220, 223, 218)
Sound generator inoperative ( page 525)
(A) ECO start/stop function ( page 216)
HOLD HOLD function ( page 267)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ( page 175)

120min:1 Maximum permissible speed exceeded (for certain countries only)
Active Stop-and-Go Assist ( page 280)
* Slippery road surface warning

Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs ( page 291)

Notes on operating safety

For your own safety, always observe the following points when operating mobile communications equipment and especially your voice control system:

• Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving.
• If you use the voice control system in an emergency your voice can change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be delayed.
• Familiarise yourself with the voice control system functions before starting the journey.

① The voice control system does not replace the Owner's Manual.

The answers from the voice control system do not provide the complete scope of information contained in the Owner's Manual. The voice control system also does not give detailed warning or damage information. You can get the full scope of information about the function and safe operation of the systems and components in the vehicle in the Owner's Manual.

Operation

Function of the MBUX voice assistant

Using the MBUX voice assistant, vehicle functions and various areas of the MBUX multimedia system can be operated by voice input, e.g. Navigation or Telephone. The MBUX voice assistant is operational about half a minute after switching on the vehicle and can be operated from all seats (depending on the optional equipment).

Conducting a dialogue

Requirements:

• Voice activation must be switched on in the multimedia system ( page 353).
• For corrections during output, the Voice barge-in option must be activated in the multi-media system ( page 353).

Starting a dialogue

Say Hey Mercedes to activate the MBUX voice assistant.

or

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. A wave appears in the MBUX multimedia system. The dialogue can be started.

For the dialogue with the MBUX voice assistant, you can use complete sentences of colloquial language as voice commands. Voice activation can also be combined directly with a voice command, e.g. Hey Mercedes, how warm is it outside?

Interrupting the dialogue

During the dialogue say Pause. The dialogue is interrupted.
Say Hey Mercedes to continue the dialogue.

Correcting an entry

During the dialogue say Correction.

or

Interrupt the system's voice output.

Changing dialogue level

During the dialogue, say Back. The MBUX voice assistant jumps back to the previous dialogue step.

During the dialogue, say From the beginning again. The MBUX voice assistant jumps to the highest dialogue level.

Navigating in the selection list If a voice command does not achieve a clear result, a selection list is shown.

Say the line number or the content to select an entry or to have further details shown.
Say Next page or Previous page to browse the selection list.

Calling up help

For information about the MBUX voice assistant: say Hey Mercedes, what can you do? .
Current application: say Help. You will receive suggestions and information about operation of the MBUX voice assistant for the current application.
Specific function: call up the voice command for the required function, for example with Hey Mercedes, I need help with the radio.

Digital Owner's Manual: say Show me the Owner's Manual. The full extent of the Digital Owner's Manual is available on the central display when the vehicle is stationary.

Overview of the operable functions of the MBUX voice assistant

You can use the MBUX voice assistant to operate the following functions depending on the vehicle equipment:

• Telephone
  • Text message and e-mail
• Navigation
• Radio and media
• Vehicle functions
  • Online functions

Full functionality of the voice control system is only available for you with activation of online voice control ( page 353).

Information on the language setting

You can change the language of the MBUX voice assistant via the system language settings ( page 385). If the set system language is not supported by the MBUX voice assistant, English will be selected.

Setting functions of MBUX voice assistant using the multimedia system

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ System ▶ Voice assistant

Switching voice activation of MBUX voice assistant on or off

For vehicles with driver camera or MBUX Interior Assistant, the MBUX voice assistant can be switched on or off in the Intelligent Assistants menu.
▶ Select Hey Mercedes.

When the function is active, the Hey Mercedes voice command can activate the dialogue.

Switching direct commands on or off

Select
Activate or deactivate the function. If the function is active, some commands can be used without Hey Mercedes, for example Next track.

Switching voice activation for individual seats on or off

Select
▶ Switch the function for the desired seats on or off.

Switching voice interruption on or off

▶ Select Further settings.
Select Voice barge-in. If the function is active, a command can be interjected during voice output of the system.

Switching proactivity on or off

Select Further settings.

Select the desired situation, e.g. Activate your profile or Don't forget your phone. When the function is active, the voice assistant proactively provides information in specific situations.

Activating or deactivating online voice control

① Online voice control is activated at the factory.

▶ Select Online recognition.

Activate or deactivate the function. If the function is activated and a Mercedes me user account is linked to the vehicle, additional results are available through the provision of external information, e.g. information on POIs. By clicking the symbol in the wave, more information about the online voice control can be displayed.

Activating or deactivating contacts for online use

Select Contact upload for online recognition. When the function is active, contacts will be found more easily and accurately using voice input.

Using MBUX voice assistant effectively

Notes on optimum use of MBUX voice assistant

• The MBUX voice assistant is operational half a minute after switching on the vehicle and can be operated from all seats, depending on the equipment installed. The system recognises from which seat the command was spoken and performs actions according to the seat position.
• When a dialogue is ended, the MBUX voice assistant continues to be active for as long as the wave is displayed in the multimedia system. You can say another voice command without saying Hey Mercedes.
• Using the direct command Change language to English, the system language can be changed to English without Hey Mercedes. Direct commands must be activated for this.
• If a user profile has been stored and is active, the MBUX voice assistant can make suggestions based on the habits of the user. If the voice commands are not clear, the system

selects an action. The action can be corrected with a new voice command.

Say Hey Mercedes, load my personal profile, to activate the profile. The user's voice must first be learned by the system and assigned to a profile.

Further information on user profiles.

- With the MBUX voice assistant, incoming calls can be accepted or rejected without the keyword Hey Mercedes.

Information on the MBUX online voice assistant

The online voice control facilitates recognition and thanks to external information makes additional results available.

Therefore, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you activate online voice control ( page 353).

You will need a Mercedes me user account for this. If you do not yet have a user account you have to create one and connect it with your vehicle.

Then call up your Mercedes me user account. The Mercedes me services are shown and can be activated.

By clicking on the symbols displayed in the wave, further information on the online status is displayed.

When online voice control is active, additional functions are available such as:

• Weather
• General knowledge
  • Public holidays and school holidays
• Smarthome
• Messages
  • Time, date and time zones
• Pocket and currency calculator
  • Football results and fixture lists
• Share prices
• Calendar
• ChitChat
• Horoscope
• Geo Quiz

The availability of these functions is country and equipment-dependent.
① Text content is taken from Wikipedia in accordance with the CC BY-SA 3.0 licence.

Essential voice commands

Notes on voice commands

It is not necessary to use exact voice commands to call up a specific function. The MBUX voice assistant also understands you when you use your colloquial speech. Some examples are listed below. For some languages however these examples are only available to a limited extent.

Examples of voice commands:

• Navigation (→ page 356)
  • Telephone (→ page 356)
  • Radio and TV (→ page 356)
  • Media player (→ page 356)
• Messages (→ page 357)
  • Vehicle functions (→ page 357)
  • Online functions (→ page 358)

Examples of navigation voice commands

You can operate the navigation system using the MBUX voice assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible navigation commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for navigation.

• Drive me home.
  • Where is the nearest service station?
  • Is there a service area along the route?
• Set Central Park as intermediate destination.
• Cancel the route guidance.
  • Show my last destination.
  • I want to buy juice.
  • Search for a French restaurant in Manhattan.

Examples of telephone voice commands

You can operate phones connected with MBUX multimedia system the using the MBUX voice assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible telephone commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for phone.

• Call Peter Miller on the mobile phone.
- Dial 0711 17 0.
- Call my father.
- Accept call
- Reject call
• Search for the contact Peter Miller.
- Switch to address book
• Show me the incoming calls.
- Switch the phone

Examples of radio and TV voice commands

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can operate the radio and TV using the MBUX voice assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible radio or TV voice commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for radio or Help for TV.

• Play the radio station Heart FM.
• Next station.

• Previous station.
  • Show me the list of radio stations

• Save the station
  • What am I listening to?

Examples of media voice commands

You can operate connected media sources and online music using the MBUX voice assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible media voice commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for media or Help for player.

• Play Michael Jackson.
• Next track.
• Previous track.
• Play similar track.
• Repeat this track.
• Switch on random playback.
• Mute the music.
• Switch to USB.

- Play "Yellow Submarine" by the Beatles.

Examples of message voice commands

Messages can be created, edited and listened to using the MBUX voice assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible message commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for messaging.

• Write a text message to Jane Doe: When will the next meeting take place?
  • Show me my new e-mails.
  • Write an e-mail to Jane Doe.
• Read me my new text messages.
  • Show all new text messages.
  • Write an e-mail to John Doe in English

Examples of vehicle voice commands

You can use the vehicle voice commands to directly call up the menus for the plug-in hybrid settings and operate the corresponding vehicle functions.

• "Display the energy flow."
- "Switch to charging settings."

• "Activate pre-entry climate control."
• "Where is the nearest charging station?"
  • "How far can I still drive?"
• "Set the departure time to tomorrow morning at 8 am."

Examples of vehicle voice commands

You can operate vehicle settings and vehicle functions using the MBUX voice assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible vehicle voice commands.

If no seat is mentioned for commands, the action is carried out automatically for the seat from which the command was spoken or for the function which is closest to that seat.

• Switch the seat heating to level 2.
• My feet are cold.
  • Start the Refresh programme.
• Switch the massage function on.
  • I would like to set the ambient light to blue

• Switch on the reading lamp.

• Turn off the rear light.

• Open all the windows.
• Switch the driver's display to 3D.
  • How fast can I drive here?
  • Tell me my next service appointment
  • How warm is it outside?

Information about the vehicle can also be requested:

• Information about individual items of the vehicle equipment
- Hey Mercedes, which massage programmes do you have?
- Hey Mercedes, do I have Blind Spot Assist?
- Hey Mercedes, where is the warning triangle?
- Information about functioning of the systems and components installed in the vehicle
- Hey Mercedes, what is DISTRONIC?
Hey Mercedes, what do I need ESP for?
- Hey Mercedes, what is MBUX?

• Information about operating the systems and components installed in the vehicle
- Hey Mercedes, how do I connect my smartphone?
- Hey Mercedes, how can I turn on the main beam headlamps?
- Hey Mercedes, how do I stop the ionization function?

You can also use the vehicle voice commands to directly call up the menus for the plug-in hybrid settings and operate the corresponding vehicle functions.

• "Display the energy flow."
- "Switch to charging settings."
- "Activate pre-entry climate control."
- "Where is the nearest charging station?"
• "How far can I still drive?"
- "Set the departure time to tomorrow morning at 8 am."

Examples of online functions

Depending on the country, language and vehicle equipment, additional functions are available when online voice control is active. The system accesses external information and can, among other things, answer questions about general knowledge, provide information about weather or locations, perform calculations, etc.

• Is the sun shining in Manchester?
• Is it raining at my location?
• What are the skiing conditions on the Zugspitze?
• What's the time in Sydney now?
• In which country do you pay with dollars?
• How many Swiss franks make 25 euros?
• How long now until the holidays?
• What day is it tomorrow?
• What is 20% of 29?
• What does my horoscope say?
• How are the shares for Mercedes-Benz Group doing?
- Let's play Geo Quiz.

• I'm bored.
  • Who is the current prime minister?
  • What do you know about the Globe Theatre in London?
  • Who painted the picture "The Scream"?
  • What's the status in the Premier League?
  • Create a calendar entry tomorrow at 9 am.
  • What's my next task?
• Tell me a joke.
  • How many languages do you speak?
  • What is your favourite animal?
• Are there any updates?
  • Is the light still on in the kitchen?
• Switch off all the devices in my house.
• Please set the temperature in the living room to 24 degrees.

Direct command examples

With direct commands, some functions can be operated without first saying the voice command Hey Mercedes. To use direct commands, the

function must be activated in the multimedia system ( page 353).

• Next TV channel
• Previous TV channel
• Next radio station
  • Previous radio station
• Next station
• Previous station
• Next track
• Previous track
• Start dashcam recording
• Stop dashcam recording
• Show the map
• 3D map
• 2D map
• Align map to north
• Align map in direction of travel
  • Show all routes
• Show traffic

• Navigate to work

• Navigate home

• Repeat driving instruction
• Cancel route guidance
  • Change language to English

Overview and operation

Notes on the MBUX multimedia system

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.

Depending on the equipment, the scope of function and product designation of your MBUX multimedia system may differ from the description and

images in this Owner's Manual. For example, route guidance with augmented reality is not available in all equipment variants.

NOTE Increased surface temperature due to direct sunlight on the central display

The surface of the central display is very dark. If the display is exposed to direct sunlight, the surface can become very hot.

If the central display has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool down before touching it for a long time.

Overview of the MBUX multimedia system

Diagram of a car dashboard with labeled parts including the steering wheel, dashboard, and screen

① Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system MBUX stands for Mercedes-Benz User Experience.
- Operates Touch Control
② Central display with touch functionality

• Home screen overview
- Operates the touchscreen

3 Switch panel with:

Fingerprint sensor
Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or off

Switches sound on or off Adjusts the volume

Further operating options:

• Conducting a dialogue with the MBUX voice assistant.
• Operating functions contact-free with the MBUX Interior Assistant.

The interaction then follows intelligently, reactively or with hand or head movements.

You can find further information about operation as well as about applications and services in the Digital Owner's Manual.

Anti-theft protection

This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. More detailed information about anti-theft protection can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Zero layer

Function of the zero layer

(i) Your software can be upgraded to a more current version at a later date.

The zero layer provides you with dynamic content from the MBUX multimedia system and is used to quickly access and control the applications you use. When you select 📄 on the central display, the digital map with the applications appears in the lower display area. Compared to the home screen with a classic menu, the steps required to call up the applications are reduced. You can switch between the zero layer and the home screen with a classic menu.

The applications can be hidden from the display area and shown again.

The zero layer provides the following modules and applications:

- Navigation module

In the expanded view you can, for example, display the route overview, switch on the display of traffic information and make settings for View (map), Messages & tones, Route.

• Entertainment (media, radio) and telephone When the lower display area is shown, the entertainment sources are always displayed. A mobile phone must be connected to the MBUX multimedia system for the phone to be displayed.
  • Active applications

The lower display area shows an active massage programme, for example.

- Suggestions

Suggestions are displayed on the lower display area based on context and your user behaviour. Here are a few examples:

• Latest calls
• Active massage programs
  Vehicle functions
• Online voice applications

The applications are first displayed in a reduced view. By tapping on them, you can operate them or open the associated menu (expanded view).

A long press on a suggestion opens a context menu in which further functions are available.

The learning function can be switched on and off for the options.

Overview zero layer

Digital map and user-specific applications (example)

10 47m 星期 Summer Wireless 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RADKED CHAP Friday On My Music - Get...

Navigation module (reduced view)

Enters a destination

Searching for parking

3 Calls up the Control Centre (pull the bar down)

④ Status line

⑤ Calls up user profile settings

6 Content sharing menu

7 Telephone

Requirement for phone: the mobile phone is connected to the MBUX multimedia system.

8 Entertainment sources (media, radio)

9

Press briefly: shows all applications ( page 363)

Press and hold: calls up the home screen with classic menu

10 Route monitor

e.g. route list, lane recommendations, 3D image of the upcoming driving manoeuvre

The zero layer shows the digital map and the user-specific applications.

The following user-specific applications are displayed in the lower display area:

• Suggestions Requirement: suggestions are activated ( page 378).
  • Active applications e.g. a massage programme
• Telephone 7
  • Entertainment sources 8
  • Online voice applications

The lower display area can be hidden and shown ( page 363).

Information about entertainment sources

You can operate the applications in the reduced view or in the menu (expanded view)

(→ page 363).

Examples:

• Control a media source, e.g. pause/play, next track, set a station
• Select tracks from the current playlist or stations from the station list

- Select a media source

The media source must be connected to the MBUX multimedia system.

Information about the telephone

To use the functions, the mobile phones must be connected to the MBUX multimedia system.

Requirement for suggestions: the Calls & messages option is activated in the suggestions.

Examples:

• Answer a call and call a missed call The missed calls are displayed for the mobile phones connected to the MBUX multimedia system.
• Display contacts and call list and call a contact
• Use voice functions
• Suggest contacts

The contacts are suggested for the mobile phones connected to the MBUX multimedia system. No contacts are suggested for the mobile phones that are linked to another user profile.

• Write messages to contacts (suggestion)
- Connect a device via the device manager (suggestion)

Information about active applications

The following functions are available:

• Operating the relaxation programme
• Raising or lowering the vehicle level

Suggestions for comfort and vehicle functions as well as navigation

Requirement: the Comfort, Vehicle and Navigation options are activated in the suggestions.

• Operating the relaxation programme For example, the multimedia system suggests a programme at a certain time.
• Opening the boot lid Requirement: the vehicle is equipped with boot lid convenience closing.
• Setting the vehicle level
• Making heating settings
• Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

- Selecting previous destinations and destinations from favourites

Suggestions for online voice applications

Requirement: the Online voice services option is activated in the suggestions.

The suggested voice applications are made available online and are based on your previous voice inputs.

Examples:

• What will the weather be like tomorrow?
- Play the messages.
- Start geoquiz.
- Open the garage door.

- Calling up and operating the zero layer

Calling up the zero layer

When the vehicle has been switched on, the zero layer is displayed with the digital map. Navigation is active.

From another application: press the button on the right side of the steering wheel.

or

Tap on

Operating applications in the reduced view (examples)

Media: to play the previous or next track, tap ▶ or ▷.
To answer a call or call a missed call: tap on the contact. After the connection has been established, the call functions are available.
To end a call: tap on the contact again.
To reply to message: tap on a message and dictate the message via the MBUX Voice Assistant.
To start a massage program: tap on the application and start the massage program.
To select a previous destination: tap on the application and select one of the previous destinations.
To select a destination from the favourites: tap on the application and select the destination.

Hiding and showing the display area with applications

To hide: pull the applications down.
To show: pull the bar above upwards.

or

Select
or
Press the button on the steering wheel on the right.

Navigation module (expanded view)

Delay: 2 min Autobehrend Nürnberg Ost 13 km 7 min 213 km 1×51 mm 16:08 p 4 Previous dest Filling stations Parking spaces Other routes Route

Example: route guidance is active

① Traffic event on the route
Distance from current vehicle position and remaining driving time
Destination
3 Searches for a filling station
4 Switches traffic information display on or off

Tap on the navigation module ( page 362).
▶ Select Route in the lower menu bar.

Operating a menu in the lower display area (example: active massage program)

Message Hot Relaxing Back Hot Relaxing Shoulder Mobilizing Message Activating Message Driver Passenger Intensive Intensive

1 Selects a massage program
2 Starts/stops a massage program for the driver
3 Starts/stops a massage program for the front passenger
4 Sets the massage program intensity for the driver's or front passenger seat

Tap on the application.
The expanded view of the application is displayed.
To close the menu: select ↗.

Opening and closing the context menu for a suggestion

▶ Press and hold on a suggestion.
The context menu opens and shows the Do not suggest option, for example.
To close: swipe downwards.

Removing a suggestion from the display area

Swipe the suggestion upwards.

Showing all applications

Apps Comfort Settings Phone Radio Media Info Smartphone

Press □ briefly. Available applications are displayed. The global search is available.
To hide applications: briefly press 📋 again.

Switching between zero layer and home screen with classic menu

Press and hold □. The home screen with classic menu is shown.
To return to the zero layer: press and hold on

Home screen overview

Screenshot of a mobile app interface with numbered UI elements and labeled buttons for navigation, phone, radio, and playback controls.

Status line
② Calls up user profile settings and switches user
③ Uses the global search
4 Calls up the Control Centre: pull the bar down
⑤ Calls up favourites
6 Displays in the status line

⑦ Calls up an application
8 Quick-access to application
9 Global menu
Calls up previous menu
Press and hold: switches between home screen and zero layer
Previous track or previous radio station
▶ Next track or next radio station

During a telephone call, the call duration is displayed in global menu.

The following functions are called up in the Control Centre:

• Notifications Centre
• Content sharing menu
• Favourites
• Vehicle quick-access

Content sharing menu in the Control Centre

graph TD
    1["1"] --> 2["2"]
    2 --> 3["3"]
    3 --> 4["4"]
    4 --> 5["5"]
    5 --> 6["6"]
    6 --> 7["7"]

Example: showing displays

① Calls up a menu
2 Central display with active content (cover display)
③ Displays animation for content sharing
Bluetooth® headphones connected to the right rear display

⑤ Rear displays with active content (cover display)
6 MBUX rear tablet

To share content, drag a display and drop it over another display.

To control media playback, tap a display.

Operating the MBUX multimedia system

Using Touch Control

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components and a Mercedes-Benz logo, likely for vehicle or diagnostic reference.

1 Shows the home screen
② Touch Control

◀ ▲ ▶ ▼ swipe in the direction of the arrow (navigate)

OK Press (confirm)

Returns to the previous display
④ Makes or accepts a call
5 Rejects or ends a call
To increase volume: swipe upwards To reduce volume: swipe down

Switches off the sound: press

7 ★ Calls up favourites (press briefly) or adds favourites (press and hold)
Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant

You can navigate through menus and lists via the touch-sensitive surface of Touch Control ② using a single-finger swipe, for example:

To enter a character: select a character using the keyboard and press on Touch Control ②.
To select a menu option: scroll in a list and press Touch Control ②.
To move the digital map: swipe in any direction.

Using the touchscreen

Diagram of a car dashboard with steering wheel, air conditioner panel, and control panel showing four labeled buttons

Example: Control elements under the central display

Fingerprint sensor
2 Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or off
3 Switches the mute function on/off

4 Adjusts the volume

Press - or + or swipe over the button

To select a menu item or entry: tap on a symbol or an entry.
To increase the map scale: tap twice quickly with one finger.
To reduce the map scale: tap with two fingers.
To enter characters with the keypad: tap on a button.
To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or right.
To use handwriting to enter characters: write the character with one finger on the touchscreen.
To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart.
To enlarge or reduce the size of a section of a website: move two fingers together or apart.
To turn the digital map: turn anti-clockwise or clockwise using two fingers.

To move the digital map: touch the touchscreen and move your finger in any direction.
To save the destination in the digital map: touch the touchscreen and hold until a message is shown.
To set the volume on a scale: touch the touchscreen and move the finger to the left or right.
To call up a global menu in the applications: touch the touchscreen and hold until the Options menu appears.

Function of the MBUX voice assistant

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

For your own safety, always observe the following points when operating mobile communications equipment and especially your voice control system:

• Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving.
• If you use the voice control system in an emergency your voice can change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be delayed.
• Familiarise yourself with the voice control system functions before starting the journey. Using the MBUX voice assistant, vehicle functions and various areas of the MBUX multimedia system can be operated by voice input. The MBUX voice assistant is operational approximately half a minute after switching on the vehicle and can be

operated from all seats. Further information and examples of voice commands can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual.

You can use the MBUX voice assistant to operate the following functions depending on the vehicle equipment:

• Telephone
  • Text message and e-mail
• Navigation
• Radio and media
• Vehicle functions
• Online functions

Full functionality of the voice control system is only available for you with activation of online voice control.

Conducting a dialogue

Starting a dialogue

Say "Hey Mercedes" to activate the MBUX voice assistant. Voice activation must be switched on in the multimedia system.

or

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

A blue line appears in the MBUX multimedia system. The dialogue can be started.

For the dialogue with the MBUX voice assistant, you can use complete sentences of colloquial language as voice commands. Voice activation can also be directly combined with a voice command, e.g. "Hey Mercedes, how fast can I drive?"

Calling up help

For information about the MBUX voice assistant: say "Hey Mercedes, what can you do?"
Digital Owner's Manual: "Show me the Owner's Manual". The full extent of the Digital Owner's Manual is available when the vehicle is stationary.

Operating functions (examples)

To operate the navigation: "Search for an Asian restaurant, but not Japanese, in South Manhattan."
To operate the phone: "Call my father."

To change the system language to English (short command): "Change language to English".
To operate the radio: "Show me the list of radio stations."
To operate media: "Switch on random play-back."
To operate vehicle functions: "Switch the seat heating to level 2."
To operate online functions: "What's the time in Sydney?"
To ask a question about the vehicle: "Do I have Blind Spot Assist?"

Overview of the MBUX Interior Assistant

WARNING Risk of injury from the camera's laser radiation

This product uses a classification 1 laser system. If the housing is opened or damaged, laser radiation may damage your retina.

Do not open the housing.

Always have maintenance work and repairs carried out by a qualified specialist workshop.

This device is a class 1 laser product in accordance with IEC 60825-1:2014 and DIN EN 60825-1:2014.

The camera records image data for the applications, for example body, head and hand detection.
The camera converts the image data directly into meta data. No image data is saved in the process. The data is only processed in the vehicle and is not transmitted from the vehicle.

When you start the vehicle, the MBUX Interior Assistant is activated automatically. You can switch the Interior Assistant on or off. The setting is saved in your current user profile and is seat-specific. Via the user profile this is also available in other vehicles with the MBUX Interior Assistant. This means that you only have to make the setting once and can take it with you to the other vehicle.

You can switch the Interior Assistant front and rear camera on and off using Front and Rear. The selected camera settings (on/off) are not saved in the user profile and only apply to the current vehicle. If you change to another vehicle with the MBUX Interior Assistant, please check the settings and adjust them if necessary.

The MBUX Interior Assistant is equipped with front and rear cameras.

Alternatively, a configuration with front camera only is also available.

The front camera consists of two cameras that support the driver and the front passenger.

The rear camera consists of two cameras that support the left and right rear seat passengers.

The MBUX Interior Assistant records the vehicle occupants via 3D laser cameras. The cameras of the front camera are located in the overhead control panel. The cameras of the rear camera are located in the roof bows.

The Assistant detects interactions of the vehicle occupants via the cameras. It interprets the natural hand, head and body movements of the vehi-

cle occupants either in context or at their explicit request. The Assistant can thus automatically trigger vehicle interior functions and assist appropriately to the situation.

Diagram of a car interior with a highlighted rectangular component and a numbered label (1) pointing to it, surrounded by no readable text or symbols.

① Arrangement of the cameras of the front camera in the overhead control panel

Line drawing of a car interior with a blue circular marker labeled '1' and a dark base (no text or symbols beyond the marker)

① Arrangement of the rear camera in the roof bows

The Assistant supports vehicle and infotainment functions at three interaction levels:

• INTELLIGENT

The Assistant recognises vehicle occupants automatically and activates functions.

- REACTIVE

The Assistant recognises the natural body language of a vehicle occupant and carries out functions automatically, appropriate to the situation.

- CONTACTLESS

The vehicle occupant actively requests a function using a hand movement or pose.

The Assistant offers functions for the following:

- SAFETY

The Assistant supports vehicle occupants with the use of restraint systems.

- COMFORT

The Assistant enhances comfort by automating functions inside the vehicle and supporting natural interaction with the vehicle.

• INFOTAINMENT

The vehicle occupants can carry out a favourite function with a hand pose.

System limits, display messages and notes for rectification

The error messages are shown on the central display, for example.

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

- The cameras may heat up during operation. As a result the cameras may switch off tempora-

rily, particularly during longer periods of operation and at high outside temperatures.

Do not touch or cover the cameras. Wait until the cameras have cooled down and are available again.

The Interior assistant unavailable. Notification to follow. message appears.

You receive a message when the camera is available again.

- The front or rear camera is covered, dirty, fogged up or scratched.

Wait until the camera has cooled down before cleaning the camera cover.

The Currently unavailable, see Owner's Manual. message appears.

Clean the outside of the camera cover with a dry or damp cotton cloth. Do not use microfibre cloths. Do not remove the cover when cleaning.

- A vehicle occupant is very large. Clothing being worn (gloves, hat, scarf, colour of clothing) or objects carried on a person, for example a watch with a large face, are affecting the

camera view. Or the detection range of the camera is restricted.

The Interior assist. only available to driver to limited extent, see Owner's Manual message appears.

Keep the camera's field of vision clear.

Objects in the detection range of the camera can restrict the camera view. Please make sure that no objects hang on the inside rear-view mirror, for example.

• The MBUX Interior Assistant is faulty.

The Interior assistant is unavailable. Please contact a Mercedes-Benz workshop. message appears.

Consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

- Vehicles with rear bench seat: as soon as the centre rear seat is occupied, the rear seat functions are not supported.

The Interior Assist in rear currently unavailable See Operator's Manual message appears.

To use the Interior Assistant in the rear passenger compartment, keep the centre rear seat free.

Anticipatory exit warning (SAFETY/reactive)

Requirements:

• The vehicle is equipped with Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning.
  • Active Blind Spot Assist is activated ( page 298).
• The vehicle is equipped with active ambient lighting or ambient lighting.
• The cameras are switched on: The front camera activates the front doors. The rear camera activates the rear doors.

i Observe the information on the system limits of Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning ( page 295).

The function can warn vehicle occupants about a possible collision with an approaching vehicle or bicycle when they exit the vehicle.

As soon as a vehicle occupant moves their hand towards the door handle, depending on the vehicle equipment, the following warnings are issued:

- The active ambient lighting or ambient lighting flashes red.

• The warning lamp in the outside mirror also flashes red for one of the front doors.
• When the door is opened, a warning tone sounds.
  The visual warning is thus already given before the door is opened.
  Further information on Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning ( page 295) and on ambient lighting ( page 178).

Switching the reading light and search light and on or off

Requirements

• For the reading light: the cameras are switched on:
  The front camera activates the reading light for driver and front passenger.
  The rear camera activates the reading light for the left and right rear seat passengers.
• The driver's and front passenger's hand movement takes place under the inside rearview mirror. Rear compartment passengers move

their hand at the grab handle in front of the reading lamp.

- For the search light: the function is available in the vehicle when it is dark.

The cameras are switched on:
The front camera records the interaction area of the unoccupied front passenger seat.
The rear camera records the interaction area of the unoccupied left or right rear seat.

- The seats covered are unoccupied or a child is sitting in a child restraint system.

Switching the reading light on and off

Abstract blue-toned illustration of a hand holding a small object (no text or symbols)

Carrying out operation of the reading light for the driver and front passenger

Abstract blue shape resembling a stylized bird or wing (no text or symbols)

Carrying out operation of the reading light for rear occupants

Move your hand up and down vertically under the inside review mirror.
or
Move your hand vertically, up and down in front of the reading lamp. The reading light is switched on or off.

Switching the search light on and off

Abstract blue ink illustration of a stylized object resembling a hand or tool, with no visible text or symbols.

Interaction area for activating the search light

To switch on: reach with your hand into the area of an unoccupied seat. The search light is switched on automatically for the vehicle occupants.
To switch off: withdraw the hand from the area of the unoccupied seat. The search light is switched off again.

Automatic preselection of the outside mirrors (COMFORT/reactive)

Requirements

• The front camera is switched on.

Until now, to set the outside mirrors the desired mirror had to be selected using a preselection button in the driver's door.

With the MBUX Interior Assistant, the mirror to be set is preselected automatically by the natural movement of your head to the left or right. When the hand touches the button for adjusting the outside mirror, the LED under the button of the preselected mirror side lights up.

Use the button to set the position of the active outside mirror.

i Preselection of the outside mirrors using buttons is still possible. Further information on adjusting the outside mirrors ( page 183).
The driver camera is also used for this application.

Calling up favourites with the V pose (INFOTAINMENT/contactless)

Requirements

• The front camera is switched on.
- At least one favourite has been saved in the favourites list.
- The favourite is connected with the MBUX Interior Assistant.
- The area for detecting the favourites pose (V pose) is above the centre console in front of the central display.
• The V pose is held for a brief time.

The V pose makes it easier to call up favourites. The front vehicle occupants can associate their own favourite with the V-pose. Some examples include a navigation destination, a radio station or a massage programme for a seat.

If a favourite has not yet been saved and connected with the MBUX Interior Assistant, the multimedia system will assist you.

Illustration of a hand pointing at a computer screen (no text or symbols visible)

Implementation of the V-pose above the stowage compartment of the centre console at the height of the central display

Position your hand above the stowage compartment of the centre console at the height of the central display. The back of your hand is facing upwards. In doing so, your index and middle finger are spread to form a V. With your other fingers bent inwards.

Briefly hold the V pose. The favourite is called up.

Function of the driver camera

The driver camera is on the driver display or in the 3D driver display.

The driver camera detects the following characteristics:

• Head position
• Viewing direction
  • Eyelid closure characteristics
• Driver's face

The driver camera is automatically activated each time the vehicle is opened with the key. The current status of the driver camera is shown in the status line of the central display.
The driver camera records image data for applications such as ATTENTION ASSIST and facial recognition, for example.

The camera converts the image data directly into meta data. No image data is saved in the process. The data is only processed in the vehicle and is not transmitted from the vehicle.

The driver camera must be set up for facial recognition before use. Teaching-in biometric data ( page 378).

System limits

The system may be impaired or inoperative in the following situations:

• The camera is covered or dirty, misted up or scratched.
  • The driver's face and/or eyes are covered.
• The driver is wearing glasses that block infrared.

Display messages

In the following situations display messages may be shown:

• The driver camera is inoperative.
The camera is faulty.

The Driver camera inoperative See Owner's Manual message appears.

- The driver camera cannot capture the position of your head.

The Change steering wheel/ seat position until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge of the screen message appears.

- The view of the driver camera is reduced or restricted.

The Driver camera view currently restricted See Owner's Manual message appears.

The message can appear, for example, in the following cases:

• The camera's view is obstructed, e.g. due to a scarf or hat being worn.
• The driver is wearing glasses that block infrared.
• If hair partially obstructs the eyes, e.g. as with a long fringe.
• In the event of strong direct sunlight. The driver camera cannot detect the driver's eyes if the light-dark contrast is too strong.

- When one or both hands are on top of the steering wheel (twelve o'clock position).

Notes on care

Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior relevant to the display ( page 443).

Switching the driver camera on or off

Multimedia system:

The driver camera is automatically activated each time the vehicle is switched on.

▶ Select On or Off.

When the driver camera is switched off or the Driver camera view currently restricted See Owner's Manual message appears, the following functions are not available or limited:

• The 3D driver display ( page 343)
- The MBUX augmented reality head-up display (only with stereo camera)(→ page 345)
- The microsleep and distraction detection of ATTENTION ASSIST ( page 269)

• The facial recognition

This function serves as sensor input for authentication and unlocking of the user profile and protected applications ( page 378).

• The mirror preselection

This function allows the natural movement of the head to the left or right to automatically preselect the outside mirror to be adjusted ( page 183).

Information on users, suggestions and favourites

A WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile

Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process.

Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement.

If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, immediately stop the adjustment process by:

a) Pressing the warning message on the central display.

or ▶ b) Pressing a position button of the memory function or a seat adjustment switch in the driver's door. The adjustment process is stopped.

The driver's seat is equipped with an anti-entrapment feature.

If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set after calling up the driver's profile.

User profiles and user-specific content

Prerequisites for the vehicle owner:

• You have a Mercedes me user account.
• You have a Mercedes me PIN.
• You have agreed to the terms of use.
- The vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user account.

If one of the pre-requisites listed is missing or if no user profile has been selected, the data described in the following section will be saved in the vehicle as the standard setting. Standard settings can be changed by all vehicle users.

User profiles save personal settings. If the vehicle is used by several people, a person can change their profile settings without changing the settings of other users.

If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX high-end Rear Seat Entertainment System, the occupants in the rear passenger compartment can log in as Mercedes me users from their seats. The Multi-seat Profile Management allows three profiles to be used simultaneously. A user profile can only be activated simultaneously on one display.

i Some settings apply to the entire vehicle and are displayed in all user profiles, e.g. ambient lighting and the current navigation settings. These initially belong to the driver, but can also be changed by the other vehicle occupants in their user profile.

You can individualise a user profile in the vehicle using the set-up assistant or using the settings in your user profile. Some settings, e.g. the Mercedes me PIN and a profile photo are made in the Mercedes me App or in the Mercedes me Portal.

User-specific content and applications with personal data are protected by different levels of security. To access protected content, the Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle equipment, biometric sensors can be used.

The security level is set by the multimedia system and calculated from the combination of all sensor inputs. Some security levels cannot be turned off.

When a user profile is activated, the following personalised comfort systems, for example, can be adjusted or their settings loaded:

• Seat
• Ambient light
• Outside mirrors
• Blinds
  • Climate control settings

If the user profile is activated when driving,

the driver's seat position will not be adjusted.

Depending on the vehicle equipment you can, as a user, save the following settings, for example:

• Driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror settings
  • Climate control
• Ambient lighting
  • Radio (including station list)
  • Suggestions and favourites

Suggestions

The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It then makes suggestions regarding navigation destinations, phone numbers and music preferences. The requirements for that are the selection of a user, your consent to the recording of data and sufficient collected data.

Favourites

Favourites offer you quick access to frequently used applications. 100 favourites are available in total.

Configuring users, suggestions and favourites

Requirements

- To use the set-up assistant: the vehicle is stationary.

Multimedia system:

Adding a user

Select + Add user . A QR code is loaded.
▶ Scan the displayed QR code with the Mercedes me App or any QR code scanner on a mobile device. If the Mercedes me App is not yet installed on your mobile device, you will be directed to the store of your mobile device.
Follow the directions in the app. The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes me user account. This automatically creates your user profile in the vehicle. If only your user profile is available, it will be loaded automatically.

If more than one user profile is available, you will be directed to the user selection.

When the vehicle is stationary, the set-up assistant starts automatically after user selection.

Protecting user-specific content and applications If you add a new user, access protection is already activated for the user profile. The Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle equipment, biometric sensors are available for access. Biometric sensors in the vehicle must be taught in. The authentication process then takes all taught-in and available sensors into account. The following user-specific content and applications are protected, for example:

• User selection and user profile settings
  • Biometric sensors
  The teaching-in of biometric sensors is protected.
• Suggestions
  The data and determination of the most probable navigation destinations, media sources,

radio stations, contacts and messages are protected.

• ENERGIZING COACH
The recorded health data and their evaluation are protected.
- Mercedes me connect store The purchase of services is protected.

▶ Switch Protect content on or off.
▶ Switch Access protection on or off.
When access protection is switched off, your user profile can be viewed from any seat and changes can be made.
i Access protection is switched on or off on a vehicle-specific basis.

Teaching in, editing and deleting biometric data The biometric data models are saved in the sensors in the vehicle. If recognition has been taught-in, this sensor serves as a contributory factor for authentication on the multimedia system.

▶ Select Protect content.
Select Facial recognition, Fingerprint recognition or Voice recognition.

① If necessary, authenticate yourself on the multimedia system.

Authenticating using face recognition

Close the driver's door or fasten the driver's seat belt.
Look at the driver's display for about five seconds.
Your face is scanned. A message in the driver's display shows whether facial recognition was successful or not. You can unlock your user profile and protected applications with the facial scan.

Authenticating using fingerprints

Place and lift your finger several times on the fingerprint sensor under the touchscreen ( page 360).
The finger is scanned. If the scanning procedure is successful, a message appears on the central display. You can unlock your user profile and protected applications with your finger print.

Authenticating using voice recognition

Speak the sentence shown on the central display and follow the voice assistant's instructions. If the voice recognition was successful, a message appears on the central display. You can unlock your user profile.
① Avoid background or disturbing noises during voice recognition.

Deleting biometric data

Tap on 📄, for example, behind Facial recognition.
Select Yes.

Teaching in the vehicle key for profile selection

▶ Select Protect content.
Select Key recognition.
Have the key ready and follow the set-up assistant's prompts. The user profile is linked to the selected key. If you open the vehicle with the key, the light, mirror and seat settings for your user profile

are pre-activated. The key you are currently using for unlocking is used. The key is only stored for the driver and for one user profile.

Selecting a user

When you call up your driver profile, the driver's seat and the steering wheel can be set. You can cancel the setting process with the following actions:

- Press Tap here to cancel. message on the central display. - Press one of the seat operating buttons in the driver's door.

Select Change user.
Select a user.
When requested to do so, authenticate with the Mercedes me PIN or a taught-in biometric characteristic. The user profile is loaded and activated.
If you select Continue without selecting user, no specific settings for the user profile are loaded.

Configuring and deleting suggestions

Select
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select Suggestions.
Select
Switch the options on or off individually. If an option is switched on and sufficient data has been gathered, personalised suggestions based on your user behaviour will be offered to you on the zero layer. These are, for example, navigation destinations visited, phone numbers dialled as well as suggestions based on your music preferences.
To delete collected suggestions: select
Select Yes. The suggestions are reset.

Adding favourites from categories

Select
Select ★.
Select ▷.

Select + Create new favourite.
Select the category.
Select a favourite.

Linking favourites with the MBUX Interior Assistant V pose

Select
Select ★.
Select ▷.
▶ Select Driver or Passenger.
Select the category.
Select a favourite.

System settings

Overview of the system settings menu

In the system settings menu, you can make settings in the following menus and control elements:

• Display:
• Display brightness

• Control elements:

• Keyboard language and handwriting recognition

• Sensitivity of the Touch Control
• Haptic operation for the touchscreen

• MBUX Voice Assistant
• MBUX Interior Assistant
- Sound:

• Entertainment
• Navigation and traffic announcements
• Telephone

Voice amplification

• Data protection
• Connectivity:

- Wi-Fi, Bluetooth ^® , NFC

• MBUX rear tablet child safety lock
• Time & date
- Language
- Units for distance
- System PIN
- Suggestions

• Software update
• System reset

Overview of software updates

Important software updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured.

The multimedia system displays a corresponding message when a software update is available.

If the Automatic online update option is active, software updates are downloaded automatically. If the option is deactivated, you will be informed of new software updates once. The software updates are available for downloading for a limited period of time.

Carrying out a software update:

• You can start software updates via the communication module.

• You can start software updates via a Wi-Fi hotspot.

• You can start map updates from an external medium.
  i Online software updates cannot be performed via external Wi-Fi hotspots that are encrypted via TKIP.
  If the Wi-Fi hotspot requires logging in via the browser, once the connection is successfully established the browser will open in order to start the update. Follow the instructions in the browser in order to start the download.
  To complete software updates via the communication module, the vehicle must be connected with the Internet and a Mercedes me user account.
  To complete software updates via Wi-Fi, the vehicle must be connected to an external Wi-Fi hotspot.
  A software update consists of three steps:

• Downloading or copying of the data required for installation
  • Installation of the downloaded software update
• Activation of the downloaded software update

It may be necessary to restart the MBUX multimedia system after completion of a software update.
While some software updates are being downloaded, the multimedia system cannot be operated and the vehicle functions may be restricted.
Some software updates require a safe vehicle status for the installation to be completed. They can only be carried out in a safely parked vehicle with the vehicle switched off.

For software updates requiring a safe vehicle status: when the last installation step is reached, a message appears on the central display after the vehicle is switched off. Follow the step-by-step instructions on the central display to complete the installation.

There are software updates that can only be installed when the vehicle is safely parked, there are no more people in the vehicle and the vehicle is locked.

Availability of the driver's and central display During the installation of software updates, it is not possible to use the vehicle, central display and driver's display. You may receive the following display message when an installation is running:

Four grayscale icons showing cars, battery cells, traffic cone, and speedometer (no text or symbols)

The display message does not appear every time a software update is installed.

In rare cases, an error can occur during the installation. The multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version.

If it is not possible to restore the previous version, the display message shown above appears every time the vehicle is started.

Failure of the driver's display

If the driver's display fails or there is a malfunction, you may not recognise limitations in the

functions of systems relevant to safety or the speed display, for example. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired. Drive on carefully and have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately ( page 533).

Further information about software updates can be found at https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Failure of the central display

If the central display fails or the display message shown above is shown continuously, several systems such as the reversing camera, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC or climate control are no longer available. Drive on carefully and consult a specialist workshop as soon as possible.

Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot

Requirements:

- The Wi-Fi function is activated on the multimedia system and the communication device to be connected.

- The communication device to be connected supports at least one of the types of connection described.

The connection types shown depend on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected.

Some functions may first need to be activated on the communication device being connected. More detailed information can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions.
The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not available in all countries.

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ System
▶ Internet and Bluetooth

The availability of the functions is dependent on the country.

Select Wi-Fi.

The controller is to the right: Wi-Fi is switched on.

When the Wi-Fi function is switched on, you can connect the multimedia system with external hotspots or make it available as a hotspot for external devices.

When the Wi-Fi function is switched off, it is not possible to establish a hotspot connection.

When the Wi-Fi function is switched off, no connection can be established with the MBUX rear tablet.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can purchase a data package directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Store. To be able to use the data package, you conclude a separate contract with a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Store, which can be terminated at any time and for which there are no costs. This contract is a prerequisite for using the services from the previously purchased package. The availability of this option is dependent on the country. If the data package option is not available or can be upgraded, you can purchase data volume directly from the mobile phone network provider for a fee.

(i) The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not available in all countries.

Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot

Select MBUX hotspot.

Select one of the following connection options.

Connecting using a QR code

Requirement: an app for scanning the QR code is installed on the device being connected.

Alternatively: the device being connected has an integrated QR code scanner (see manufacturer's operating instructions).

▶ Scan the QR code shown. The Wi-Fi connection is established.

Connecting using NFC

▶ Activate NFC on the device to be connected.
When the NFC icon is displayed in the MBUX hotspot menu, hold the device to be connected to the NFC interface.
Follow the instructions on the device. The Wi-Fi connection is established.

Connecting using a security key

Select the vehicle from the device to be connected. The vehicle is displayed with the MBUX XXXXX network name.
Enter the security key which is shown in the central display on the device to be connected.
Confirm the entry.

Generating a new security key

Select the Generate new security key option in the MBUX hotspot menu.
Confirm the prompt with Yes. A new security key is generated.

A connection will be established with the newly created security key.

When a new security key is generated, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-established, the new security key must be entered.

Using a mobile communication device as a Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering)

① This function is country-dependent.
Select the Manage Internet access option in the Internet and Bluetooth menu.
The Wi-Fi function on the mobile phone and Internet access via Wi-Fi must be activated (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
▶ Select Search for access.

Select the network.
Log in to the Wi-Fi network.

or

Select the mobile phone with the Wi-Fi symbol.

With external Wi-Fi hotspots, which are encrypted via TKIP, online software updates cannot be carried out via the external Wi-Fi hotspot.

System language

Notes on the system language

This function allows you to determine the language for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language affects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all languages. If a language is not available, the navigation announcements will be in English.

Setting the language

Multimedia system:

Settings System
Language

Setting the system language

A list of the available system languages is shown.

Select a language.

The system language is switched to the selected language.

Resetting the multimedia system (reset function)

WARNING Risk of accident due to failure of central display functions

While the multimedia system is reset, its functions, such as the reversing camera, are not available.

Only reset the multimedia system when the vehicle is stationary.

Requirements

• The vehicle is switched on.

- Some settings can only be reset when the vehicle is stationary.

Multimedia system:

Settings System Reset

When resetting the system, personal data and settings are deleted, for example:

• Connected devices
  • Individual user profiles
• Biometric data
  • Vehicles with rear telephony: handset connection

The data used and saved in the multimedia system by the driver assistance systems is deleted.
① Vehicles with rear telephony: The handset must be in the cradle while the system is reset.
Select Reset.

A query appears asking if the system should really be reset.

Select Yes.

The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. The multimedia system is restarted after the system reset.

Due to data protection, as well as the function of individual driving systems and driving safety systems, it is a requirement to carry out a complete system reset before selling the vehicle or transferring it to a third party, or after use as a hire car.

AMG TRACK PACE

Function of AMG TRACK PACE

This function is an on-demand feature and can be activated via Mercedes me after you purchase your vehicle. The Digital Operator's Manual contains further information on Mercedes me and on-demand features.

With AMG TRACK PACE, the handling characteristics on race tracks can be analysed and optimised. You can drive previously saved race tracks (e.g. Hockenheimring), or record and save new tracks. The driven lap times are stored for every

track. These can be analysed and compared to other lap times to achieve the best possible race results. Additionally, acceleration and braking manoeuvres can be measured and stored.

Note: Only use AMG TRACK PACE on closed-off routes outside the public traffic area. Adapt your driving style to your personal performance and environmental conditions. As the driver, you are solely responsible for driving your vehicle. Park your vehicle safely before operating the application.

Setting Track Race

Multimedia system:

TRACK PACE Track Race

Recording a new track

Select New track.

▶ Select ▶ Start Record. at the desired starting point. The track recording starts at this point.

During track recording, sectors can be set to divide up the track.

Select Set Sector.

Select ■ Stop Recording to end track recording or cross the starting line again.

Confirm the prompt with Yes.

Select the weather.

The temperature is determined automatically.

Enter a name.

Press OK to confirm. The track is saved under the name entered.

Searching by track name

Select Search.

Enter the track name. Tracks with the searched name are displayed.

Measuring time on a saved track

Select All tracks.

Select the desired track.

Select
Select Start timing if you are already at the starting line.
or
Select Navigate to for navigation to the starting line.
Timing begins automatically when the starting line has been crossed.
When is selected, the track display can be switched to AR. In addition, it is possible to switch to the telemetry display by selecting .
Select Stop timekeeping to end timekeeping.
▶ Confirm the prompt with OK.
Select the weather.
Select Yes to save the times driven for this track.
Showing readings during Track Race
The following readings can be shown:
- Tyre temperature

• Miniature map
• Sector overview
• Engine data
  • G-force display
• Lap overview
  Select Start timing.
  Select
  Drag the desired display from the grid on the left or right edge of the central display. The readings are shown during the Track Race.
  By selecting × on the active display, you can deactivate this.
  Displaying the analysis

Select All tracks.
An overview of all the driven tracks appears.
Select a track.

Select a session.
The following data are displayed:
- Lap and sector times
• Average and top speed
- Driver
- Vehicle
- Date
- Weather
Select Add recording to use a different session as a reference value.
Select ↩ to return to the overview.
Select Diagram.
Set the desired parameters. The analysis is displayed.

LPG dualverkering 1 Ruddercetan Diagramen 2 3 4 5

① Lap overview

2 Parameter overview

3 Editing parameters

④ Deleting parameters

⑤ Adding new parameters

The following values can be set for the parameters, for example:

- Speed

• Longitudinal/lateral acceleration
- Steering angle
- Engine speed
• Engine oil/tyre temperature

Based on the analysis, you can check and optimise the driving behaviour for any position on the track.

Exporting tracks (USB)

Select Track. An overview of all stored tracks appears.
Select the desired track.
Select options ●●● for the desired track.
Select Export track to.... The selected track can be exported to a USB storage device connected to the vehicle.

Editing tracks and recordings

Select Tracks
▶ Select the desired track.
Select options □□□ for the desired track.
▶ Select Rename or Delete.

or

select a track.
▶ Highlight the desired recording.
Select options.
▶ Select Exporting to... or Delete.

Setting Drag Race

Multimedia system:

→ TRACK PACE ▶ Drag Race

Measuring acceleration

Select Drag race options.
Select Acceleration.
Set a starting speed or select Automatic. Measurement begins as soon as the specified starting speed has been reached.
Set a target speed. Measurement stops as soon as the specified target speed has been reached.
Start off and begin the measurement. Measurement begins when the vehicle accelerates.

Measurement can be stopped early by interrupting the acceleration procedure.

Quarter mile race

▶ Select 🎨 Drag race options.
Select Quarter-mile.
Set a target distance. Measurement stops as soon as the specified target distance has been reached.
Start off and begin the measurement. Measurement begins when the vehicle accelerates. Timing runs until the target distance or a maximum of one mile has been travelled.

Measurement can be stopped early by interrupting the acceleration procedure.

Measuring braking

Drag Race options
Select Braking.
Set a starting speed or select Automatic.
Start off and begin the measurement.

Brake to a stop.

Measurement is incremental, in steps of 10 km/h to a stop. If the braking manoeuvre is started e.g. at a speed of 157 km/h, measurement starts as soon as 150 km/h has been reached

Storing and calling up measured values

If measurement is completed or cancelled, a prompt appears asking whether the measurement should be saved.
▶ Confirm the prompt with OK to save.

Calling up saved measurements

Select History.
▶ Select Acceleration, Quarter-mile or Braking.
Select a measurement. The desired measurement is displayed in detail.

or

▶ Delete a measurement.

Calling up the telemetry display

Multimedia system:

→ TRACK PACE ▶ Telemetry

The telemetry display shows current vehicle data as a digital value and as a diagram. Up to four parameters can be selected to be shown on the display.

For example:

• Engine speed
• Wheel angle
• Speed
• Steering angle

Set the desired parameters.
Set the time. The set parameters are evaluated in the diagram for the selected time.

Configuring AMG TRACK PACE

Requirements

To connect a mobile device to the TRACK PACE app:

• The TRACK PACE app must be installed on the mobile end device.
• The mobile end device must be connected to the multimedia system via Wi-Fi.

Multimedia system:

Connecting mobile device via the TRACK PACE app

The TRACK PACE app makes it possible to record videos and to synchronise them with stored tracks.

Select TRACK PACE App.
▶ Select Authorise new device.
Start the TRACK PACE app on the device to be connected.
Select Continue and confirm the authorisation prompt.
A four-digit code is shown on the central display.
Enter the code on the smartphone. The device is authorised.

De-authorising the mobile device

Select TRACK PACE App.
Select a device.
Confirm the message prompt with Yes. The device is de-authorised.

Setting the TRACK PACE display on the head-up display and driver's display

▶ Select IC and HUD contents.
Activate or deactivate the desired contents. The contents on the head-up display and the driver's display are adapted.

For further information on the Head-up Display ( page 345).

① Further information about the driver's display ( page 343).

Setting acoustic feedback

▶ Select Acoustic feedback.
A scale with values from 0 to 10 is shown.
Select a setting.

Displaying statistics

Select TRACK PACE statistics.
Statistics on the current user profile are displayed.
The following data are displayed:

• Driving time
• Track driven
• Recorded tracks
• Recorded Track Races
• Laps recorded
• Recorded Drag Races
  • Maximum speed

Activating the ambient light

If this function is active, the vehicle interior is lit in red or green depending on delta time.

Select Ambient light.

▶ Activating or deactivating the function.

Adjusting the dashcam

If the vehicle is equipped with a dashcam, it can be used in AMG TRACK PACE.

Select Dashcam.
Select Track Race or Drag Race and activate Activate recording.
You can set which overlay is to be used in the recorded video under Video overlay contents.

Plug-in hybrid settings

Configuring the charging settings

Multimedia system:

Hybrid Charging

Setting the charging program

▶ Select Home, Work or Standard.

Opening the socket flap

Press Open socket flap. The socket flap opens and can be closed again by hand.

Unlocking the charging cable (mode 3 or 4) When the function is active, the charging cable is unlocked when the maximum charge level is reached.

Select Home or Work.
▶ Activate or deactivate Unlock charging cable.
Activating or deactivating location-based charging
Select Charging program, home or Charging program, work.
Activate or deactivate Select based on location.

When the function is activated, the vehicle's current position is saved as one of the selected options. When the address is reached again, a brief query appears as to whether the respective charging program should be selected.

Activating or deactivating rapid charging

Activate or deactivate the Quick charge function.

The Quick charge function increases the maximum possible charging capacity at charging stations up to 60 kW in order to charge the vehicle's high-voltage battery faster. After the charging process is complete, the charging capacity in the "Standard" charging program is again limited to 20 kW in order to protect the high-voltage battery.

Setting the departure time

The set departure times are used for the vehicle's pre-entry climate control and for predictions regarding the approximate state of charge and range at the time selected. When rapid charging is deactivated, the charging process start time is optimised for the next departure time. When rapid charging is activated, the charging process starts immediately, irrespective of the next departure time.

▶ Select Next departure time.

The following charging times can be selected:

• individual charging times

- a Week profile

Setting an individual departure time

▶ Select Add new time and set the time.

or

Select √ and adapt an existing departure time.

Setting the repeat days

▶ Select Add new time and set the time.

Mark the relevant weekdays for which the departure time will apply and confirm with OK.

or

Select ☐ and edit existing repeat days.

Setting a break in the charging process

Up to four breaks in the charging process can be set during which the vehicle is not charged, even if it is connected to a charging station.

▶ Select Charging interruptions.
Select Add new time and then set and save the times for the beginning and end of the break.
Activate or deactivate the charging breaks that have been set.

Set charging breaks can be edited with the button or deleted with the button.

Setting the maximum charge level

▶ Select Maximum charge state.

Set the desired percentage. The high-voltage battery is charged up to the set percentage as a maximum.
(i) The percentage can be set in increments of 10%.
As soon as the full charge level is reached, a notification is shown in the central display that the charging process is completed and the journey may be continued.

Calling up the energy flow display

Multimedia system:

Select Energy flow. The energy flow in the vehicle will be displayed.

Information on the status of the hybrid system and the current state of charge of the high-voltage battery will be displayed in addition to the energy flow.

Navigation and traffic

Notes on navigation

Route guidance with augmented reality

WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depiction or wrong interpretation of the display

The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving.

Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation.
Avoid extended observation of the camera image.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of additional information

The additional information from the augmented reality display may be inaccurate and is not a substitute for observing and assessing the actual driving situation.

Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation when carrying out all driving manoeuvres.

Switching navigation on

Multimedia system:

Alternatively, press the button on the steering wheel on the right ( page 367). The zero layer with the digital map is displayed.

Navigation overview

Digital map

Screenshot of a mobile app interface with numbered UI elements and location markers on a map background

① Navigation module (reduced view) Route guidance active:

The navigation module shows the information relevant to the route in the zoomed-out view, e.g. the destination or a traffic delay

☒ Ends the current route guidance

Tapping opens the navigation module in the expanded view with the Route

② Destination entry
3 Searches for a parking space
Map orientation and set map type
5 Current vehicle position (vehicle symbol or arrow)
6 Display area with entertainment sources, phone, active applications and suggestions
7 Navigation window shows the next driving manoeuvre (zoomed out view) or the route monitor (zoomed in view)

Route guidance active: route monitor shows, e.g. route sections, upcoming driving manoeuvres with lane recommendations, destination, traffic delays, 3D images at motor-way exits, online content

Switches off navigation announcements
Switches on navigation announcements

The following map orientations ④ are available:

• 2D and to the north
  • 2D and direction of travel

• 3D and direction of travel
- Map with complete route
If the map is moved, the map switches between 3D direction of travel and 2D north orientation.

The following map types ④ are available:

- Daytime display

- Night-time display

- Satellite map

If you notice a problem with the digital map you can report this under https://mapfeedback.here.com/#/report.

Navigation module (expanded view)

Delay: 2 mm Autobahnkreuz Nürnberg Crt 13 km 7 km 213 km 1+51 mm 16:08 p Previous dest Filling stations Parking spaces Other routes Route

Example: route guidance is active

① Traffic event on the route
Distance from current vehicle position and remaining driving time

2 Destination

3 Searches for a filling station

4 Switches traffic information display on or off

Destination entry

Requirements

• For the online search:

• There is an Internet connection.
• Mercedes me connect is available.
• You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal.
• The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have accepted the terms of use.
• Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me
• The service is available and has been activated.

Multimedia system:

1 Alle Latte Date Fleuhrer Emphangene Date Sonderante 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Appliende St. Martin Trendhagen, Zieglinäte 10 St. Marie

Example: entering a POI or address

① Input line with current entry
② Search result
3 Selects destination input, displays further destination inputs with double arrow
4 Deletes an entry

Adopts the search result in the input line and continues the search
6 Deletes the last character entered
7 Hides the keypad
8 Switches to handwriting recognition
9 Starts the MBUX voice assistant
10 Sets the written language
11 Switches to digits and special characters
12 Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters

Enter the destination in ①. The entries can be made in any order. The search results are displayed in a list.

① Online search results for POIs may contain additional information, for example opening times and prices. The information is provided by an online map service. This online function is not available in all countries.
You can enter a destination as a three-word address from what3words. This option is not available in all countries.
Hide the keyboard with OK.

Select the destination in the list. The route is calculated.

① Observe the notes on the MBUX multimedia system ( page 360).

Calculating a route and using settings for route guidance

1 2 3 4

Example: detailed display

① Calls up alternative routes
② Calculates the route and starts route guidance

3 Selects a point of interest in the vicinity of the destination
④ Three-word address from what3words

After selection of a destination the route is be calculated.

▶ Select one of the options.

Calling up alternative routes

Select Routes.
▶ Select an alternative route.

Starting route guidance

Select Let's go!.

Calling up the detailed display with destination address

Pull the bar above ② upwards. Depending on the destination selection and availability, online content, for example ratings, prices and weather information, is shown. If the destination is in a different time zone, a message is displayed.

To share a destination: select Share. This option allows you to scan the displayed QR code.
To save a destination as a favourite: select ★ Favourite and then an option.
To call up an Internet address: if a web address is available, select www.
To call the destination: if a telephone number is available, select Call.

Searching for POIs in the vicinity of the destination shown

Select In the vicinity.
Search using categories, enter a search entry or search for a personal POI.

Selecting a route type

In the navigation module (expanded view), select ⏻ (→ page 393).
Select Route.

The route is calculated as a fast route with a short journey time. Trailer mode is available if a trailer has been coupled with the vehicle. If available, you can select online routes. Traffic

announcements for the route are taken into account via Dynamic route guidance ▶.

Trailer mode and online routes are not available in all countries and for all vehicles.

Calculating alternative routes

In the navigation module (expanded view), select 🔊.
Select View.
Activate Overview of route after start. Alternative routes are calculated for every route.

Selecting alternative routes

① If Overview of route after start has been switched on and a route has been calculated, the function is available.
In the navigation module (expanded view), select Other routes.
When the alternative routes have been calculated, display the route in the navigation window by swiping to the right or left.
Select Start.

Activating a commuter route

A user profile has been created and Allow destination suggestions has been activated in the user options ( page 378). Route guidance is not active.

In the navigation module (expanded view), select ⚙️.
Select Route.
Activate Activate commuter route. The navigation system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route.

For the daily commuter route, traffic events on the route are also reported when driving without active route guidance.

To select or delete a commuter route: selectStart or ×.

Avoiding or using route sections, e.g. motorways or ferries

In the navigation module (expanded view), select ⚙️.
Select Route.
Select Avoid options.

▶ Activate or deactivate the avoid option.

Activating route guidance with augmented reality

In the navigation module (expanded view), select 🔍.
Select View.
▶ Select Augmented reality video.
Activate or deactivate Augmented reality video.

The camera's video image is shown on the central display before a turning manoeuvre. The video image includes additional information.

Showing property information for route guidance with augmented reality

Road guidance with augmented reality is activated.

In the navigation module (expanded view), select 🔍.
Select View.
▶ Select Augmented reality video.

▶ Activate Street names and House numbers. During route guidance, the activated options are shown as additional information in the camera image.

Using map functions

Multimedia system:

Increasing map scale

When the map is shown, tap twice quickly with one finger on the central display.

or

Move two fingers apart on the central display.

Decreasing map scale

Tap with two fingers on the central display.

or

Move two fingers together on the central display.

Moving the map

When the map is displayed, swipe in any direction with one finger on the central display.

To reset the map to the current vehicle position: select ● Centre .

Selecting map orientation

Tap repeatedly on the compass symbol on the map.

The map orientations changes in this order:

• The 2D map view is displayed so that north is always at the top.
• The 2D map view is aligned to the direction of travel.
• The 3D map view is aligned to the direction of travel.
  • The map shows the complete route.

Using services

Requirements:

• There is an Internet connection.
• Mercedes me connect is available.
- You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal.

• The vehicle is connected to a user account and you have accepted the conditions of use for the service.
  Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me
• The service is available and has been activated.

Multimedia system:

Showing traffic information

In the navigation module (expanded view), select ⚙️ (→ page 393).
Select View.
Traffic.
▶ Activate Traffic incidents and Free-flowing traffic.
Traffic incidents, for example roadworks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warning messages, are shown on the route.
The traffic delay is displayed for the current route. The smallest value for the display for traffic delays is a minute.

Displaying hazard warnings

If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display depends on the settings for the Traffic incidents option.

In the navigation module (expanded view), select ⚙️ (→ page 393).
▶ Activate or deactivate Traffic incidents. If the option is activated, all of the symbols are shown.

If the option is deactivated, the symbols are only shown when there is a hazard warning.

The following hazards may be shown on the map:

• Accidents and breakdowns
- Slippery roads, fog, crosswinds and heavy rain
• Hazards reported manually
• Vehicle with active hazard warning light
- Roadworks
• Additional hazards (if available)

Displaying online map contents

In the navigation module (expanded view), select [icon].
Select View.
Switch on an online service, e.g. Weather. Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover.
The service information is not shown in all map scales, e.g. weather symbols.

Parking service

! NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted head-room clearance

If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged.

Observe the signposted headroom clearance.

If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter.
Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.

NOTE Vehicle damage due to failure to observe local information and parking conditions

The data is based on the information provided by the respective service providers.

Mercedes-Benz does not guarantee the accuracy of the information provided in relation to the car park or parking area.

Always observe the local information and conditions.

① This service is not available in all countries.

In the navigation module (expanded view), select 🔍 and switch on Parking.
Tap on P the map.

In the route overview, select P Parking spaces.
Select the search position and search filter, e.g. Near destination and Multi-storey car parks.
The map shows car parks suited to the selected settings.

Select a parking option. The map shows the parking options in the vicinity.

The following information is displayed (if available):

• Destination address, distance from current vehicle position and arrival time
  • Information on the multi-storey car park/car park

For example, opening times, parking charges, current occupancy, maximum parking time, maximum access height.

The maximum access height shown by the parking service does not replace the need for observation of the actual circumstances.

• Available payment options (Mercedes pay, coins, bank notes, cards)
• Details on parking tariffs
• Number of available parking spaces
• Payment method (e.g. at parking meters)
• Services/facilities at the parking option
- Telephone number

Calculate the route (→ page 396).

Notes on the dashcam

NOTE Risk of legal consequences due to violation of legal regulations and data protection provisions

You are legally responsible for operation and use of the dashcam functions.

The legal requirements relating to operation and use of the dashcam can vary depending on the country in which the dashcam is operated.

This function is not permitted in all countries.

Before using the dashcam, read up on the content of the legal regulations, in particular the data protection requirements in the respective country of use.
Observe the legal regulations, in particular the data protection requirements.

① Observe the following notes for safe operation:

• Only use FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage media.
• Use USB-IF certified USB storage media. The USB-IF is a non-profit society and stands for USB Implementers Forum. Based on the USB specification, the USB-IF certifies e.g. USB versions, corresponding cables and plugs as well as methods for supplying energy via the USB interface.

- Frequent and continuous high-speed overwriting can damage the USB storage media. Mercedes-Benz recommends a high-quality external SSD drive.

The abbreviation SSD stands for solid-state drive.

The file size and therefore the duration of single recording is limited by the limitations of the USB flash drive format. So FAT32 formatted USB flash drives do not allow files larger than 4 GB, for example.

When the file size is reached, the recording stops and you receive a notification.

The following functions are available in the Gallery app:

• Switching write protection on or off
• Deleting video files

Selecting a USB device for a video recording with the dashcam

Requirements

- At least one USB device is connected with the multimedia system.

Multimedia system:

→ ➤ Apps ➤ Dashcam

Select the USB symbol.
Select the USB device.

When USB devices contain multiple partitions, recorded video files are not always displayed in the recording list.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use USB devices with one partition.

Starting or stopping video recording with the dashcam

Requirements

• For recording and saving a video file: a USB device is connected with the multimedia system.
  • The vehicle is switched on.

Multimedia system:

→ Apps >> Dashcam

If several USB devices are connected with the multimedia system, select a USB device ( page 401).

If no USB device is selected, a selection is made automatically when recording starts.

To select a recording mode: select Loop recording or Individual recording. Loop recording records several short video files. When the memory is full, recording is continued automatically. In doing so, other files will be overwritten starting with the oldest file.
Individual recording stops recording when the memory limit is reached. An individual recording is automatically protected against being overwritten.
To start: select Start recording. The length of the recording is shown. The Do not remove the storage medium during recording. Before removing the storage medium, eject it first. message appears. The video file is stored on the USB device.
To end: select End recording.
In some countries, geo-coordinates (longitude and latitude) are shown in the video image. For technical reasons, the geo-coordinates may show greater inaccuracies.

A report may appear in the following cases:

• Individual recording: the memory is full or there are only a few minutes recording time available. The video recording stops or will be stopped imminently. Change the USB device or delete a video file.
• The camera is not functional, the Camera unavailable message appears. Have the camera checked in a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
• If the country border indication has been switched on.
• If an outdoor recording is started with the camera app during a dashcam recording, the dashcam recording pauses and resumes automatically after the camera recording is finished. A notification to this effect is displayed.

Telephone

Telephony

Notes on telephony

A WARNING Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion

If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

WARNING Risk of accident from operating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion

Mobile communication devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This can also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

As a driver, only operate mobile communication devices when the vehicle is stationary.
As a vehicle occupant, use mobile communication devices only in the designated area, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system and mobile communication equipment in the vehicle.

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around

and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
▶ Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
▶ Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.

Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly:

- Loading the vehicle (→ page 147)

Bluetooth ^® connection:

The menu view and the available functions in the telephone menu are in part dependent on the Bluetooth ^® profile of the connected mobile phone. If the mobile phone supports all the following Bluetooth ^® profiles, the full range of features is available:

• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)
- The contacts on the mobile phone are shown automatically on the multimedia system.
• MAP (Message Access Profile)
- The mobile phone message functions can be used on the multimedia system.
• HFP (hands-free profile)
- Wireless telephony is available on the multimedia system.
- SAP (SIM Access Profile)
- The car telephone has access to the SIM card data and dials into the mobile phone network via the exterior aerial.

Irrespective of this, Bluetooth ^® audio functionality can be used with any mobile radio unit.

For information on the range of functions of the mobile radio unit to be connected, see the manufacturer's operating instructions.

Network connection:

The following cases can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion:

• You switch into a transmission/reception station, in which no communication channel is free.
• The SIM card used is not compatible with the network available
• A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time

The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice ^® for improved speech quality. A requirement for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice ^® .

Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate.

Further information can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

Telephone menu overview

Galaxy A3 (2017) Phone 2 1 2 3 4 Contacts Call list 9 8 7 6 5 Search

Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone
2 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode)
3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network
④ Battery status of the connected mobile phone

5 Options
6 Messages
⑦ Calls up devices
8 Numerical pad
9 Starts contact search

Telephony operating modes overview

Depending on your equipment, the following telephony operating modes are available:

• A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth®.
• Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (two phone mode).
• You can use all the functions of the multi-media system with both mobile phones.
• A mobile phone is connected as the car phone.

Connecting a mobile phone

Requirements:

• Bluetooth ^ is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
• Bluetooth ^® is activated on the multimedia system.

Multimedia system:

Devices

Searching for a mobile phone

▶ Select Connect new device.

Connecting a mobile phone

Select a mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.
If both codes match, confirm the code on the mobile phone.

Functions in the telephony menu

In the telephony menu you have the following functions, for example:

- Making calls, e.g.:

• Accepting a call
• End call
  Answering a call with a message
• Conference
  Accepting or rejecting a waiting call

• Managing contacts, e.g.:

• Downloading mobile phone contacts
• Managing the format of a contact's name
• Deleting favourites

• Receiving and sending messages, e.g.:

• Using the read-aloud function
• Dictating a new message

Mercedes me Apps

Mercedes me calls

Making a call via the overhead control panel

① Mercedes me calls are not possible in every country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these functions are available in your country.

Diagram showing a car intake switch with labeled parts and a close-up of the internal component, likely for automotive control or diagnostic.

me button for service or information calls
② SOS button cover
3 SOS button (emergency call system)

Making a Mercedes me call

Press me button 1.

Making an emergency call

To open the cover of SOS button ②, press it briefly.
Press and hold SOS button ③ for at least one second.

If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls.

Information about the Mercedes me call using the me button

A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre has been initiated via the me button in the overhead control panel or the multimedia system ( page 405).

Using the voice dialogue system you access the desired service:

• Accident and Breakdown Management
  • Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for general information about the vehicle

You can find information on the following topics:

• Activation of Mercedes me connect
- Operating the vehicle

• Nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
• Other products and services from Mercedes-Benz

Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre ( page 408).

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia system

Requirements:

• Access to a GSM network is available.
• The contract partner's GSM network coverage is available in the respective region.
• The vehicle must be switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred automatically.

Multimedia system:

▶ Call Mercedes me connect. After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the display.

Then you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre after automatic accident or breakdown detection

Requirements:

• The vehicle has detected an accident or breakdown situation.
  • The vehicle is stationary.
  • The hazard warning lights are switched on.

① This function is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circumstances.

Requirements for collision detection in the context of accident management:

• The vehicle is equipped with an anti-theft alarm system (ATA) (code 551).
• The vehicle is equipped with the interior protection (code 882).
• The vehicle is equipped with the Anti-Theft Protection Package (code P54).

- The collision detection service with theft notification has been activated on Mercedes me connect.

If a collision is detected when the tow-away protection is primed on a locked vehicle, you will receive a notification in the multimedia system when you switch the vehicle on.

Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if this functions is available in your country.

In the event an accident or breakdown is detected, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. This may take a few seconds.

① The availability of collision detection depends on the vehicle.

After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.

Select Call.

- After your agreement, or if the Mercedes me connect service "Accident and Breakdown Management" is active, the vehicle

data is transferred automatically ( page 410).

• The Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre takes your call and organises the breakdown and accident assistance.

You may be charged for these services.

(i) Depending on the severity of the accident, an automatic emergency call can be initiated. This has priority over all other active calls ( page 417).
In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear after a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined.
If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre with Call later, the message will be hidden and appear again later.

The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either be confirmed or declined. After being declined, this will not be shown again.

Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call

If you have activated the maintenance management service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. You will then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle.

Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multimedia system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment.

To arrange a service appointment: select Call. After your agreement, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz customer centre takes your preferred appointment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet.

This will contact you to confirm the appointment and if necessary consult about the details.

If you select Call later after the service message appears, the message is hidden and reappears at a later time.

Giving consent to data transfer during a Mercedes me call

Requirements

• There is an active Mercedes me call via the multimedia system or the me button in the overhead control panel (→ page 405).
  The prompt to confirm data transfer does not appear in all countries.

If the Accident and Breakdown Management services are not activated on Mercedes me, the Do you want to transfer your vehicle data and the vehicle's position to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre to improve the processing of your request? message is shown.

① The exact phrase may differ depending on the multimedia system installed.

Select Yes.

- The relevant vehicle data is sent automatically ( page 408).

or

▶ Select No and confirm.

- Only call control data is transmitted (→ page 408).

More information on Mercedes me: https://www.mercedes.me

Data transferred during a Mercedes me call If you initiate a service call using Mercedes me, data is transferred to enable targeted advice and an efficient service.

The following requirements must be fulfilled for the transfer of the data:

• The vehicle is switched on.
- The required data transfer technology is supported by the mobile phone network provider.
- The quality of the mobile connection is sufficient.

Multi-stage transfer depends on the following factors:

• Reason for the initiation of the call
• The available mobile phone transmission technology.
  • The activated Mercedes me connect services.
• The service selected in the voice control system.

A prompt for consent to the data transfer only occurs if the corresponding Mercedes me connect service is not activated.
The scope of the data transmitted depends on the vehicle model and equipment. For technical reasons, not all data is available at all times.

Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services are not activated

If no Mercedes me connect services are activated and the data protection prompt has been confirmed the following data is transmitted:

• Vehicle identification number
• Time of the call

• Reason for the initiation of the call
• Confirmation of the data protection prompt
• Country indicator of the vehicle
- Set language for the multimedia system
- Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle

If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted:

• Current mileage and maintenance data

If a call is made after automatic accident or breakdown detection using the multimedia system, the following data is also transmitted:

• Current mileage and maintenance data

• Current vehicle location

If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system and no service has been activated, but the data protection query has been confirmed, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre:

• Current vehicle location

If the data protection prompt has been rejected, the following data is transmitted to enable targeted advice and an efficient service:

• Reason for the initiation of the call
- Rejection of the data protection prompt
• Country indicator of the vehicle
- Set language for the multimedia system
- Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle

Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services are activated

Only if the respective service is activated will additional incident-specific data be transmitted in the second stage to enable an optimal service.

An overview of the data transferred is contained in the data protection information for the Mercedes me connect services. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account.

Data processing

The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system after the call is finished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services.

The incident-specific data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and, if required to process the incident, forwarded to the service partner authorised by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. Take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https://www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.

The recorded message is not available in every country.

Mercedes me connect

Information on Mercedes me connect

Mercedes me connect or individual Mercedes me connect services are not available in every country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these functions are available in your country.

Mercedes me connect consists of multiple services.

You can use the following services via the multi-media system and the overhead control panel, for example:

• Accident and Breakdown Management (me button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system)
  • Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call System (automatic emergency call and SOS button)

The Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre are available to you around the clock.

The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel ( page 405).

You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia system ( page 406).

Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, first call the national emergency services using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ( page 416).

Please note the Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account.

Information on Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management

(i) Accident and Breakdown Management is not available in every country. Contact a Mercedes-Benz service centre to find out whether this function is available in your country.

The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions:

• Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ( page 416)
  If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre forwards the call to Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management. Forwarding the call is however not possible in all countries.
• Breakdown assistance by a technician on location and/or the towing away of the vehicle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre You may be charged for these services.

• Addition to the emergency guide after automatic accident or breakdown detection ( page 407)
  In the event of a breakdown or accident, further vehicle data is sent which enables optimal support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and the authorised service partner or breakdown assistance.

• Addition to the Mercedes me connect service Telediagnostics
  With the Telediagnostics function, specific wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are subject to diagnostics.
  If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary.
  These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone coverage, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the information to appear in the multimedia system.

Please note that the service and breakdown call is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, be sure to contact the usual national emergency

number first or use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ( page 415).

More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Data transferred during Mercedes me connect call services

The data transferred during a Mercedes me connect call depends on:

• The reason for initiation of the call
- The service that is selected in the voice control system
• The activated Mercedes me connect services

You can find out which data is transferred when using the services in the currently valid Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account.

Overview of the Mercedes me & Apps menu

When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and offers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you.

For more information consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre or visit the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

i Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me Apps updated.

You can call up the menu using Apps in the multimedia system.

In the Apps menu, the following options can be available:

• Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes me user account
• Deleting a connection between a user account Mercedes me and the vehicle
• Calling up the Mercedes me services
• Calling up apps such as In-Car Office or the web browser depending on availability

Overview of In-Car Office

Using In-Car Office, you can connect your online services with the multimedia system.

Requirements for In-Car Office:

• The In-Car Office service is activated in your Mercedes me user account.
  • You have a Mercedes me user account.
  • You have set a Mercedes me PIN.
• You have synchronised your Mercedes me user account in the vehicle and via Mercedes me.
• You have a user account with an online service, e.g. with Office 365 or Gmail, and have connected the user account with In-Car Office.

Alternatively you can link this user account from the multimedia system to your Mercedes me user account. You will be offered a QR code that will take you to the website from which you can make the link.

In-Car Office functions

• Display pending appointments in the calendar

• Reading out calendar entries
• Calling (requirement being that a telephone is connected and a telephone number is saved)
• Navigating to appointments (requirement being that the appointment contains a navigable destination)
• Deleting a calendar entry

- Display and selection of tasks and calls to complete

• Reading aloud
• Calling (requirement being that a telephone is connected and a telephone number is saved)

• Deleting

• Marking entry in Tasks & calls as completed

• Managing e-mails
• Showing or reading e-mails
• Writing, answering and forwarding e-mails

Alternatively, you can record text contents for your e-mail via the MBUX voice assistant or via the dictation function.
Further information on the MBUX voice assistant ( page 368).
The Zero Layer displays notifications or reminders from In-Car Office, such as birthdays or calls due (→ page 361).
You can start the In-Car Office function using the Apps menu. Please note that certain functions are only available when the vehicle is stationary.

Web browser overview

Screenshot of a car dashboard interface with numbered annotations pointing to specific vehicles and parking areas.

1 Previous website
2 Next website
3 Update
4 URL
5 Adds/removes bookmarks
6 Options
7 Settings

i Under ⋯ you have the following options:

• Tabs
• Bookmarks & history
• Reading mode
• Share link
• Share content
• Request mobile website

① Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion.

Overview of Smartphone Integration

With Smartphone Integration, you can use certain functions on your mobile phone via the multimedia system display.

Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Smartphone Integration to the multimedia system. Also for use with two phone mode with Smartphone Integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth ^® with the multimedia system.

The full range of functions for Smartphone Integration is only possible with an internet connec-

tion. The appropriate application must be downloaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Integration. The mobile phone must be switched on and connected to the multimedia system via the USB port using a suitable cable.

Apps for Smartphone Integration:

• Apple CarPlay ^ (wireless connection via Bluetooth ^ also possible)
• Android Auto (wireless connection via Bluetooth® also possible)
  For safety reasons, the first activation of Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary with the parking brake.

You can start Smartphone Integration using the Devices menu.

You can end Smartphone Integration via the Devices or by disconnecting the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia system.

① Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connection via the device manager or the

connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary.

Overview of transferred vehicle data

When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible.

The following system information is transmitted:

• Software release of the multimedia system
  • System ID (anonymised)

The transfer of this data is used to optimise communication between the vehicle and the mobile phone.

To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomly generated.

This has no connection to the vehicle identification number (VIN) and is deleted when the multimedia system is reset ( page 385).

The following driving status data is transmitted:

• Transmission position engaged

• Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling and driving
  • Day/night mode of the driver's display
• Drive type

The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation.

The following position data is transmitted:

• Coordinates
• Speed
• Compass direction
  • Acceleration direction

The mobile phone uses this data to improve the accuracy of navigation, for example, when driving through a tunnel.

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Information on available emergency call systems

Two types of emergency call system are available to you in the vehicle:

• Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
• 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)

The Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call System is not available in all countries. You can find more information on the regional availability of the

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/extra/ecall/

The following applies for both emergency call systems:

• The transfer of specific data is required for the intended function of both emergency call systems. This will be explained in the "Data transfer" section (→ page 418).

• Both emergency call systems are included as standard equipment in your vehicle and are activated at the factory.

• The use of both emergency call systems is exempt from charges.

• Both emergency call systems only function in areas in which the mobile phone network providers offer mobile phone coverage.
  For both systems, insufficient network coverage from the mobile phone network providers can result in an emergency call not being transmitted.

Differences between the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system and the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)

• The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in to the mobile phone network.
  • Automatic and manual Mercedes-Benz emergency calls are transmitted to a Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.
  In the event that the emergency call centre of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system cannot be reached (e.g. due to a lack of network coverage), the 112 emergency call is carried out automatically.

• If you decide on the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) only, then the system only logs in to the mobile phone network after the triggering of a manual or automatic emergency call.

• The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) transmits automatic and manual emergency calls directly to public coordination centres.

The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) in your vehicle meets the delegated regulation EU 2017/79. Proper and full functionality of the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) depends on circumstances beyond the influence of Mercedes-Benz AG. This includes mobile network coverage and the technical infrastructure of the public reception centres in the respective countries.
Please observe that in the event of a repair genuine Mercedes-Benz batteries must be used which have been certified pursuant to the delegated regulation EU 2017/79 (Appendix I). Other manufacturers are also permitted provided their batteries are certified according to the delegated regulation EU 2017/79.

There is the option of deactivating the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system and using only the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall). Contact address for carrying out deactivation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system are the local dealers.

Mercedes-Benz recommends the activation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system for the following reasons:

• In emergency situations when abroad, you can also get support in a language you speak.
• Several transmission technologies are used to accelerate the transfer of the accident data and improve reliability of the transmission.
• The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in to the mobile phone network, which ensures faster placement of the emergency call and faster transfer of the accident data.

Measures for rescue, recovery or towing away can then be initiated in quickly.

- With a Mercedes-Benz emergency call, the accident data is only transferred to the public coordination centre with the approval of the customer.

In the event of an automatically triggered emergency call in which there is no voice contact, the accident data is transmitted immediately to the public emergency call centre.

- If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre is not available, the 112 emergency call is carried out automatically.

Overview of emergency call systems

Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. They help locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access.

Both emergency call systems can initiate an emergency call automatically ( page 417) or manually ( page 417).

Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation.

Indicators in the displays

The following messages appear on the central display or the media display of both emergency call systems:

- SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not switched on or the emergency call system is malfunc-

tioning. This does not necessarily indicate complete failure of the emergency call system. Emergency calls can still be transmitted.

The display only refers to the vehicle and does not take account of the availability of mobile phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.

The functional readiness of the emergency call system on the vehicle can be seen when the SOS NOT READY display disappears once the vehicle is switched on.

- SOS: the icon appears in the display during an active emergency call.

If there is a malfunction of the emergency call system, the loudspeakers, microphone, airbag or the SOS button, for example, are faulty.

You can recognise a fault in the emergency call system by the following displays:

- A corresponding message will also appear in the driver's display.

• The SOS button lights up red continuously.

Triggering an automatic emergency call

Requirements:

• The vehicle is switched on.
• The starter battery is sufficiently charged.

Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) automatically initiate an emergency call:

• After activation of the restraint systems such as airbags or seat belt tensioners after an accident
  • After an automatically initiated emergency stop by Active Emergency Stop Assist

The emergency call has been made:

• A voice connection is established with the emergency call centre.
• A message with accident data is transmitted to the emergency call centre.

The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished.

If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the display.

▶ Dial the emergency number 112 or the appropriate local emergency call number on your mobile phone.

If an emergency call has been initiated:

• Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call centre.
• On the basis of the call, the emergency call centre decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.
• If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance is sent to the vehicle immediately.

Triggering a manual emergency call

To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press the SOS button at least one second long ( page 405).

or

To use voice control: use the voice commands of the MBUX voice assistant.

The emergency call has been made:

• A voice connection is established with an emergency call centre.
• Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call centre.
• On the basis of the call, the emergency call centre decides whether it is necessary to call

rescue teams and the police to the accident site.

- A message with accident data is transmitted to the emergency call centre.

If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the display.

Dial the emergency number 112 or the appropriate local emergency call number on your mobile phone.

Emergency call system data transfer

For both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) data is transferred to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre or the public emergency services call centre.

Depending on the emergency call system ( page 415) activated different data is transmitted to the appropriate emergency call centre.

Transmitted data according to activated emergency call system:

Mercedes-Benz emergency call 112 emergency call

• Position data of the vehicle
• Position data on the route (a few 100 m before the incident)
- Direction of travel
• Vehicle identification number
- Drive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, electric or hydrogen)
• Number of people detected in the vehicle
• Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically
• Time of the accident
• Language setting on the multimedia system
- Whether Mercedes me connect is available or not This is a requirement for the option of forwarding the call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre if necessary.

• Position data of the vehicle
• Position data on the route (a few 100 m before the incident)
- Direction of travel
• Vehicle identification number
- Drive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, electric or hydrogen)
• Number of people detected in the vehicle
• Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically
• Time of the accident

For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated:

• The current vehicle position can be determined.
• A voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established.
  • Emergency call data can be called up.

For Russia: various functions, e.g. receiving traffic information, cannot be performed for up to two hours after sending an emergency call.

Self diagnosis function of the emergency call system

Your vehicle checks the functionality of the emergency call system every time the vehicle is switched on. During this time, the SOS button lights up red continuously for five seconds. In the event of a system failure, you will be informed via a text message on the driver's display and the red SOS NOT READY indicator on the central display or media display.

Please, make sure, that during 30 seconds after switching vehicle ON the red indicator SOS NOT READY in the upper right corner of display is switched OFF, this means the emergency call system passed diagnostics successfully.

Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode

Requirements:

• The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
• The vehicle is switched on.
- The vehicle has been stationary for at least one minute.

The test mode is currently available in the following countries, for example:

• Russia
• Belarus
• Kazakhstan
• Armenia
• Kyrgyzstan

To start the test mode: press and hold the button on the multifunction steering wheel for at least five seconds.
The test mode is started and automatically ends after the language test has been performed.
To stop manual test mode: switch off the vehicle.
The test mode is ended.

Information on data processing

Processing of personal data via the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system All processing of personal data via the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system corresponds with the specifications in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on the protection of natural entities with regard to the processing of personal data (GDPR)".

The data is solely used by the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system for rescue and recovery in the event of an accident.

The owner of a vehicle, that is equipped with a Mercedes-Benz emergency call system in addition to the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall), has

the right to use the 112 emergency call system instead of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system.

Contact address for carrying out deactivation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system are the local dealers.

Processing of personal data via the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)

All processing of personal data via the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) corresponds with the specifications in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on the protection of natural entities with regard to the processing of personal data (GDPR)" and is based particularly on the necessity of upholding the vital interests of the affected person in accordance with Article 6, Clause 1, Letter d of the GDPR.

The processing of this type of data is strictly limited to the purpose of operating the emergency calls to the standard European emergency call number 112.

Data recipient

The recipients of data that is processed using the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) are the relevant emergency call inquiry terminals that are specified to first receive and handle emergency calls to the standard European emergency call number 112 by the respective country authorities in whose territory you are located.

Arrangements for data processing

Both emergency call systems are designed so that the following requirements are fulfilled:

• The data contained in the system memory is not accessible outside the system prior to the initiation of an emergency call.
• Both emergency call systems cannot be traced and there is no continuous tracking in normal operation.
• The data in the system's internal memory is automatically and continuously deleted.
• The location data of the vehicle is continuously overwritten in the system's internal memory, so that no more than the last three current locations required for the normal function of the system are available.
• The record of the activity data of both emergency call systems is only kept for as long as

is required to fulfil the purpose of handling the emergency call, and under no circumstances for more than 13 hours after the time that an emergency call is initiated.

Rights of persons affected by the data processing The person affected by the data processing (the vehicle owner) has the right to access the data and if applicable can demand the correction, deletion or barring of data that affects him or her and that the processing of which does not correspond with the GDPR regulations. Each correction, deletion or barring carried out according to this regulation must be shared with the third party to which the data has been transmitted, provided this does not prove to be infeasible and does not incur disproportionate expenditure.

The person affected by the data processing has the right to complain to the appropriate data protection authority should they be of the opinion that their rights have been infringed by the processing of their personal data.

Radio, media & TV
Overview of the symbols and functions in the media menu

Symbol Designation Function
	Play Select to start or continue playback.
	Rest Select to pause the playback.
	Repeat a track Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist.Select once: the active playlist is repeated.Select twice: the current track is repeated.Select three times: the function is deactivated.
	Random playback Select to play back the tracks in random order.
	Skip forwards/back	Select to skip to the next or to the previous track.
	Additional options Select to show additional options.

Symbol Designation Function

	Categories Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums, artists, etc.).
	Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.
	Settings Select to make settings.
	Home Select to return to the home screen.
	Messaging Select to call up messaging.
	Full screen Select to switch to full screen mode.

The following functions and settings are available in the media menu:

- Connecting external data storage media with the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or Bluetooth ^® )

• Playing back audio or video files
• Streaming online music
• Looking at TV programmes in the TV menu

Additional functions in the TV menu

Symbol Designation Function
	Settings Select to make settings in the TV menu. The following functions can be switched on/off or configured:Channel fixCountry-specific character setAudio languageSubtitlesTeletextPicture format
i	EPG Select to show current programme information for the channel.
	Channel list Select to show a list of available channels with the current programme.

Receiving TV channels in HD quality

NOTE Damage to the Cl+ capable CA module (Conditional Access module) and the Smart Card due to sustained high heat

The Cl + capable CA module is designed for home use. The Cl + capable CA module can overheat and be damaged at continuously high outside temperatures.

Make sure that the Cl+ enabled CA module is not exposed to prolonged high temperatures. If the Cl+ capable CA module is damaged, no encrypted channels can be received.

The CI+ module is not available in all countries.

A Cl+ module (CA module), which is not included in the scope of delivery, is used to decrypt HD programmes according to the Cl+ standard.

In some countries, an additional smart card is required, which is inserted into the Cl+ module (see the manufacturer's operating manual).

The Cl+ module is connected in the Cl+ box in the glove compartment.

To insert the smart card in the Cl+ module: if required (country-dependent), insert the smart card into the Cl+ module slot.

The Cl+ box is designed for operating temperatures between 0 °C and 65 °C. At operating temperatures that are higher or too low a message appears in the multimedia system and the Cl+ module is switched off automatically. If the Cl+ module is switched off, no encrypted channels can be received.

Overview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu

Symbol Designation Function
	Home Select to return to the home screen.
	Messaging Select to call up messaging.
	Skip forwards/back	Select to skip to the next or to the previous station.
	Settings Select to have further options shown.The setting options are country-dependent.
	Additional options Select to show additional options.
TA	Traffic information service Select to switch on the traffic information service.When the traffic information service is switched on,TAis blue.
	Station list Select to have the station list shown.
	Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.

Additional functions of Tuneln Radio

i A relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using Tuneln Radio.

Symbol Designation Function
	Settings The following additional settings are available in the Tuneln Radio menu:Selecting streamLogging on to or out of the Tuneln account
	Favourites Select during playback to save the station currently set as a favourite.
	Play/Pause Select to start, stop or continue playback.
	Browse Select to choose a category and then a radio station.

Depending on the frequency band selected, different functions are available to you.

Select the desired frequency band in the radio menu head runner.

Calling up Tuneln Radio

Requirements

• There is a user account at https://www.mercedes.me.

• The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user account.
• The Tuneln Radio service is activated in the Mercedes me portal.
  • The data volume is available.

Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased.

• A fast Internet connection for data transmission free of interference.
  Data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal.
  The functions and services are country-dependent. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Radio

▶ Select Tuneln Radio. The Tuneln menu appears. The last station set starts playing.
The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception.

Sound settings

Overview of functions in the sound menu

The setting options and functions available depend on the sound system fitted. You can find

out which sound system is fitted in your vehicle in the Digital Owner's Manual.

Standard sound system

The following functions are available:

• Equaliser
• Treble, mid-range and bass
  • Balance and fader
  Volume
• Automatic adjustment

ASSYST PLUS service interval display

Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the driver's display provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date.

You can hide this service display using the back button ↩ on the steering wheel.

Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases:

• Mainly short-distance driving
- When the engine is often left idling for long periods
• In the event of frequent cold start phases
- Vehicles with diesel particulate filters: in the event of frequently interrupted regeneration of the diesel particulate filter

Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions.

You can obtain information concerning the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Displaying the service due date

Driver's display:

The next service due date is displayed.

To exit the display: press the back button on the steering wheel.

Bear in mind the following related topic:

- Operating the driver's display (→ page 343).

Information on regular maintenance work

NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates

Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle.

Adhere to the prescribed service intervals.
Always have the prescribed maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on special service requirements

The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Have the maintenance work carried out more often than prescribed if operating conditions are difficult or the vehicle is subject to increased stress.

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. It is the responsibility of the driver of the vehicle to have maintenance work carried out more often than prescribed due to actual operating conditions and/or stresses.

Examples of arduous operating conditions:

• Regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops
  • Mainly short-distance driving

• Frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces

• When the engine is often left idling for long periods
• Operation in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used

In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, air filter, engine oil and oil filter, for example, changed more frequently. Check the tyres more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased stress. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery disconnection periods

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can calculate the service due date only when the battery is connected.

▶ Display and note down the service due date on the driver display before disconnecting the battery ( page 429).

Maintenance Management

Notes about Maintenance Management

If the Maintenance Management service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to the Mercedes-Benz customer centre. The customer centre transmits the data to the service partner that you have entered on the Mercedes me website at: http://www.mercedes.me. You will then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle.

The calculation of the optimal transmission time of the maintenance request to the service partner is subject to technical limitations that may cause the maintenance recommendation to be perceived as too early or too late or not to be made at all. In this case, you can conveniently arrange a maintenance appointment with the customer centre via the maintenance reminder in the multimedia system.
i Maintenance Management and the maintenance reminder in the multimedia system are not available in every country. Contact a

Mercedes-Benz service centre to find out whether this function is available in your country.

Data transferred when using Maintenance Management

When the service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to determine the required scope of maintenance as well as fault detection and fault rectification.

Details on data transfer can be found in the data protection information for the Mercedes me connect services. These can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me under "My Mercedes me account", "Terms of use".

i Maintenance Management and the maintenance reminder in the multimedia system are not available in every country.

Telediagnostics

Notes about Telediagnostics

This service is not available in all countries.

The vehicle can detect if certain wear parts need to be replaced or if malfunctions have occurred in vehicle systems. If the Telediagnostics service is activated, relevant data is automatically transmitted to the manufacturer. If fault conditions are detected by the vehicle system self-diagnosis, the system transmits recommendations for action to the Mercedes-Benz customer centre depending on the fault detected. The customer centre transmits the data to the service partner that you have entered on the Mercedes me website at: http://www.mercedes.me.

For selected faults, the notification that a malfunction has been detected may appear in the multimedia system with a request to contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. From this message, a call can be made directly to the customer centre for assistance.

The transmission of a notification to the multimedia system depends on the country, vehicle model and equipment and requires a fast data connection, over which the service provider has no influence.
① Reliable fault detection is subject to technical limitations. Therefore, only a limited selection

of faults can be detected and recommendations for action transmitted to the customer centre and the service partners. Mercedes-Benz AG is continuously working on the expansion of this service. The fault detection depends on the country, vehicle model and equipment.

Data transferred when using Telediagnostics

When the service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to determine the required scope of maintenance as well as fault detection and fault rectification.

Details on data transfer can be found in the data protection information for the Mercedes me connect services. These can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me under "My Mercedes me account", "Terms of use".

The scope of the data transmitted depends on the vehicle model and equipment. For technical reasons, not all data is available at all times.

Engine compartment

Active bonnet (pedestrian protection)

Operation of the active bonnet (pedestrian protection)

In certain accident situations, the actuation of the active bonnet reduces the risk of injury to pedestrians. The rear area of the bonnet is raised by approximately 80 mm.

After being triggered, the active bonnet remains in the raised position. Limited visibility due to the raised bonnet cannot be ruled out.

After the active bonnet has been actuated, pedestrian protection may be limited.

Have the full functionality of the active bonnet restored immediately in a qualified specialist workshop.

If necessary, adjust your seat position and drive carefully to a qualified specialist workshop. If a safe continued journey is not possible, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Opening and closing the bonnet

A DANGER Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during the charging process

During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage.

Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging process.

WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked

The bonnet may open and block your view.

▶ Never release the bonnet when driving.

Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the bonnet

The bonnet may suddenly drop into the end position.

There is a risk of injury for anyone in the engine bonnet's range of movement.

Do not open or close the bonnet if there is a person in the bonnet's range of movement.

WARNING Risk of bums when opening the bonnet

If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur:

- You may come into contact with hot gases. - You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.

Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service.

WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts

Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off.

Observe the following if you must open the bonnet:

▶ Switch off the vehicle.
▶ Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.
Remove jewellery and watches.
Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

WARNING Risk of injury from touching components under voltage

The ignition system and the fuel injection system operate at high voltage. You could receive an electric shock.

▶ Never touch ignition system or fuel injection system components when the vehicle is switched on.

The live components include the following, for example:

• Ignition coils
• Fuel injectors
  • Electric lines to the ignition coils and the fuel injectors

WARNING Risk of bums from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

WARNING Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers when the bonnet is open

If the windscreen wipers start moving when the bonnet is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage.

▶ Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the vehicle first if you need to open the bonnet.

Opening the bonnet

Diagram showing car interior with a highlighted device labeled '①' and directional arrow, likely indicating a step or location.

Pull on handle ① twice. The bonnet will be released and open slightly.

Then lift the bonnet by hand.

Closing the bonnet

NOTE Damage to the bonnet

If the bonnet is closed manually, there is a risk of dents.

Do not close the bonnet manually.

Lower the bonnet to a height of around 20 cm and then allow it to fall, applying a little force as you let it go.
If the bonnet can still be lifted slightly, open the bonnet again and close it with a little more force until it engages correctly.

Engine oil

Checking the engine oil level using the driver's display

Requirements

• The engine has been warmed up.
• The vehicle is parked on a level surface.
- The engine is running at idle speed.
• The bonnet is closed.

Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style.

Driver's display:

Service

The engine oil level is shown.

One of the following messages will appear on the driver's display:

• Engine oil level Measuring now...: the engine oil level cannot be determined yet.
Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving.
- Engine oil level OK and the bar display for indicating the engine oil level on the driver's display is green and is between "min" and "max": the engine oil level is correct.
- Engine oil level Top up 1,0 l and the bar display for indicating the engine oil level on the driver's display is yellow and is below "min":
▶ Add 1 l of engine oil.

• Engine oil level Reduce and the bar display for indicating the engine oil level on the driver's display is yellow and is above "max":
  Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
  • For engine oil level, switch on vehicle
  Switch on the vehicle to check the engine oil level.
  • Engine oil level System inoperative: The oil level sensor is defective or not connected.
  Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
  • Engine oil level System currently inoperative
  Close the bonnet.
  Topping up engine oil

WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.
WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil
If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite.
Make sure that no engine oil is spilled next to the filler opening.
▶ Allow the engine to cool off and thoroughly clean the engine oil from component parts before starting the vehicle.

NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or additives

Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifications explicitly prescribed for the service intervals.
▶ Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine

oil and observe the prescribed change intervals.
Do not use additives.

NOTE Damage caused by topping up too much engine oil

Excess engine oil can damage the engine or catalytic converter.

Have excess engine oil removed at a qualified specialist workshop.

Depending on driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.8 litres of oil per 1000 km. The oil consumption may also be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the cap may be located in different positions in the engine compartment.

Mercedes-Benz Off ① ② ③

▶ Turn cap ⓘ anti-clockwise and remove it.
Top up the engine oil.
Replace cap ① and turn it clockwise until it engages.
▶ Check the oil level again ( page 434).

Checking the coolant level

WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant

If you open the cap, you could be scalded.

Let the motor cool down before opening the cap.
When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety glasses.
▶ Open the cap slowly to release pressure.

Have the coolant checked or refilled only at a qualified specialist workshop.

Topping up the windscreen washer system

WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts

Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off.

Observe the following if you must open the bonnet:

▶ Switch off the vehicle.
▶ Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.
Remove jewellery and watches.
Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

WARNING Risk of bums from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

WARNING - Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate

Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system.

Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

Diagram of a car interior with a highlighted vehicle component and a numbered annotation pointing to it.

Remove cap ① by the tab.
Top up the washer fluid.
i Further information about the windscreen washer fluid ( page 506)

Keeping the air/water duct free

Keep the area between the bonnet and the windscreen free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow or leaves.

Cleaning and care

Information on washing the vehicle in a car wash

A WARNING Risk of an accident due to reduced braking power after washing the vehicle

Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle.

After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored.

! NOTE Damage from automatic braking

If one of the following functions is activated, the vehicle will brake automatically in certain situations:

• Active Brake Assist
• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
- HOLD function
• Active Parking Assist

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations:

During towing.
In a car wash.

NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash

Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions.

▶ Ensure there is sufficient ground clearance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.
▶ Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is sufficient.

To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
• The HOLD function is switched off.
- The 360° camera or the reversing camera is switched off.
- The vehicle is locked and the door handles are retracted.
- The side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed.
• The outside mirrors are folded in.
- The blower for the ventilation and heating is switched off.
- The windscreen wiper switch is in position 0.

• The key is at a minimum distance of 6 m away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the boot lid or a door could open unintentionally.
• For car washes with a conveyor system:
• Neutral N is engaged.
• The vehicle is locked from the inside.
• Do not make any hand movements in the area of the overhead control panel or deactivate (→ page 370) the Sliding sunroof and roller sunblind option in the settings for the MBUX interior assistant.
  If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windscreen and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.

Automatic car wash mode

In car wash mode, the vehicle is prepared for driving into an automatic car wash. Car wash mode can be activated at a speed of up to 20 km/h ( page 439).

When car wash mode is activated, the Car wash mode active message will appear on the driver's display. The following adjustments will be made:

• The outside mirrors will be folded in.
- To prevent the windscreen washer system from starting up automatically, the rain sensor will be deactivated.
- The windows and the sliding sunroof will be closed, if necessary.
- Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will be deactivated.
- Vehicles with 360° camera: The front image will be activated after approximately eight seconds.
- Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: kick detection will be deactivated.

If one of the settings cannot be selected, this will be shown by the X symbol next to the respective setting.

Pressing Switch off will cancel car wash mode. Above a speed of 20 km/h, car wash mode will be deactivated automatically.

You can also switch off car wash mode via the MBUX multimedia system ( page 439).

The following settings will be reset when car wash mode is deactivated:

• The outside mirrors will be folded out.
• The rain sensor will be activated.
- Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will be reset to the previously selected setting.
- The windows and the sliding sunroof will remain closed.
- Vehicles with 360° camera: The front image will be deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h.
- Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: kick detection will be activated.

Activating/deactivating car wash mode

Requirements

• The vehicle is stationary.
• The vehicle is switched on.

Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle Driving

Activating car wash mode

▶ Select Car wash mode.
Select Activate.

If one of the settings cannot be selected, this is shown by a next to the respective setting.

① For an overview of the settings made when activating car wash mode ( page 437).

Deactivating car wash mode

▶ Select Switch off.
The settings for car wash mode are reset.
Car wash mode is automatically deactivated as soon as a speed of 20 km/h is exceeded.

Information on using a high-pressure cleaner

A WARNING Risk of an accident when using high-pressure cleaners with round-spray nozzles

The water jet can cause externally invisible damage.

Components damaged in this way may unexpectedly fail.

Do not use a high-pressure cleaner with round-spray nozzles.
Have damaged tyres or chassis parts replaced immediately.

To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the following when using a high-pressure cleaner:

• The key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the boot lid or a door could open unintentionally.
• Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the vehicle.
• Vehicles with decorative films: Parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative film.

Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between the film-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around whilst cleaning. The water temperature of the high-pressure cleaner must not exceed 60°C.

• Observe the information on the correct distance in the equipment manufacturer's operating instructions.
• Do not direct the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner directly at sensitive parts, e.g. tyres, gaps, electrical components, batteries, illuminants or louvres.

Washing the vehicle by hand

NOTE Engine damage due to water ingress

Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille below the bonnet.

Observe the relevant legal requirements (e.g. in some countries, washing by hand is permitted only in specially designated wash bays).

Use a mild cleaning agent (e.g. car shampoo).
Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.
Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois.
i Observe the notes on the care of car parts ( page 442).

Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork care

To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering with the driving assistance systems, please observe the following notes:

Paint

• Insect remains: Soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
• Bird droppings: Soak with water and rinse off afterwards.

• Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.

• Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water.
  • Tar stains: use tar remover.

• Wax: use silicone remover.
• Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials. Only have film attached to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop.
• Remove dirt immediately, where possible.

Matt finish

• Only use care products approved for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials. Only have film attached to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop.
• Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy wheels.
• Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engineering standards.
• Do not use car wash programmes with a final hot wax treatment.
• Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polishing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax.

In the event of paintwork damage:

• Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
- Make sure the radar sensors function ( page 262).

Notes on cleaning decorative films

Observe the "Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork care" ( page 440). They also apply to matt decorative films.

Observe the notes on cleaning decorative films to avoid damage.

Cleaning

• For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances (e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz).

• Remove dirt as soon as possible. Avoid rubbing too hard in order not to damage the decorative film irreparably.

• If there is dirt on the finish or if the decorative film is dull: use the paint cleaner recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz.

• Insect remains; soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
• Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
• To prevent water stains, dry a film-wrapped vehicle with a soft, absorbent cloth after every car wash.

Avoiding damage to the decorative film

• The service life and colouring of decorative films are impaired by:
• Sunlight
• Temperature (e.g. hot air blower)
• Weather conditions
• Stone chippings and dirt
• Chemical cleaning agents
• Oily products

- Do not use polish on matt decorative film. Polishing will have the effect of shining the film-wrapped surface.

- Do not treat matt or structured decorative films with wax. Permanent stains may occur.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In this case, contact a qualified specialist workshop. You can obtain more information on care and cleaning agents from the manufacturer.

In the case of film-wrapped surfaces, visual differences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative film after a decorative film has been removed.

i Have work or repairs to decorative films carried out at a qualified specialist workshop (e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre).

Notes on care of car parts

WARNING Risk of entrapment if the wind-screen wipers are switched on while the windscreen is being cleaned

If the windscreen wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the vehicle before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following car parts:

Wheels and rims

• Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners.
- Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.
- To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and pads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and pads will warm up and dry out.

Windows

NOTE Damage to electronic components due to excess fluids

When cleaning the windows from the inside, fluids such as cleaning agents or water may run down and get behind trim parts of the vehicle interior and cause damage to electronic components.

▶ Use cleaning agents as sparingly as possible.
▶ Immediately absorb any excess fluids.

• Clean the windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-based cleaning agents to clean the insides of windows.
  i After changing the wiper blades or treating the vehicle with wax, clean the windscreen thoroughly with cleaning agents recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the

application instructions may result in damage, smear marks or dazzling spots.

(i) Remove external fogging or dirt on the windscreen in front of the multifunction camera. Otherwise, driving systems and driving safety systems may be impaired or unavailable ( page 262).

Wiper blades

• Move the wiper arms into the replacement position ( page 180).
• With the wiper arms folded out, clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth.

① Make sure that the wiper blades are coated. The coating may leave residue on a cloth. Do not rub the wiper blades excessively or clean them too often.

Exterior lighting

• Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent (e.g. car shampoo).
• Use only cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.

Vehicle socket (high-voltage battery)

• Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the vehicle socket.
• Do not use high-pressure cleaners or cleaning agents such as soap.

Sensors

• Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumpers with a soft cloth and car shampoo (→ page 262).
• When using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain a minimum distance of 30 cm.

Reversing camera and 360° camera

• Open the camera cover with the multimedia system ( page 314).
• Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens.
• Do not use a high-pressure cleaner.

Trailer hitch

• Observe the notes on care in the trailer hitch manufacturer's operator manual.

• Do not clean the ball neck with a high-pressure cleaner or solvent.

• Remove traces of rust on the ball (e.g. using a wire brush).

• Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth.
  • After cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball head.

Before using trailers with anti-torsional coupling, observe the manufacturer's operator manual.

Notes on care of the interior

WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of solvent-based care products

Care and cleaning products containing solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away.

Do not use any care or cleaning products containing solvents to clean the cockpit.

WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries from bleached seat belts

Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them.

This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident.

▶ Never bleach or dye seat belts.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the following notes on cleaning and care:

Seat belts

• Clean with lukewarm soapy water.
• Do not use chemical cleaning agents.
• Do not dry by heating them to over 80°C or exposing them to direct sunlight.

Display

• Switch off the display and let it cool down.
• Clean the surface carefully with a microfibre cloth and a suitable display care product (TFT-LCD).
• Do not use any other agents.

Head-up display

• Clean with a soft, non-static, lint-free cloth.
• Do not use cleaning agents.

Plastic trim

• Clean with a damp microfibre cloth.
• For heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials.
• Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come into contact with the plastic trim.

Real wood and trim elements

• Clean with a microfibre cloth.
• Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and soapy water.
• For heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes.

Roof lining

- Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.

Carpet

- Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.

Steering wheel made of genuine leather or DINA-MICA

NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners

Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover or wheel cleaner; neither should you use polishes or waxes. Otherwise you may damage the finish.

• Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth.
• For heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
  • Leather care: use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
• Do not use a microfibre cloth.

i Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface properties such as differences in

structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle colour differences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material faults. Leather is also subject to a natural ageing process during which the surface properties change.

Genuine leather seat covers

• Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then clean the seat covers with a damp cotton cloth and wipe down with a dry cloth. Regularly clean the seat covers.
• For heavy soiling: use a leather care agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz aftercare.
  • Leather care: use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not use a microfibre cloth.
• Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
• Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products.

Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface properties such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle colour differences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material faults. Leather is also subject to a natural ageing process during which the surface properties change. Waves or wrinkling in the seat cover may occur due to the stress on the seat; this is caused by the natural leather material. Regular cleaning and care of the leather reduces soiling, wear marks and ageing damage and thus significantly extends its life span. Clothing that can leave stains (e.g. jeans) may discolour the leather.

DINAMICA seat covers

• Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp cloth to clean.
- Do not use a microfibre cloth.

Fabric seat covers

• Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp microfibre cloth and a 1%

soap solution to clean the entire seat cover. Do not spot clean.

• Use cleaning and care products recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products.

EASY-PACK boot box

• Clean with a damp cloth.
• Do not use any alcohol-based thinners, petrol or abrasive cleaning agents.

Emergency

Removing the safety vest

The safety vests are located in stowage spaces in the front door.

Diagram of a car interior showing a blue circular marker labeled '1' pointing to a dark rectangular area, with no readable text or symbols.

Take the safety vest ① bag out of stowage space.
Open the safety vest bag Ⓤ and pull out the safety vest.
i Safety vests can also be stored in the rear door stowage spaces.

1 Max. 15x 2 40° 3 × 4 × 5 × 6 2 7

① Maximum number of washes
2 Maximum wash temperature
Do not bleach
4 Do not iron
Do not tumble dry
6 Do not dry clean
⑦ This is a class 2 vest

The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled in the following cases:

• the safety vest is the correct size
- the safety vest is fully closed whilst being worn

Replace the safety vest in the following cases:

• the reflective strips are damaged or dirt on the reflective strips can no longer be removed
  • the maximum number of washes is exceeded
  • The fluorescence has faded

Warning triangle

Removing the warning triangle

Diagram showing car interior with directional arrows and labeled parts, likely illustrating vehicle movement or system change.

Push both sides of warning triangle holder in the direction of the arrow and open it.
Remove warning triangle 2.
Setting up the warning triangle

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    A --> C["3"]
    A --> D["3"]

Fold side reflectors ① upwards to form a triangle and attach at the top using upper press-stud ②.
Fold legs ③ down and out to the side.

First-aid kit

Technical diagram showing a component with numbered annotations pointing to specific parts.

The first-aid kit ① is located on the right-hand side of the boot and is secured with Velcro strip ②.

Removing the fire extinguisher

Diagram of a car seatbelt with directional arrows and a close-up of the seatbelt (no text or symbols)

NOTE Damage to the stowage compartment
Keep the stowage compartment closed while the vehicle is moving.

Pull handle ① up and fold the cover forwards in the direction of the arrow.

Remove the fire extinguisher from the stowage compartment.
After removing the fire extinguisher, close the cover again.

Flat tyre

Notes on flat tyres

WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tyre

A flat tyre severely affects the driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle.

Tyres without run-flat characteristics:

Do not drive with a flat tyre.
Change the flat tyre immediately with an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tyres with run-flat characteristics:

Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres).

In the event of a flat tyre, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equipment:

• Vehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres) (→ page 448).
• Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can seal the tyre so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit (→ page 449).
• Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown ( page 405).
• All vehicles: change the wheel (→ page 482).

Notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres)

WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode

Driving in emergency mode impairs the handling characteristics of the vehicle.

Do not exceed the permissible maximum speed of the MOExtended tyres.
Avoid any abrupt steering and driving manoeuvres as well as driving over obstacles (kerbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle.
▶ Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice:
- banging noise
- vehicle vibration
• smoke which smells like rubber
• continuous ESP® intervention
• cracks in the tyre sidewalls
After driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a qualified specialist

workshop with regard to their further use.
The defective tyre must be replaced in every case.

With MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. However, the tyre affected must not show any clearly visible damage.

You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tyre.

Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system: MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure monitoring system.

If a pressure loss warning message appears in the driver's display, proceed as follows:

R Check the tyre for damage.
R If driving on, observe the following notes.

Driving distance possible in emergency mode after the pressure loss warning:

Load condition Driving distance possible in emergency mode
Partially laden 80 km
Fully laden 30 km

The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h.

If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tyre, you can use a standard tyre as a temporary measure.

TREFIT kit storage location

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the storage bag for the TIREFIT kit is located in the boot or in the storage net on the left. Comply with the loading guidelines ( page 147).

① You can find information on the power category (LK) and/or electrical data on the back of the tyre inflation compressor:

R LK2 - 12 V/15 A, 180 W, 0.8 kg

At a distance of approximately 1 m to the tyre inflation compressor and approximately 1.6 m above the ground, the following sound pressure levels apply:

R Emissions sound pressure level L_PA 83 dB (A)
R Sound power level L_WA 91 dB (A)

The tyre inflation compressor is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Using the TREFIT kit

Requirements

R Tyre sealant bottle and tyre inflator compressor are ready for use ( page 449).
R TREFIT sticker is present.
R Gloves are present.

TREFIT kit storage location: (→ page 449)

You can use TIREFIT tyre sealant to seal perforation damage of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -20 °C.

WARNING Risk of accident when using tyre sealant

The tyre sealant may be unable to seal the tyre properly, especially in the following cases:

• there are large cuts or punctures in the tyre (larger than damage previously mentioned)
  • the wheel rims have been damaged
  • after journeys with very low tyre pressure or with flat tyres
  Do not continue driving.
  Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tyre sealant

Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and causes irritation. Do not allow it to come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale any vapours. Keep the tyre sealant away from children.

Observe the following if you come into contact with the tyre sealant:

Rinse off the tyre sealant from your skin using water immediately.
If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thoroughly rinse them using clean water immediately.
If tyre sealant has been swallowed, thoroughly rinse out your mouth immediately and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately.
Change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant immediately.

If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

NOTE Overheating due to the tyre inflation compressor running too long

Do not run the tyre inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.

Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tyre inflation compressor.

Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced in a qualified specialist workshop every five years.

Do not remove any foreign objects which have entered the tyre.

MAX 80 50 Km/h Mph TIRFETI ① ②

Affix part ① of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.
Affix part ② of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre.

Diagram showing a device with labeled parts including a card, cable, and connector, likely illustrating a medical or electronic setup.

Pull plug ⑥ with the cable and hose ⑤ out of the tyre inflation compressor housing.
Push the plug of hose ⑤ into flange ④ of tyre sealant bottle ③ until the plug engages.
Place tyre sealant bottle ③ head downwards into recess ② of the tyre inflation compressor.

Diagram showing car wheel connected to cable with numbered points 7 and 8 indicating specific positions or directions.

Remove the valve cap from valve ⑦ on the faulty tyre.
Screw filling hose ⑧ onto valve ⑦.
Insert plug ⑥ into a 12-V-socket in your vehicle.
Switch on the vehicle.
Switch on the tyre inflation compressor using On/Off switch ①. The tyre is inflated. First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).

Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase!

Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tyre should then have attained a tyre pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is preferable to use clean water.

If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene.

If, after ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained:

▶ Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.

Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tyre.

Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose.

Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for approximately 10 m.

Pump up the tyre again. After a maximum of ten minutes the tyre pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being attained

If the specified tyre pressure is not attained after the specified time, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance.

The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired.

Do not continue driving.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If, after ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained:

▶ Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.
Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tyre.

WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tyres

A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds.

Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully.
Do not exceed the maximum speed limit with a tyre that has been repaired using tyre sealant.

Observe the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant.

NOTE Staining from leaking tyre sealant

After use, excess tyre sealant may leak out from the filling hose.

Therefore, place the filling hose in the plastic bag that contained the TREFIT kit.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irresponsible disposal

Tyre sealant contains pollutants.

Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre inflation compressor.
Pull away immediately.
Stop driving after approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure using the tyre inflation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being attained

If the specified tyre pressure is not reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance.

The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired.

Do not continue driving.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Countries that have Mercedes-Benz Service24h: you will find a sticker with the telephone number, e.g. on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap for values.
To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor.

Product packaging and cleaning interface with labeled diagrams and gauges, showing mechanical components and product images

To reduce the tyre pressure: press pressure release button ① next to manometer ②.
When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tyre.
Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tyre.
Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor. The filling hose stays on the tyre sealant bottle.
Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tyre, tyre sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there.

Battery (vehicle)

Notes on the 12 V battery

WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the battery

Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This

can restrict functions relevant for safety systems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle.

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• when braking
• in the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions
  In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
  Do not drive on.
  Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

• Further information on ABS ( page 264)
• Further information on ESP®(→ page 264)

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery

WARNING Risk of explosion due to electrostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery.

To discharge any electrostatic charge that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the battery.

The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance.

WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid

Battery acid is caustic.

Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not lean over the battery.
Do not inhale battery gases.
Keep children away from the battery.

Immediately rinse battery acid off thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately.

All vehicles

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal, pose of them with the household rub-

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion if the 12 V battery is used improperly.

Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.

Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor immediately.

Do not place heavy objects on the surface of the battery or use the battery to support a person in any way.

Wear safety glasses.

Keep children away.

Observe this Owner's Manual.

Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time:

• Non-plug-in hybrid: switch to standby mode (→ page 261).
• Alternatively: connect the battery to a battery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or consult a qualified specialist workshop to disconnect the battery.

Notes on the 48 V battery

WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the battery

Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety systems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle.

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• when braking
• in the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions
  In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
  Do not drive on.
  Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

• Further information on ABS ( page 264)
• Further information on ESP®(→ page 264)

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is dispose of them with the household

Li-ion Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

If you have to disconnect the 48 V battery, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion if the 48 V battery is used improperly.

The surface of the 48 V battery may be hot.

Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.

Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse off splashes of electrolyte or acid with plenty of clean water. Consult a doctor immediately.

Do not place heavy objects on the surface of the battery or use the battery to support a person in any way.

Do not perform any work on the battery. Always have any work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not disconnect the battery yourself. Do not remove the battery yourself. Do not attempt to open the battery.

Keep children away.

Wear safety glasses.

Observe this Owner's Manual.

Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time:

- Non-plug-in hybrid: switch to standby mode (→ page 261).

Notes on the high-voltage battery

DANGER Risk of fire and explosion from excessive internal pressure of the high-voltage battery

In the event of a vehicle fire, flammable gas can escape and ignite.

▶ Stop the charging process immediately in case of unusual odours, smoke or burn marks.

Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger zone at a sufficient distance.
▶ Call the fire service.

Observe the notes on charging the high-voltage battery ( page 238).

Risk of explosion.

Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.

Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor immediately.

Wear safety glasses.

Keep children away.

Observe this Owner's Manual.

Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery

Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery

When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connection point in the engine compartment.

! NOTE Damage to the battery due to over-voltage

When charging using a battery charger without a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged.

Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

All other vehicles

When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connection point in the engine compartment.

! NOTE Damage to the battery due to over-voltage

When charging using a battery charger without a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged.

Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

WARNING Risk of explosion due to the ignition of hydrogen gas

If there is a short circuit or sparks are created, there is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting when you charge the battery.

Make sure that the POSITIVE terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.
▶ Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.

When connecting and disconnecting the battery, always observe the sequence of battery terminals described.
During starting assistance, always take care to connect only battery terminals of identical polarity.
During starting assistance, observe the sequence described for connecting and disconnecting the jump leads.
Do not connect or disconnect the battery terminals with the engine running.

WARNING Risk of explosion due to explosive mixture of gases

An explosive mixture of gases can escape from the battery during charging and starting assistance.

▶ Fire, naked flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided.
▶ Make sure there is adequate ventilation.
Do not stand over the battery.

WARNING Risk of explosion from a frozen battery

A discharged battery may freeze at temperatures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charging, battery gas can be released.

Always allow a battery to thaw before charging it or performing starting assistance.

If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery.

The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures.

It is recommended that you have a thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid

If your vehicle has been started with starting assistance, it may not be possible to use the electric drive for approximately 30 minutes.

Starting assistance is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

All vehicles

NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine

Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel.

Avoid numerous and extended attempts to start the engine.

Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery:

• Only use undamaged jump lead/charging cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
  • Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal

parts while the jump lead/charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start connection point.

• The jump lead/charging cable must not come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running.
• Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged.
• Keep away from fire and naked flames.
• Do not lean over the battery.

Observe the additional following points when charging the battery:

• Only use battery chargers tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
• Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery.

Observe the additional following points during starting assistance:

• Starting assistance may only be provided using vehicles, batteries or other jump start devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
  • The vehicles must not touch.

- Vehicles with a petrol engine: jump-start the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust system are cold.

Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery

Preparing for starting assistance/the charging process

Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
Shift the transmission to position P.
Switch off the vehicle and all electrical consumers.
Open the bonnet.

Technical diagram of a car interior with numbered components and an inset showing a mechanical component with arrows indicating direction.

Open cover 1.
Slide protective cover ② of POSITIVE contact ③ on the jump-start connection point in the direction of the arrow.

Starting assistance

Close-up of a computer cable connector with a magnified inset showing a plug inserted into the socket (no text or symbols visible)

Connect the POSITIVE contacts of the vehicles with the jump lead. Start with your own vehicle first.
Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
Connect the negative terminal of the donor battery to earth point of your vehicle ④ using

the jump lead. Start with the donor vehicle first.

▶ Start the engine of your own vehicle.
Let the engines run for several minutes.
Before disconnecting the jump leads, switch on an electrical consumer in your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or the lighting.

When starting assistance has finished:

First, remove the jump lead from the earth point of your own vehicle and the negative terminal of the donor battery, then remove the jump lead from the POSITIVE contacts of both vehicles. Always start with your own vehicle first.
Close protective cover ② of POSITIVE contact ③ and close cover ①.

Plug-in hybrid: if your vehicle has been started with starting assistance, it may not be possible to use the electric drive for approximately 30 minutes.

Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Charging the 12 V battery

Connect the POSITIVE contacts of the vehicle and the charger with the charging cable. Start with the vehicle first.
Connect the NEGATIVE contact of the charger and earth point ④ on the vehicle with the charging cable. Start with the charger first.
▶ Start the charging process.

When the charging process is complete:

Remove the charging cable from earth point ④ on the vehicle and the NEGATIVE contact of the charger first and then from the POSITIVE contacts on the vehicle and charger. Always start with the vehicle first.
Close protective cover ② of POSITIVE contact ③ and close cover ①.

Replacing the 12 V battery

Observe the notes on the 12 V battery ( page 453).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself:

- Always replace a faulty battery with a battery which meets the specific vehicle requirements.

The vehicle is equipped with an AGM (Absorbent Glass Mat) technology battery or a lithium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lithium-ion battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

- Carry over detachable parts, such as vent hoses, elbow fittings or terminal covers from the battery being replaced.

- Make sure that the vent hose is always connected to the original opening on the side of the battery.

Fit any existing or supplied cell caps.

Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape.

• Make sure that detachable parts are reconnected in the same way.

Tow-starting or towing away

Permitted towing methods (not plug-in hybrid)

NOTE Damage from automatic braking

If one of the following functions is activated, the vehicle will brake automatically in certain situations:

• Active Brake Assist
• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
- HOLD function
• Active Parking Assist

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations:

When towing.
In a car wash.

Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away.

For towing with both axles on the ground, use a tow rope or tow rod. Do not use tow bar systems ( page 342).

! NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to towing away incorrectly
Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.

Towing with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company.

Vehicles with rear wheel drive

Permitted towing methods
Both axles on the ground	Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h
Front axle raised	No
Rear axle raised	Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in the centre position with a steering wheel lock

4MATIC vehicles

Permitted towing methods
Both axles on the ground	Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h
Front axle raised	No
Rear axle raised	No

Permitted towing methods (plug-in hybrid)

(i) The following information does not apply to Mercedes-AMG E Performance vehicles.

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away.

For towing with both axles on the ground, use a tow rope or tow rod. Do not use tow bar systems.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to towing away incorrectly

Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.

Observe the information on towing and transporting the vehicle in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

In the following situations, only transporting the vehicle is permitted:

• the driver's display is not working
- the Towing not permitted See Owner's Manual display message appears in the driver's display

Exception: if the vehicle is located in a danger zone, it can be recovered from the danger zone despite the Towing not permitted See Owner's Manual display message or the display not working. It must not be towed further than 50 m with both axles on the ground. A towing speed of 10 km/h must not be exceeded. Beyond these limits, only transporting is permitted.

Vehicles with rear wheel drive

Permitted towing methods
Both axles on the ground	Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h, only forwards with the driver in the vehicle
Front axle raised No
Rear axle raised Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in the centre position with a steering wheel lock

4MATIC vehicles

Permitted towing methods
Both axles on the ground	Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h, only forwards with the driver in the vehicle
Front axle raised No
Rear axle raised No

Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground

Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods.
Make sure that the battery is connected and charged.

When the battery is discharged, the following actions cannot be performed:

• the vehicle cannot be started.
- the electric parking brake cannot be released or applied
- The transmission cannot be shifted to position [N] or [P]

If the transmission cannot be shifted to position N or the driver's display in the instrument cluster does not show anything, have the vehicle transported ( page 464). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transportation.

NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long distances

The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high speeds or over long distances.

A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded.
A towing distance of 50 km must not be exceeded.

WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy

If the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass of your vehicle, the following situations can occur:

• the towing eye may become detached.
- the vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or overturn.
Before tow-starting or towing away, check if the vehicle to be tow-started or

towed away exceeds the permissible gross mass.

If a vehicle has to be tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle.

Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate ( page 496).
Do not open the driver's door or front passenger door; the transmission will otherwise automatically shift to P.
Fit the towing eye ( page 467).
Fasten the towing device.

NOTE Damage due to incorrect connection of the tow bar

Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.

① Vehicles with tow bar: you can also attach the tow bar to the trailer hitch.
▶ Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism.

Do not activate the HOLD function.
Deactivate tow-away protection ( page 114).
▶ Deactivate Active Brake Assist ( page 290).
Shift the transmission to position N.
Release the electric parking brake.

A WARNING Risk of accident due to limited safety-related functions during the towing process

Safety-related functions are limited or no longer available in the following situations:

• the vehicle is switched off.
- the brake system or power steering system is malfunctioning.
- the energy supply or the on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.

When your vehicle is towed away, significantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required.

▶ Use a tow bar.

Make sure that the steering wheel can move freely before towing the vehicle away.

NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power

If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged.

▶ Pull away slowly and smoothly.

Loading the vehicle for transport

Requirements

• The vehicle is stationary.
• The vehicle is switched off.
- The driver's display is in the initial state with no menus open (→ page 343). Transport is also possible with a warning message visible.
• The 12 V battery is charged.

Plug-in hybrid: transportation of vehicles should only be carried out by professional recovery companies.

▶ Select vehicle transport.
The noise certification mode is intended exclusively for the technical test organisation. It restricts the drive power of the vehicle and must not be used in customer operation.
If necessary, set the system language ( page 385).
Observe the notes on towing away ( page 463).
Connect the towing device to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle.
i Vehicles with a trailer hitch: you can also attach the tow bar to the trailer hitch.
▶ Switch on the power supply ( page 207).
Shift the transmission to position N.
The transmission may be locked in position in the event of damage to the electrics. To shift to [N] , provide the on-board electrical system with power ( page 459).

NOTE Possible damage to the vehicle when loading or unloading

When loading or unloading, the vehicle must be raised to transport level.

If the transport settings are not shown or the Vehicle not ready for loading message is displayed, the vehicle may not be loaded or unloaded.

If required, raise the vehicle to transport level again.
A vehicle that cannot be raised to transport level may not be loaded or unloaded using a ramp. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle not ready for loading

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to activated transport level

If the vehicle is raised to transport level, driving and driving safety systems have only limited availability and the view from the vehicle is restricted.

Driving safety is severely restricted and there is a risk of an accident!

Do not use transport level in normal road operation.
Only activate and use transport level to load the vehicle and when not on public roads.

▶ Ensure that no persons or obstacles are located in the area surrounding the vehicle.

Raising the vehicle to transport level

Press the ↩ button for at least five seconds.
Immediately press and hold the OK button for at least one second. The For transport level, switch vehicle on message is displayed.
Switch on the vehicle(→ page 208). The transport settings are displayed.
Swipe downward to select Transport level and press OK.
The vehicle is raised and the Vehicle rising... Do not drive on ramp message is displayed for 5 seconds. The raising process can last up to 60 seconds and can be cancelled with the button.
When raising, do not switch off the vehicle.

While the vehicle is being raised, you can manoeuvre at a maximum speed of 40 km/h.

30 UM 10 0 Auto 7:5°C Vehicle rising... Do not drive on ramp Rising

Before loading the vehicle, wait until the transport level has been reached and the Transport level status is shown.
If the vehicle is raised to transport level, the transport settings will also be shown after a restart. Operation of the driver's display is restricted.

When the vehicle is at transport level, it is lowered again in the following situations:

• When driving faster than 40 ~km / h .
  • If the 12 V battery is discharged.

The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last active level.

Transporting the vehicle

Load the vehicle onto the transporter.
Shift the transmission to position P.
Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
▶ Switch off the vehicle and the power supply.
▶ Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.

4MATIC vehicles

Diagram of two cars on a track with a blue X mark, no text or symbols present

Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle.

NOTE Damage to the drive train due to incorrect positioning of the vehicle

Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehicle.

Unloading the vehicle

Make sure that the vehicle is raised to transport level before unloading.

Lowering the vehicle after unloading

Switch on the power supply.
Start the vehicle.
In Transport Settings, swipe up to select the Standard level and press OK. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last active level and the Lowering vehicle message is displayed.
After the vehicle has been lowered, press the button for at least two seconds. Transport Settings closes.

Towing eye storage location

Top-down line drawing of a car interior showing the hood and dashboard with a traffic sign (no text or symbols)

Towing eye ① is located under the boot floor. Depending on the vehicle version, the towing eye is in a different position in the boot.

Fitting and removing the towing eye

Diagram showing front and side views of a car with labeled points 1 and 2 indicating specific parts of the grille.

Press the mark on cover ① inwards and remove.
Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten.

Vehicles with a trailer hitch: vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a rear bracket for the towing eye. Fasten the tow bar to the trailer hitch.

After removing the towing eye, secure the cover ① in the bumper.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye or trailer hitch

When a towing eye or trailer hitch is used to recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be damaged in the process.

Only use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow away or tow start the vehicle.

Do not use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow the vehicle during recovery.

Tow-starting the vehicle (emergency engine start)

! NOTE Damage to the automatic transmission due to tow-starting

Tow-starting the vehicle can damage the automatic transmission.

Do not tow-start the vehicle.

Do not tow-start the vehicle.

Electrical fuses

Notes on electrical fuses

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines

If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloaded.

This could result in a fire.

Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses containing the correct amperage.

NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses

Using incorrect fuses can result in damage to electrical components or systems or their functions being considerably restricted.

Use only fuses approved for Mercedes-Benz with the respective specified fuse rating.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings and further information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram.

Fuse assignment diagram: in the vehicle document wallet.

NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture

Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction.

When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box.

When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned correctly on the fuse box.

If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop.

Ensure the following before replacing a fuse:

• The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
- All electrical consumers are switched off.
• The vehicle is switched off.

The electrical fuses are located in the following fuse boxes:

• Fuse box in the engine compartment on the driver's side (→ page 469)
• Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit (→ page 471)
• Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (→ page 471)
• Fuse box in the boot on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel ( page 472)

Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment

Requirements:

• Observe the notes on electrical fuses ( page 468).
  • Have the following tools readily available:
• a dry cloth
• a screwdriver with an appropriate head

Opening

① Depending on the vehicle equipment, access to the fuse box may be limited. Mercedes-Benz recommends consulting a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

WARNING Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers when the bonnet is open

If the windscreen wipers start moving when the bonnet is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage.

Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before opening the engine bonnet.

Top-down line drawing of a car's front dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

Release the rotary catches on cover ① and pull the cover up and out.
Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.

Diagram of a vehicle engine compartment with numbered components and highlighted parts

Depending on the vehicle equipment, there may be an electrical component ② on the fuse box lid. If present, unscrew screw ③ and put the component to the side without disconnecting the electrical connection.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

If present, release hoses ④ from the retaining clips on the fuse box and vehicle body.

Diagram showing a road intersection with numbered marker '5' and blue boxes highlighting specific areas

If present, release hoses ⑤ from the retaining clips in the engine compartment and vehicle body.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts labeled 6 and 7

Unscrew screws 6 and fold out bar 7.

Diagram of a car interior with labeled components and an inset map highlighting numbered areas 8 and 9.

Unscrew screws ⑧ and remove fuse box lid ⑨ to the side.

Closing

Check whether the seal is positioned correctly in lid 9.
Place lid ⑨ on the fuse box and tighten screws ⑧.

Fold back bar ⑦ and tighten screws ⑥.
If present, engage hoses ⑤ in the retaining clips in the engine compartment and vehicle body.
If present, engage hoses ④ in the retaining clips on the fuse box and vehicle body.
If present, insert electrical component ② into the holder on the fuse box lid and tighten screws ③.
Insert cover ① and engage the rotary catches.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the cockpit

- Observe the notes on electrical fuses (→ page 468).

Diagram of a car interior showing a highlighted seat area and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Fuse box ① is on the driver's side on the side of the cockpit under a cover.

Open cover ① in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
Mercedes-Benz recommends you have the fuse box opened at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell

Requirements

- Observe the notes on electrical fuses (→ page 468).

Diagram showing car interior with directional arrow and control panel, likely indicating navigation or movement

Open cover ⓘ in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

Diagram of a car door with a blue directional arrow and a numbered label (no text or symbols beyond the label)

Fold cover ① down in the direction of the arrow.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the boot

Requirements:

- Observe the notes on electrical fuses ( page 468).

Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics

Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehicle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics.

If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately and have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres

WARNING Risk of injury due to damaged tyres

Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss.

▶ Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately.

WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tyre tread

Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip.

The risk of aquaplaning is increased on wet roads, especially when the speed of the vehicle is not adapted to suit the conditions.

Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres.

Minimum tread depth for:

• Summer tyres: 3 mm
• M+S tyres: 4 mm
  For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.

Carry out the following checks on all wheels regularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving off-road:

- Check the tyre pressure (→ page 474).

• Visually inspect wheels and tyres for damage.
- Check the valve caps.
- Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the tyre contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is 3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm.

Notes on snow chains

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrectly fitted snow chains

If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components.

▶ Never fit snow chains to the front wheels.
Only fit snow chains on the rear wheels in pairs.

NOTE Damage to components of the vehicle body or chassis due to fitted snow chains

If you fit snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage components of the vehicle body or chassis.

Only fit snow chains to the rear wheels of 4MATIC vehicles.

Observe the following notes when using snow chains:

• Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain information about this from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
• For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard.
• Comply with the installation instructions of the snow chain manufacturer.

• If snow chains are fitted, the maximum permissible speed is 50 km/h.

• Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are fitted.

• Vehicles with level control: if snow chains are fitted, only drive at raised vehicle level ( page 302).
• Vehicles with rear axle steering: if snow chains are fitted, only drive with snow chain mode active ( page 474).
  ① You can deactivate ESP® to pull away (→ page 266). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force.

Activating or deactivating snow chain mode

Multimedia system:

▶ Activate or deactivate Snow chain mode.

When the function is active, the vehicle behaves as if snow chains were installed. For example, the maximum steering movement of the rear wheels is limited and the turning circle is thus increased.

Additionally, parts of the driving and driving safety systems are not available when snow chain mode is active.

Tyre pressure

Notes on tyre pressure

WARNING Risk of accident due to insufficient or excessive tyre pressure

Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose in particular the following risks:

• The tyres can burst.
- The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
- The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.

Comply with the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all tyres, including the spare wheel, regularly:

• monthly
• when the load changes
  • before embarking on a longer journey
• if operating conditions change, e.g. off-road driving
  Adjust the tyre pressure, if necessary.

Tyre pressure which is too high or too low can:

• Shorten the service life of the tyres.
- Cause increased tyre damage.
- Adversely affect driving characteristics and thus driving safety, e.g. due to aquaplaning.

WARNING Risk of accident due to repeated pressure drop in the tyres

The wheels, valves or tyres could be damaged.

Too low a tyre pressure can lead to the tyres bursting.

▶ Examine the tyres for foreign objects.
▶ Check whether the tyre has a puncture or the valve has a leak.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Information on the recommended tyre pressure for the vehicle's factory-fitted tyres can be found on the tyre pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap ( page 475).

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure.

Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. Conditions for cold tyres:

• The vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at least three hours.
  • The vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km.

The vehicle's tyres heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tyres increases, so too does the tyre pressure.

Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: you can also see the tyre pressure in the driver's display ( page 476).

Notes on trailer operation

Always inflate the rear axle tyres to the recommended tyre pressures on the tyre pressure table for increased load.

Tyre pressure table

The tyre pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

The tyre pressure table shows the recommended tyre pressure for all tyres approved for this vehicle. The recommended tyre pressures apply for cold tyres under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle.

If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pressure, the following tyre pressure information is only valid for those tyre sizes and their respective load condition.

If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented by the [31] symbol, the tyre pressure information following shows alternative tyre pressures. Fuel consumption may then increase slightly.

The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ from this.

Tyre pressure monitoring system

Function of the tyre pressure monitoring system

The system checks the tyre pressure and the tyre temperature of the tyres fitted to the vehicle by means of a tyre pressure sensor.

The tyre pressure and the tyre temperature appear in the driver's display.

If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tyre temperature is excessive, you will be warned with display messages ( page 582) or the ① warning lamp in the driver's display ( page 609).

The tyre pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation.

In most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring system will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. You can, however, also update the reference values by restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system manually ( page 477).

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:

• incorrect reference values were taught in
• sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign object penetrating the tyre, for example
• there is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source

- Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre pressure monitoring system

Requirements:

• The vehicle is switched on.

Driver's display:

One of the following displays appears:

• Current tyre pressure of each wheel:

2.5 50℃ 2.5 50℃ 2.5 50℃ 2.5 50℃

• Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving: current values are not yet known to the system. The pressure/temperature values of each tyre are displayed as soon as they are known to the system.
• Tyre pressure monitor active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tyre pressures are already being monitored.
  ▶ Compare the current tyre pressure with the recommended tyre pressure for the current operating condition ( page 475). Additionally, observe the notes on cold tyres ( page 474).

The values displayed in the driver's display may deviate from those of the tyre pressure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high elevations, the tyre pressure values indicated by a tyre pressure gauge are higher than those shown in the driver's display.

Bear in mind the following related topic:

• Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 474)

■ Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system

Requirements:

- The recommended tyre pressure is correctly set for the respective operating status on each of the four wheels ( page 474).

Restart the tyre pressure monitoring system in the following situations:

• The tyre pressure has changed.
- The wheels or tyres have been changed or newly fitted.

Driver's display:

Service

Select Tyre pressure and confirm with OK.

Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the steering wheel. The Use current tyre pressures as new reference values? message is shown in the driver's display.
Select Yes and confirm the restart with OK. The Tyre pressure monitor restarted message is shown in the driver's display.

Current warning messages are deleted and the yellow ⏻ warning lamp goes out.

After you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pressures are within the specified range. The current tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.

If the tyre pressure levels are not within the specified range, the Please correct tyre pressure message appears.

Bear in mind the following related topic:

• Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 474)

Wheel change

Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing tyres

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions

If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are fitted, the service brakes or components in the brake system and in the wheel suspension may be damaged.

▶ Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the specifications of the original part.

For wheels, pay attention to the following:

• Designation
• Type

For tyres, pay attention to the following:

• Designation
• Manufacturer
• Type

WARNING Risk of injury through exceeding the specified tyre load-bearing capacity or the permissible speed rating

Exceeding the load-bearing capacity of the tyres can lead to tyre damage and could cause the tyres to explode.

Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your vehicle model.
▶ Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.

NOTE Vehicle and tyre damage caused by non-approved tyre types and sizes

For safety reasons, only use tyres, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.

These tyres are specially adapted to the active safety systems, such as ABS, ESP® and 4MATIC, and marked as follows:

• MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
• MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (run-flat tyres only for certain wheels)
- MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tyres)

Otherwise, certain properties, such as handling characteristics, vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc. could be adversely affected. Furthermore, other tyre sizes could result in the tyres rubbing against the body and axle components when loaded. This could result in damage to the tyre or the vehicle.

Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea- ded tyres

Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres.

For this reason driving safety cannot be guaranteed.

Do not use used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage.

NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage when driving over obstacles

Large wheels have a smaller section width. As the section width decreases, the risk of wheels and tyres being damaged when driving over obstacles increases.

Avoid obstacles or drive especially carefully.
▶ Reduce your speed when driving over kerbs, speed bumps, manhole covers and potholes.
▶ Avoid particularly high kerbs.

NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage when parking on kerbs or in potholes

Parking on kerbs or in potholes can damage the wheels and tyres.

▶ Only park on level surfaces if possible.

▶ Avoid kerbs and potholes when parking.

NOTE Damage to electronic component parts due to the use of tyre-fitting tools

Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system: there are electronic component parts in the wheel.

If tyre-fitting tools are positioned in the area of the valve, the electronic components could be damaged.

▶ Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve.
Always have tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop.

! NOTE Damage to summer tyres at low ambient temperatures

At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tyres, causing permanent damage to the tyre.

At temperatures below 7 °C use M+S tyres.

Accessory parts which are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which are not used correctly, can impair the operating safety.

Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and enquire about:

• Suitability
• Legal stipulations
  • Factory recommendations

WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tyres

The special tyre tread in combination with the optimised tyre compound means that the risk of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is increased.

In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tyre running temperature.

Switch on the ESP ^® and adapt your driving style accordingly.
Use M+S tyres at outside temperatures of less than 10 °C.
Only use the tyres for their intended purpose.

Observe the following when selecting, fitting and replacing tyres:

- Country-specific requirements for tyre approval that define a specific tyre type for your vehicle.

• Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial.
- Only use tyres and wheels of the same type (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) and the same make.
- Only fit wheels of the same size on one axle (left and right).
It is only permissible to fit a different wheel size in the event of a flat tyre in order to drive to the specialist workshop.
- Do not make any modifications to the brake system, the wheels or the tyres.
The use of shims or brake dust shields is not permitted and may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit.
- Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring system.
- At temperatures below 7 °C use winter tyres or all-season tyres marked M+S for all wheels.

Winter tyres provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
- For M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same tread.
- Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres fitted.
If the tyre's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision.
- Run in new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km.
- Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
- When replacing with tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres.

For more information on wheels and tyres, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

• Notes on tyre pressure ( page 474)
• Tyre pressure table (→ page 475)
- Notes on the emergency spare wheel (→ page 488)

Notes on interchanging wheels

WARNING Risk of injury through different wheel sizes

Interchanging the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics.

The disk brakes or wheel suspension components may also be damaged.

Only interchange the front and rear wheels if the wheels and tyres have the same dimensions.

Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tyres have different dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid.

Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" ( page 478)

The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels differ:

• front wheels wear more on the tyre shoulder
- rear wheels wear more in the centre of the tyre

Do not drive with tyres that have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet roads (aquaplaning).

On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel size, you can interchange the wheels every 5,000 to 10,000 km, depending on the wear. Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained for the wheels.

Notes on storing wheels

When storing wheels, observe the following notes:

• After removing wheels, store them in a cool, dry and preferably dark place.
- Protect the tyres from contact with oil, grease or fuel.

Overview of the tyre-change tool kit

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

Apart from some country-specific variants, vehicles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit. For more information on which tyre-changing tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Required tyre-changing tools may include, forexample:

• Jack
• Chock
• Wheel wrench

The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg. The maximum load capacity of the jack can be found on the sticker affixed to the jack.

The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

The tyre-change tool kit is located in tool bag ① on the boot floor.

(i) Depending on the equipment, the tool bag may be in other positions on the trunk floor.
When stowing the tool bag, make sure that it is adequately secured.

Top-down view of a car's front compartment showing the hood and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

The tool bag contains:

• Jack
• Gloves

• Wheel wrench

• Centring pin

• Folding chock
• Ratchet for jack

Plug-in hybrid

The tyre-change tool kit is located in tool bag on the boot floor.

Top-down line drawing of a car interior with a black rectangular object and a blue circular icon labeled '1' (no text or symbols beyond the icon)

Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change

Requirements:

• The vehicle is not on a slope.

• The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level ground.
  • The required tyre-change tool kit is available.
  If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyre-change tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools.
  Apply the electric parking brake manually.
  Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position.
  Shift the transmission to position P.
  ▶ Vehicles with level control system: set the normal vehicle level ( page 302).
  Switch off the vehicle.
  Make sure that the vehicle cannot be started.
  Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
  Remove the hub cap if necessary ( page 483).
  ▶ Raise the vehicle ( page 483).

Removing and fitting the wheel trim/hub caps

Requirements

- The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change ( page 482).

Aluminium hub cap

Diagram showing a car wheel with three labeled components and directional arrows indicating motion or flow.

To remove:

Position socket ② from the tyre-change tool kit on hub cap ①.
Position wheel spanner ③ on socket ②.
Using wheel spanner ③, turn hub cap ① anti-clockwise and remove it.

To fit:

▶ Follow the instructions above in reverse order.
i Specified tightening torque: 25 Nm.

Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel

Requirements

• There are no persons in the vehicle.
- The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel change ( page 482).
- The hub caps have been removed (→ page 483).

Important notes on using the jack:

• Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle.
• The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for maintenance work under the vehicle.
• The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface.

- The foot of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jack support point.

Two mechanical linkage diagrams showing joint configurations with blue X marks, no text or symbols present

Line drawing of a car with a blue 'X' mark and a small letter 'r' at the base (no text or symbols on the car itself)

Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised:

• Never place your hands and/or feet under the vehicle.
• Never lie under the vehicle.
• Do not start the vehicle and do not release the electric parking brake.
• Do not open or close any doors or the boot lid.

Diagram of a car wheel with a blue arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the screws completely.

Side view of a sedan with two blue arrows pointing upward, indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)

Position of the jack support points

WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack

If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.

Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to the jack

If you do not position the jack at the jack support points provided for this purpose, you could damage your vehicle.

Only position the jack at the jack support points provided for this purpose.

Take the ratchet ring spanner out of the tyre-change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible.

Diagram illustrating bicycle wheel assembly with labeled components and directional arrows

Position support ② of jack ④ on jack support point ①.
Turn ratchet ring spanner ③ clockwise until jack support ② sits completely on jack support point ① and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

Continue to turn ratchet ring spanner ③ until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm off the ground.
Loosen and remove the wheel ( page 485).

Removing a wheel

Requirements

• The vehicle is raised.

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, as this could impair the level of comfort when braking.

NOTE Damage to the wheels' plastic elements when changing a wheel

Plastic elements on wheels may be damaged when removing and repositioning the wheel.

Do not raise the wheels by the plastic elements when removing and repositioning.
! NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface.
Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely.

Line drawing of a bicycle wheel with a blue circular icon and a bracket, no text or symbols present

Screw centring pin ① into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.
Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts completely.
Remove the wheel.

Fitting a new wheel

Requirements

- The wheel to be changed is removed and the centring pin is screwed in (→ page 485).

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

▶ Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel

Oiled or greased wheel bolts can cause the wheel bolts to come loose, as too can damaged wheel bolts or wheel hub threads.

▶ Never oil or grease the threads.
In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Have the damaged wheel bolts or damaged hub threads replaced.
Do not continue driving.

Observe the information on the choice of tyres ( page 478).

For tyres with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tyre indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direction of rotation when fitting.

NOTE Damage to the wheels' plastic elements when changing a wheel

Plastic elements on wheels may be damaged when removing and repositioning the wheel.

Do not raise the wheels by the plastic elements when removing and repositioning.

Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the cent-ring pin and push it on.

WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts

If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip.

Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.

Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (→ page 478).
For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and for the wheel in question.
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are finger-tight.
Unscrew and remove the centring pin.
Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.
▶ Lower the vehicle ( page 487).

Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change

Requirements

• The new wheel has been fitted ( page 486).

NOTE Risk of vehicle jack becoming trapped by the AIRMATIC system

If the AIRMATIC system has released air when raising the vehicle, the jack can become trapped when the vehicle is lowered.

Start the engine. This adapts the vehicle level.
Remove the jack from under the vehicle.

To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AB" are visible and turn anti-clockwise.

Diagram showing a circular dial with numbered points and directional arrows, likely illustrating a cycle or state in a vehicle's wheel.

Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated ① to ⑤ with an initial maximum force of 80 Nm.
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated ① to ⑤ with the specified tightening torque of 150 Nm.

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect tightening torque

The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed torque.

▶ Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque.
If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the tightening torque checked immediately.
Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted wheel and adjust it if necessary.
① The following does not apply if the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.
▶ Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: restart the tyre pressure monitoring system ( page 477).

Emergency spare wheel

Notes on the emergency spare wheel

WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions

The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle.

To prevent hazardous situations:

Drive carefully.
▶ Never fit more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size.
Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel briefly.
Do not deactivate ESP®.
Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist work-

shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions.

The emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare wheel bag in the boot.

Observe the following notes on fitting an emergency spare wheel:

• The maximum permissible speed with an emergency spare wheel fitted is 80 km/h.
• Do not fit the emergency spare wheel with snow chains.
• Replace the emergency spare wheel after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
• Use the wheel bolts that are included with the emergency spare wheel.
  • Specified tightening torque: 130 Nm
• Check the tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel fitted. Correct the pressure as necessary.
  The specified tyre pressure is stated on the label of the emergency spare wheel.

Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: if an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the tyre pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.

Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

• Notes on tyre pressure ( page 474)
• Tyre pressure table ( page 475)
• Notes on fitting tyres (→ page 478)
- Fitting an emergency spare wheel (→ page 482)

Notes on technical data

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

The technical data was determined in accordance with EU Directives. The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Only for certain countries: you can find vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC documents (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are supplied when the vehicle is delivered.

On-board electronics

Notes on tampering with the engine electronics

NOTE Premature wear through improper maintenance

Improper maintenance may cause vehicle components to wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated.

Always have work on the engine electronics and related components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

NOTE Increased wear and tear or damage caused by measures undertaken to increase performance

Engine management measures undertaken to increase performance can lead to increased wear and tear or damage to the drive system.

Do not undertake engine management measures to increase performance.

Two-way radios

Notes on fitting two-way radios

WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios

If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.

You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios

If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in the following situations, in particular:

• The two-way radio is not connected to an exterior aerial.
• The exterior aerial is fitted incorrectly or is not a low-reflection aerial.

This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.

Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop.
When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior aerial.

NOTE Invalidation of the operating permit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use

The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed.

▶ Only use approved frequency bands.
Observe the maximum permissible output power in these frequency bands.
▶ Only use approved aerial positions.

Top-down line drawing of a car with a numbered marker (1) on the roof, no text or symbols present.

Vehicles without panoramic sliding sunroof

① Rear roof area

On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, fitting an aerial is not permitted. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles - "EMCs for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when

retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and aerial connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when fitting.

Two-way radio transmission output

The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the values in the following table:

Frequency band and maximum transmission output

Frequency band Maximum transmission output
2-m- frequency band 144 - 174 MHz	50 W
Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) 380 - 460 MHz	10 W
Frequency band Maximum transmis-sion output
70-cm-frequency band430 - 470 MHz	35 W
Two-way radio2G	2 W
Two-way radio3G/4G/5G	0.5 W

The following devices can be used in the vehicle without restrictions:

• two-way radios with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW
• two-way radios with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 420 MHz frequency band and a

maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (TETRA)

• mobile phones (2G/3G/4G/5G)

There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the following frequency bands:

• TETRA
- 2G/3G/4G/5G

Notes on pyrotechnical vehicle components

Registration information on pyrotechnic actuators

Manufacturer information:

Regulatory radio information

Specific information on wireless applications in accordance with 2014/53/EU

Besides the typical frequencies for mobile communication cars by Mercedes-Benz make use of the following automotive radio applications.

Type of wireless applications and specifications in accordance with 2014/53/EU

Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic field s		strength
Remote Keyless Entry 20 kHz (9–90 kHz) ≤ 72 dBμA/m at 10m
Wireless Power Transmission 105 kHz (90–119 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Remote Keyless Entry 120 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Wireless Power Transmission 127 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 66 dBμA/m at 10m with the magnetic field		strength level decreasing 3dB/octave above 119 kHz
Near-field communication 13.553–13.567 MHz ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Remote Keyless Entry, Garage Door Opener, Tire Pressure Monitoring	433 MHz (433.05–434.79 MHz) ≤ 10 mW ERP
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door Opener	868 MHz (868.0–868.6 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door Opener	869 MHz (868.7–869.2 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP
Bluetooth, Kleer, RLAN, wireless Headphones 2.4 GHz ISM band (2400–2483.5 MHz) ≤ 100 mW EIRP
RLAN 5.1 GHz UNII-1 (5150–5250 MHz)	≤ 25 mW EIRP
Interior Monitoring Radar, RLAN 5.8 GHz UNII-3 (5725-5875 MHz) ≤ 25 mW EIRP
Remote Keyless Entry 7.25 GHz UWB (6.0-8.5 GHz) ≤ -41.3 dBm/MHz EIRP mean ≤ 0 dBm/MHz		EIRP peak
76 GHz radar 76-77 GHz ≤ 55 dBm peak EIRP
Carsharing Module NFC:	13.553-13.567 MHzBluetooth®:2402-2480 MHz	NFC:≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10 mBluetooth®:≤ +4 dBm (class 2)
Rear Seat Entertainment System	Bluetooth®:2400-2483.5 MHzWLAN 2.4 GHZ:2400-2483.5 MHzWLAN 5 GHz:5150-5250 MHz5725-5875 MHz	Bluetooth®:-0.8 dBmWLAN 2.4 GHZ:14.5 dBmWLAN 5 GHz:20.5 dBm13.3 dBm
Two-way radio (Tel7 telephone control unit) E-GSM (900 MHz)GSM (1800 MHz)		+33 dBm+30 dBm
	UMTS (Band I, III, VIII) +24 dBm (+1/-3 dB)
	LTE (Band 1, 3, 7, 8, 20, 28) +23 dBm (±2 dB)
HERMES (Hardware for Enhanced Remote, Mobility & Emergency Services)	WLAN (2400-2483.5 MHz)	< 20 dBm
	WLAN (5736-5833 MHz)	< 14 dBm
	GSM (E-GSM 900, Class 4)	< +33 dBm (±2 dB)
	GSM (E-GSM 1800, Class 1)	< +30 dBm (±2 dB)
	GSM (E-GSM 900 8-PSK, Class E2)	< +27 dBm (±3 dB)
	GSM (E-GSM 1800 8-PSK, Class E2)	< +26 dBm (±3 dB/-4 dB)
	UMTS (2100 WCDMA FDD B1, Class 3) < +24 dBm (±1 dB/-3 dB)
	LTE (FDD B I, B III, B38, B39, B40, B41, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±2 dB)
	GPS (1575.42 MHz +/- 2 MHz) Receiving only
RAMSES (Router And Mobile SEviceS) GSM (E-GSM 850 / E-GSM 900, Class 4)		< +32.5 dBm (±1 dB)
		< +29.5 dBm (±1 dB)
	UMTS (WCDMA FDD I, II, III, IV, V, VIII, XIX, Class 3)	< +23.5 dBm (±1 dB)
	LTE (FDD B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B7, B8, B9, B18, B19, B21, B28, Class 3)	< +23 dBm (±1 dB)
	LTE (TDD B38, B40, B41, Class 3) < +23 dBm (+1 dB)
	GNSS (1559–1610 MHz) Receiving only

Regulatory radio identifiers and specific notes

Manufacturer information about radio-based vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio information" in the Digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app.

Information about the specific absorption rate (SAR)

Information about the specific absorption rate (SAR) can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio information" in the Digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app.

Importer information for regulatory radio components

Importer information about radio-based vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio information" in the Digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app.

Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview

Vehicle identification plate

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

MFD BY MERCEDES-BENZ AG STUTTGART GVW 2480KG MADE IN HUNGARY MY2013 GAW FRT 1190KG BUILT 10/12 GAW RR 1340KG PASSENGER CAR XXXX هندّد Deutsche تطابق كل م Operationات Sédiaries Quarterly العربية/السعودية المطوبة بحىت تاریخ الاشنام VINXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Vehicle identification plate (example: Kuwait)
① Vehicle manufacturer
2 Place of manufacture
③ Manufacturing date
4 Paint code
⑤ VIN (vehicle identification number)

Mercedes-Benz AG XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXX kg XXXX kg XXXX kg XXXX kg XXXX kg 1- 2- Made in Germany 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Vehicle identification plate (example: all other countries)
① Vehicle manufacturer
② EU general operating permit number (only for certain countries)
VIN (vehicle identification number)
4 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight (kg)

Maximum permissible gross weight of vehicle combination (kg) (for certain countries only, optional)
6 Maximum permissible front axle load (kg)
7 Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg)
B Paint code
① The data shown in the illustration is example data.

VIN at the lower edge of the windscreen

Line drawing of a car's front and rear door with a blue traffic sign pointing to the side (no text or symbols)

① VIN (vehicle identification number)

The VIN at the lower edge of the windscreen is only available in some countries.

VIN in the engine compartment

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

① VIN (vehicle identification number)

Engine number

The engine number is stamped into the crank-case.

i Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Operating fluids

Notes on operating fluids

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

WARNING Risk of injury due to harmful operating fluids

Operating fluids can be toxic.

When using, storing and disposing of operating fluids, observe the imprints on the respective original containers.
Always keep operating fluids in the sealed original container.
Always keep children away from operating fluids.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Pollution of the environment due to irresponsible disposal of operating fluids

Incorrect disposal of operating fluids can cause considerable damage to the environment.

▶ Dispose of operating fluids in an environmentally responsible manner.

Operating fluids include the following:

• fuels
• DeNOx agent AdBlue® for exhaust gas after-treatment
• lubricants
• Coolant
• Brake fluid
  • windscreen washer fluid
  • climate control system refrigerant

Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures.

The operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by the following inscriptions on the container:

• MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
• MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)

Further information on approved operating fluids:

• in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids by entering the designation

- At https://operatingfluids.mercedes-benz.com

• At a qualified specialist workshop

WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel

Fuels are highly flammable.

▶ Fire, naked flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided.
Before and during refuelling, switch off the vehicle and, if fitted, the stationary heater.

WARNING Risk of injury from fuels

Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.

Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not inhale fuel vapour.
▶ Keep children away from fuel.
Keep doors and windows closed during the refuelling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following:

Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.
If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.
If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do not induce vomiting.

Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.

Flexible-fuel vehicles can be refuelled with the following fuel types:

• unleaded petrol
  E85 fuel
  • a mixture of E85 fuel and unleaded petrol

Flexible-fuel vehicles can be identified by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

Depending on the country, the fuels you can use in your vehicle may differ from the information in the Owner's Manual. The fuels that have been approved for your vehicle can be found on the instruction label on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

Fuel

Information on fuel quality for vehicles with a petrol engine

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 497).

NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free spark-ignition engine fuel that conforms to European EN 228, or an equivalent specification.

Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel.

See the information label in fuel filler flap for other compatible fuels.

Never refuel with one of the following fuels:

• Diesel
  • Regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON
• Petrol with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30
  • Petrol with additives containing metal

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

Do not switch on the vehicle.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

According to European standard EN 16942, you can find the compatibility indications at the following locations:

• On the vehicle on the information label in the fuel filler flap
• On the fuel dispenser or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle throughout Europe

E5 E10

For petrol with a maximum of 5% ethanol by volume
For petrol with a maximum of 10% ethanol by volume

If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sulphur, it may produce unpleasant odours.

Recommended fuel: the recommended octane number for your vehicle can be found on the information label on the fuel filler flap ( page 231).

① Vehicles with petrol engine M256: when using 95 RON, there may be slight limitations in performance that have no further consequences.

All models: if you wish to achieve maximum engine output, refuel using only super unleaded petrol with an octane number of at least 98 RON. Alternatively, you can also refuel using premium-grade petrol with an octane number of at least 95 RON.

All models: as a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol with an octane number of at least 91 RON. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption.

Never refuel using petrol with a lower RON. Further information on fuel can be obtained at a filling station or a qualified specialist workshop.

Information on additives in petrol (vehicles with petrol engine) Observe the notes on operating fluids (→ page 497).

NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives

Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring.

Only add cleaning additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brand-name fuels with additives.

In some countries, the fuel available may not have sufficient additives. Deposits could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with a qualified specialist workshop (e.g. a Mercedes-Benz service centre), mix the fuel with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the notes and mixing ratios indicated on the tank.

information on fuel quality for vehicles with a sel engine

General notes

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 497).

WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture

If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.

▶ Never refuel using petrol in diesel engines.
▶ Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.

NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

Vehicles with a diesel particulate filter:

Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel fuel that conforms to European standard EN 590, or an equivalent specification. In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 50 ppm.

Vehicle without diesel particulate filter:

Only refuel using diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 500 ppm.

Never refuel with one of the following fuels:

• Petrol
• Marine diesel
• Heating oil
  • Pure fatty acid methyl ester or vegetable oil
  • Paraffin or kerosene

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

▶ Do not switch on the vehicle.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The following compatibility indications for fuel apply to your vehicle:

① For diesel fuel with a maximum of 7% fatty acid methyl ester by volume (bio-diesel)
For diesel fuel with a maximum of 10% fatty acid methyl ester by volume (bio-diesel)

According to European standard EN 16942 you can find the compatibility indications at the following locations:

• On the vehicle on the information label on the fuel filler flap ( page 231)
• On the fuel dispenser or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle throughout Europe

Information on low outside temperatures

Refuel your vehicle with as much winter diesel fuel as possible at the beginning of winter.

Before changing over to winter diesel fuel, the fuel tank should be empty, if possible. When first refuelling with winter diesel fuel, keep the fuel level low, e.g. to reserve level. The fuel tank can be filled as usual when next refuelling.

Further information on fuel can be obtained at a filling station or a qualified specialist workshop.

Tank content and fuel reserve

The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment.

Not for plug-in hybrid:

Total fuel tank capacity

Model
S 580 4MATIC 76.0 litres
All other models 65.0 litres	or76.0 litres

Fuel tank reserve

Model
All models 8.0 litres

Plug-in hybrid:

Total fuel tank capacity (plug-in hybrid)

Model
S 450 e	67.0 litres
S 580 e
S 580 e 4MATIC

Fuel tank reserve (plug-in hybrid)

Model
S 450 e	8.0 litres
S 580 e
S 580 e 4MATIC

AdBlue ^® (vehicles with a diesel engine only)

Notes on AdBlue®

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 497).

AdBlue ^® is a water-soluble fluid for the NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines.

It may be improper or punishable in some countries to operate a vehicle that uses no AdBlue ^® or one that does not comply with the specifications of this Owner's Manual.

NOTE Malfunctions due to the dilution of AdBlue ^® or the use of additive-enhanced AdBlue ^®

The function of the NOx exhaust gas after-treatment can be impaired by the use of unsuitable denoxification agents.

Only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO 22241.
Do not dilute AdBlue ^® with water.
Do not use additive-enhanced AdBlue®.

NOTE Damage and malfunctions due to impurities in AdBlue®

Consequences of impurities in AdBlue®:

• increased emission values
• damage to the catalytic converter
- NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment malfunctions

▶ Avoid impurities in AdBlue®.

AdBlue ^® residues crystallise after a period of time, and contaminate the surfaces with which they come into contact. Clean the dirty surfaces with water as soon as possible.

When you open the AdBlue ^® tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may escape. Do not inhale any ammonia vapours that may be released. Only fill the AdBlue ^® tank in well-ventilated areas.

AdBlue® filling capacity and consumption

Total capacity of AdBlue ^® tank

Model Total capacity

All models 25.0 litres

AdBlue ^® consumption

The average AdBlue® consumption is between 1% and 5% of fuel consumption. Like fuel consumption, AdBlue® consumption is highly dependent upon driving style and operating conditions. For this reason, your vehicle's actual consumption figures in day-to-day operating conditions may differ from the average consumption figures calculated. The frequency at which you will have to top up AdBlue® will also vary. Have the AdBlue® supply checked at a qualified specialist workshop before making journeys outside Europe. Before a longer stay outside Europe, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

AdBlue ^® fill level and range

The AdBlue ^® fill level and range can be displayed via the driver's display. The AdBlue ^® range shown depends strongly on the driving style and operat-

ing conditions. The actual range may therefore differ from the range currently displayed on the driver's display. The information supplied in the Owner's Manual regarding the reserve quantity at the first driver's display warning and on the minimum top-up quantity when the fuel tank is empty is also to be understood as guide values.

Engine oil

Notes on engine oil

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 497).

Mercedes-Benz Oil recommended

NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or additives

Do not use engine oils or oil filters other than those which meet the specifications necessary for the prescribed service intervals.
Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.
Do not use additives.
Have the engine oil changed after the prescribed intervals.

Mercedes-Benz recommends having the oil changed at a qualified specialist workshop.

Only use engine oils approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Engine oil quality and filling capacity

Not for plug-in hybrid:

Engine oil specifications (petrol engines)

Model MB-Freigabe or MB-
	Approval
S 580 4MATIC 229.52	229.61*
All other models 229.51, 229.52, 229.61, 229.71 229.72*

Engine oil specifications (diesel engines)

Model MB-Freigabe or MB-
	Approval
S 350 d	229.52
S 350 d 4MATIC	229.61*
S 400 d 4MATIC

Plug-in hybrid:

Engine oil specifications (plug-in hybrid)

Model MB-Freigabe or MB-
	Approval
S 450 e	229.51, 229.52*
S 580 e
S 580 e 4MATIC

* recommended for lowest possible fuel consumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes)

To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifications marked in the table with the lowest SAE viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes must be observed.

Plug-in hybrid: Use only engine oils of viscosity class SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40.

If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may add a maximum of 1.0 litre of the following engine oils once only.

Engine oils for one-time filling only in exceptional cases:

• Plug-in hybrid: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.31 or ACEA C3
• Petrol engines:

S 580 4MATIC: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.51 or ACEA C3
All other models: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.31 or ACEA C3
• Diesel engines: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.51 or ACEA C3

The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter.

Not for plug-in hybrid:

Engine oil filling capacity

Model Capacity
S 350 d 9 litres
S 580 4MATIC 8.5 litres
All other models 8 litres

Plug-in hybrid:

Engine oil filling capacity (plug-in hybrid)

Model Capacity
S 450 e	7.8 litres
S 580 e
S 580 e 4MATIC 7.3 litres

Notes on brake fluid

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 497).

WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapour pockets forming in the brake system

The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapour pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard.

This impairs the braking effect.

Have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals.

Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Only use a brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.

Coolant

Notes on coolant

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 497).

WARNING Risk of fire- and injury from antifreeze

If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite.

Allow the engine to cool down before you top up the antifreeze.

Make sure that no antifreeze spills out next to the filler opening.
Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from component parts before starting the vehicle.

NOTE Damage caused by incorrect coolant

▶ Only use coolant that has been premixed with the required antifreeze protection. Information on coolant is available at the following locations:

• In the Mercedes-Benz Specification for Operating Fluids 320.1
- At https://operatingfluids.mercedes-benz.com
• At a qualified specialist workshop

! NOTE Overheating at high outside temperatures

If an inappropriate coolant is used, the cooling system is not sufficiently protected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures.

▶ Only use coolant approved for Mercedes-Benz.
Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids 320.1.

Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the cooling system:

• A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down to about -37°C)
  • A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45°C)

Notes on windscreen washer fluid

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 497).

WARNING - Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate

Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system.

Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windscreen washer fluid

Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids may damage the plastic surface of the exterior lighting.

Only use windscreen washer fluids which are also suitable for use on plastic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.

NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windscreen washer fluids

Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit with other windscreen washer fluids.

Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Otherwise, the fill level sensor may be triggered erroneously.

Recommended windscreen washer fluid:

• above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit
• below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit

For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the information on the antifreeze container.

Mix washer fluid with windscreen washer fluid all year round.

Vehicle data

Information regarding the vehicle data

The vehicle data specified may vary as a result of the following factors:

Factors:

• tyres
• load
  • condition of the suspension
• optional equipment

In addition, the following applies to the specified vehicle data:

• Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the payload.
• Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate ( page 496).

Vehicle dimensions

Not for plug-in hybrid:

Vehicle dimensions

All models
Vehicle length 5289 mm
Vehicle width including exterior mirrors	2109 mm

All models
Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors	1954 mm
Vehicle height 1503 mm
Wheelbase 3216 mm

Plug-in hybrid:

Vehicle dimensions (plug-in hybrid)

S 450 eS 580 eS 580 e 4MATIC
Vehicle length 5289 mm
Vehicle width including exterior mirrors	2109 mm
Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors	1954 mm
Vehicle height 1503 mm
Wheelbase 3216 mm

Weights and loads

Not for plug-in hybrid:
Roof load
Model Maximum roof load
All models 100 kg
Plug-in hybrid:
Roof load (plug-in hybrid)
Model Maximum roof load
S 450 e	100 kg
S 580 e
S 580 e 4MATIC

Maximum design speeds

The maximum design speed can differ from the stated figures in practice. It depends on the operating conditions, the optional equipment and the size of the tyres.

Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

Maximum design speed

Model
All models

High-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

Notes on the power supply for vehicles with high-voltage battery

In accordance with European standard EN 17186:2019, vehicle identifiers are located on the vehicle in the following places:

• On the inside of the socket flap
• On the charging cable connector

In addition, charging stations in European countries are equipped with energy supply identifiers. You can recharge your vehicle at charging stations whose charging station identifier corresponds to the vehicle identifier.

For further information on charging the high-voltage battery, refer to the "Charging the high-voltage battery" section(→ page 238).

1 C 2 K 3 L

① Supply type: AC

Standard: EN 62196-2

Design: type 2

Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug

Voltage range: 480 V RMS

② Supply type: DC

Standard: EN 62196-3

Design: FF

Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug

Voltage range: 50 V to 500 V

③ Supply type: DC

Standard: EN 62196-3

Design: FF

Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug

Voltage range: 200 V to 920 V

You can find information on the range in electric-only mode in the driver's display ( page 343).

Energy content and charging times

S 450 e
S 580 e
S 580 e 4MATIC
Type Lithium-ion
Maximum energy content 28.6 kWh
Charging time - mode 2 with up to 1.8 kW charging capacity (depending on the vehicle build and national version)	15 h

S 450 eS 580 eS 580 e 4MATIC
Charging time - mode 3with up to 11 kW charging capacity	2 h
Charging time - mode 4with direct current at fast charging stationwith up to 60 kW charging capacity	20 min

Charging times -modes 2 and 3 apply to AC charging from 10% to 100% of the usable energy content.

Charging time -mode 4 applies to DC charging from 10% to 80% of the usable energy content.

The time taken to charge the battery depends on the state of charge of the battery, the ambient temperature and the charging capacity of the battery. The charging capacity, in turn, depends on

the supply voltage, the current intensity and the type of power supply.

The nominal voltage range for your vehicle can be found on the information label in the socket cover ( page 238).

Trailer hitch

General notes on the trailer hitch

Modifications to the cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle model. The retrofitting of a trailer hitch is only permissible if a towing capacity is specified in your vehicle documents.

Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Mounting dimensions

Technical diagram of a mechanical device with numbered components and dimension lines

Diagram showing a mechanical setup with labeled components and directional arrows, possibly illustrating a system or motion path.

Fastening points
② Overhang dimension
③ Rear axle centre line

The overhang dimension and fastening points are valid for a trailer hitch installed at the factory. Not for plug-in hybrid:

Overhang dimension length

Model 2 Ov	erhang dimension
All models 1299 mm

Towing capacity

The drawbar load is not included in the towing capacity.

Not for plug-in hybrid:

Towing capacity, braked (at a minimum start-off gradeability of 12 %)

Model Towing capacity,	braked
All models 2100 kg

Towing capacity, unbraked

Model Towing capacity,

unbraked

All models 750 kg

Maximum trailer drawbar noseweight -and load capacity

NOTE Damage caused by the trailer coming loose

If the tongue weight used is too low, the trailer may come loose.

The tongue weight must not be below 50 kg.
▶ Use a tongue weight that is as close as possible to the maximum permissible tongue weight.

NOTE Damage caused by the bicycle rack coming loose

When using a bicycle rack, both the maximal tongue weight and the maximal load capacity should be observed.

Do not exceed the permissible load capacity.

Observe the additional notes on the maximum load capacity ( page 339).

Not for plug-in hybrid:

Trailer drawbar load

Model Maximum drawbar	load
All models 85 kg

Load capacity

All models Maximum load capa-city
When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball head	75 kg
When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball head and additionally to the guide pin	100 kg

Permissible axle load, rear axle

Not for plug-in hybrid:
Axle load when towing trailer
Model Axle load
S 350 d 1610 kg
S 350 d 4MATIC	1615 kg
S 400 d 4MATIC
S 450 4MATIC

Model Axle load
S 500 4MATIC 1610 kg
S 580 4MATIC 1560 kg

Display messages

Introduction

Information about display messages

Display messages appear on the driver's display.

Display messages with graphical symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols on the driver's display. The driver's display shows high-priority display messages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone.

Please act in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in the Owner's Manual.

For some display messages, symbols will also be shown:

• Further information
• × Hide display message

With the left-hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the left or right. Pressing ⓘ displays further information on the central display. Press the × symbol to hide the display message.

Display messages to be acknowledged can be hidden by pressing the back button ↩ or with the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory.

Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible.

High-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The driver's display will show these display messages continuously until the cause of the display message has been rectified.

- Calling up saved display messages

Driver's display:

The Message memory: XXmessage appears on the driver's display.

▶ Scroll through the display messages by swiping upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
To exit the display: press the [←] back button.

Occupant safety

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Restraint system malfunction Consult workshop

* The restraint system is malfunctioning ( page 44).

WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid:

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.

You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
▶ After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Front left malfunction Consult workshop (example)

* The restraint system is malfunctioning ( page 44).

WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident. ▶ Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid:

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.

- Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. - After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Left window airbag malfunction Consult workshop (example)	* The restraint system is malfunctioning (→ page 44).⚠ WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbagThe windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident.▶ Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Push rear left seat belt extender back manually See Owner's Manual (example)	* The corresponding seat belt extender is malfunctioning.▶ Slide the seat belt extender back into its original position manually.▶ If the malfunction occurs again, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Front passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual	* The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult build is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.⚠ WARNING - Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabledIf the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function.A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard.▶ Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.▶ Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (→ page 46).▶ If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Front passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual	* The front passenger airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations:• even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat• even when the front passenger seat is not occupiedThe system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.
	⚠ WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabledIf you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.The child could be struck by the airbag.▶ Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.
▶ Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff ( page 46).
If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Key

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Replace key

Change key batteries

* Have the key replaced.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The key battery is discharged.
Replace the battery ( page 87).

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Key not detected (white dis-play message)

* The key is currently undetected.► Change the location of the key in the vehicle.► Try to start the vehicle.► If the key is still not detected, place it in the slot for starting with the key (→ page 209).► Start the vehicle.

Key not detected (red dis-play message)

* The key can no longer be detected during a journey and may no longer be in the vehicle.If the key is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the vehicle:·You can no longer start the vehicle.·You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.► Ensure that the key is in the vehicle.If the key is in the vehicle and is still not detected:► Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.► Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (→ page 209).The key battery is weak or discharged.► Check the battery using the indicator lamp (→ page 85).► Replace the key battery, if necessary (→ page 87).

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Key being taught in Please wait

Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual

* The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new key.

▶ Wait until processing is complete.

* Key detection is malfunctioning.

Change the location of the key in the vehicle.
Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key ( page 209).

Lights

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Left low beam (example)

* The corresponding light source is defective.

Drive on carefully.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

i LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting diodes in the light are faulty.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Malfunction See Owner's Manual

Automatic driving lights inoperative

Switch on headlamps

Switch off lights

* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Vehicles with a trailer hitch: a fuse may have blown.
▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Check the fuses and replace them if necessary ( page 468).

* The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* You are driving without low-beam headlamps.

Turn the light switch to the 📋D or AUTO position.

* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on.

Turn the light switch to the AUTO position.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
DIGITAL LIGHT Functions limited	* The DIGITAL LIGHT system is malfunctioning. The lighting system will continue to work even without the functions of the DIGITAL LIGHT system. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
MULTIBEAM LED Functions limited	* The MULTIBEAM LED system is malfunctioning. The lighting system will continue to work, but without the functions of the MULTIBEAM LED system. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Check low beam setting (left/right-side traffic)	* The type of traffic has been selected manually. ▶ Check the setting and change it manually if necessary (→ page 177).
Low beam setting (left/right-side traffic) Manual adjustment only	* The automatic headlamp conversion for left-hand/right-hand traffic has malfunctioned. ▶ Change the headlamps over manually (→ page 177).
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (→ page 175). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus available again display message will appear. ▶ Drive on ▶ Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inoperative	* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning.▶ Drive onor▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Until then, operate the high beam manually.
Hazard warning lamp sys-tem Malfunction	* The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Climate control

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

inoperative See Owner's Man.

* The stationary heater is temporarily malfunctioning.▶ When the vehicle is stationary on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on the stationary heater, waiting several minutes between each attempt.▶ If the stationary heater does not switch on, consult a qualified specialist workshop.1 The stationary heater cannot be activated if the outside temperature is above 15°C.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Currently unavailable Battery low

Currently unavailable Refuel

Currently unavailable High-voltage battery charging incomplete.

* The on-board electrical system voltage is too low.

The stationary heater has switched itself off.

▶ Drive an extended distance until the battery has reached a sufficient charge level again.

* There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The stationary heater cannot be switched on.

Refuel the vehicle.

* The high-voltage battery is charging. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.

Wait until the charging process has achieved a minimum state of charge.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Currently unavailableCharge high-voltage battery	* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.▶ Charge the high-voltage battery (→ page 238).
Pre-entry climate control via key available again after starting vehicle	* You have attempted to switch on pre-entry climate control more than twice with the vehicle switched off.▶ Start the vehicle for ten seconds.Pre-entry climate control is operational again.
Pre-entry climate control via key currently unavailable. High-voltage battery low	* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.▶ Charge the high-voltage battery (→ page 238).When the high-voltage battery is sufficiently charged, pre-entry climate control will be operational again.

Hybrid system

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Towing not permitted See Owner's Manual	* The drive system is malfunctioning.▶ Have the vehicle transported only using a transporter or trailer (→ page 462).
Acoustic presence indicator inoperative	* The sound generator (acoustic vehicle warning system) is malfunctioning. No vehicle noises are being produced. The vehicle may not be heard by other road users.▶ Drive with particular care.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Charger cable connected	* You cannot pull away while the charging cable is connected.▶ Disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle.
Not possible to unlock charging cable See Owner's Manual	* The charging cable connector cannot be removed from the charging station's socket.▶ Press the EMERGENCY OFF switch on the charging station.If the charging cable connector cannot be removed after that:
	Request service personnel from the operator of the charging station via the emergency call button or the emergency numbers attached to the charging station.
Vehicle not currently being charged Charging station fault	* A malfunction has occurred in the charging station or the RFID card is not recognised.Start the charging process at a different charging station.orHave the RFID card checked to ensure it is functioning.
Charging fault Please change charging method See Owner's Manual	* A temporary malfunction has occurred in the charging station.Wait until the malfunction has passed.orStart the charging process at a different charging station.
AC charging inoperative Consult workshop	* The charging process cannot be started due to a malfunction.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
DC charging inoperative Consult workshop	* The charging process cannot be started due to a malfunction.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Only electric drive available Power limited	* The fuel tank is empty and the combustion engine is switched off. The output of your vehicle is limited because you are driving in electric mode.▶ Refuel immediately.Subsequently, there may be temporary restrictions in the availability of electric mode over a driving distance of 50 km.If there is fuel in the vehicle, there is a fault with the combustion engine.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
"Electric" drive program currently unavailable	* The state of charge of the high-voltage battery is not sufficient for the Electric drive program.Charge the high-voltage battery (→ page 238).
Reduced drive system performance See Owner's Manual	* The drive system switches to emergency operation mode due to a malfunction.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Preparing drive system...	* The insulation of the drive system is being tested. This process can last for up to ten seconds.
Battery overheated Stop, everybody out! Outdoors if possible	* Plug-in hybrid: the high-voltage battery is overheated. There is a risk of fire.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out.i Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. air-recirculation mode as part of climate control.▶ Do not continue driving.▶ If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the fire service immediately.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a fire.
Malfunction	* The drive system is malfunctioning. A warning tone will also sound.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunction Visit workshop	* The drive system is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Have high-voltage system checked See Owner's Manual	* A function restriction has occurred in the drive system.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Consult workshop without changing the transmission position	* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position.▶ If transmission position D is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position.▶ For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Consult workshop without starting the vehicle again	* It is not possible to restart the drive system due to a malfunction.▶ Do not switch off the drive system; drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Output and range reduced See Owner's Manual	* A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery.Output and range will be severely restricted.▶ Switch the vehicle off and lock it.▶ After waiting for a short time, unlock the vehicle and start it again.If the display message appears again:▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Fully charge the high-voltage battery (→ page 238).If the output and range are still reduced, there is a malfunction in the drive system.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Cannot start vehicle See Owner's Manual	* It is not possible to start the vehicle.A malfunction has occurred in the drive system.▶ Switch the vehicle off and lock it.
	▶ After waiting for a short time, unlock the vehicle and start it again.▶ If the display message appears again and the vehicle does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Drive malfunction Achievable speed limited Stop soon	* The drive system is malfunctioning.The maximum vehicle speed is restricted. The drive system will shut off within a few kilometres.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the drive system. Do not continue driving.▶ Do not tow the vehicle; stop towing if necessary.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Drive malfunction Achievable speed severely limited See Owner's Manual	* The drive system is malfunctioning.The maximum vehicle speed is restricted.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunction	* The drive system is malfunctioning. The output of your vehicle is restricted.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Stop Switch off the vehicle	* The drive system is malfunctioning.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the drive system. Do not continue driving.▶ Do not tow the vehicle; stop towing if necessary.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Performance severely limited	* The drive system is outside the normal operating temperature range, e.g. due to extremely low or high outside temperatures.The output is severely restricted.Once the operating temperature of the drive system returns to normal, the full output will be available again. The display message will disappear.* If the drive system power output is still reduced, there is a fault in the drive system.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
High-voltage battery malfunction. No start in approx. XXX km Consult workshop (yellow display message)	* A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery.It will no longer be possible to start the electric drive system after the distance displayed has been covered.It is still possible to start the combustion engine.▶ Have the necessary maintenance work on the high-voltage battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
High-voltage battery malfunction. No start in approx. XXX km Consult workshop (red display message)	* A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery.It will no longer be possible to start the electric drive system after the distance displayed has been covered.It is still possible to start the combustion engine.▶ Have the necessary maintenance work on the high-voltage battery carried out immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
High-voltage battery malfunction. Consult workshop without starting the vehicle again	* A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery.It will no longer be possible to restart the drive system once it has been switched off.▶ Do not switch off the drive system; drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Please wait Depressurising fuel tank	* Vehicles with petrol engines: the pressure in the fuel tank is reduced before the fuel filler flap is opened. This pressure reduction can take up to 15 minutes.
Fuel tank is depressurised Ready for refuelling	* Vehicles with petrol engines: the pressure in the fuel tank is released and the fuel filler flap opens.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

* The driver's display is inoperative due to a failed software update.

The display message will be shown every time the engine is started.

WARNING Risk of accident if the driver display fails

If the driver display has failed or is malfunctioning, function restrictions in systems relevant to safety cannot be detected.

The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired.

Drive on carefully.
Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid:

WARNING Risk of accident due to failure of the driver display

In the event that the driver display fails or malfunctions, you will not recognise function restrictions affecting systems relevant to safety. This may impair operating safety.

Park the vehicle safely as soon as possible and notify a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	If the driver's display fails, you may not recognise function restrictions affecting systems relevant to safety or the speed display, for example. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired (→ page 381).▶ Have the vehicle checked by a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Vehicle is operationalSwitch off vehicle before exiting	* You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state.▶ Get out of the vehicle, secure it against rolling away and take the key with you.▶ If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V battery may discharge and starting the engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (jump start).
Operation only possible in transmission position P	* The ball neck will not swivel because transmission position D, R or neutral N is selected.▶ Depress the brake pedal.▶ Engage park position P.
Trailer coupling in motion	* The ball neck is retracting/extending.Do not attempt to speed up, slow down or initiate the swivel movement using your hand, foot or other aids. During the swivel movement, do not couple a trailer.When the ball neck has reached an operational position, the display message will disappear.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Trailer coupling Check lock (white display message)

* The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer.

WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked

The trailer may become detached.

▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
▶ Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.
▶ Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.

▶ Initiate a new swivel movement ( page 334).
When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.

If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.

Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* When the vehicle is stationary with a coupled trailer, the trailer hitch is not operational.

▶ Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away.
If the ball neck has been retracted: initiate a new swivel movement ( page 334).

The ball neck will engage vertically in the locked position and then engage beneath the bumper.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ If the ball neck has been extended: initiate a new swivel movement (→ page 334).The ball neck will engage beneath the bumper.
	If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.▶ Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Please teach in trailer coupling again using the button in load compartment Wait for it to extend/retract	* The swivel movement of the trailer hitch is impaired.▶ Use the button on the boot lid to trigger a new, complete swivel movement until the ball neck engages beneath the bumper.
Head-up display currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* The head-up display is temporarily unavailable. Possible causes:· malfunctions in the power supply· signal interference▶ Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch the vehicle off and on again.▶ If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Head-up display inoperative	* The head-up display has an internal error.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Head-up display Brightness currently reduced See Owner's Manual	* The brightness of the head-up display is reduced. Possible causes:• Dirt on the windscreen in the camera's field of vision• Faulty exterior brightness signals▶ Switch on the windscreen wipers.• Clean the windscreen if necessary.• Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on▶ If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Steering malfunction Drive carefully Visit workshop	* A power steering malfunction has occurred. Steering characteristics may be impaired as a result.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Steering malfunction Increased physical effort See Owner's Manual	* The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristicsIf the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.▶ If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.▶ Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Steering malfunction Stopimmediately See Owner's Manual	* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired.⚠ WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impairedIf the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Rear axle steering currently malfunctioning	* The rear-axle steering is temporarily unavailable. The turning circle may become wider.▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.If the display message does not disappear:▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Rear axle steering Malfunction Visit workshop	* The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.The rear axle has no steering capability.The steering wheel may be at an angle when you drive in a straight line.▶ Adapt your speed and drive on carefully.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Rear axle steering Malfunction Stop immediately	* The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.The rear axle has no steering capability.The steering wheel may be tilted considerably when you drive in a straight line.Depending on the steering wheel's tilted position, the steering wheel will also vibrate and a continuous warning tone will sound.⚠ WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impairedIf the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	▶ When stopping, bear the enlarged vehicle width in mind.
Snow chain mode Maxi-mum speed exceeded	* The maximum permissible speed for snow chain mode has been exceeded.Drive more slowly.
Active bonnet malfunction See Owner's Manual	* The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Ambient light warning support inoperative	* The ambient lighting may not provide full visual warning support.Lock the vehicle and unlock it again after a few minutes.▶ If the display message appears regularly, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
	* At least one door is open.▶ Close all doors.
Bonnet unlatched Pull lever again to open	* The bonnet is not fully unlocked.⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlockedThe bonnet may open and block your view.▶ Never release the bonnet when driving.▶ Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.▶ To open the bonnet fully, pull the handle again (→ page 432).
Bonnet not locked Close before starting journey	* The bonnet is not locked.⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlockedThe bonnet may open and block your view.▶ Never release the bonnet when driving.▶ Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.▶ Close the bonnet (→ page 432).
Stop immediately Close bonnet completely	* The bonnet is not locked.⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlockedThe bonnet may open and block your view.▶ Never release the bonnet when driving.▶ Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.
	▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Close the bonnet (→ page 432).
	* The bonnet is open.⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlockedThe bonnet may open and block your view.▶ Never release the bonnet when driving.▶ Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.
	▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Close the bonnet.* The boot lid is open.⚠ DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoningCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.▶ Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid.▶ Never drive with the boot lid open.
	▶ Close the boot lid.
Top up washer fluid	* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.▶ Top up the washer fluid (→ page 436).
Intensive cleaning activated for 30 s	* Intensive cleaning of the windscreen has been activated (→ page 180).
Wiper Malfunction	* The windscreen wiper is malfunctioning.▶ Restart the vehicle.
	If the display message still appears:
	▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
To switch off the vehicle, press the Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or 3 times	* You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion.▶ Information about switching off the vehicle while driving (→ page 208).
Top up coolant See Owner's Manual	* The coolant level is too low.!! NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant.▶ Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.▶ Add coolant (→ page 436).▶ Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Coolant Stop Switch off the vehicle

* The coolant is too hot.

▶ Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet

If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur:

- You may come into contact with hot gases.

- You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.

Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service.

▶ Wait until the engine has cooled down.

Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.

Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120^ C.

There is a malfunction in the engine cooling system.

Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120°C.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Reserve fuel level	* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.▶ Refuel.
Clean the fuel filter	* Vehicles with diesel engines: the fuel filter is dirty or the water in the fuel filter needs to be drained.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Replace air filter	* Vehicles with diesel engines: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Only select P when vehicle is stationary	* It is possible to select the park position ▶ only if the vehicle is stationary. ▶ Depress the brake pedal to stop.▶ Shift the transmission to park position P when the vehicle is stationary.
Apply brake to deselect P position	* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position P and into another transmission position. ▶ Depress the brake pedal. ▶ Select transmission position D, R or neutral N.
Apply brake and start vehi-cle to shift out of P or N	* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position P or neutral N and into another transmission posi-tion. ▶ Depress the brake pedal. ▶ Start the vehicle. ▶ Change the transmission position.
Apply brake to engage D or R	* You have attempted to select transmission position D or R. ▶ Depress the brake pedal. ▶ Select transmission position D or R.
Apply brake to engage R	* You have attempted to select transmission position R. ▶ Depress the brake pedal. ▶ Select transmission position R.
Apply parking brake to park Visit workshop	* A malfunction has occurred in the emergency power supply to park position P. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Until then, always select park position P manually before you switch off the vehicle.▶ Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Risk of vehicle rolling awayDriver's door open Transmission not in P	* The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position D, R or neutral N is selected.The vehicle may roll away.▶ Select park position P when switching off the vehicle.
Risk of vehicle rolling awayApply parking brake to park	* The transmission is malfunctioning. Park position P cannot be selected.▶ Park the vehicle safely.▶ Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.▶ On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the kerb if it starts moving.
Risk of vehicle rolling awayN activated manually No automatic switch to P	* While the vehicle was at a standstill or driving at very low speed, neutral N w as engaged with the engine running or the vehicle switched on.
	! NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to rolling awayWhen the vehicle is switched off or the driver's door is opened, automatic engagement of park position P is deactivated.The vehicle may roll away.▶ Be ready to brake.▶ Do not leave the vehicle unattended.▸ Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill.▸ Engage park position P when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed.▸ To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position D or R.
N automatically activated Please engage transmis-sion position again	* Neutral N was automatically engaged when the vehicle was rolling or being driven.1 When you open the driver's door in neutral N, park position P will be engaged automatically.▸ Engage park position P when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed.▸ To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position D or R.
Reversing not poss. Con-sult workshop	* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position R.▸ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Malfunction Stop	* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutral N automatically.▸ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.▸ Depress the brake pedal.▸ Engage park position P.▸ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Consult workshop without changing the transmission position	* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position.▸ If transmission position D is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position.▶ For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Drive malfunction Stop Restart vehicle	* The transmission is malfunctioning.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Restart the vehicle.If the display message still appears:▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Drive malfunction Stop Consult workshop	* The transmission is malfunctioning.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in a safe location and do not continue driving.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Drive overheated. Drive on with care	* The transmission is overheating. When the display message is active, start-up and driving characteristics may be temporarily impaired.▶ Drive at low engine speed.▶ Avoid sporty driving.▶ Before pulling away on uphill gradients, let the transmission cool down until the display message disappears.
Auxiliary battery malfunction (white display message)	* There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Until then, always select park position P manually before you switch off the vehicle.▶ Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Auxiliary battery malfunction(red display message)	* There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Until then, always select park position P manually before you switch off the vehicle.▶ Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Brakes

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Parking brake See Owner's Manual

* The yellow (P) indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

To apply:

▶ Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on
Apply the electric parking brake manually ( page 259).

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow (P) indicator lamp and the red (P) indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

To release:

▶ Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on
Release the electric parking brake manually ( page 259).
or
Release the electric parking brake automatically ( page 258).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The yellow (P) indicator lamp is lit and the red (P) indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.

▶ Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on

To apply:

Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually ( page 259).

To release:

Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or the red indicator lamp continues to flash:

Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow (P) indicator lamp is lit and the red (P) indicator lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

If the state of charge is too low:

Charge the 12 V battery.

To apply:

Apply the electric parking brake manually.

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

To release:

If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically, release the electric parking brake manually ( page 259).

If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:

Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Release parking brake	* The red (P) indicat or lamp is flashing.The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving:A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (→ page 258).You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (→ page 259).▶ Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake.▶ Release the electric parking brake manually.
Parking brake Switch on vehicle to release	* The red (P) indicat or lamp is lit.You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the vehicle switched off.▶ Switch on the vehicle.
Brake immediately	* A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated.A horn may also sound at regular intervals.You cannot start the vehicle system.▶ Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the display message disappears.You cannot start the vehicle system again.
Malfunction See Owner's Manual	* The brake force boosting function is impaired.Hill Start Assist may be impaired.⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunctionIf the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunction Stop vehicle	* The brake force boosting function is impaired and the braking characteristics may be affected.⚠ WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioningIf brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.▶ Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving!▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Check brake fluid level	* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid levelIf the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.▶ Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Do not top up the brake fluid.
Check brake pads See Owner's Manual	* The brakepads have reached the wear limit.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving and driving safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

currently unavailable See Owner's Manual

* ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable.

The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.

⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning

The wheels may lock during braking and ESP ^® does not perform any vehicle stabilisation.

The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

▶ Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
	* ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
inoperative See Owner's Manual	⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioningThe wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
	* ESP® is temporarily unavailable.Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning®If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.▸ Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.▸ If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
inoperative See Owner's Manual	* ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioningIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.▸ Drive on carefully.▸ Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

inoperative See Owner's Manual

Off

ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!

* EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning

The wheels may block during braking and ESP ^® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.

The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

Drive on carefully.
Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled.

Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function ( page 267).

* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver ( page 269).

If necessary, take a break.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
ATTENTION ASSIST Micro-sleep Take a break!	* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected indicators of microsleep (→ page 269).A warning tone will also sound.▶ Take a break.▶ Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
--- km/h	* The limiter can temporarily not be engaged. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
passive	* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown), the limiter will be switched to passive mode (→ page 271).
Limiter inoperative	* The limiter is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Speed limit (winter tyres)XXX km/h	* You have reached the maximum permissible stored speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed.
Maximum speed exceeded	* You have exceeded the maximum permissible speed (for certain countries only).▶ Drive more slowly.
Tst currently Owner's	* Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.▶ Continue driving in compliance with the traffic regulations.
Traffic Sign Assist inoperative	* Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.▶ Continue driving in compliance with the traffic regulations.or▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	* AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.
Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h	NOTE The tyres on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements▶ Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.▶ If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible.▶ Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 80 km/h.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
STOP Vehicle level too low	* You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low.▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.▶ Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIRMATIC is malfunctioning:▶ No faster than 80 km/h and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
	! NOTE The tyres on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements▶ Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.▶ If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible.
	▶ Set a higher vehicle level (→ page 302).Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle will be raised.
Vehicle rising Please wait	* The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.▶ Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
Max. speed 20km/h	* AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent.The current level is too high. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.▶ No faster than 20 km/h.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Compressor is cooling	* Due to frequent level changes within a short space of time, the compressor first needs to cool down in order to set the selected vehicle level.When the compressor has cooled down, the vehicle will continue rising to the selected vehicle level.▶ Drive on in a manner appropriate for the current level. Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.
E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL Function limited See Owner's Manual	* At least one main function of the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL system is malfunctioning.The system is outside the operating temperature range or the on-board electrical system voltage is too low.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h

NOTE The vehicle's suspension and damping behaviour is restricted. The vehicle body may tilt heavily to the side during cornering.

▶ Drive on carefully.
▶ Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend.
▶ Avoid sudden steering movements.

Drive on carefully.
▶ Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend.
Avoid sudden steering movements.

* At least one main function of the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL system is malfunctioning.

The system is deactivated.

NOTE The vehicle's suspension and damping behaviour has changed significantly, the vehicle body may tilt heavily to the side during cornering.

▶ Reduce vehicle speed. Drive on carefully.
▶ Reduce the vehicle speed considerably before taking a curve.
▶ Avoid sudden steering movements.

Continue driving carefully and do not exceed 80 km/h.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ If possible, stop in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch the vehicle off and on again.▶ If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	* There is a serious malfunction affecting the hydraulics of the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL system.The system is deactivated.
Fault Stop	! NOTE The vehicle's driving characteristics have changed significantly.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
	▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driver assistance systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
---km/h	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.▶ Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (→ page 275).
suspended	* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to passive mode (→ page 272).
Off	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (→ page 275).
Assist cur-See Own-	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 272).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.Drive on carefully.orIf the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
Assist inop-	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.Drive on carefully.or▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Distance Assist available again	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again.▶ Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (→ page 275).
Active Brake Assist Functions currently limited See Owner's Manual	* For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only partially available:Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic functionEvasive Steering AssistPRE-SAFE® PLUSThe ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 286).▶ Drive on carefully.As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.or▶ If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
Active Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual	* For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only partially available:Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic functionEvasive Steering AssistPRE-SAFE® PLUSDrive on carefully.orStop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Steering Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 280).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.Drive onCheck the tyre pressure if necessary.
Active Steering Assist inoperative	* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available.Drive onorStop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (→ page 280).You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time.▶ Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Active Steering Assist currently unavailable due to multiple emergency stops	* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops.▶ Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Switch the vehicle off and switch it back onActive Steering Assist is available once more.
Beginning emergency stop	* Your hands are not on the steering wheel. Active Steering Assist will initiate an emergency stop (→ page 280).▶ Put your hands on the steering wheel.Information on cancelling an emergency stop (→ page 282).
Active Emergency Stop Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Active Emergency Stop Assist is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 282).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.▶ Drive on.or▶ If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
Active Emergency Stop Assist inoperative	* Active Emergency Stop Assist is malfunctioning.► Drive onor► Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.► If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Lane Change Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Active Lane Change Assist is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 284).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.► Drive onor► If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
Active Lane Change Assist inoperative	* Active Lane Change Assist is malfunctioning.► Drive onor► Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.► If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Stop-and-Go Assist currently unavailable see Owner's Manual	* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 272).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.▶ Drive on
Active Stop-and-Go Assist inoperative See Owner's Manual	* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning.Active Stop-and-Go Assist has been deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available.▶ Drive onor▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (→ page 295).Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.▶ Drive onor▶ If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative	* Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.▸ Drive onor▸ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▸ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Blind Spot Assist unavailable when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual	* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable.▸ Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 298).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.▸ Drive on
Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative	* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.▸ Drive onor▸ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▸ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Lane Keeping Assist functions restricted See Owner's Manual	* Active Lane Keeping Assist is available but restricted.▶ Drive onor▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	* Front and corner radar sensors (hereafter "sensors") are malfunctioning. Possible causes:The sensors are dirtyHeavy rain or snowExtended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desertDriving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally.▶ Drive on carefully.Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off.If the display message does not disappear:
temporarily unavailable Sensors dirty	▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.Clean all sensor covers from outside (→ page 262).▶ Restart the vehicle.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Camera view restricted See Owner's Manual

* The view of the multifunction camera is restricted. Possible causes:

• Dirt on the windscreen in the field of vision of the multifunction camera
  • Heavy rain, snow or fog
• Mist on the inside of the windscreen: in certain weather conditions, mist can form on the inside of the windscreen during cold times of year in particular.

This mist on the windscreen will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restriction is temporary.

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally.

Drive on carefully.

Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off.

If the display message does not disappear:

▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Clean the windscreen, especially in the position of the multifunction camera ( page 262).
▶ Restart the vehicle.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Restricted during trailer operation

Driver camera view currently restricted See Owner's Manual

* When the trailer socket is occupied, some driving systems will be available only to a limited extent.

Drive carefully if you are towing a trailer or have the bicycle rack mounted.

* The view of the driver camera is reduced. Possible causes:

• Objects or stickers are projecting into the driver camera's field of vision.
  • The driver camera is dirty.
  Keep the driver camera's field of vision free.
  Clean the driver camera if necessary. Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior relating to the display ( page 443).

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Change steering wheel/seat position until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge of the screen	* The driver camera cannot capture your line of sight.▶ Change the steering wheel and seat position until six dots are visible on the top edge of the screen.The display message will appear again if the driver camera is again unable to detect your line of sight after 30 minutes.The display message will no longer appear if you confirm the display message and the driver camera cannot detect your line of sight during the entire journey.
Driver camera inoperative See Owner's Manual	* The driver camera is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual	* The PRE-SAFE® functions are malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual	* The PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE PLUS inoperative See Owner's Manual	* The PRE-SAFE® system is malfunctioning.▶ Drive onor▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking assistance systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual	* Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.▶ Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.or▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
PARKTRONIC and manoeuvring assistant unavailable at rear when towing a trailer	* If transport equipment, e.g. a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection is correctly established, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not available at the rear when reversing. The rear manoeuvring assistant is also unavailable in this situation.▶ Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual	* Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.▶ Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.or▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Limited availability of Active Parking Assist manoeuvring assistant See Owner's Manual

* Active Parking Assist's manoeuvring assistant is temporarily unavailable or only partially available.

Clean all sensors of the parking and camera system ( page 442).
If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Inoperative

* The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Cannot start vehicle See Owner's Manual

* The vehicle cannot be started.
▶ Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on
If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	* Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: the state of charge of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the vehicle.► Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.► Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with sufficient charge output to the jump-start connection point of the 12 V battery (→ page 459).The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle.* Plug-in hybrid: the charging cable is inserted.► Disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle.* The charging cable is not inserted.► Switch off the vehicle for five to ten minutes.► Switch on the vehicle.► If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
12 V on-board electrical system Visit workshop	* The 12 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual

* The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the state of charge is too low.

NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
▶ Switch off the vehicle.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Start the vehicle to charge the 12 V battery

* The vehicle is off and the state of charge of the 12 V battery is too low.

▶ Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.
▶ Drive for 30–60 mins.

or

Charge the 12 V battery when stationary ( page 459).
Plug-in hybrid: Charge the vehicle at a charging station ( page 238).

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Stop vehicle Leave vehicle on to charge the 12 V battery	* The 12 V battery charge level is too low.► Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.► Leave the vehicle running► If the display message disappears: drive on.► If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual	* The 48 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.► Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.► Switch off the vehicle.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Battery overheated Stop, everybody out! Outdoors if possible	* The 48 V battery is overheating. There is a risk of fire.► Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.► If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out.i Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. air-recirculation mode as part of climate control.► Do not continue driving.► If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the fire service immediately.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a fire.
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
48 V battery See Owner's Manual	* The 48 V on-board electrical system has function restrictions.Comfort functions may be restricted.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Please wait 48 V battery charging	* The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the vehicle while the 12 V battery was being charged with a suitable charger or while another vehicle was providing starting assistance.The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. After a few minutes, thePossible to start the vehicle againdisplay message will be shown on the driver's display.► Start the vehicle.► Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery after disconnecting the charger from the vehicle.If thePossible to start the vehicle againdisplay message does not appear after a few minutes:► Try to start the vehicle.► If the vehicle does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Cannot start vehicle See Owner's Manual	* The state of charge of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the vehicle.► Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.▶ Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with sufficient charge output to the jump-start connection point of the 12 V battery (→ page 459).The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle.
Possible to start the vehicle again	* The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter.▶ Start the vehicle and drive for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery.

Tyre pressure monitor

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Tyre press. monitor currently unavailable	* There is interference from a powerful radio signal source As a result, no signals from the tyre pressure sensors are being received. The tyre pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable.The tyre pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified.▶ Drive on
Tyre press. monitor inoperative	* The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.⚠ WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioningThe tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres.Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.▶ Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tyre pressure monitor inoperative No tyre pressure sensors	* The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitoring system is deactivated.▶ Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.
Wheel sensor(s) missing	* There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor in at least one wheel. No pressure value is displayed for the affected tyre.▶ Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Check tyre(s)	* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly.The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone will also sound.⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressureThe tyres can burst.The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.You could then lose control of the vehicle.▶ Observe the recommended tyre pressures.▶ Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
	▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
	▶ Check the tyre pressure (→ page 474) and the tyres.
Rectify tyre pressure	* The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the difference in tyre pressure between the individual wheels is too great.▶ Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary.▶ When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitor (→ page 477).
Warning tyre malfunction	* The pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed.⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tyreThe tyres can overheat and be damaged.The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.You could then lose control of the vehicle.▶ Do not drive with a flat tyre.Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissible speed with a flat MOExtended tyre.▶ Observe the notes on flat tyres.
	Notes on flat tyres (→ page 448).▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Check the tyres.
Tyre(s) overheated	* At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyresOverheated tyres can burst.▶ Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.
Reduce speed	* At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyresOverheated tyres can burst.▶ Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.

Exhaust gas aftertreatment

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Refill AdBlue See Owner's Manual	* The AdBlue® level has fallen into the reserve range.▶ Top up AdBlue® immediately (→ page 236).
Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX km See Owner's Manual	* The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance after the remaining distance displayed has been covered.▶ Top up with AdBlue® immediately (→ page 236).
Top up AdBlue XX,X I Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km	* The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance from the speed displayed.After the remaining distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle.▶ Top up with at least the indicated amount of AdBlue® (→ page 236).

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Top up AdBlue XX,X I Switch vehicle on, wait 60 sec. or engine start not poss.

AdBlue system fault See Owner's Manual

AdBlue system malfunction Emergency op. in XXX km See Owner's Manual

* The AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the vehicle.

Top up with at least the indicated amount of AdBlue® (→ page 236).
Switch on the vehicle and wait for approximately 60 seconds.
Start the vehicle.

* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. Performance will be reduced once the remaining distance displayed has been covered.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

AdBlue system malfunction Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km

AdBlue system fault Engine start not possible

* Power restriction due to the AdBlue® system fault. After the distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. You can no longer start the vehicle.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Engine oil

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Add 1 litre engine oil when next refuelling	* The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
	NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
	Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
	When next refuelling, add 1 litre of engine oil (→ page 434).Notes on engine oil (→ page 503).
Engine oil level Reduce oil level	* The engine oil level is too high.
	NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil
	Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.
	Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced.
Engine oil level Stop Switch off the vehicle	* The engine oil level is too low.
	NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
	Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
	Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
	▶ Switch off the vehicle.▶ Add 1 l of engine oil (→ page 434).▶ Check the engine oil level.Notes on engine oil (→ page 503).
Engine oil pressure StopSwitch off the vehicle	* The oil pressure is too low.■ NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure▶ Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Switch off the vehicle.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Engine oil level cannot be measured	* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps

Overview of indicator and warning lamps

Some systems will perform a self-test when the vehicle is switched on. Some indicator and warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behaviour is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or flash after the vehicle has been started or during a journey.

Driver's display

Close-up of two car speed gauges showing 100 km/h and 200 km/h respectively, with no visible text or symbols on the gauges themselves.

Driver's display with driver camera

Digital dashboard display showing two circular gauges with speedometer readings, mounted on a black screen (no readable text or symbols)

Indicator and warning lamps

Occupant safety

Restraint system ( page 593)

Seat belt (→ page 593)

Drive system

Reduced power ( page 594)

System error ( page 594)

Electrical fault (→ page 594)

Vehicle

Trailer hitch (→ page 595)

Power steering (yellow) (→ page 595)

Power steering (red) (→ page 595)

Rear axle steering (yellow) (→ page 595)

Rear axle steering (red) (→ page 595)

Engine

Coolant temperature ( page 598)

Engine diagnostics ( page 598)

Vehicles with a petrol engine: engine operating temperature ( page 598)

700 Vehicles with a diesel engine: preglow

Electrical fault (→ page 598)

Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator ( page 598)

Brakes

Electric parking brake (yellow) (→ page 601)

(P) Electric parking brake (red) (→ page 601)

(1) Brakes (yellow) (→ page 601)

(1) Brakes (red) (→ page 601)

Driving and driving safety systems

ABS (→ page 604)

ESP ^® (→ page 604)

ESP ^® OFF ( page 604)

ATTENTION ASSIST ( page 604)

Distance warning (→ page 604)

Active Brake Assist (→ page 604)

Active Brake Assist (→ page 604)

Active Brake Assist (→ page 604)

AIRMATIC/E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL (→ page 604)

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ( page 608)

Tyre pressure monitoring system

Tyre pressure monitoring system ( page 609)

Exterior lighting

Parking lights (→ page 168)

Low beam ( page 168)

High beam (→ page 170)

Turn signal lights (→ page 170)

Rear fog light ( page 168)

Symbols on the central display

Drive Away Assist ( page 327)

Rear cross traffic warning ( page 328)

Manoeuvring brake function (→ page 329)

Occupant safety

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Restraint system warning lamp

* The restraint system red warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is on. The restraint system is malfunctioning ( page 44).

WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

▶ Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid:

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.

You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.

▶ Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

▶ After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

Drive on carefully.
Note the messages on the driver's display.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Seat belt warning lamp flashes	* The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.▶ Fasten your seat belt (→ page 44).There are objects on the front passenger seat.▶ Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.
Seat belt warning lamp lights up	* The red seat belt warning lamp lights up once the vehicle has started.In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound.The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.▶ Fasten your seat belt (→ page 44).If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.

Hybrid system

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Reduced-power warning lamp

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

System error warning lamp

Electrical fault warning lamp

* The red system error warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is in a state of operational readiness READY. There is a malfunction in the drive system.

Note the messages on the driver's display.

* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit. There is a fault with the electrics.

Note the messages on the driver's display.

Vehicle

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Trailer hitch warning lamp

* The red trailer hitch warning lamp is lit. The trailer hitch is not operational or is swivelling.

WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked

The trailer may become detached.

▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
▶ Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.
	▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.
	If the trailer hitch is swivelling:
	▶ Wait until the ball neck has reached the operational position.
Power steering warning lamp (yellow)	* The yellow power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
	▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.
Power steering warning lamp (red)	* The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
	⚠ WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
	If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
	▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
	▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Rear axle steering warning lamp (yellow)

Rear axle steering warning lamp (red)

* The yellow rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.

Note the messages on the driver's display.

* The red rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.

WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.

▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Note the messages on the driver's display.

Engine

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Coolant warning lamp (red)

* The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

Possible causes:

• The temperature sensor is malfunctioning
• The coolant level is too low
• The air supply to the radiator is obstructed
• The radiator fan is faulty
• The engine coolant pump is faulty

If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded 120^ C.

⚠ WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet

If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur:

• You may come into contact with hot gases.
- You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.
Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.
In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service.

▶ Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle. Do not continue driving.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale:▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the coolant temperature display is at the upper end of the temperature scale:▶ Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down.▶ Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.▶ Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120°C.
Coolant warning lamp (yellow)	* The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.Possible causes:• The temperature sensor is malfunctioning• The charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faulty• The radiator shutters are blocked or defective▶ Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Engine diagnostics warning lamp	* The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system.The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode.▶ Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank may have been run dry.▶ Start the engine three to four times after refuelling.If the yellow engine diagnosis warning lamp goes out, emergency operation mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked.
Electrical fault warning lamp	* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.There is a fault in the electrics.▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.
Engine operating temperature warning lamp	* Vehicles with a petrol engine: after a cold start, the blue engine operating temperature warning lamp is on.Engine output and engine torque are reduced.▶ Take this into consideration in your driving style.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up

* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.

Refuel.

Brakes

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red)

*The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit in the event of a malfunction. ▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.

Electric parking brake indicator lamp (yellow)

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Brakes warning lamp (yellow)	* The yellow brakes warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunctionIf the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
	The Hill Start Assist may be malfunctioning.▶ Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.▶ If the driver's display shows a display message, observe it.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Brakes warning lamp (red)	* The red brakes warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.Possible causes:• The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.• There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning

If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.

▶ Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving!
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level

If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.

▶ Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Do not top up the brake fluid.

Driving and driving safety systems

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
ABS warning lamp	* The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.ABS is malfunctioning.If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.
	⚠ WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioningThe wheels may lock during braking.The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
ESP® warning lamp flashes	* The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (→ page 264).▶ Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

ESP® warning lamp lights up

* The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP® is malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

Note the messages on the driver's display.

⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning

If ESP ^ is malfunctioning, ESP ^ cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

▶ Drive on carefully.
Have ESP ^® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

ESP ^® OFF warning lamp

* The yellow ESP ^ OFF warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP ^ is deactivated.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.

WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated

ESP ^® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited.

▶ Drive on carefully.
▶ Deactivate ESP ^® only for as long as the situation requires.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning.▶ Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
	▶ Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (→ page 264).
ATTENTION ASSIST warning lamp	* The ATTENTION ASSIST warning lamp is lit.ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning lamp for distance warning	* The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.▶ Be prepared to brake immediately.▶ Increase the distance.Function of Active Brake Assist (→ page 286).

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Active Brake Assist warning lamp	* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.Due to dirty sensors or a malfunction, the system is not available or the range of functions is restricted.► Note the messages on the driver's display.
Active Brake Assist warning lamp	* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.The system is switched off or the range of functions has been automatically restricted.This may be the case if the driver is not wearing a seat belt or another driving system has been activated.► Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (→ page 286).
Active Brake Assist warning lamp	* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.After you drive off, the system's range of functions will be restricted due to the teach-in process.Depending on the ambient conditions, the teach-in process may take a few minutes.► Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (→ page 286).
Suspension warning lamp (yellow)	* The yellow AIRMATIC / E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit.A fault has occurred in AIRMATIC / E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL.► Note the messages on the driver's display.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Suspension warning lamp (red)

* The red AIRMATIC / E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit. A fault has occurred in AIRMATIC / E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL.

NOTE The vehicle's driving characteristics will have changed significantly.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Note the messages on the driver's display.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system warning lamp

*The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tyre pressure monitor

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes

*The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.

WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning

The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres.

Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.

▶ Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up

*The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.

The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.

WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure

• The tyres can burst.
• The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
• The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle.

▶ Observe the recommended tyre pressures.

Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

▶ Observe the recommended tyre pressures. ▶ Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
▶ Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.

1, 2, 3 ...

3D driver's display, 3D instrument cluster Function/notes.... 343

4MATIC....231

48 V on-board electrical system Displays in the driver's display.... 350 Operating safety..... 26

A

A/C function Switching on/off (MBUX).... 191

ABS.... 264

Acceleration Kickdown.... 230 Optimised acceleration.... 211

Accelerator pedal 223

Accident ERA-GLONASS test mode.... 420

Accident prevention.... 327

Accident, emergency call.... 416

Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal.... 86

Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating.... 298
Brake application.... 297
Exit warning.... 295
Function.... 295
Trailer operation.... 297

Active bonnet.... 431

Active Brake Assist

Function.... 286
Setting.... 290

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Activate/deactivate variable limiter..... 275

Activating/deactivating.... 275

Active Emergency Stop Assist...... 282

Active Lane Change Assist.... 284

Calling up a speed.... 275

Function 272

Increasing/decreasing the speed...... 275

Route-based speed adaptation.... 278

Storing a speed.... 275

Active Emergency Stop Assist.... 282

Active headlamps.... 171

Active Lane Change Assist

Activating/deactivating.... 286

Function.... 284

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating.... 301

Function.... 298

Setting the sensitivity.... 301

Trailer operation.... 298

Active light function.... 171

Active Parking Assist

Automatic braking function.... 323

Cross traffic warning.... 328

Drive Away Assist.... 327

Exiting a parking space.... 321

Function 318

Manoeuvering brake function.... 329

Memory Parking Assist.... 330

Parking 320

Pausing.... 322

Remote Parking Assist.... 323

Active Service System PLUS.... 429

Active Speed Limit Assist.... 277

Active Steering Assist

Activating/deactivating.... 282

Active Emergency Stop Assist...... 282

Active Lane Change Assist.... 284

Function.... 280

Active Stop-and-Go Assist.... 280

Adaptive brake lights.... 268

Adaptive cruise control.... 278

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Switching on/off.... 176

AdBlue® Additives....502 Capacity....503 Notes....236 Purity....502 Topping up....236

Additional door lock.... 89

Additives AdBlue ^® 236, 502 Engine oil 503 Fuel 500

After-sales service.... 429

Air conditioning menu Air distribution....191 Calling up....190 Climate control....191 Footwell temperature....192

Fragrance system.... 194

Front air conditioning.... 190

Ionisation.... 193

Rear compartment climate control..... 192

Stationary heater/ventilation.... 201

Air distribution Setting.... 188, 191 Air freshener system.... 194

Air inlet 437

Air pressure.... 474

Air suspension.... 301

Air vents Glove box.... 203 Setting.... 201

Air/water duct.... 437

Airbag Belt airbag....59 Centre airbag (driver's backrest)....60 Cushionbag....60 Front airbag....60 Inflating....53 Overview....60 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps....46

Rear airbag....60

REAR SEAT AIRBAG indicator lamps..... 48

Warning lamp 44

Airflow Setting.... 188

AIRMATIC Setting the vehicle level.... 302 Vehicle levels.... 301

Alarm system.... 113

All-wheel drive.... 231

Alternative route.... 396

Ambient lighting.... 178

AMG TRACK PACE Configuring....389 Drag Race....388 Function....386 Telemetry display....389 Track Race....386

Animals....55

Anti-lock braking system.... 264

Anti-theft alarm system.... 113

Anti-theft protection

Additional door lock.... 89

Immobiliser.... 113

Anticipatory operating-mode strategy,

Route-based 222

Apps, Mercedes me

Mercedes me calls.... 406

Mercedes me connect.... 410

Assembly licence plate, front.... 30

Assistance system.... 263

ASSYST PLUS

Battery disconnection periods.... 430

Service interval display.... 429

Service requirements.... 429

ATA

Deactivating the alarm.... 114

Function.... 113

Interior protection.... 115

Interior protection function.... 114

Tow-away protection.... 114

Tow-away protection function.... 114

ATTENTION ASSIST

Function.... 269

Setting.... 270

Attention assistant.... 269

Augmented reality

Head-up display.... 347

Authorised workshop.... 35

Automatic adjustment of the lateral sup-

port....135

Automatic car wash 437

Automatic car wash mode.... 439

Automatic climate control.... 191

Automatic co-driver airbag shutoff

Function.... 49

Automatic distance control.... 272

Automatic driving lights.... 169

Automatic emergency call.... 417

Automatic engine start/stop.... 216

Automatic front passenger airbag shutoff

Information (child restraint system on

the front passenger seat).... 68

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps..... 46

Automatic measures after an accident.... 53

Automatic mirror folding function.... 186

Automatic seat adjustment.... 134

Automatic transmission

DIRECT SELECT lever.... 227

Drive programs.... 223

DYNAMIC SELECT button.... 223

Engages neutral.... 228

Engaging drive position.... 229

Engaging reverse gear 228

Gear shift.... 227

Kickdown 230

Manual shifting.... 229

Oil temperature (driver's display)...... 345

Selecting park position.... 228

Steering wheel gearshift paddles...... 229

Transmission position display.... 227

Transmission positions.... 227

Autonomous braking.... 286

Axle load

Trailer operation.... 511

B

Back seat.... 122

Bad weather light.... 173

Bag hook.... 154

Ball neck

Extending/retracting.... 334

Extending/retracting (MBUX multimedia system).... 336

Trailer coupling.... 337

BAS....264

Basic information.... 41

Battery

High-voltage battery 456

Battery (12 V battery)

Charging.... 459

Notes...... 453

Notes (starting assistance and charging).... 457

Replacing.... 460

Starting assistance.... 459

Battery (48 V)

Notes 455

Battery (high-voltage on-board electrical

system)....508

Battery (key) 87

Battery (starter battery)

Charging via Remote Online.... 209

Battery operation.... 204

Belt

Adjusting the height.... 44

Fastening.... 44

Notes on wearing correctly.... 43

Releasing.... 59

Belt airbag

Function.... 59

Inflating.... 53

Straightening out a seat belt strap.... 59

Bicycle rack

Load capacity.... 510

Trailer operation.... 339

Blind Spot Assist.... 297

BlueTec

AdBlue ^® 236

Bluetooth®

Connecting a mobile phone.... 405

Bonnet

Active bonnet.... 431

Opening/closing 432

Boost pressure, current (driver's display)..... 345

Boot

Adjusting the EASY-PACK comfort box.... 155

Installing/removing the EASY-PACK

comfort box.... 157

Boot lid

Closing....97

HANDS-FREE ACCESS.... 100

Limiter....102

Opening....96

Opening dimensions.... 507

Power closing function.... 97

Switching the separate locking fea-

ture on/off.... 101

Unlocking with emergency key...... 102

Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist 286

Brake Assist System 264

Brake Assist System.... 264

Brake disks.... 210

Brake fluid.... 505

Brake force distribution.... 266

Brake lamps

Adaptive brake lights.... 268

Brake pads.... 210

Brakes

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)...... 264

Active Brake Assist.... 286

Adaptive brake lights.... 268

BAS (Brake Assist System).... 264

Driving tips.... 212

EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution).... 266

Electric parking brake..... 257, 258, 259

Handbrake.... 257, 258, 259

HOLD function.... 267

Limited braking effect (salt-treated roads).... 212

New/replaced brake pads/brake discs.. 210

Parking brake.... 257, 258, 259

Post-collision brake.... 53

Recuperation.... 219

Running-in notes.... 210

Braking assistance

Brake Assist System.... 264

Breakdown

Flat tyre.... 448

Overview of aids.... 20

Tow-starting....468

Towing methods.... 463

Transporting the vehicle.... 464

Wheel change.... 482

C

Calling the customer centre for

Mercedes-Benz 406

Calls

Mercedes me.... 405

Telephone menu 405

Using overhead control panel.... 405

Camera

360° camera.... 308

Activating using GPS (reversing cam-

era) 314

Button.... 313

Cleaning.... 442

Driver camera.... 375

Function 308

Information 262

Manage activation points.... 314

Opening the camera cover (reversing

camera).... 314

Reversing camera.... 306

ROAD SURFACE SCAN.... 304

Selecting the view.... 313

Car key 85

Car wash

Automatic car wash.... 437

High-pressure cleaner.... 439

Washing by hand.... 440

Car-to-X-Communication

Display on map.... 398

Care

Air/water duct.... 437

Automatic car wash.... 437

Camera 442

Car parts.... 442

Decorative foil.... 441

Display 443

Exterior lighting.... 442

Head-up display.... 443

High-pressure cleaner.... 439

Paint 440

Plastic trim.... 443

Real wood/trim elements.... 443

Roof lining.... 443

Seat belt.... 443

Steering wheel 443

Trailer hitch.... 442

Vehicle interior.... 443

Vehicle socket for the high-voltage battery.... 442

Washing by hand.... 440

Wheels/rims 442

Caring for plastic trim.... 443

Caring for rims.... 442

Caring for the roof lining.... 443

Caring for the steering wheel.... 443

Carrier.... 147

Central display Operating.... 367

Central locking system Button....90 Key....86

Centre airbag (driver, front passenger) Inflating....53

Centre airbag (driver's backrest).... 60

Centre airbag (driver's seat backrest) Information...... 60

Charge level display.... 255

Charge level/charge display.... 255

Charging 12 V battery.... 459

At time of departure.... 391

Charge level display.... 255

Charging cable control panel.... 244

Charging station, mode 3.... 242

Configuring weekly profile.... 391

Ending the charging process (alternating current, mode 2/3).... 250

Ending the charging process (direct current, mode 4).... 254

Indicator lamps on vehicle socket...... 246

Mains socket, mode 2.... 241

Maximum charging current (mains socket).... 244

Notes on charging the high-voltage battery.... 238

Notes on the high-voltage battery..... 456

Rapid charging station, mode 4.... 243

Starting the charging process (alternating current, mode 2/3).... 247

Starting the charging process (direct current, mode 4).... 252

Stowing the charging cable.... 241

USB port.... 149, 161

Wallbox, mode 3.... 242

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone...... 164

Charging cable Control panel....244 Stowing....241

Charging settings.... 391

Chauffeur mode Folding the head restraint down or into position.... 127

Moving the front passenger seat into the chauffeur position.... 125

Moving the front passenger seat into the normal position.... 129

Overview.... 124

Checking the coolant level.... 436

Child safety lock Rear door....82 Side window (rear)....84

Child seat Adjusting the vehicle seat.... 78 Approval categories.... 71 Basic instructions.... 64 Brief overview of most important points... 63

Fitting ISOFIX/i-Size.... 80

Front passenger seat.... 68

Notes on the belt airbag.... 71

Overview of warning stickers.... 67

Rear airbag....70

Rearward-facing....71

Recommendations for child restraint systems.... 73

Risks/dangers.... 65

Seats suitable for belt-secured child restraint systems.... 76

Seats suitable for i-Size child restraint systems....76

Seats suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems.... 74

Securing to the front passenger seat with the seat belt.... 82

Securing to the rear seat with the seatbelt....82

Top Tether....81

Without automatic co-driver airbag sh utoff....70

Children

Avoiding dangers in the vehicle.... 65

Basic instructions.... 64

Chock.... 481, 482

City lighting.... 173

Clean varnish.... 440

Cleaning

Air/water duct.... 437

Automatic car wash.... 437

Car parts.... 442

Decorative foil.... 441

High-pressure cleaner.... 439

Paint 440

Real wood/trim elements.... 443

Sensors.... 442

Vehicle interior 443

Vehicle socket for the high-voltage

battery....442

Washing by hand 440

Cleaning carpets.... 443

Cleaning seat covers.... 443

Climate control

Activating/deactivating.... 190

Activating/deactivating (rear operat-

ing unit)....190

Air conditioning menu.... 190

Air distribution.... 188

Air vents (front).... 201

Air vents (rear).... 202

Airflow.... 188

Automatic control.... 191

Defrosting the windscreen.... 191

Demisting the windscreen.... 188

Demisting windows.... 192

Fine particle status display.... 190

Fragrance system.... 194

Glove box air vent.... 203

Immediate pre-entry climate control..... 199

Inserting/removing the flacon (fragrance system).... 194

Ionisation.... 193

Notes.... 188

Operating unit.... 188

Pre-entry climate control for departure time.... 197

Pre-entry climate control when the vehicle is unlocked.... 196

Rear operating unit.... 18, 189

Rear window heater.... 188

Residual heat.... 193

Setting.... 190

Stationary heater/ventilation.... 200

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off.... 193
Switching the A/C function on/off (MBUX).... 191
Synchronisation function.... 192
Temperature....188
Ventilation with comfort opening...... 104
Windscreen heater.... 195

Co-driver airbag shutoff, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF.... 49

COC papers, Certificate of conformity...... 489

Cockpit Dashboard overview.... 6, 8

Collision detection (parked vehicle) Setting.... 259, 260

Combination switch Lights.... 170 Windscreen wipers.... 180

Commuter route.... 396

Components subject to radio regulations Declaration of conformity.... 30

Content sharing menu.... 366

Control elements: 25

Convenience closing.... 105
Convenience opening.... 104
Coolant Notes...... 505
Cooling....188
Copyright.... 40
Cornering light.... 172
Correct use.... 35
Cover.... 106
Cross traffic (warning) 328
Crosswind Assist.... 265
Cushionbag, Reclining rear seat Information....60
Cushionbag (reclining rear seat) Inflating....53

D

Damage Limited protection.... 55
Damping system ADS PLUS AIRMATIC.... 301 E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL.... 303

Setting the vehicle level.... 302
Dashboard Cockpit overview.... 6, 8
Dashcam Notes......400 Selecting a USB device......401 Starting/stopping a video recording......401
Data processing in the vehicle.... 37
Data protection rights.... 40
Data storage Data protection rights....40 Electronic control units....37 Online services....39
Deactivating the alarm.... 114
Dealership.... 35
Declaration of conformity Components subject to radio regulations....30 Electromagnetic compatibility....30 Jack....32 TIREFIT kit....33
Decorative foil.... 441
Defrost function.... 191

DeNOx agent

AdBlue ^® 236

Deployed components

Limited protection.... 55

Deployment situations.... 53

Destination entry.... 394

Detecting inattentiveness.... 269

Diagnostics connection.... 34

Diesel

Low outside temperatures.... 500

Notes....500

DIGITAL LIGHT

Activating/deactivating.... 174

Active headlamps.... 171

Assistance functions.... 173

Bad weather light.... 173

City lighting.... 173

Cornering light.... 172

Enhanced fog light function.... 172

Intelligent Light System.... 171

Motorway mode.... 172

Overview.... 171

Topographical compensation.... 173

Digital Owner's Manual.... 22

Direct commands

Voice commands for MBUX voice assistant.... 358

DIRECT SELECT lever

Automatic transmission.... 227

Engages neutral.... 228

Engaging drive position.... 229

Engaging park position automatically..... 228

Engaging reverse gear.... 228

Function.... 227

Gearshift recommendation.... 230

Manual gearshifting.... 229

Selecting park position.... 228

Display

Care.... 443

Display (driver's display)

Overview of displays.... 350

Display (MBUX multimedia system)

Settings.... 349

Display message

Calling up on driver display.... 512

Notes.... 512

Display messages

--- km/h 564

LIM --- km/h 559

12 V on-board electrical sys

48 V battery See Owner's Man-

ual....581

(ArcoFF) Acoustic presence indicator

inoperative.... 525

AdBlue system fault Engine

start not possible 588

AdBlue system fault See Own-

er's Manual...... 587

AdBlue system malfunction

Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not

poss. in XXX km.... 588

AdBlue system malfunction

Emergency op. in XXX km See Own-

er's Manual.... 587

Add 1 litre engine oil when next refuelling....589
ATTENTION ASSIST Microsleep Take a break!...... 559
ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break! 558
Automatic driving lights inoper- ative.... 520
Battery overheated Stop, everybody out! Outdoors if possible 527, 580
Beginning emergency stop.... 568 Bonnet not locked Close before starting journey.... 540
Bonnet unlatched Pull lever again to open.... 540
(1) Brake immediately.... 553 camera view restricted See
Owner's Manual 573
Change key batteries.... 517

Charger cable connected.... 525
Check brake fluid level.... 554
Check tyre(s) 583
Clean the fuel filter 545
Compressor is cooling.... 562
Coolant Stop Switch off the vehicle....544
Currently unavailable Battery low.... 523
Currently unavailable Charge high-voltage battery.... 524
Currently unavailable High-voltage battery charging incomplete.... 523
Currently unavailable Refuel...... 523
currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 555
currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 556
Engine oil level cannot be measured.... 590

Engine oil level Reduce oil level.... 589
Engine oil level Stop Switch off the vehicle.... 589
Engine oil pressure Stop Switch off the vehicle.... 590
Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h 560, 563
Fault Stop.... 564
Front left malfunction Consult workshop (example).... 514
Fuel tank is depressurised Ready for refuelling.... 532
Have high-voltage system checked See Owner's Manual.... 528
inoperative See Owner's Man..... 522
inoperative See Owner's Manual.. 556
inoperative See Owner's Manual.. 557
EBD inoperative See Owner's Manual.. 558
SOS Inoperative.... 577

Intensive cleaning activated for 30 s....542
Key being taught in Please wait.... 519
Key not detected (red display message).... 518
Key not detected (white display message).... 518
Left low beam (example).... 519
Left window airbag malfunction Consult workshop (example).... 515
Malfunction See Owner's Manual.... 520
(1) Malfunction See Owner's Manual.... 554
(1) Malfunction Stop vehicle.... 554
Malfunction Visit workshop...... 528
Malfunction.... 530
Malfunction.... 528
Max. speed 20km/h....562
120km/h! Maximum speed exceeded.... 560

Off 565
HOLD Off 558
Operation only possible in transmission position P.... 534
Output and range reduced See Owner's Manual.... 529
(P) Parking brake See Owner's Manual.... 550
(P) Parking brake Switch on vehicle to release.... 553
LIM passive.... 559
Performance severely limited.... 531 Please wait 48 V battery charging.... 581
Please wait Depressurising fuel tank.... 532
Pre-entry climate control via key available again after starting vehicle.... 524

Pre-entry climate control via key currently unavailable. High-voltage battery low.... 524

Rear axle steering currently malfunctioning.... 538

Rear axle steering Malfunction Stop immediately.... 539

Rear axle steering Malfunction Visit workshop.... 538

Rectify tyre pressure.... 584

Reduce speed.... 585

Refill AdBlue See Owner's Manual....586

(P) Release parking brake.... 553

Replace air filter.... 545

Replace key.... 517

Reserve fuel level 545

Restraint system malfunction Consult workshop.... 513

Restricted during trailer operation.... 574

Start the vehicle to charge the 12 V battery....579

Steering malfunction Drive carefully Visit workshop.... 537

Steering malfunction Increased physical effort See Owner's Manual..... 537

Steering malfunction Stop immediately See Owner's Manual.... 538

Stop immediately Close bonnet completely.... 541

Stop Switch off the vehicle.... 531

Stop vehicle Leave vehicle on to charge the 12 V battery.... 580

STOP Vehicle level too low.... 561

Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual 579

Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual 580

suspended.... 565

Switch off lights.... 520

Switch on headlamps.... 520

temporarily unavailable Sensors dirty.... 572

Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX km See Owner's Manual.... 586

Top up AdBlue XX,X I Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km....586

Top up AdBlue XX,X I Switch vehicle on, wait 60 sec. or engine start not poss.... 587

Top up coolant See Owner's Manual.... 543

Top up washer fluid.... 542

Towing not permitted See Owner's Manual.... 525

Trailer coupling Check lock (white display message).... 535

Trailer coupling in motion.... 534

Tyre(s) overheated.... 585

Vehicle is operational Switch off vehicle before exiting.... 534

Vehicle rising Please wait...... 562

Warning tyre malfunction...... 584

Wheel sensor(s) missing.... 583 "Electric" drive program currently unavailable.... 527

AC charging inoperative Consult workshop.... 526

Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 570

Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative...... 571

Active Blind Spot Assist unavailable when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual.... 571

Active bonnet malfunction See Owner's Manual....539

Index 623

Active Brake Assist Functions currently limited See Owner's Manual.... 566
Active Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual.... 566
Active Distance Assist available again..... 566
Active Distance Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 565
Active Distance Assist inoperative...... 565
Active Emergency Stop Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual... 568
Active Emergency Stop Assist inoper- ative.... 569
Active Lane Change Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 569
Active Lane Change Assist inoperative... 569
Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 571
Active Lane Keeping Assist functions restricted See Owner's Manual.... 572
Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative... 571

Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual....576
Active Steering Assist currently unavailable due to multiple emergency stops.... 568
Active Steering Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 567
Active Steering Assist inoperative.... 567
Active Stop-and-Go Assist currently unavailable see Owner's Manual.... 570
Active Stop-and-Go Assist inoperative See Owner's Manual.... 570
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus currently unavailable See Owner's Manual... 521
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inoperative....522
Ambient light warning support inoper- ative.... 539

Apply brake and start vehicle to shift out of P or N.... 546
Apply brake to deselect P position.... 546
Apply brake to engage D or R...... 546
Apply brake to engage R.... 546
Apply parking brake to park Visit workshop.... 546
Auxiliary battery malfunction (red display message).... 550
Auxiliary battery malfunction (white display message).... 549
Cannot start vehicle See Owner's Manual.... 529, 577, 581
Change steering wheel/ seat position until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge of the screen....575
Charging fault Please change charging method See Owner's Manual.... 526
Check brake pads See Owner's Manual....555

Check low beam setting (left/right-side traffic).... 521
Consult workshop without changing the transmission position.... 528, 548
Consult workshop without starting the vehicle again.... 529
DC charging inoperative Consult workshop.... 526
DIGITAL LIGHT Functions limited.... 521
Drive malfunction Achievable speed limited Stop soon.... 530
Drive malfunction Achievable speed severely limited See Owner's Manual..... 530
Drive malfunction Stop Consult work- shop....549
Drive malfunction Stop Restart vehicle... 549
Drive overheated. Drive on with care..... 549
Driver camera inoperative See Owner's Manual.... 575

Driver camera view currently restricted See Owner's Manual.... 574
Front passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual.... 515
Front passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual.... 516
Hazard warning lamp system Malfunction....522
Head-up display Brightness currently reduced See Owner's Manual.... 537
Head-up display currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 536
Head-up display inoperative.... 536 High-voltage battery malfunction.
Consult workshop without starting the vehicle again.... 532
High-voltage battery malfunction. No start in approx. XXX km Consult workshop (red display message).... 532

High-voltage battery malfunction. No start in approx. XXX km Consult workshop (yellow display message).... 531

Limited availability of Active Parking Assist manoeuvring assistant See

Owner's Manual.... 577

Limiter inoperative.... 559

Low beam setting (left/right-side traffic) Manual adjustment only.... 521

MULTIBEAM LED Functions limited..... 521

N automatically activated Please engage transmission position again..... 548

Not possible to unlock charging cable See Owner's Manual.... 525

Only electric drive available Power limited....526

Only select P when vehicle is stationary.... 545

Index 625

PARKTRONIC and manoeuvring assistant unavailable at rear when towing a trailer....576
PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual.... 576
Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual.... 519
Please teach in trailer coupling again using the button in load compartment Wait for it to extend/retract.... 536
Possible to start the vehicle again.... 582 PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual.... 575
PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual....575
PRE-SAFE PLUS inoperative See Owner's Manual....575
Preparing drive system.... 527

Push rear left seat belt extender back manually See Owner's Manual (example)....515
Reduced drive system performance See Owner's Manual.... 527
Reversing not poss. Consult workshop... 548 Risk of vehicle rolling away Apply parking brake to park.... 547
Risk of vehicle rolling away Driver's door open Transmission not in P.... 547
Risk of vehicle rolling away N activated manually No automatic switch to P... 547
Snow chain mode Maximum speed exceeded.... 539
Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h..... 559
To switch off the vehicle, press the Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or 3 times....543
Traffic Sign Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 560

Traffic Sign Assist inoperative.... 560
Transmission Malfunction Stop...... 548
Tyre press. monitor currently unavailable....582
Tyre press. monitor inoperative.... 582
Tyre pressure monitor inoperative No tyre pressure sensors.... 583
Vehicle not currently being charged Charging station fault.... 526
Wiper Malfunction.... 542

Displaying road names/house numbers..... 396

Distance control.... 272

Distance warning.... 286

DISTRONIC....272

Door Additional door lock.... 89

Child safety lock (rear door).... 82

Emergency key.... 94

Opening (from the inside).... 90

Power closing function.... 94

recessed door handles.... 91

Unlocking (inside).... 90

Door control panel

Seat operation.... 16

Door control panel (rear).... 18

Door handles

Extending/retracting.... 91

Drag Race, Drag race.... 388

Drinks holder, Cup holder.... 159

Drive Away Assist.... 327

Drive position.... 229

Drive program display.... 225

Drive programs

Selecting.... 225

Driver camera

Activating/deactivating.... 376

Function 375

Driver's display

48 V on-board electrical system.... 350

Head-up display.... 345

Menus.... 344

Notes 343

Operating.... 343

Adjusting electrically.... 117

Easy entry and exit feature.... 140

Seat heating.... 136

Driving abroad

Light adjustment low beam.... 168

Driving safety system

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)...... 264

Active Brake Assist.... 286

Adaptive brake lights.... 268

ATTENTION ASSIST...... 269

BAS (Brake Assist System).... 264

Blind Spot Assist/Active Blind Spot

Assist.... 295

Cameras.... 262

EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribu-

tion)....266

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)...... 264

Hill Start Assist.... 268

HOLD function.... 267

Overview 263

Radar and ultrasonic sensors.... 262

STEER CONTROL.... 266

Traffic Sign Assist.... 291

Your responsibility.... 261

Driving system.... 263

Driving tips

General driving tips.... 212

Light adjustment when driving abroad.... 168

Optimised acceleration.... 211

Rear axle steering.... 215

Recuperation.... 219

Running-in notes.... 210

Drowsiness detection.... 269

Duplicate key.... 89

Dynamic handling control system.... 264

DYNAMIC SELECT

Calling up the fuel consumption indi-

cator....227

Configuring drive program I.... 225

Displaying engine data.... 226

Displaying vehicle data.... 226

Drive program display.... 225

Drive programs.... 223

Function 223

Selecting the drive program.... 225

E

E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL

Electrohydraulic suspension.... 303

ROAD SURFACE SCAN.... 304

Setting the vehicle level.... 305

Suspension.... 303

Vehicle levels.... 303

E-mails.... 357

E10....499

Easy entry feature

Setting.... 142

Easy exit feature

Setting.... 142

EASY-PACK boot box

Adjusting.... 155

Care.... 443

Installing/removing.... 157

EBD, Electronic Brakeforce Distribution..... 266

ECO Assist

48 V on-board electrical system..... 218

Activating/deactivating.... 222

Plug-in hybrid.... 220

ECO display.... 217

ECO start/stop button

Automatic engine start/stop.... 217

ECO start/stop function

Automatic engine start.... 216

Automatic engine stop.... 216

Function.... 216

Switching off/on.... 217

Electric drive.... 204

Electric parking brake

Applying automatically.... 257

Emergency braking.... 259

Manually applying/releasing.... 259

Releasing automatically.... 258

Electrical fuses.... 468

Electrohydraulic chassis.... 303

Electrohydraulic suspension.... 303

Electromagnetic compatibility

Declaration of conformity.... 30

Electronic Stability Program.... 264

Emergency

Fire extinguisher.... 447

First-aid kit (soft sided).... 447

Overview of aids.... 20

Safety vest.... 446

Warning triangle.... 447

Emergency braking

Active Brake Assist.... 286

Brake Assist System.... 264

Carrying out.... 259

Electric parking brake/handbrake..... 257

Emergency call

Automatic.... 417

Manual.... 417

Emergency call system

Mercedes me connect.... 416

Emergency key

Boot lid.... 102

Door....94

Inserting/removing.... 87

Emergency operation mode

Start the vehicle.... 209

Emergency shutoff (high-voltage on-board

electrical system).... 206

Emergency stop assistant.... 282

Energy flow display.... 392

Engine

Emergency operation mode.... 209

Engine number 496

Starting assistance.... 457

switching off (start/stop button)...... 255

Tow-starting.... 468

Engine data

Displaying.... 226

DYNAMIC SELECT.... 226

Engine electronics..

Engine number...... 496

Engine oil

Additives.... 503

Capacity.... 504

Checking the oil level using the driver

display.... 434

MB-Freigabe / MB-Approval.... 504

Quality.... 504

Temperature (driver's display)...... 345

Topping up.... 434

Engine oil temperature (driver's display)..... 345

Engine output, current (driver's display)...... 345

Engine starting

Remote Online.... 210

Start/stop button.... 208

Environmentally friendly driving.... 23

ERA-GLONASS test mode.... 420

ESC, Electronic Stability Control.... 264

ESP®

Activating/deactivating.... 266

Crosswind Assist.... 265

Function.... 264

Trailer stabilisation.... 266

EU type approval number.... 496

Exhaust gas aftertreatment, diesel engine.... 502

Exit warning

MBUX Interior Assistant.... 372

Exiting a parking space

Active Parking Assist.... 318

Drive Away Assist.... 327

PARKTRONIC.... 314

Exterior lighting

Care.... 442

Light adjustment when driving abroad.... 168

F

Factory settings

MBUX reset function.... 385

Fatigue detection.... 269

Fault message

Driver's display.... 512

Favourites.... 378

Fine particle status display.... 190

Fire extinguisher.... 447

First aid

First-aid kit (soft sided)...... 447

Fitting

Snow chains.... 473

Tyres/wheels 486

Fitting accessories

Limited protection.... 55

Fitting the licence plate (front).... 30

Flacon.... 194

Flat towing

Pulling/towing.... 342

Flat tyre

MOExtended.... 448

Notes 448

TREFIT kit.... 449

Wheel change.... 482

Floor mats.... 167

Fog light (extended range).... 172

Foil covering

On camera/sensors.... 262

Radar and ultrasonic sensors.... 262

Folding table.... 150

Footrest

Rear front passenger seat.... 127

Footwell temperature.... 192

Fragrance.... 194

Fragrance system

Activating/deactivating.... 194

Inserting/removing the flacon.... 194

Perfume vial.... 194

Setting.... 194

Free software.... 40

Frequencies

Mobile phone 490

Two-way radio.... 490

Front airbag

Inflating.... 53

Front headlamps.... 168

Front passenger airbag

Disabling/enabling.... 47

Front passenger airbag shutoff

Information (child restraint system on the front passenger seat).... 68

Front passenger seat

Adjusting electrically.... 117

Adjusting from driver's seat.... 119

Adjusting from the rear.... 120

Folding the head restraint down or into position (chauffeur mode).... 127

Fuel

Additives.... 500

Depressurising the fuel tank (plug-in hybrid with petrol engine).... 235

Diesel.... 500

Diesel quality.... 500

E10 499

Low outside temperatures.... 500

Petrol....499

Petrol quality.... 499

Refilling 231

Reserve....502

Sulphur content.... 499

Tank content 502

Fuel consumption indicator.... 227

Fuel reserve.... 502

Fully reclined position.... 124

Function in the event of an accident.... 54

Function seat.... 16

Function seat (rear).... 18

Fuses

Boot.... 472

Cockpit 471

Engine compartment...... 469

Front passenger footwell.... 471

Fuse assignment diagram.... 468

Notes 468

G

G-meter, Accelerometer.... 345

Gearshift

DIRECT SELECT lever.... 227

Manual.... 229

Gearshift paddles

Steering wheel gearshift paddles.... 229

General driving tips.... 212

Genuine parts.... 24

Glide mode.... 230

Glove box

Air vent....203

Glove compartment

Locking/unlocking.... 150

Grab handles

Notes.... 116

Gross mass.... 496

H

Handbrake.... 257

Handling characteristics

Unusual.... 473

HANDS-FREE ACCESS.... 100

Handset.... 151

Haptic accelerator pedal, Pressure point..... 223

Hazard warning lights.... 171

Hazard warnings

Car-to-X-Communication.... 398

Head restraint

Adjusting (rear).... 131

Attaching/removing the additional cushion (front).... 130

Attaching/removing the additional cushion (rear).... 132

Chauffeur mode (front passenger side)... 127

Folding into position/folding back manually (rear).... 133

lowering/folding into place from the front (rear).... 131

Luxury head restraint (front).... 130

Luxury head restraint (rear).... 131

Neck warmer.... 132

Head-up display

Augmented reality.... 347

Care.... 443

Function.... 345

Memory function.... 143

Operating.... 348

Selecting (with augmented reality)...... 349

Switching on/off.... 349

Headlamp flashing.... 170

Headlamp range control.... 173

Headlamps.... 168

Heating

Activating/deactivating.... 190

Centre console.... 189

Climate control.... 188

Panel heating.... 138

Rear window.... 188

Seat 136

Stationary heater.... 200

Steering wheel 140

Windscreen.... 195

Help call

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system.. 416

High beam, Adaptive Highbeam Assist...... 170

High-pressure cleaner.... 439

High-voltage battery

Charge level display.... 255

Charging at time of departure.... 391

Charging cable control panel 244

Charging duration.... 508

Charging station, mode 3.... 242

Configuring weekly profile.... 391

Connection types.... 508

Ending the charging process (alternating current, mode 2/3).... 250

Ending the charging process (direct current, mode 4).... 254

Energy flow display.... 392 General notes on charging.... 238

Mains socket, mode 2.... 241

Maximum charging current (mains socket).... 244

Notes.... 456 Range.... 508

Rapid charging station, mode 4.... 243

Starting the charging process (alternating current, mode 2/3).... 247

Starting the charging process (direct current, mode 4).... 252

Stowing the charging cable.... 241

Type 508

Voltage types.... 508

Wallbox, mode 3.... 242

High-voltage on-board electrical system

Indicator lamps on vehicle socket...... 246

Manual switch-off.... 206

Operating safety.... 26

Hill Start Assist.... 268

HOLD function Function...... 267

Switching on/off.... 267

Home screen Central display.... 366

Household socket.... 160

|

i-Size child restraint system Fitting....80 Suitable seats....76

Identification plate Engine....496 Vehicle....496

Immediate pre-entry climate control.... 199

Immobiliser.... 113

Implied warranty.... 37

Importer information Regulatory radio information...... 495

In-Car Office 412

Incorrect behaviour by vehicle occupants Limited protection.... 55

Indicator lamps/warning lamps PASSENGER AIR BAG.... 46

Indicator/warning lamps.... 591

Individual drive program Configuring.... 225

Inside rearview mirror.... 185

Intelligent Light System Activating/deactivating....174 Active headlamps....171 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus....175 Assistance functions....173 Bad weather light....173 City lighting....173 Cornering light....172 Enhanced fog light function....172 Motorway mode....172 Overview....171 Topographical compensation....173

Interior lighting Ambient lighting.... 178 MBUX reading light.... 373 Setting.... 177

Switch-off delay time.... 179

Interior protection.... 115

Internet

Mercedes me connect.... 410

Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot.... 383

Web browsers.... 413

Ionisation.... 193

ISOFIX child restraint system

Fitting....80

Suitable seats.... 74

J

Jack

Declaration of conformity.... 32

Storage location.... 481, 482

Jump-start connection.... 459

K

Key

acoustic locking verification signal...... 86

Battery....87

Deactivating a function.... 87

Emergency key 87

Energy consumption...... 87

Function.... 85

Key ring attachment.... 87

Problem....89

Replacement key 89

Unlocking setting.... 86

KEYLESS-GO

Deactivating....87

Locking/unlocking the vehicle.... 91

Problem....93

Unlocking setting.... 86

Kickdown 230

Knee airbag....60

L

Lane Change Assistant.... 284

Lane Keeping Assist.... 298

Lane recognition

Active Lane Change Assist.... 284

Lane recognition (automatic)

Active Lane Keeping Assist.... 298

Lane scan.... 304

Language

Notes.... 385

Setting.... 385

Level control

AIRMATIC....301

E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL.... 303

Light adjustment

Driving abroad.... 168

Light switch.... 168

Lighting

Intelligent Light System.... 171

Interior lighting.... 177

Lights

Active headlamps.... 171

Adaptive brake lights.... 268

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus.... 175

Assistance functions.... 173

Automatic driving lights.... 169

Bad weather light.... 173

City lighting.... 173

Combination switch.... 170

Cornering light.... 172

DIGITAL LIGHT.... 171

Fog light (extended range).... 172

Hazard warning lights.... 171

High beam.... 170

Intelligent Light System.... 171

Interior lighting.... 177

Light adjustment when driving abroad.... 168

Locator lighting.... 177

Motorway mode.... 172

Reading lamp.... 177

Rear fog light.... 169

Responsibility for lighting systems...... 168

Switch-off delay time.... 177

Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off.... 174

Topographical compensation.... 173

Turn signal light.... 170

Limiter

Activating/deactivating.... 275

Function 271

Passive mode.... 271

Permanent setting.... 271

LINGUATRONIC.... 352, 368

Live Traffic Information 398

Load capacity

Bicycle rack.... 510

Loading

Bag hook.... 154

Roof luggage rack.... 158

Loading guidelines.... 147

Loads.... 147

Locator lighting.... 177

Locking/unlocking

Additional door lock.... 89

Automatic locking (MMS).... 93

Doors (from the inside).... 90

Emergency key....94

KEYLESS-GO....91

Mercedes me connect.... 89

Loud sound

PRE-SAFE® Sound.... 50

Low beam

Activating/deactivating.... 168

Left-hand traffic.... 177

Light adjustment when driving abroad.... 168

Right-hand traffic.... 177

Setting.... 177

lubricants.... 497

Luggage

Net hooks.... 152

Luggage net hooks.... 152

Lumbar support.... 121

M

Maintaining safe distance

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC...... 275

Maintenance.... 429

Maintenance Management

Notes 430

Transferred data 430

Malfunction

Restraint system.... 44

Manoeuvering brake function.... 329

Manoeuvring

Drive Away Assist.... 327

Manoeuvering brake function.... 329

Manoeuvring assistant

Activating/deactivating.... 330

Cross traffic warning.... 328

Drive Away Assist.... 327

Manoeuvering brake function.... 329

Manual gearshifting

Activating/deactivating.... 230

Map

Displaying online map contents...... 398

Displaying weather information.... 398

Moving......398

Selecting the map orientation.... 398

Setting the map scale.... 398

Map functions.... 398

Massage programmes.... 135, 136

Maximum full-stop braking.... 264

Maximum permissible gross vehicle mass..... 496

Maximum speeds (Mercedes-AMG vehicles).... 508

MBUX

Dashcam.... 400

MBUX Interior Assistant

Camera & parking 375

Driver camera.... 375

Exit warning.... 372

Favourites.... 375

Overview.... 370

Preselection outside mirrors.... 374

Reading light 373

Search light.... 373

Using the favourites pose.... 375

MBUX multimedia system

Activating/deactivating standby mode... 261

Air conditioning menu.... 190

Calling up the Zero Layer.... 363

Configuring display settings.... 349

Drive programs.... 225

Factory setting.... 385

Home screen.... 366

Language settings.... 352, 368

MBUX Interior Assistant.... 370

Media.... 422

Memory Park Assist.... 333

Mercedes me & Apps.... 412

Notes.... 360

Operating the Zero Layer.... 363

Overview 360

Set collision detection.... 259, 260

Setting route-based speed adaptation.... 279

Snow chain mode.... 474

Standby mode function.... 261

Steering wheel heater/seat heating..... 140

Telephone.... 402

Touchscreen.... 367

Zero layer.... 361

MBUX reading light 373

MBUX search light.... 373

MBUX voice assistant

E-mails.... 357

Function.... 352, 368

Language setting.... 353

Media voice commands.... 356

Online voice commands.... 358

Online voice control.... 355

Operable functions.... 353

Operating safety 352

Setting.... 353

Speech quality.... 354

Voice commands.... 355

Voice prompting.... 352, 369

Media

Overview of functions/symbols...... 422

Medical aids.... 36

Memory function

Head-up display.... 143

Outside mirrors.... 143

Seat.... 143

Steering wheel.... 143

Memory function (rear)

Passenger seat and rear seat.... 145

Rear seat.... 144

Memory Parking Assist

Exiting a parking space.... 332

Function.... 330

Parking 332

Recording.... 331

Setting.... 333

Menus (driver's display)

Notes.... 344

Sport.... 345

Mercedes me App

Activating on-demand features.... 26

Mercedes me Apps.... 412

Mercedes me calls

Arranging a service appointment...... 408

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer

Centre after automatic accident/

breakdown detection.... 407

Calls via the overhead control panel..... 405

Consenting to the transfer of data...... 408

Information...... 406

Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre...... 406

Transferred data.... 408

Mercedes me connect

Accident/Breakdown Management..... 410

Information...... 410

Transferred data.... 411

Mercedes-AMG vehicles, Notes...... 204

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Automatic emergency call.... 417

Data processing.... 420

Data transfer.... 418

ERA-GLONASS test mode.... 420

Information.... 415

Manual emergency call.... 417

Overview.... 416

Self-diagnosis.... 420

Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts.... 24

Mercedes-Benz service centre.... 35

Message memory.... 512

Messages

MBUX voice commands.... 357

Mirror heater.... 196

Mirrors

Mirror folding function.... 186

Outside mirrors.... 183

Rear-view mirror.... 185

Mobile phone

Authorising, Remote Parking Assist...... 326

Frequencies.... 490

Maximum transmission output...... 490

Notes on wireless charging.... 164

Wireless charging (front)...... 165

Wireless charging (rear passenger

compartment).... 166

wireless charging (rear).... 18

Model type.... 496

Modification

Limited protection.... 55

MOExtended tyres, Run-flat tyres.... 448

Motorway mode.... 172

MULTIBEAM LED.... 171

Multifunction camera

ROAD SURFACE SCAN.... 304

Multimedia system

Enabling/disabling the rear airbag...... 49

N

Navigation

Activating.... 393

Destination entry.... 394

MBUX voice commands.... 356

Notes.... 392

Overview.... 393

Neck warmer.... 132

Neutral....228

Nodding off.... 269

O

Objects in the vehicle interior

Limited protection.... 55

Occupant safety

Airbag....60

Basic information.... 41

Child seat....64

Information on the child restraint sys-

tem.... 49

Information on the correct seat position... 42

Pets in the vehicle.... 55

PRE-SAFE ^® 50

On-board diagnostics interface.... 34

On-board electronics

Engine electronics.... 489

Two-way radios.... 489

On-demand feature.... 26

Online services.... 39

Open Source Software.... 40

Opening the boot lid using your foot

HANDS-FREE ACCESS.... 100

Operating fluids

AdBlue ^® 502

Additives.... 500

Brake fluid.... 505

Coolant....505

Diesel....500

Engine oil.... 503

Notes 497

Petrol.... 499

Windscreen washer fluid.... 506

Operating safety

48 V on-board electrical system.... 26

High-voltage on-board electrical system... 26

Outside mirrors

Automatic anti-dazzle mode.... 185

Automatic mirror folding function...... 186

Blind Spot Assist/Active Blind Spot

Assist.... 295

Folding in/out.... 183

Memory function.... 143

Parking position.... 185

Preselection MBUX.... 374

Setting.... 183

Warning lamp 295

Overhead control panel.... 14

Overview of airbags.... 60

Owner's Manual.... 25

P

Paint code.... 496

Panel heating.... 138

Park position

DIRECT SELECT lever.... 227

Parking

Active Parking Assist.... 318

PARKTRONIC.... 314

Parking Assist

Active Parking Assist.... 318

Memory Parking Assist.... 330

PARKTRONIC.... 314

Remote Parking Assist.... 323

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Activating/deactivating.... 317

Adjusting warning tones.... 317

Function 314

Parking assistance systems

Active Parking Assist.... 318

Drive Away Assist.... 327

Manoeuvering brake function.... 329

Memory Parking Assist.... 330

PARKTRONIC.... 314

Remote Parking Assist.... 323

Parking brake 257

Parking lights.... 168

Parking position

Outside mirrors.... 185

Storing the position of the passenger

outside mirror using reverse gear...... 186

Parking up.... 260

PARKTRONIC.... 314

PASSENGER AIR BAG

Status display, front passenger airbag..... 46

Pedestrian protection.... 431

Period out of use

Activating/deactivating standby mode... 261

Permissible axle load 496

Permitted towing methods

Overview.... 461, 462

Personalisation.... 377

Petrol 499

Pets in the vehicle.... 55

Plug-in hybrid operation

Charging cable control panel.... 244

Charging the high-voltage battery at a

rapid charging station (mode 4)...... 243

Ending the charging process (alternat-

ing current, mode 2/3).... 250

Ending the charging process (direct

current, mode 4).... 254

Function of the regenerative brake

system.... 219

Haptic accelerator pedal.... 223

Indicator lamps on vehicle socket...... 246

Manually disconnecting the high-voltage on-board electrical system.... 206

Maximum charging current (mains socket).... 244

Notes on charging (charging station, mode 3).... 242

Notes on charging (mains socket, mode 2).... 241

Notes on charging (wallbox, mode 3)..... 242

Notes on plug-in hybrid operation...... 204

Operating safety.... 26

Power meter 350

Route-based operating-mode strategy.... 222

Sets recuperation.... 220

Starting the charging process (alternating current, mode 2/3).... 247

Starting the charging process (direct current, mode 4).... 252

Stowing the charging cable.... 241

Post-collision brake.... 53

Power closing function

Boot lid....97

Door....94

Power supply

Start/stop button.... 207

Switching on (start/stop button)...... 207

Pre-entry climate control

activating/deactivating for departure

time.... 198

At departure time.... 198

At time of departure.... 197

immediate.... 199

When vehicle is unlocked.... 196, 197

Pre-heating.... 196

PRE-SAFE ^® , Anticipatory occupant protection

Function.... 50

PRE-SAFE ^® Sound.... 50

Reversing measures.... 51

PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side

Function.... 51

Inflating.... 53

PRE-SAFE® PLUS

Function.... 51

Reversing measures.... 51

Preventative occupant protection system

50, 51

Profile 377

Programme.... 223

Protection

Limited.... 55

Protection against collision

Drive Away Assist.... 327

Manoeuvering brake function.... 329

Protection of the environment

Driving style.... 23

Take-back of end-of-life vehicles.... 23

Pulling away

Drive Away Assist.... 327

Hill Start Assist.... 268

Optimised acceleration.... 211

Pyrotechnical vehicle components.... 491

Q

QR code rescue card.... 37

Qualified specialist workshop.... 35

R

Radar and ultrasonic sensors.... 262

Radio

MBUX voice commands.... 356

Radio regulations

Importer information.... 495

Regulatory radio identification.... 495

Specific absorption rate.... 495

Wireless applications.... 491

Rain closing function

Side windows.... 104

Sliding sunroof.... 109

Rain sensor

Side windows.... 104

Sliding sunroof.... 109

Windscreen wipers.... 180

REACH regulation.... 36

Reading lamp

Interior lighting.... 177

Rear airbag

Activating/deactivating.... 49

Inflating.... 53

Information.... 61

REAR SEAT AIRBAG indicator lamps...... 48

Rear axle steering.... 215

Rear compartment climate control.... 192

Rear door (child safety lock) Securing....82

Rear fog lamp.... 169

Rear fog light.... 169

Rear seat Footrest......127 Fully reclined position......124 Reclining rear seat......123

REAR SEAT AIR BAG Status display.... 48

Rear seat belt Status display.... 45

Rear window Roller sunblind.... 112

Rear window heater.... 188

Rear-view mirror Automatic anti-dazzle mode..... 185

Rearward-facing child seat Information....71

Recuperation Function.... 219

Setting.... 220

Recycling.... 23

Reducing agent AdBlue ^® 236

Refrigerator box Removing/fitting.... 163

Refuelling Depressurising the fuel tank (plug-in hybrid with petrol engine).... 235 Fuel.... 231 Refuelling the vehicle.... 231 Topping up AdBlue®.... 236

Registration.... 35

Remote Online Charging the starter battery...... 209 Cooling/heating the vehicle interior...... 209 Starting the vehicle...... 210

Remote Parking Assist Authorising a mobile phone.... 326 Function.... 323 Operating.... 324

Replacement key....89

Reserve Fuel....502

Resetting MBUX reset function.... 385

Residual heat.... 193 Responsibility Driving safety systems.... 261

Restraint system Basic information....41 Basic instructions for children....64 Deployment situations....53 Functionality....44 Information on function....54 Information on the correct seat position...42 Limited protection....55 Malfunction....44 Protection....42 Self-test....44 Warning lamp....44

Reverse gear DIRECT SELECT lever.... 227

Reversing camera 360° Camera.... 306 Activate via GPS.... 314

Activating/deactivating.... 313

Care.... 442

Function.... 306

Manage activation points.... 314

Opening the camera cover.... 314

Setting.... 313

ROAD SURFACE SCAN.... 304

Roll away protection.... 267

Roller sunblind

Electric.... 111

Rear window.... 112

Sliding sunroof.... 106

Roof load.... 508

Roof luggage rack

Loading.... 158

Securing.... 158

Route

Alternative route.... 396

Calculating.... 396

Commuter route.... 396

Navigation.... 393

Selecting a type.... 396

Route guidance with augmented reality Activating.... 396

Activating/deactivating the traffic

light view.... 294

Displaying road names/house num-

bers.... 396

Head-up display.... 347

Switching video on or off.... 396

Route-based operating-mode strategy

Function 222

Route-based speed adaptation

Function 278

Setting.... 279

Run-flat characteristics.... 448

Running-in notes.... 210

S

Safety system.... 263

Safety vest.... 446

Seat

Adjusting electrically.... 117

adjusting electrically (rear).... 122

Adjusting the front passenger seat

from the rear.... 120

Automatic adjustment.... 134

Automatic adjustment of the lateral

support.... 135

Centre airbag (driver's backrest).... 60

Configuring settings.... 134

Correct driver's seat position.... 116

Footrest (rear).... 127

Fully reclined position.... 124

Lumbar support.... 121

Panel heating.... 138

Reclining rear seat.... 123

Resetting settings (massage pro-

gramme).... 136

Settings.... 16

Side airbag.... 60

Workout programme.... 135

Seat (rear)

Settings.... 18

Seat belt

Activating/deactivating seat belt

adjustment.... 52

Adjusting the height.... 44

Automatic tightening.... 52

Belt airbag.... 59

Care.... 443

Fastening.... 44

Notes on wearing correctly.... 43

Rear seat belt status display.... 45

Releasing....59

Seat belt extender.... 52

Straightening out a belt airbag.... 59

Warning lamp.... 45

Seat belt adjustment

Activating/deactivating.... 52

Function.... 52

Seat belt extender.... 52

Seat belt tensioners

Inflating.... 53

Seat belt warning.... 45

Seat heating

Activating/deactivating.... 136

Seat height.... 117

Seat ventilation.... 18, 138

Selecting a gear.... 229

Selector lever.... 227

Self-test

Automatic front passenger airbag shut off....46 Restraint system....44

Sensors

Cleaning.... 442

Service....429

Service centre.... 35

Shortening the braking distance

Brake Assist System.... 264

Shunting support.... 328

Side airbag....60

Side windows

Automatic function.... 104
Child safety lock (rear).... 84
Close with key.... 105

Convenience closing.... 105

Convenience opening.... 104

Electric roller sunblind.... 111

Opening/closing.... 102

Problem.... 105

Rain closing function.... 104

Skid chains.... 473

Sliding sunroof

Automatic functions.... 109

Close with key.... 105

Opening with the key.... 104

Opening/closing.... 106

Problem.... 110

Rain closing function.... 109

Smartphone Integration, iPhone®

Android Auto.... 413

Apple CarPlay ^® 413

Snow chain mode.... 474

Snow chains.... 473

Socket

12 V (rear passenger compartment)..... 159

230 V (rear passenger compartment)..... 160

Trailer operation.... 337

Socket flap.... 238

Software update.... 381

SOS button.... 405

Sound

Menu 428

PRE-SAFE ^® Sound.... 50

Wheels/tyres 473

Sound settings.... 428

Spare parts.... 24

Spare wheel

Emergency spare wheel.... 488

Specialist workshop.... 35

Specific absorption rate (SAR) 495

Speed

Limit, Limiter.... 271

Save, cruise control.... 275

Save, DISTRONIC.... 275

Save, Limiter 275

Speed adjustment, route-based.... 278

Speed control

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC...... 272

Limiter.... 271

Speed limit Winter tyres.... 272

Standing lights.... 168

Start-off assist Drive Away Assist...... 327 Hill Start Assist...... 268 Optimised acceleration...... 211

Start/stop button Parking the vehicle....255 Starting the vehicle....208 Switching on the power supply / vehicle....207

Start/stop function.... 216

Starter battery Charging via Remote Online.... 209

Starting assistance.... 459

Starting the engine Emergency operation mode.... 209 Remote Online.... 210 Start/stop button.... 208

Starting-off aid Drive Away Assist.... 327 Hill Start Assist.... 268

Optimised acceleration.... 211

Stationary heater/ventilation Activating/deactivating.... 200 Operating.... 201

Status display Front passenger airbag.... 46 Rear seat belt.... 45

Status display, rear airbag.... 48

Steer Assist Active Steering Assist.... 280 STEER CONTROL.... 266

STEER CONTROL.... 266

Steering Rear axle steering.... 215

Steering wheel Adjusting electrically.... 139 Driver's airbag.... 60 Memory function.... 143 Steering wheel heater.... 140

Steering wheel adjustment.... 139

Steering wheel gearshift paddles.... 229

Steering wheel heater Linking to seat heating.... 140

Stop/start

ECO start/stop function.... 217

Stopping

Parking the vehicle.... 255

Stowage areas.... 149

Stowage compartment

Luggage net hooks.... 152

Stowage space

Handset (rear).... 151

Stowage spaces

Armrest.... 149

Centre console (front).... 149

Door....149

Glove compartment.... 149

Sulphur content.... 499

Suspension

Adjusting the vehicle level (E-ACTIVE

BODY CONTROL).... 305

AIRMATIC.... 301

E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL.... 303

Setting the suspension level (AIR-

MATIC)....302

SVHC

Substances of very high concern.... 36

Switch-off delay time

Exterior....177

Interior.... 179

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off..... 193

System settings

MBUX reset function.... 385

Overview.... 381

T

Take-back of end-of-life vehicles.... 23

Tank content

AdBlue ^® 503

Fuel....502

Reserve 502

Tank filler cap / flap.... 231

Technical data

Axle load (trailer operation).... 511

Fastening points of the trailer hitch..... 510

High-voltage battery.... 508

Information...... 489

Mounting dimensions of a trailer hitch.... 510

Overhang dimension of the trailer hitch.. 510

Pyrotechnical vehicle components...... 491

Radio frequencies.... 490

Radio regulations.... 495

Roof load.... 508

Specific absorption rate (SAR)...... 495

Tongue weight.... 510

Towing capacity.... 510

Telediagnosis

Diagnostic data.... 430

Telediagnostics

Transferred data.... 431

Telemetry display.... 389

Telephone

Authorising a mobile phone Remote

Parking Assist.... 326

Bluetooth ^® 405

Connecting a mobile phone.... 405

Emergency call.... 416

MBUX voice commands.... 356

Menu 405

Notes 402

Notes on wireless charging (mobile

phone).... 164

Operating modes.... 404

Secure Simple Pairing.... 405

Telephone menu overview.... 404

Wireless charging (mobile phone, rear)... 166

Wirelessly charging a(mobile phone, front).... 165

Telephony operating modes

Bluetooth ^® telephony.... 404

Car telephony.... 404

Television, Digital TV

MBUX voice commands.... 356

Temperature

Setting.... 188

Text messages.... 357

THERMOTRONIC

Air conditioning control panel.... 188

Through-loading feature

Locking.... 154

Opening.... 152

TREFIT kit

Declaration of conformity.... 33

Storage location.... 449

Toll system

Windscreen.... 186

Tongue weight.... 510

Top Tether....81

Topographical compensation, Predictive

headlamp range control.... 173

Torque (driver's display).... 345

Touch Control

Driver's display.... 343

MBUX.... 367

Touch-sensitive controls.... 25

Touchscreen 367

Tow bar system

Towing away.... 342

Tow-away protection.... 114

Tow-starting.... 468

Towing

Pulling/towing.... 342

Towing methods.... 461, 462

Towing eye

Fitting/removing...... 467

Storage location.... 467

Towing methods

Both axles on the ground.... 463

Overview.... 461, 462

Track Race 386

Traffic information.... 398

Traffic Jam Assistant.... 280

Traffic light view

Activating/deactivating.... 294

Information 294

Traffic light warning/display 291

Traffic Sign Assist

Function.... 291

Setting 294

Trailer coupling.... 334

Trailer drawbar, Pulling/towing.... 342

Trailer hitch

Axle load.... 511

Bicycle rack 339

Care....442

Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer.... 337

Extending/retracting the ball neck...... 334

Extending/retracting the ball neck

(MBUX multimedia system).... 336

Fastening points.... 510

General notes.... 509

Mounting dimensions.... 510

Overhang dimension.... 510

Socket.... 337

Tongue weight.... 510

Towing capacity.... 510

Trailer operation

Active Blind Spot Assist.... 297

Active Lane Keeping Assist.... 298

Axle load.... 511

Bicycle rack.... 339

Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer.... 337

Extending/retracting the ball neck..... 334

Extending/retracting the ball neck

(MBUX multimedia system).... 336

Notes.... 333

Socket.... 337

Trailer stabilisation.... 266

Transmission position display.... 227

Transmission positions

DIRECT SÉLECT lever.... 227

Transporting

Vehicle 464

Tuneln Internet Radio 427

Turn signal indicator.... 170

Turn signal light.... 170

TV

MBUX voice commands.... 356

Two-way radios

Frequencies.... 490

Installation.... 489

Transmission output 490

Type approval number EG.... 496

Tyre pressure

Checking.... 476

TREFIT kit.... 449

Tyre pressure table.... 475

Tyre pressure monitoring system

Function 476

Restarting.... 477

Tyre pressure table.... 475

Tyre sealant.... 449

Tyre tread....473

Tyre-change tool.... 481, 482

Tyre-change tool kit

Overview.... 481, 482

Tyres

Breakdown 448

Checking.... 473

Checking the temperature.... 476

Fitting.... 486

Interchanging.... 481

MOExtended 448

Noise 473

Notes on fitting.... 478

Removing...... 485

Removing/fitting hub cap.... 483

Replacing.... 478, 482

Selection.... 478

Snow chains.... 473

Storing.... 481

TIREFIT kit 449

Tyre pressure table.... 475

Unusual handling characteristics...... 473

U

Unfastening....59

Unlocking setting.... 86

Updates.... 381

USB port

Rear.... 161

Stowage compartments (front)...... 149

User profiles

Adding a user.... 378

Note 377

Selecting options.... 378

V

Variable limiter.... 271

Vehicle

48 V on-board electrical system.... 26

Activating/deactivating standby mode... 261

Additional door lock.... 89

Correct use.... 35

Data storage.... 37

Diagnostics connection.... 34

Emergency key.... 94

enabling, Remote Online.... 210

Equipment.... 25

High-voltage on-board electrical system... 26

Implied warranty.... 37

KEYLESS-GO....91

lock automatically (MMS).... 93

Locking/unlocking (from inside)....90

Locking/unlocking using the emer-

gency key....94

Lowering.... 487

Medical aids.... 36

Parking up.... 260

QR code rescue card.... 37

Raising 483

REACH regulation.... 36

Registration.... 35

Set collision detection.... 259, 260

Standby mode function.... 261

Starting (start/stop button)...... 208

starting, emergency operation mode..... 209

Stopping 255

SVHC/substances of very high concern... 36

Switching off.... 255

switching off (start/stop button)...... 255

Switching on (start/stop button)...... 207

Towing 342

Towing away.... 461, 462

Transporting.... 464

ventilate / comfort opening...... 104

Voice commands for MBUX voice

assistant...... 357

Vehicle cameras.... 262

Vehicle data

Displaying, DYNAMIC SELECT...... 226

Displaying, MBUX.... 226

Maximum speeds (Mercedes-AMG

vehicles)....508

Notes.... 507

Roof load 508

Vehicle height 507

Vehicle length.... 507

Vehicle width.... 507

Wheelbase 507

Vehicle dimensions.... 507

Vehicle emergency start 468

Vehicle equipment.... 25

Vehicle identification number.... 496

Vehicle identification plate

Axle load 496

EU type approval number...... 496

Gross mass 496

Model type.... 496

Paint code 496

VIN....496

Vehicle interior

Cooling/heating (Remote Online)...... 209

Vehicle key 85

Vehicle level

Setting (AIRMATIC).... 302

Setting (E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL)...... 305

Vehicle sensors.... 262

Vehicle socket

Care.... 442

Indicator lamps.... 246

Vehicle start

Emergency operation mode.... 209

Remote Online.... 210

Start/stop button.... 208

Vehicle tool kit

TIREFIT kit.... 449

Towing eye 467

Ventilating.... 104

Ventilation.... 201

Vents

Air vents.... 201

VIN

Engine compartment...... 496

Identification plate.... 496

Seat 496

Vision

Demisting windows.... 192

Windscreen heater.... 195

Voice assistant

Voice prompting.... 352, 369

W

Warning system.... 113

Warning triangle.... 446, 447

Warning/indicator lamp

ABS warning lamp.... 604

Active Brake Assist warning

lamp.... 607

ATTENTION ASSIST warning

lamp.... 606

(1) Brakes warning lamp (red)...... 602

Brakes warning lamp (yellow)...... 602

Coolant warning lamp (red)...... 598

Coolant warning lamp (yellow)..... 599

Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red).... 601

(P) Electric parking brake indicator lamp (yellow).... 601

Electrical fault warning lamp 595,600

Engine diagnostics warning lamp....600

Engine operating temperature warning lamp.... 600

ESP® OFF warning lamp.... 605

ESP® warning lamp flashes...... 604

ESP® warning lamp lights up...... 605

Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up.... 601

SOS RIGHT READY Mercedes-Benz emergency call system warning lamp.... 608

Power steering warning lamp

(red)....596

Power steering warning lamp (yellow)....596

Rear axle steering warning lamp (red).... 597

Rear axle steering warning lamp (yellow).... 597

Reduced-power warning lamp..... 594

Restraint system warning lamp..... 593

Seat belt warning lamp flashes..... 594

Seat belt warning lamp lights up... 594

Suspension warning lamp (red).... 608

Suspension warning lamp (yel- low).... 607

System error warning lamp...... 595

Trailer hitch warning lamp...... 595

Tyre pressure monitoring sys- tem warning lamp flashes.... 609

(1) Tyre pressure monitoring sys- tem warning lamp lights up.... 609

Warning lamp for distance warning....606 REAR SEAT AIR BAG....48

Warning/indicator lamps Driver's display.... 591 PASSENGER AIR BAG.... 46

Washer fluid Topping up.... 436 Windscreen washer fluid.... 506

Washing by hand.... 440 Water tank.... 437

Wear Limited protection.... 55

Weather information.... 398

Web browsers.... 413

Wedge.... 481, 482

Weight information.... 496

Wheel change Fitting a new wheel....486 Lowering the vehicle....487 Preparation....482 Raising the vehicle....483

Removing a wheel.... 485 Removing/fitting hub caps.... 483 Wheel rotation.... 481

Wheels Breakdown....448 Care....442 Checking....473 Checking the tyre temperature....476 Fitting....486 Interchanging....481 MOExtended....448 Noise....473 Notes on fitting....478 Removing....485 Removing/fitting hub cap....483 Replacing....478, 482 Selection....478 Snow chains....473 Storing....481 TIREFIT kit....449 Tyre pressure....474 Tyre pressure monitoring system....476 Unusual handling characteristics....473

Wi-Fi Setting up a hotspot.... 383

Window airbag.... 60

Windows

Care.... 442

De-icing....191

Opening/closing.... 102

Rear window.... 112

Removing mist.... 192

Roller sunblind.... 112

Windscreen

De-icing.... 191

Demisting.... 188

Infrared reflective coating.... 187

Radio waves.... 186

Replacing the wiper blades.... 180

Replacing the wiper blades with

MAGIC VISION CONTROL.... 182

Toll system.... 186

Windscreen heater.... 188, 195

Windscreen washer fluid.... 506

Windscreen washer system.... 436

Windscreen wipers

Activating/deactivating.... 180

Replacing the wiper blades.... 180

Replacing the wiper blades (wind-screen).... 180

Replacing the wiper blades with MAGIC VISION CONTROL.... 182

Winter operation

Activating/deactivating snow chain

mode.... 474

Snow chains.... 473

Winter tyres

Limiter 272

Setting the permanent speed limit...... 272

Wiper blades

Care.... 442

Replacing (windscreen).... 180

Replacing with MAGIC VISION CONTROL.... 182

Wipers....180

Wireless applications.... 491

Wireless charging

Mobile phone (front).... 165

Mobile phone (rear).... 166

Overview.... 164

Workout programme.... 135

Workshop.... 35

Z

Zero layer

Calling up.... 363

Function.... 361

Operating.... 363

Overview 362

Publication details

Germany

Internet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Mercedes-Benz AG can be found on the following websites:

https://www.mercedes-benz.com

https://group.mercedes-benz.com

Documentation team

You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you may have regarding this Owner's Manual to the technical documentation team at the following address:

Mercedes-Benz AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service, 70546 Stuttgart, Germany

^© Mercedes-Benz AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Mercedes-Benz AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Mercedes-Benz AG

Mercedesstraße 120

70372 Stuttgart

As at 04.04.22

Digital - in the vehicle Vehicle document wallet Digital - on the Internet Digital - as an App

Familiarise yourself with the contents of the Owner's Manual directly via the vehicle's multimedia system (menu item "Vehicle information"). Start with the quick guide or broaden your knowledge with practical tips.

Here you can find comprehensive information about operating your vehicle and about services and guarantees in printed form.

You can find the Owner's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz homepage.

The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available free-of-charge in familiar App stores.

2235849110Z102

Order no. P223 0555 02 Part no. 223 584 91 10 Z102

Edition ÄJ2022-2a

Apple® iOS Android